SonarWiz UserGuide

SonarWiz5 User Guide
Rev 5.03.0030 - September 11, 2011
 Chesapeake Technology, Inc.

888 Villa St, Suite #200, Mountain View, CA 94041
Phone 650 967-2045 • Fax 650 903-4500
www.chesapeaketech.com or www.chestech-support.com
support@chesapeaketech.com
Page 2
Document History
Jan 2010 – Beta Users' Guide
Apr 2010 – Conversion from SWM4 to SW5 Manual
Trademarks
SonarWiz, SonarWiz.MAP and SonarWiz.NAV are a trademarks of Chesapeake Technology, Inc.
NI-DAQ and DAQCard are trademarks of National Instruments Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© Copyright 2001-2011, Chesapeake Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Page 3
Table of Contents
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................19
1.1 SonarWiz – Introduction ....................................................................................................19
1.2 Supported Sensors...............................................................................................................19
1.2.1 Real-Time Sensors.......................................................................................................19
1.2.2 Supported Sensor Data Formats (Offline Processing).................................................20
1.3 System Requirements and Configurations .........................................................................22
1.3.1 Recommended PC Configuration.................................................................................22
1.3.2 System Configurations and Components......................................................................22
1.3.3 Real Time Data Acquisition and Mapping...................................................................23
1.3.4 Post-processing and Mapping Configuration..............................................................24
1.3.5 Remote Server Configuration.......................................................................................25
1.4 Component Installation.......................................................................................................25
1.4.1 Previously Installed Versions of SonarWiz..................................................................26
1.4.2 Installing SonarWiz from CD.......................................................................................26
1.4.3 Installing SonarWiz and Servers from Web.................................................................26
1.4.4 Installing Analog Data Acquisition Cards and Drivers...............................................27
1.4.5 Installing SonarWiz Server Modules............................................................................27
1.4.6 Updating SonarWiz License Key..................................................................................28
1.5 User Manual Layout............................................................................................................29
1.6 Program Work-flow............................................................................................................29
1.6.1 Real-time Work-flow....................................................................................................29
1.6.2 Post Processing Work-flow..........................................................................................31
SECTION 2 SONARWIZ BASICS.........................................................................................33
2.1 The Help Menu...................................................................................................................33
2.1.1 User Manual................................................................................................................33
2.1.2 Restore Factory Defaults.............................................................................................33
2.1.3 My Support Info...........................................................................................................33
2.2 The View Menu - User Interface.........................................................................................34
2.3 Screen Anatomy..................................................................................................................35
2.3.1 Status Bar....................................................................................................................36
2.3.2 Customizing the User Interface....................................................................................37
2.3.3 Quick Access Toolbar..................................................................................................38
2.4 Docking Windows..............................................................................................................44
2.5 The View Menu..................................................................................................................53
2.5.1 Data Displays..............................................................................................................54
2.5.2 Layout Manager..........................................................................................................85
2.5.3 Map Display................................................................................................................86
2.5.4 Color and Contrast......................................................................................................88
2.5.5 Control.........................................................................................................................90

Page 4
2.5.6 Right-Clicking in SonarWiz.........................................................................................90

2.6 Getting Started with SonarWiz...........................................................................................97
2.7 Quick Access Toolbar Functions........................................................................................97
2.8 Program Preferences...........................................................................................................98
2.8.1 General Settings..........................................................................................................99
2.8.2 File Options...............................................................................................................101
2.8.3 SBP Options...............................................................................................................104
2.8.4 Contact Options.........................................................................................................106
2.8.5 Digitized Feature Options..........................................................................................112
2.8.6 R/T Navigation Plot...................................................................................................117
2.8.7 Magnetometer Post-Processing Settings....................................................................120
2.8.8 Advanced Settings......................................................................................................122
2.9 SonarWiz Projects.............................................................................................................124
2.9.1 Important Folders and Files......................................................................................126
2.9.2 Manually Creating a Project.....................................................................................129
2.9.3 Automatically Creating a Project..............................................................................132
2.9.4 Opening an Existing Project......................................................................................135
2.9.5 Modifying A Project...................................................................................................136
SECTION 3 BASEMAPS.......................................................................................................137
3.1 Basemaps - Introduction...................................................................................................137
3.1.1 Map Data Types.........................................................................................................137
3.1.2 Map Display Types...................................................................................................137
3.2 Georeferencing ................................................................................................................138
3.2.1 Specifying Coordinate System and Projection...........................................................139
3.2.2 Map Files that use a Custom Coordinate System.......................................................140
3.2.3 Specifying World Reference Parameters....................................................................142
3.3 Adding/Removing Maps in SonarWiz..............................................................................144
3.3.1 Basemaps Command Group.......................................................................................145
3.3.2 Overlays Command Group........................................................................................146
3.3.3 Vector Map Controls Command Group.....................................................................149
3.3.4 Remove a Basemap or Overlay..................................................................................149
3.3.5 Search Web................................................................................................................150
3.4 Map Manager....................................................................................................................155
3.5 Performance Considerations.............................................................................................156
3.5.1 Importing a Basemap from a Different Coordinate System.......................................157
3.5.2 Saving the Imported Basemap in the Project Coordinate System..............................159
3.5.3 Import Basemap as a Geo Image...............................................................................161
3.6 Sources of Digital Map Images.........................................................................................162
3.6.1 NOAA Office of Coast Survey....................................................................................162
3.6.2 National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency .................................................................163
3.6.3 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service........................................................163
3.6.4 Microsoft TerraServer...............................................................................................163
3.6.5 US Geological Survey................................................................................................163
SECTION 4 DATA ACQUISITION.....................................................................................165
4.1 Sonar Servers....................................................................................................................165
4.2 Configure Sensors.............................................................................................................166
4.2.1 Vessel.........................................................................................................................167
4.2.2 Sonar.........................................................................................................................169
4.2.3 Navigation.................................................................................................................170

Page 5
4.2.4 Fathometer Setup.......................................................................................................175

4.2.5 Magnetometer............................................................................................................178
4.2.6 Motion Sensor Input...................................................................................................180
4.2.7 Cable Payout / Layback Setup...................................................................................181
4.2.8 Outputs......................................................................................................................187
4.3 Survey Lines.....................................................................................................................190
4.3.1 The SHIFT and Control Keys.....................................................................................191
4.3.2 Draw A Base Survey Line..........................................................................................192
4.3.3 Generate Parallel Lines.............................................................................................192
4.3.4 Line Manager............................................................................................................194
4.3.5 Line Tools..................................................................................................................201
4.3.6 Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM)................................................................................207
4.3.7 Graphical Line Editing..............................................................................................210
4.3.8 Grouping Lines..........................................................................................................212
4.3.9 Adding Lines Within a Feature..................................................................................216
4.4 Survey Line Following......................................................................................................218
4.4.1 Display Survey Lines.................................................................................................218
4.4.2 Steer the Selected Line...............................................................................................219
4.4.3 Activate Next/Previous Survey Line...........................................................................219
4.4.4 Build Line Set Around Contact..................................................................................219
4.4.5 Reverse Survey Line...................................................................................................219
4.4.6 Left Right Steering Indicator......................................................................................220
4.4.7 Vessel (Ship Display) Options....................................................................................220
4.5 NavWiz.............................................................................................................................220
4.5.1 NavWiz Display.........................................................................................................221
4.5.2 Survey Lines in NavWiz.............................................................................................223
4.6 Data Recording.................................................................................................................223
4.6.1 Record.......................................................................................................................223
4.6.2 Quick Record.............................................................................................................224
4.6.3 Record Turn...............................................................................................................224
4.6.4 Stop Recording..........................................................................................................225
4.6.5 Real-time Mosaic.......................................................................................................225
4.6.6 Thermal Printer Setup...............................................................................................226
4.7 Data Acquisition Controls.................................................................................................230
4.7.1 Real-time Sidescan Gains..........................................................................................230
4.7.2 Real-time Sub-bottom Gains......................................................................................231
4.7.3 Bottom Tracker..........................................................................................................232
4.7.4 Event Setup................................................................................................................233
4.7.5 Event Now!................................................................................................................234
SECTION 5 POST PROCESSING........................................................................................235
5.1 Post-Processing Data.........................................................................................................235
5.2 Sonar File Tasks................................................................................................................235
5.2.1 What Happens When a File is Imported?..................................................................235
5.3 Importing Sidescan Sonar Data.........................................................................................237
5.3.1 Manual Sidescan Data Import...................................................................................238
5.3.2 File Type Specific Options (Sidescan).......................................................................240
5.3.3 Import Settings...........................................................................................................255
5.3.4 File Playback.............................................................................................................259
5.3.5 Printing Sonar Records..............................................................................................262
5.4 Importing Sub-bottom Sonar Data....................................................................................262

Page 6
5.4.1 Manually Importing Sub-bottom Data.......................................................................263

5.4.2 File Type Specific Options (Sub-bottom)...................................................................265
5.4.3 SBP Import Settings...................................................................................................271
5.4.4 Sub-bottom File Playback..........................................................................................273
5.4.5 Printing Sub-bottom Sonar Records..........................................................................273
5.5 Importing Magnetometer Data..........................................................................................273
5.5.1 Manually Importing a Magnetometer File ................................................................274
5.5.2 Viewing Mag Data.....................................................................................................278
5.5.3 Trimming Mag File Data...........................................................................................279
5.6 Sonar File Management....................................................................................................282
5.6.1 Sonar File Manager Information Section..................................................................283
5.6.2 Sonar File Manager Sonar Files Section...................................................................283
5.6.3 Sonar File Manager Batch Processes Section...........................................................284
5.6.4 Sonar File Manager File Tools Section.....................................................................291
5.6.5 Sonar File Right-Context (Right-click) Pop-up Menu................................................298
5.6.6 Multiple Sonar Files Right-Context (Right-click) Pop-up Menu................................313
5.6.7 Trimming Sonar Data to Feature Extents..................................................................315
5.7 Export...............................................................................................................................317
5.7.1 Save Project as Geo Image........................................................................................318
5.7.2 Export Individual Images to GeoTiff..........................................................................321
5.7.3 Exporting Entire Project to Web................................................................................321
5.7.4 Export to 3D Viewer..................................................................................................326
5.7.5 Export Mosaic to Google Earth................................................................................332
5.7.6 Batch Image Export...................................................................................................333
5.7.7 Project Reports..........................................................................................................334
5.8 Sonar File Processing........................................................................................................335
5.9 Sidescan Bottom Tracking................................................................................................335
5.9.1 Real-time Bottom Tracker..........................................................................................335
5.9.2 Sidescan Bottom Tracker...........................................................................................339
5.9.3 Batch Bottom Tracker................................................................................................343
5.10 Sub-bottom Bottom Tracking..........................................................................................345
5.10.1 Real-time SBP Bottom Tracker................................................................................345
5.10.2 SBP Bottom Tracker................................................................................................345
5.10.3 Batch Bottom Tracker..............................................................................................354
5.10.4 Acoustic Reflectors..................................................................................................354
5.10.5 Cores.......................................................................................................................354
5.11 Signal Processing............................................................................................................354
5.11.1 Sidescan Gain Controls...........................................................................................356
5.11.2 SBP Gain Settings....................................................................................................367
5.11.3 Batch SBP Gains .....................................................................................................371
5.12 Editing Navigation & Sensor Data.................................................................................372
5.12.1 Fish versus Ship Position.........................................................................................372
5.12.2 Smoothing...............................................................................................................373
5.13 ZEdit Editor...................................................................................................................373
5.13.1 ZEdit Anatomy.........................................................................................................374
5.13.2 The ZEdit Map Window..........................................................................................377
5.13.3 The ZEdit Graph Window........................................................................................379
5.13.4 Smoothing Data ......................................................................................................382
5.13.5 Limiting Raw Ranges..............................................................................................384
5.13.6 Calculating and Applying Layback in ZEdit...........................................................385
5.13.7 Editing Navigation Data.........................................................................................387

Page 7
5.14 Layback & Offsets.........................................................................................................392

5.14.1 Layback in SonarWiz..............................................................................................393
5.14.2 Lever Arm a.k.a. Sheave Offsets...............................................................................393
5.14.3 Cable Out................................................................................................................396
5.14.4 Layback Algorithm..................................................................................................398
5.14.5 Layback Percentage................................................................................................399
5.14.6 Determining Layback Percentage...........................................................................399
5.14.7 Batch Layback Operations.......................................................................................407
5.14.8 Move Tool................................................................................................................407
5.15 Contacts.........................................................................................................................408
5.15.1 How Contacts are Stored........................................................................................409
5.15.2 Contact Preferences................................................................................................409
5.15.3 Real-time Contact Capture.....................................................................................410
5.15.4 Off Line Contact Capture........................................................................................411
5.15.5 Digitizing Window..................................................................................................412
5.15.6 Dual Digitizing Windows........................................................................................415
5.15.7 Contact Editor........................................................................................................415
5.15.8 The Contact Manager.............................................................................................423
5.15.9 Contact Tools..........................................................................................................437
5.15.10 Sonar Contact Strip..............................................................................................438
5.16 Digitizing Features.........................................................................................................439
5.16.1 Pre-Digitizing Preparation.....................................................................................440
5.16.2 Digitizing in the Map Window................................................................................441
5.16.3 Digitizing View: Sidescan Features........................................................................446
5.16.4 Digitizing Sub-bottom Reflectors............................................................................447
5.16.5 Thickness Functions ...............................................................................................451
5.16.6 Feature Manager.....................................................................................................453
5.16.7 Graphical Feature Editing in the Map Window.......................................................461
5.16.8 Graphical Feature Editing on the Waterfall Display...............................................463
5.16.9 Using Features For Automated Editing Functions .................................................464
5.16.10 Feature Tools.........................................................................................................464
5.17 Intersections....................................................................................................................466
5.17.1 Calculating Intersections.........................................................................................466
5.17.2 Intersections Manager.............................................................................................467
5.17.3 Displaying Intersections..........................................................................................468
5.17.4 Quick View 3D.........................................................................................................469
5.18 Cores...............................................................................................................................470
5.18.1 Adding a Core..........................................................................................................472
5.18.2 Editing a Core .........................................................................................................474
5.18.3 Core Location List...................................................................................................475
5.19 Mag File Management....................................................................................................476
5.19.1 Magnetometer Anomaly List....................................................................................480
5.19.2 Mag File Editor.......................................................................................................485
5.20 Sediment Classification...................................................................................................492
5.20.1 Overview of the Seabed Classification Function......................................................492
5.20.2 Classification Steps..................................................................................................492
5.20.3 Seabed Classification Settings.................................................................................494
5.20.4 Running the Classification Process..........................................................................499
5.20.5 Simple Texturers......................................................................................................500
5.20.6 GLCM Texturers......................................................................................................501

Page 8
SECTION 6 TOOLS...............................................................................................................507
6.1 Geodesy Utility.................................................................................................................507
6.1.1 Create Coordinate System.........................................................................................508
6.1.2 Create Datum............................................................................................................515
6.1.3 Create Ellipsoid.........................................................................................................516
6.1.4 How To Import a User Defined Coordinate System Into The SonarWiz 5 Geodesy
Database.............................................................................................................................518
6.1.5 Enabling Commonly Used Projections......................................................................519
6.2 Coordinate Converter........................................................................................................520
6.2.1 Input Fields................................................................................................................521
6.2.2 Output Fields.............................................................................................................522
6.3 File Utilities......................................................................................................................524
6.4 XTF File Utilities..............................................................................................................525
6.4.1 XTF to SEGY Converter.............................................................................................525
6.4.2 Rewrite XTF Ping Times............................................................................................527
6.4.3 Extract Notes from XTF File......................................................................................527
6.4.4 Update Parameters in XTF File.................................................................................528
6.5 CSF File Utilities..............................................................................................................530
6.5.1 Convert CSF File to CSV...........................................................................................530
6.5.2 Convert CSF Navigation to SEGP1...........................................................................532
6.5.3 Convert CSF File to XTF..........................................................................................532
6.5.4 Convert CSF File to SEGY........................................................................................533
6.5.5 Extract CSF Navigation to Text File..........................................................................535
6.6 SEG-Y File Utilities..........................................................................................................536
6.6.1 ODC to SEGY Converter...........................................................................................536
6.6.2 Geostar to SEG-Y......................................................................................................538
6.6.3 SEG-Y Channel Splitter.............................................................................................539
6.6.4 SEG-Y Datum Shifter.................................................................................................540
6.6.5 SEG-Y File Splitter....................................................................................................541
6.7 Open Project Folder..........................................................................................................542
6.8 Open Log File Folder........................................................................................................542
6.9 Palette Builder..................................................................................................................543
6.10 Grid and Contour............................................................................................................544
6.11 Shape Files......................................................................................................................548
6.12 Dongle Info.....................................................................................................................549
SECTION 7 SUPPORTED MAPS........................................................................................551
7.1 List of Supported Reference Map Formats........................................................................551
SECTION 8 SONAR SERVERS...........................................................................................555
B.1 Sonar Servers – Introduction............................................................................................555
B.1.1 What Are SonarWiz Servers?....................................................................................555
B.1.2 Obtaining SonarWiz Servers.....................................................................................557
B.1.3 Installing a Server.....................................................................................................559
B.1.4 Launching a Sonar Server.........................................................................................559
B.1.5 Running a Local Server.............................................................................................560
B.1.6 Connecting to a Remote Server.................................................................................561
B.2 Teledyne Benthos 16xxx Server - General.......................................................................562
B.2.1 Server IP Address......................................................................................................562
B.2.2 TCP Port...................................................................................................................563

Page 9
B.2.3 LED's.........................................................................................................................563
B.2.4 Connect / Disconnect Button.....................................................................................563
B.2.5 Log Diagnostic Data.................................................................................................563
B.2.6 Control Parameters...................................................................................................563
B.2.7 Status Windows.........................................................................................................565
B.2.8 Quit ..........................................................................................................................565
B.2.9 System Menu Controls...............................................................................................565
B.2.10 Advanced Settings....................................................................................................566
B.3 Benthos 1625 Server........................................................................................................567
B.3.1 General......................................................................................................................567
B.3.2 Server IP Address......................................................................................................567
B.3.3 TCP Port...................................................................................................................568
B.3.4 Connect / Disconnect Button.....................................................................................568
B.3.5 LED's.........................................................................................................................568
B.3.6 Control Parameters...................................................................................................568
B.3.7 Status Windows.........................................................................................................570
B.3.8 Trigger Mode ...........................................................................................................570
B.3.9 Chirp Pattern Test.....................................................................................................570
B.3.10 Send ASCII Command ............................................................................................570
B.3.11 Approx Latitude.......................................................................................................570
B.3.12 Quit ........................................................................................................................571
B.3.13 System Menu Controls.............................................................................................571
B.4 Benthos CHIRP III Server................................................................................................573
B.4.1 TCP/IP Address of Chirp III Firmware.....................................................................574
B.4.2 Connect/Disconnect Button.......................................................................................574
B.4.3 Connection Status LED’s..........................................................................................574
B.4.4 Sonar Rep Rate..........................................................................................................574
B.4.5 Trigger Source Selector.............................................................................................574
B.4.6 Chirp Pattern Test.....................................................................................................574
B.4.7 LF/HF Enable ..........................................................................................................574
B.4.8 LF/HF Signal Rectification.......................................................................................574
B.4.9 Pulse Type Selector...................................................................................................574
B.4.10 Transmit Pulse Power.............................................................................................575
B.4.11 Receiver Gain..........................................................................................................575
B.4.12 Transmit Pulse Length.............................................................................................575
B.4.13 Status of Current Ping.............................................................................................575
B.4.14 Amplitude Statistics for Current Ping......................................................................575
B.4.15 Reflectivity...............................................................................................................575
B.4.16 PreAmp Gain...........................................................................................................576
B.5 C-Max CM2 USB Server.................................................................................................579
B.5.1 Start Towfish.............................................................................................................579
B.5.2 Stop Towfish..............................................................................................................579
B.5.3 Set Range/Frequency ................................................................................................579
B.5.4 Simulation Mode.......................................................................................................580
B.5.5 Mute Towfish.............................................................................................................580
B.5.6 Hold Gain..................................................................................................................580
B.5.7 Shallow Mode............................................................................................................581
B.5.8 Offset Altitude............................................................................................................581

Page 10
B.5.9 Connection Status LED’s..........................................................................................581

B.5.10 Do Not Send Packets...............................................................................................582
B.5.11 Status Windows.......................................................................................................582
B.6 EdgeTech ACI Server.......................................................................................................584
B.6.1 General......................................................................................................................584
B.6.2 Frequency: ...............................................................................................................584
B.6.3 Range:.......................................................................................................................584
B.6.4 Baseline Gain: ..........................................................................................................584
B.6.5 Sound Velocity:.........................................................................................................585
B.6.6 Status Windows ........................................................................................................585
B.6.7 ACI Serial Port .........................................................................................................585
B.6.8 Port / Stbd.................................................................................................................585
B.6.9 Enable Test Signal on ACI........................................................................................585
B.6.10 Operating Mode......................................................................................................585
B.6.11 Software Gain..........................................................................................................585
B.6.12 Telemetry.................................................................................................................585
B.6.13 Send data as............................................................................................................586
B.7 EdgeTech DF1000 Server................................................................................................587
B.7.1 General......................................................................................................................587
B.7.2 Range:.......................................................................................................................587
B.7.3 Hardware Gain: .......................................................................................................587
B.7.4 User Gain:.................................................................................................................587
B.7.5 Operating Mode........................................................................................................588
B.7.6 Send data as..............................................................................................................588
B.7.1 Status Windows ........................................................................................................588
B.7.2 Sonar Information ....................................................................................................588
B.7.3 DCI Serial Port.........................................................................................................588
B.7.4 Telemetry...................................................................................................................588
B.8 EdgeTech 3xxx SBP Server.............................................................................................589
B.8.1 General......................................................................................................................589
B.8.2 3xxx SBP IP Address.................................................................................................589
B.8.3 IP Port.......................................................................................................................589
B.8.4 Control and Data Status Lights.................................................................................590
B.8.5Trigger (ms)...............................................................................................................590
B.8.6Record Length ...........................................................................................................590
B.8.7Status Windows..........................................................................................................590
B.8.8 Ping Statistics............................................................................................................590
B.8.9 Telemetry...................................................................................................................590
B.8.10 Outgoing Pulse Power.............................................................................................591
B.8.11 Pulse List.................................................................................................................591
B.8.12 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................591
B.8.13 Log Raw Diagnostic Data & Debug .......................................................................591
B.8.14 Logging Format.......................................................................................................591
B.8.15 JSF Scalar...............................................................................................................591
B.8.16 Quit.........................................................................................................................591
B.8.17 Enable Pinging........................................................................................................591
B.8.18 SonarWiz Connection Light.....................................................................................592
B.8.19 System Menu ...........................................................................................................592

Page 11
B.9 EdgeTech 4100 Server.....................................................................................................594

B.9.1 Start-up Procedure....................................................................................................594
B.9.2 4100 IP Address / IP Port ........................................................................................596
B.9.3 Connect.....................................................................................................................596
B.9.4 Slave Mode................................................................................................................596
B.9.5 Status Lights..............................................................................................................596
B.9.6 Sonar Power/Frequency............................................................................................596
B.9.7 Range........................................................................................................................596
B.9.8 Analog Gain Level.....................................................................................................596
B.9.9 Sound Velocity...........................................................................................................596
B.9.10 Status Windows.......................................................................................................597
B.9.11 Scalars.....................................................................................................................597
B.9.12 Downsample............................................................................................................597
B.9.13 Record Diagnostic Data..........................................................................................597
B.9.14 Quit ........................................................................................................................597
B.9.15 Enable Pinging........................................................................................................597
B.9.16 SonarWiz Connection..............................................................................................597
B.9.17System Menu Commands .........................................................................................597
B.10 EdgeTech 4125 Server...................................................................................................600
B.10.1 4125 COM Port ......................................................................................................600
B.10.2 Connect/Disconnect Button.....................................................................................600
B.10.3 Connection Status LED’s........................................................................................601
B.10.4 Sonar Control..........................................................................................................601
B.11 EdgeTech 4200 Server...................................................................................................604
B.11.1 Master Controller: Start-up Procedure...................................................................604
B.11.2 Slave Mode: Start-up Procedure.............................................................................605
B.11.3 4200 IP Address / IP Port .......................................................................................606
B.11.4 Connect...................................................................................................................606
B.11.5 Status Lights............................................................................................................606
B.11.6 Operating Mode .....................................................................................................606
B.11.7 Slave Mode..............................................................................................................607
B.11.8 Record Diagnostic Data..........................................................................................607
B.11.9 Sound Velocity (m/s)................................................................................................607
B.11.10 Ping/Channel Amplitude .......................................................................................607
B.11.11 Scalars...................................................................................................................607
B.11.12 Ping/Channel Info.................................................................................................608
B.11.13 Diagnostics............................................................................................................608
B.11.14 Configure Serial Devices.......................................................................................608
B.11.15 Downsampling.......................................................................................................608
B.11.16 Quit ......................................................................................................................608
B.11.17 System Menu Controls...........................................................................................609
B.11.18 Advanced Settings..................................................................................................609
B.12 GeoAcoustics Digital Sidescan Server...........................................................................611
B.12.1 General....................................................................................................................611
B.12.2 Preparing the DSSS Deck Unit................................................................................612
B.12.3 GCF Packet Info......................................................................................................613
B.12.4 Gain Windows.........................................................................................................613
B.12.5 Connection Settings.................................................................................................614

Page 12
B.12.6 Controls...................................................................................................................614
B.12.7 Quit ........................................................................................................................615
B.12.8 System Menu............................................................................................................615
B.13 GeoAcoustics Digital Chirp Sub-bottom Server.............................................................617
B.13.1 General....................................................................................................................617
B.13.2 Preparing the SBP Deck Unit..................................................................................618
B.13.3 Ping Windows..........................................................................................................619
B.13.4 Controls ..................................................................................................................619
B.13.5 Waveform................................................................................................................620
B.13.6 Gain Levels and Settings.........................................................................................620
B.13.7 Send GCF Navigation..............................................................................................620
B.13.8 Sound Velocity (m/s)................................................................................................620
B.13.9 Connection Settings.................................................................................................621
B.13.10 Quit ......................................................................................................................621
B.13.11 GCF Packet Info....................................................................................................621
B.13.12 System Menu..........................................................................................................621
B.14 HUGIN Server................................................................................................................623
B.14.1 UDP Port Addresses...............................................................................................623
B.14.2 Connect/Disconnect Check boxes............................................................................624
B.15 Klein 3000+ Server........................................................................................................627
B.15.1 Sonar Configuration................................................................................................627
B.15.2 TPU IP Address.......................................................................................................628
B.15.4 Connection Modes...................................................................................................628
B.15.5 Advanced (More) Settings.......................................................................................629
B.15.6 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................630
B.15.7 Apply Gains ............................................................................................................630
B.15.8 SBP TX Waveform...................................................................................................630
B.15.9 SBP Pre-amp Gain..................................................................................................630
B.15.10 Status Windows.....................................................................................................630
B.15.11 Connection Status LED’s.......................................................................................631
B.16 Klein 3900 Server...........................................................................................................634
B.16.1 Send Data as............................................................................................................634
B.16.2 Gains ......................................................................................................................635
B.16.3 Sonar Range Selection (m)......................................................................................635
B.16.4 Pulse Length (µs)....................................................................................................635
B.16.5 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................635
B.16.6 TPU IP Address.......................................................................................................635
B.16.9 Advanced (More) Settings.......................................................................................636
B.16.10 Status Windows.....................................................................................................638

Page 13

B.17 Klein 5000 Server...........................................................................................................641
B.17.1 Send Data as............................................................................................................641
B.17.2 Sonar Range Selection.............................................................................................642
B.17.3TPU IP Address........................................................................................................642
B.17.6 More Settings..........................................................................................................643
B.17.7 Along Track Resolution...........................................................................................644
B.17.8 Pulse Length (µs)....................................................................................................644
B.17.9 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................644
B.17.10 Apply Gains ..........................................................................................................644
B.17.11 Status Windows.....................................................................................................644
B.17.12 Use TPU Navigation .............................................................................................645
B.18 Knudsen SSS Server.......................................................................................................648
B.18.1 General....................................................................................................................649
B.18.2 Knudsen IP Address and Port..................................................................................649
B.18.3 Connect / Disconnect Button...................................................................................649
B.18.4 Status LEDs.............................................................................................................649
B.18.5 Quit.........................................................................................................................649
B.18.6 SSS Channel Control...............................................................................................650
B.18.7 Sync.........................................................................................................................650
B.18.8 Transmit Off/On......................................................................................................650
B.18.9 System......................................................................................................................650
B.18.10 Channel.................................................................................................................650
B.18.11 Graph....................................................................................................................651
B.18.12 Message Box..........................................................................................................651
B.18.13 System Menu..........................................................................................................651
B.19 Knudsen SBP Server......................................................................................................653
B.19.1 General....................................................................................................................653
B.19.2 Knudsen IP Address and Port..................................................................................654
B.19.4 Status LEDs.............................................................................................................654
B.19.5 Quit.........................................................................................................................654
B.19.6 SBP Channel Control..............................................................................................654
B.19.7 Sync.........................................................................................................................654
B.19.8 Transmit Off/On......................................................................................................655
B.19.9 System......................................................................................................................655
B.19.10 Channel.................................................................................................................655
B.19.11 Graph....................................................................................................................655
B.19.12 Message Box..........................................................................................................655
B.19.13 System Menu..........................................................................................................656
B.20 Marine Sonic Server.......................................................................................................658
B.20.1 General....................................................................................................................658
B.20.2 Status Windows.......................................................................................................658
B.20.3 LED Indicators........................................................................................................659

Page 14
B.20.4 Do NOT Send Sonar Packets...................................................................................659

B.20.5 Send Sonar Only, Use SonarWiz Navigation...........................................................659
B.20.6 Quit.........................................................................................................................659
B.20.7 Record Diagnostic Data (Test Only).......................................................................659
B.20.8 System Menu............................................................................................................659
B.21 Marine Sonic HDS Server..............................................................................................661
B.21.1 General....................................................................................................................661
B.21.2 Connect...................................................................................................................661
B.21.3 LED Indicators........................................................................................................661
B.21.4 Power......................................................................................................................661
B.21.5 Resolution................................................................................................................662
B.21.6 Sonar Range............................................................................................................662
B.21.7 Transducer..............................................................................................................662
B.21.8 Ping Statistics .........................................................................................................662
B.21.9 Enable Log Decompression.....................................................................................662
B.21.10 Packet Statistics.....................................................................................................662
B.21.11 Quit.......................................................................................................................662
B.21.12 System Menu..........................................................................................................662
B.22 ODOM Echotrac SSS Server..........................................................................................664
B.22.1 UDP Port /Connect.................................................................................................664
B.22.2 LED's.......................................................................................................................664
B.22.3 Status Windows.......................................................................................................664
B.22.4 Ping Statistics..........................................................................................................665
B.22.5 Log Raw Data..........................................................................................................665
B.22.6 System Menu............................................................................................................665
B.23 ODOM Echotrac Server.................................................................................................667
B.23.1 Start Up...................................................................................................................667
B.23.2 UDP Port /Connect.................................................................................................669
B.23.3 LED's.......................................................................................................................670
B.23.4 Status Windows.......................................................................................................670
B.23.6 Log Raw Data..........................................................................................................671
B.23.7 System Menu............................................................................................................671
B.24 Remote File Server.........................................................................................................673
B.24.1 Operational Controls..............................................................................................673
B.24.2 File to Monitor........................................................................................................674
B.24.3 LED’s......................................................................................................................674
B.24.4 Operating Procedure...............................................................................................674
B.24.5 System Menu............................................................................................................675
B.25 SonarBeam S-150 Server................................................................................................677
B.25.1 S-150 COM Port .....................................................................................................677
B.25.4 Sonar Control..........................................................................................................678

Page 15
B.26 SportScan Server ...........................................................................................................681

B.26.1 General....................................................................................................................681
B.26.2 SportScan Serial Port..............................................................................................681
B.26.3 Frequency Selection................................................................................................681
B.26.4 Range......................................................................................................................681
B.26.5 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................681
B.26.6 Gain.........................................................................................................................682
B.26.7 Status Windows.......................................................................................................682
B.26.8 LED's.......................................................................................................................682
B.26.10 System Menu..........................................................................................................682
B.26.12 Quit.......................................................................................................................684
B.26.13 Diagnostic Mode...................................................................................................684
B.27 Tritech Starfish Server ...................................................................................................685
B.27.1 General....................................................................................................................685
B.27.2 Connection..............................................................................................................685
B.27.3 Status Windows.......................................................................................................686
B.27.4 Quit.........................................................................................................................686
B.27.5 Diagnostic Mode.....................................................................................................686
B.27.6 System Menu............................................................................................................686
B.28 SyQwest SBP Server......................................................................................................689
B.28.1 General....................................................................................................................689
B.28.2 Sonar Serial Port.....................................................................................................689
B.28.4 Use Pixel Swap........................................................................................................690
B.28.5 StrataBox Mode.......................................................................................................690
B.28.6 Bathy 2010 Mode....................................................................................................690
B.28.7 Dual Channel Mode................................................................................................690
B.28.8 Status Windows.......................................................................................................690
B.28.10 System Menu..........................................................................................................691
B.29 YellowFin Server...........................................................................................................693
B.29.1 General....................................................................................................................693
B.29.2 IP Address...............................................................................................................693
B.29.3 Sound Velocity.........................................................................................................694
B.29.4 Frequency................................................................................................................694
B.29.5 Data Gain................................................................................................................694
B.29.6 Range......................................................................................................................694
B.29.7 Balance Gain...........................................................................................................694
B.29.8 Status Windows.......................................................................................................694
B.29.10 Diagnostics............................................................................................................695
B.29.11Connect / Disconnect..............................................................................................695
B.29.12 System Menu..........................................................................................................695
B.29.14 Quit.......................................................................................................................696
B.30 NI Analog Sidescan Server.............................................................................................697
B.30.1 Configuring the NI Card.........................................................................................697

Page 16
B.30.2 Operational Sidescan Controls................................................................................700

B.30.2.1 Summary Window.................................................................................................701
B.30.2.2 Board Selection/Simulate Mode............................................................................701
B.30.2.3 Data Acquisition Mode.........................................................................................701
B.30.2.4 LEDs and Data Resolution...................................................................................702
B.30.2.5 Range Selection....................................................................................................703
B.30.2.6 Trigger.................................................................................................................703
B.30.2.7 Data Monitor........................................................................................................703
B.30.2.8 Channel Monitor..................................................................................................703
B.30.2.9 BNC Signal Connections......................................................................................703
B.30.2.10 Error Display.....................................................................................................703
B.30.2.11 Telemetry............................................................................................................703
B.30.2.12 Downsampling....................................................................................................704
B.30.3 Tips & Troubleshooting the Analog Interfaces........................................................704
B.30.3.1 NI Software Not Installed – Error Message..........................................................704
B.30.3.2 CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected – Error Message................................................705
B.30.3.3 Green Blinking LED.............................................................................................705
B.30.3.4 BNC Connections Impedance Recommendation...................................................705
B.30.3.5 Single 5-BNC box Use in SSS / SB Data Collection Configuration......................705
B.30.3.6 Same-Ping-Rate SSS / SB Data Dual-Collection Configuration...........................706
B.30.3.7 Independent Ping-Rate SSS / SB Analog Dual-Collection Configuration.............707
B.31 NI Analog Sub-bottom Server........................................................................................709
B.31.1 Configuring the NI Card.........................................................................................709
B.31.2 Operational Sub-bottom Controls...........................................................................712
B.31.2.1 Summary Window.................................................................................................712
B.31.2.2 Board Selection/Simulate Mode............................................................................712
B.31.2.3 Data Acquisition Mode.........................................................................................713
B.31.2.4 LEDs.....................................................................................................................713
B.31.2.5 Transmit Controls.................................................................................................714
B.31.2.6 Data Monitor........................................................................................................715
B.31.2.7 Channel Monitor..................................................................................................715
B.31.2.8 BNC Signal Connections......................................................................................715
B.31.2.9 Error Display.......................................................................................................716
B.31.2.10 Telemetry............................................................................................................716
B.31.2.11 Downsampling....................................................................................................716
B.31.3 Tips & Troubleshooting the Analog Interfaces........................................................716
B.31.3.1 NI Software Not Installed – Error Message..........................................................717
B.31.3.2 CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected – Error Message................................................717
B.31.3.3 Green Blinking LED.............................................................................................717
B.31.3.4 BNC Connections Impedance Recommendation...................................................717
B.31.3.5 Single 5-BNC box Use in SSS / SB Data Collection Configuration.....................718
B.31.3.6 Same-Ping-Rate SSS / SB Data Dual-Collection Configuration...........................719
B.31.3.7 Independent Ping-Rate SSS / SB Analog Dual-Collection Configuration.............720
SECTION 9 SONARWIZ.NAV.............................................................................................721
9.1 SonarWiz.NAV - Introduction..........................................................................................721
9.1.1 Installing SonarWiz.NAV...........................................................................................721
9.1.2 Enabling Data Transmission to SonarWiz.NAV.........................................................721
9.1.3 Starting SonarWiz.NAV..............................................................................................722
9.2 Using SonarWiz.NAV.......................................................................................................722
9.2.1 Anatomy of the SonarWiz.NAV Display.....................................................................722

Page 17
9.2.2 Map Window (Orange Box) ......................................................................................723

9.2.3 Toolbar Buttons (Black Box).....................................................................................723
9.2.4 Status Bar .................................................................................................................726
9.2.5 Menus .......................................................................................................................726

Section 1 Introduction
1.1 SonarWiz – Introduction

SonarWiz (or SonarWiz5) is a fast, friendly acoustic mapping package designed to produce
real-time mosaics and post-processed mosaics from most sidescan sonars and acoustic data
files.
In Real-time mode, mosaics can be generated on-the-fly at any resolution and size. Support
is provided for navigation, fathometer, heave sensor, and magnetometer input, and the
operator can control image quality, layback, bottom tracking and navigation.
In post-processing mode, it will handle most of common acoustic data file types as well as
georeferenced imagery (KAP, TIFF, JPEG and BMP), and vector files (ESRI Shapefiles).
In both modes, visualization tools such as zoom, pan, measure, and on-the-fly image scaling
are available to enhance mosaic production and interpretation.
Basemaps (raster images) and overlays (vector files) can be displayed to add visual context
and perspective to mosaics.
Contact and feature digitizing tools allow features to be located and classified on the mosaic
during or after data acquisition. Graphic, tabular and application specific files (HTML, MS
Word, DXF, ESRI Shapefiles, GoogleEarth KMZ and 3D Views) provide multiple data
export routes.
1.2 Supported Sensors

SonarWiz supports a large number sensors for Real-time data collection as well as a large
number of sensor data formats and sensor format for Post processing (offline).
1.2.1 Real-Time Sensors

Sidescan Sonars
• Analog Side Scan Server
• CMAX CM2 USB Server
• EdgeTech 4100 Server
Page 20
• EdgeTech ACI server

• EdgeTech DCI Server (DF-10000)
• GeoAcoustics Digital Sonar Server
• Klein 3K Server
• Klein 3900
• Klein 5K Server
• Marine Sonic Server
• SonarBeam S150 Server
• SportScan Server
• Teledyne-Benthos 16xx Server
• Tritech Seaking Server
• YellowFin Server
Sub-bottom Profilers
• EdgeTech 3100 (XStar) Server
• Knudsen SBP Server
• Odom CVM (EchoTrac) Server
• SyQwest SBP Server
• Teledyne-Benthos Chirp III Server
Combined Sidescan and Sub-bottom

• Klein 3K + SBP
• Teledyne-Benthos 1625 Server
• HUGIN AUV Server
Fathometers
• All Fathometers sending NMEA DBT messages via RS232
Magnetometers
• AquaScan AX2000
• GEM 19M
• Geometrics 881 & 882
• Marine Magnetics Standard and with Depth
Magnetometers
• All Heave sensors sending TSS01 Format via RS232
1.2.2 Supported Sensor Data Formats (Offline Processing)

Sidescan Sonar Data Formats
• CMax (*.cm2)
• CODA (*.COD)+
SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

Page 21
• EdgeTech (*.JSF)+
• eXtended Triton Format (*.XTF)
• GeoAcoustics (*.GCF & *.RDF)
• Humminbird (*.SON, *.DAT)
• HYPACK (*.HSX)
• Imagenex SportScan (*.81S)
• Imagenex Yellow Fin (*.872)
• Imagenex DeltaT Backscatter (*.83P)
• Klein – Including K5000 V2 (*.SDF)
• Konsgberg EM Backscatter (*.all)
• Kongsberg (Simrad) EA400/EA600 Backscatter (*.RAW)
• Marine Sonic (*.MST)+
• ProSAS (*.IMG)
• QMips (.DAT & .QMP)
• Reson 7000 Series Backscatter (*.S7K)
• SeaBeam2100 (*.MB41)
• SwathPlus Raw/Processed (*.SXR/*.SXP)+
• Swedish Geo Survey (*.SEG)
• Tritech (*.V4Log & LogDoc)
• Swedish Geo Survey SEG-Y (*.seg)
Sub-bottom Profiler Data Formats

• SEG-Y (*.seg)+
• XTF (*.xtf)+
• EdgeTech JSF (*.jsf)+
• GeoAcoustics (*.gcf)
• CODA (*.cod)+
• Klein 3000 (*.sdf)
• Kongsberg (*.RAW)
• Tritech (*.V4Log)
• StrataBox ODC (*.odc)
• Knudsen KEB (*.keb) including D0-D3 and B9 formats
Magnetometer Data Formats

• AquaScan AXL;
• C&C Magnetometers;
• CSF Magnetometers;
• HYPACK RAW File Magnetometer
• Lat Lon Magnetometer Files
• Lon Lat Magnetometer Files
• Maglog GPS-POS w/ Altitude
• Maglog GPS-POS-Alt-MAG2-MAG3

Page 22
• Maglog Standard Format

• Maglog w/ Altitude
• PLR Magnetometer [feet]
• PLR Magnetometer (m) [meters]
• SeaLink Magnetometer
• SonarWiz MAG 882
• SonarWiz SEASPY
• SonarWiz SEASPY_XY
• TBSmith HYPACK MAG; and
• XYZ MAG
1.3 System Requirements and Configurations
1.3.1 Recommended PC Configuration

Minimum: Pentium 4, 512MB RAM 2-GB HD space
Operating Systems: Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows7
Multi-threading/32 Bit/64 Bit Support: SonarWiz5 currently supports multi-core
processors on 32 and 64 bit architecture however it currently only runs in 32 Bit
mode.
1.3.2 System Configurations and Components

SonarWiz is available in two general configurations: SonarWiz for real-time data
acquisition and processing, and SonarWiz Office for data post processing and map
production only. The available functions and features of these two configurations
are compared in the table below.

Page 23
SonarWiz
Feature SonarWiz
Office
Post-processing of mosaics  
Feature Digitizing Capabilities  
File Import (XTF, QMP,  
MST, 81S, JSF, SDF, etc)
GeoTiff Mosaic Export  
Basemap Support  
Report Generator  
Target Analysis and Reporting  
Sidescan acquisition 
Sub-bottom Acquisition 
(optional)
Real-time Mosaics 
Fathometer Interface 
Magnetometer Interface 
Real-time Navigation Interface 
XTF Data Recording 
Left/Right Steering Indicator 
Survey Line Management 
Table 1: Comparison of SonarWiz and SonarWiz Office
1.3.3 Real Time Data Acquisition and Mapping

In order to acquire and process sonar data in real time, the following SonarWiz
components are required:
1. The main SonarWiz software application. This program communicates
with a SonarWiz server (see below), obtains sonar data, and processes
and displays it in a consistent manner, regardless of sonar hardware and
server being used.
2. A SonarWiz server software module designed for the type of Sidescan
or Sub-bottom sonar being used. Several server modules may be
installed on a single host computer, but only one is running at any given
time. The server module performs the following functions:
• communicates with the sonar hardware,
• provides a control user interface specifically designed for that
hardware,
• converts the acoustic data to a standard format, and
• transfers sonar and other data (navigation) to the main SonarWiz
application.

Page 24
3. A CTI software licensing key (commonly called a “dongle”). This small

hardware device plugs into any available parallel port (Figure 1) or USB
port (Figure 2) depending on the type shipped by CTI.. It contains the
licenses for the various software components and options that have
been purchased from CTI. The licenses in the key can be updated in
the field by the user if new options are purchased from CTI.
Instructions for doing this can be found later in this Section in Section
1.4.6 on page 28.
Figure 2: USB Key

Figure 1: Parallel Key
4. An analog data acquisition card (e.g. National Instruments PCI-60xxE

or PCI-6034E) and appropriate software drivers. Note that this card is
only required for analog sonar devices.
These components are typically installed on a single PC as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3: Typical SonarWiz real time configuration
1.3.4 Post-processing and Mapping Configuration

If you have purchased SonarWiz Office for the purpose of post-processing
previously collected sonar data, the only components required are:
1. The main SonarWiz software application.
2. A CTI software licensing key.
Both components are used on a single computer as shown in Figure 4

Page 25
Figure 4: SonarWiz Office Configuration
1.3.5 Remote Server Configuration

It is possible to run some servers remotely from the SonarWiz (Real-time)
application, in which case the computers must be connected by a reliable network.
When run in this mode, the SonarWiz operator may not be able to view the server
user interface, and therefore, may have limited control over server functions.
Figure 5: SonarWiz Network Configuration
1.4 Component Installation

When you purchase SonarWiz or SonarWiz Office, you will receive a package containing the
following:
• SonarWiz Software Installation CD
• Software License Key
• Data Acquisition Card and cables (Optional)
• DAQ card Driver CD (Optional)

Page 26
The installation CD contains the main SonarWiz application and the driver for the Software
License Key. If you have purchased one or more SonarWiz server modules, these will also be
included on the installation CD. The NI-DAQ card and driver CD is only supplied if you
have purchase SonarWiz to use with an analog sonar system.
For users on a current EMA the CTI support Website offers the latest versions of the Sonar
Wiz and Servers at http://www.chestech-support.com/ctisupport/login.asp A user name
and password is required to login.
1.4.1 Previously Installed Versions of SonarWiz

New versions SonarWiz5 can be installed directly on to a PC that already has an
existing version of SonarWiz5 resident on the machine. The new version will install
“overtop” of the older version, replacing out-of-date module while still retaining
user settings.
SonarWiz5 will not affect/uninstall any versions of SonarWiz 4 on the PC.
1.4.2 Installing SonarWiz from CD

1. Insert the SonarWiz Installation CD and wait for the CD to auto-run.
2. Follow the instructions on the installation wizard.
3. If the installation wizard does not start (perhaps because auto-run is
disabled), browse to the CD in Explorer and double click on the file
SonarWiz5FullInstall_V5xxx.exe to start the installation
Note that the following additional software will be automatically installed along with
the main SonarWiz application:
• Driver software required for the Software License key.
• Any server modules that have been licensed as part of the initial system
purchase.
1.4.3 Installing SonarWiz and Servers from Web

For users holding a current Maintenance Agreement, software upgrades and
additional server modules may be downloaded from the CTI Support Website at
http://www.chestech-support.com/ctisupport/login.asp
To install a new version of SonarWiz:
1. Log in to the CTI Support Website, click on SonarWiz5 from the left
hand side of the web page under Downloads.
2. Under the Currently Available SonarWiz Downloads page
SonarWiz5 can be downloaded to the local PC by selecting
Download.
3. When prompted, select a location to save the file to be downloaded.

4. Once the download is completed use Windows Explorer to navigate
to the location of the downloaded file.
5. Double click on the downloaded file and follow the instructions on the
installation wizard.

Page 27
Note that driver software required for the Software License is included in the
downloaded version however, server modules are not.
1.4.4 Installing Analog Data Acquisition Cards and Drivers

Instructions for installing and configuring the various analog data acquisition
cards supplied with SonarWiz, as well as other specialized hardware components,
can be found in the SonarWiz Hardware Configuration Guide.
1.4.5 Installing SonarWiz Server Modules

SonarWiz server modules are located under the main program directory
(C:\Program Files\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWiz5) under the
Servers directory.
CD: For initial installations from the CD supplied by CTI, the servers purchased
will automatically be installed.
Downloads:
For users holding a current Maintenance Agreement, server modules may be
downloaded from the CTI Support Website at http://www.chestech-
support.com/ctisupport/login.asp
To install a new server:
1. Log in to the CTI Support Website, click on SonarWiz Servers from
the left hand side of the web page under Downloads.
2. Under the Currently Available SonarWiz Servers click
Download beside the server required.
3. There are two tyoes of files available on the support site: WinZip
Archives and Self-installing executables.
a) For WinZip Archives

b) When prompted, select a location to save the Zip file
containing the server files to be downloaded.
c) Once the download is completed use Windows Explorer to
navigate to the location of the downloaded Zip file.
d) Double click on the downloaded Zip file and Extract all files to
the following directory: C:\Program Files\Chesapeake
Technology, Inc\SonarWiz5\Servers
4. For Self-installing executables

a) When prompted, select a location to save the .exe file
containing the server files to be downloaded.
b) Once the download is completed use Windows Explorer to
navigate to the location of the downloaded Zip file.
c) Double click on the downloaded .exe file and follow the
prompts. The program will automatically install the new servers
to the Servers directory.

Page 28
1.4.6 Updating SonarWiz License Key

If your Dongle is out of date or you have purchased new features, the Dongle must
be updated with a DUK file provided by CTI.
In order to update the Dongle with the new DUK file:
1. When SonarWiz is installed the Program “Dongle Manager” is also
included.
2. From the Windows Start Menu under programs, select the SonarWiz5
Program Group and left-click on Dongle Manager to open the dialog in
Figure 6 below.
Figure 6: CTI Dongle Manager
3. Ensure the dongle is plugged into a USB or parallel port on the local
machine.
4. Click the Update Dongle button which will open a standard file selection
dialog.
5. Find the local copy of the 'DUK' file attachment that you received from
CTI and press the Open button.
6. The dongle will now be updated using the information contained in the
'DUK' file.
7. Click the Done button to exit the program.

Page 29
1.5 User Manual Layout

The Sections in this user manual is are organized by major function groupings in the same
sequence as the typical program work-flow. This layout enables new users to read each
Section in sequence from program basics all the way to producing a final end-product.
Experienced users will be able to quickly find a particular topic or procedure via the table of
contents or by Section headings.
1.6 Program Work-flow

The typical work-flow from start to finish is listed in the following pages according to the
type of work being undertaken. Each step in the work-flow list has a corresponding Section
in this manual.
Section 1 (this Section) is an introduction to the program and the manual and Section 2 is a
guide to understanding the layout of the program windows and buttons. Section 3 is the start
of the work-flow.
Sections 7 through 9 are not part of the normal work-flow but necessary tools that are called
upon from time to time depending on the project.
1.6.1 Real-time Work-flow

1. Set Program Options – Section 2.8 on page 98
2. Create new, or open existing Project – Section 2.9 on page 123
3. Load Basemaps – Section 3.1 on page 137
4. Set Data Acquisition Parameters – Section 4.2 on page 166
5. Create new, or load existing survey lines – Section 4.3 on page 190
6. Record Data – Section 4.6 on page 223
7. Capture Real-time contacts (Sidescan only) – Section 5.15.3 on page 409

Page 30
Figure 7: Real Time Work flow

Page 31
1.6.2 Post Processing Work-flow

1. Set Program Options – Section 2.8 on page 98
2. Create new, or open existing Project – Section 2.9 on page 123
3. Load Basemaps – Section 3.1 on page 137
4. Import Data
a) Section 5.3 on page for Sidescan data 237
b) Section 5.4 on page for Sub-bottom data 262
c) Section 5.5 on page for Magnetometer data 273
5. Basic Sonar File Management
a) Split – Section 5.6.5.22 on page 309
b) Aggregate – Section 5.6.4.5 on page 292
c) Trim – Section 5.6.5.21 on page 308
d) Delete – Section 5.6.5.23 on page 312
6. Bottom Tracking
a) Section 5.9.2 on page 339 for Sidescan data
b) Section 5.10.2 on page 345 for Sub-bottom data
7. Signal Processing
a) Section 5.11.1 on page 356 for Sidescan data
b) Section 5.11.2 on page 367 for Sub-bottom data
8. Navigation – Section 5.13 on page 373
9. Layback and Offsets – Section 5.14 on page 391
10. Target Capture (Sidescan Only) – Section 5.15.4 on page 410
11. Digitizing Features – Section 5.16 on page 438
12. Intersections (Sub-bottom only) – Section 5.17 on page 465
13. Cores – Section 5.18 on page 469
14. Magnetometer Processing – Section 5.19 on page 475
15. Export Final Results – Section 5.7 on page 317

Page 32
Figure 8: Post Processing Work flow

Section 2 SonarWiz Basics
2.1 The Help Menu

This small but important menu is the first stop for users experiencing difficulties or
questions about the program.
Figure 9: Help Menu
2.1.1 User Manual

Opens the well-written and informative SonarWiz User Guide in the default PDF viewer.
2.1.2 Restore Factory Defaults

A good tool to use if/when:
• Sonar Wiz Windows or menus become “lost” due to a hardware change such as the
removal or relocation of a second monitor; or
• Bizarre program behavior that is not a crash.
2.1.3 My Support Info

Prior to contacting CTI support the information in the Figure 10 below should be ready in
order to expedite assistance from CTI.
Page 34
Figure 10: My Support Info
2.2 The View Menu - User Interface

The primary functions of SonarWiz are:
1. Recording sonar and magnetometer data in Real-time;
2. Re-playing prerecorded sonar data;
3. Creating mosaics or maps from sonar and magnetometer data.
In addition, SonarWiz contains many tools for manipulating and exporting sonar data and
for handling ancillary data such as targets and digitized features. This Section provides a brief
overview of the user interface through which these functions are provided.
An Important Note About Units
SonarWiz will uses the Project Geodetic Units for the following tools:
● Measuring Tool
● Helm L/R indicator
● A-Scan ranges
● Waterfall Range Lines
● Target Image Scale Bars in the Contact Editing Window
● Towfish Altitude Display
● Survey Line Status Boxes
Project units are specified at the time of project creation (See Creating a Project on page
127) or in the Project Settings dialog (See Modifying A Project on page 135 ) and are
displayed in the System Information Window. See Section 2.5.1.5 on page 65 for more
information.
SonarWiz5 User Guide SonarWiz Basics

Page 35
2.3 Screen Anatomy
Figure 11: Anatomy of Main SonarWiz screen
The SonarWiz screen (Figure 11) consists of a main window, menus, toolbars, and docking
areas for optional windows.
The main window, known as the Map Window, is used for the display of georeferenced
data. Basemap images and survey lines may be added to the map display to provide visual
reference. Digitized features and targets can also be displayed on this map.
An example of SonarWiz with a Raster Basemap and sidescan files in the Map Window, a
2-channel sidescan waterfall docked on the left, and the Output summary docked at the
bottom is shown in Figure 12

Page 36
Figure 12: SonarWiz Main View as "Map View"
2.3.1 Status Bar
Figure 13: Program Status Bar
The Status Bar (Figure 13), located at the bottom of the Main View, contains the
following information:
CTI Support
• A Hyperlink to the Chesapeake Technology Support Website.

Redraw
• Redraws (refreshes) the Map Window

Real Time Status Icons
• Active sensors are displayed. When connection to a particular sensor is lost

then a red flashing X will appear over the Sensor Status Icon
• Left-clicking a sensor status icon open the associated sensor configuration
dialog

Page 37
• See Sensor Status Icons in Section 4.2 on page 166 for more
information.
Cursor Information
• Displays the Latitude, Longitude, X and Y position of the cursor

• If a basemap is loaded that contains height (Z) information then the value is
shown in the Z field.
Configuring the Status Bar
• The Status Bar may be configured by right-clicking on the bar itself
opening the context pop-up menu shown in Figure 14 below.
• Individual items (except Sensor Status Icons) may be turned on or off
Figure 14: Status Bar Configuration Menu
2.3.2 Customizing the User Interface

The SonarWiz User Interface is highly customizable allowing users to enable various
windows and menus and subsequently place them as either docked inside the main
program or floating anywhere on the Desktop.
Further, once a user has a particular layout that he/she wished to preserve it can be
saved and reloaded using the Layout Manager (page 85). This allows multiple
users on the same PC to quickly load their preferred layout or a single user to save
various layouts depending on the specific task at hand.

Page 38
2.3.3 Quick Access Toolbar
Figure 15: Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar (Figure 15) is the “Starting Point” for most new
projects and contains commands that a user would traditionally find under the
“File” menu of predominant Windows-based applications. Clicking on the blue
SonarWiz “5” icon opens the Quick Access Toolbar to reveal the (enabled) main
functions available (Figure 16).
Figure 16: Quick Access Toolbar - Opened
All functions within the Quick Access Toolbar are discussed in Section 2.7 on
page 97; this section discusses Quick Access Toolbar customization.
Left-clicking the down arrow to the right of the Quick Access Toolbar opens
the dialog in Figure 17 below.
Figure 17: Quick Access Toolbar Customization Dialog

Page 39
Customize Quick Access Toolbar

The first section in Figure 17 above shows that the New, Project Settings,
Options and Exit buttons are active (checked) within the Quick Access Toolbar.
Left-clicking on an un-checked command will add it to the Quick Access Toolbar

whereas left-licking on a checked command will remove that command from the
Quick Access Toolbar.
More Commands...
▪ See More Commands below on page 40

Show Below the Ribbon
▪ Puts the Quick Access Toolbar, which is normally above the ribbon
(Figure 40), and places it below the Ribbon (Error: Reference source not
found )
Figure 18: Quick Access Toolbar Above Ribbon
Figure 19: Quick Access Toolbar Below Ribbon
Minimize the Ribbon
▪ Minimizes the Command Ribbon containing the Command Icons for each
menu item (Figure 20)

Page 40
Figure 20: Minimized Ribbon with Quick Access Toolbar Above
More Commands...
▪ The six commands listed in the first section of the customization dialog are
the most common commands available for inclusion in the toolbar but not
the only commands available.
▪ Left-clicking on More Commands opens the dialog in Figure 21 below.
Figure 21: Customize Dialog for Quick Access Toolbar
Customize Dialog
The Customize dialog allows the user to choose almost any command function
available in SonarWiz and assign it to the Quick Access Toolbar.
To add a new command: Find the desired command by locating it within its
Command list. The command lists available are sown in Figure 22. Left-click to
select the Command list and then left-click (highlight) the desired command. Once

Page 41
the the command is highlighted left-click on Add>> and the command will now be
available in the Quick Access Toolbar.
To remove command: Left-click on the unwanted command in the Active
Commands area and then left-click on Remove.
To change the order of the commands: Within the Active Commands area, left-
click on the command whose order is to be changed. Once selected left-click on the
up or down arrow to the right of the Active Commands area until the selected
command appears in its desired position.
Figure 22: Command Lists
Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon
▪ This check box is equivalent to left-clicking the “Show Below the

Ribbon” option in the dialog in Figure 40. When selected the Quick
Access Toolbar will appear blow the command ribbon (See Figure 20) .
Keyboard Shortcuts
▪ Left-clicking the Customize button will open the dialog in Figure 23

below.

Page 42
Figure 23: Customize Keyboard Dialog
To Customize A New Shortcut Key:

▪ Left-click the Command category in the “Categories:” window where the
desired command is located
▪ Left-click the specific command desired changed in the “Commands:”
window
▪ If any shortcut keys exits for the selected command it (they) will be shown
in the “Current Keys:” window.
▪ Left-click inside the “Press new shortcut key” window and type the
new shortcut key desired. Note that the Shift, Control, and Alt keys must
be held while typing the next key in the sequence in order for that sequence
to register.
▪ Once the key (sequence) desired is in the window then left-click the Assign
button to finalize the new keyboard shortcut.
▪ Note that adding a new keyboard shortcut does not remove the existing
shortcut; rather, it appends the new one. In order to remove an existing
shortcut see the next section.
To Remove An Existing Shortcut Key:
▪ Left-click the Command category in the “Categories:” window where the
desired command is located

Page 43
▪ Left-click the specific command desired changed in the “Commands:”

window
▪ If any shortcut keys exits for the selected command it (they) will be shown
in the “Current Keys:” window.
▪ Left-click the keyboard shortcut desired removed inside the in the
“Current Keys:” and left-click the Remove button to delete the currently
selected keyboard shortcut.
To Revert to Factory Keyboard Shortcut Settings:
▪ Left-click the “Reset All” button
▪ SonarWiz will prompt the user to confirm the Reset command with the
dialog in Figure 24 below.
▪ Note that ALL customized Keyboard shortcuts will be lost using this
function.
Figure 24: Confirm "Reset All"
Adding Ribbon Functions to the Quick Access Toolbar

Ribbon Toolbars are specific command functions with their associated icons
assigned to a particular Menu function.
SonarWiz has six principal Menu functions, each with an associated set of command
functions which can be viewed in their respective Ribbon Toolbars.
As an example, the Maps Ribbon Toolbar is shown in Figure 25 below. This ribbon
is made up of five groupings of commands, enclosed within boxes and labeled
below.
Figure 25: Maps Ribbon Toolbar
Add a Ribbon command group to the Quick Access Toolbar:

• Left-click the Menu function containing the desired Ribbon Command
group

Page 44
• Right-click on the desired Ribbon Command Group and the context

sensitive dialog box in Figure 26 will appear. In this example the mouse was
over the Basemaps group when the mouse right-button was depressed
Figure 26: Add Command Group to Quick Access Toolbar
Figure 27: New Command Group in Quick Access Toolbar
• Select Add to Quick Access Toolbar and the Command Group will
appear in the Quick Access Toolbar (Figure 27)
2.4 Docking Windows

SonarWiz has a large number of windows/displays that can be attached (docked) to the main
User Interface or may be allowed to float freely anywhere on the Desktop (outside of the
User Interface).
Each Window has a right-click context sensitive dialog (Figure 28) that is accessed by right-
clicking on the top bar of the individual window.

Page 45
Figure 28: Right-click Dialog
Each function within the context sensitive dialog in Figure 28 is discussed below.
Make Floating Window
A window that is docked may be made into a floating window by either
• Left-clicking and dragging the top bar of the window to a free area on the User
Interface or Desktop; or
• Selecting “Floating” in the right-click context sensitive menu
Make a Docked Window
A window that is floating may be made into a docked window by either
• Left-clicking and dragging the top bar of the window to a docking point (Figure 34)
within the User Interface; or
• Selecting “Docking” in the right-click context sensitive menu
Docking Points
Docking Points (Figure 29) are the small icons that appear when a window 's top bar is being
left-clicked and dragged. Bringing the cursor over one of these docking points causes a
shaded area to appear representing exactly where the window will be docked if/when the
left-mouse button is released (Figure 35).
Figure 29: Single and Multi Docking Points
Single Docking Points such as the one seen of the left-hand side of Figure 29 point to the
position of the main User Interface open to receive the current window being left-clicked
and dragged.
Multi-Docking Points such as the one seen of the right-hand side of Figure 29 offer up to
five points where the current window being left-clicked and dragged may be placed. The four
primary docking points, at the top, right, bottom and left (12, 3, 6 and 9 o'clock positions),

Page 46
represent the four sides of the main User Interface whereas the center docking point
represents adding the window to a stacked and tabbed area – See Stackable Windows on
page 52.
Auto Hide a Docked Window
A window or display that is docked may have the Auto Hide option enabled by left-clicking
on the vertical thumb-tack located beside the close window “X” at the top-right of the
window (Figure 30) or by right-clicking on the top bar of the window and selecting Auto
Hide (Figure 28).
Figure 30: Auto Hide and Close Window Controls
Auto Hiding a window means that when another section of the screen is made active (by a
left or right-click for example) the window will slide closed against the side to which it is
docked.
A window that is Auto Hidden is indicated by its name at the extreme edge of the User
Interface where the Window is docked. In Figure 31 below the Waterfall Window is
Docked on the left-hand side of the User Interface and hidden. Clicking on the name
“Waterfall” in this case will make the window reappear.

Page 47
Figure 31: Hidden Window
N.B. A Window that has Auto Hide enabled cannot be moved. Auto Hide must be turned
off prior to dragging a window to a new location.
Turn off Auto Hide
To turn off Auto Hide either:
• Left-click on the horizontal thumb-tack and Auto Hide will be disabled and the
thumb-tack will return to its original vertical position; or
• Left-click on “Auto Hide” in the right-click context sensitive menu
Adding a Window/Display
Windows and Displays are normally added using the Data Displays Command Group
within the View Menu. See the View Menu Section on page 53 for a complete discussion
on all windows and displays available and their functions.

Page 48
Figure 32: Opening a Data Display
Example: Adding and Moving a Window (Dock and Free Floating)
1. Figure 32 shows the user selecting the Output Message Log from the Data
Display Toolbars command under the View Menu. A display or window that is
opened will automatically be placed where it was during its previous instance, or if it
is being opened for the first time it will go to a system default position. In Figure 33
below the Output Message Log opened in its last location which was at the
bottom of the User Interface.

Page 49
Figure 33: Display Appears In Its Last Position (Docked)
2. The user may move a window or display by left-clicking and holding the top bar of
the window (Figure 34). N.B. A Window that has Auto Hide Enabled cannot be
moved. Auto Hide must be turned off prior to dragging a window to a new
location. (See the “Turn off Auto Hide” on page 47).
3. Moving the cursor over a docking point (Figure 34)and hovering (without releasing
the button) causes the corresponding Docking Area to become highlighted in blue.
(Figure 35)
4. Moving the cursor over a docking point and releasing will cause the window to dock
in the associated quadrant (Figure 36)
5. If the left mouse button is released when the cursor is not over a docking point then
the window becomes free-floating, anywhere on the PC Desktop (Figure 37)
6. A window or display may be closed by either:
• Left-clicking the “X” at the right side of the top bar of the window or
• Deselecting the window in the Toolbars or Sensor Graphs in the Data

Displays Command Group

Page 50
Figure 34: Left-click and Drag Top Bar of Window/Display
Figure 35: Left-click and Drag over Docking Point

Page 51
Figure 36: Releasing Left Mouse Button Over a Docking Point
Figure 37: Releasing Left Mouse Button Outside a Docking Point

Page 52
Multiple Docked Windows
More than one window may be active and docked in one area. For example the
image in Figure 38 below shows a total of four docked windows within the User
Interface, some of which are stackable i.e. may be stacked on top of other windows.
N.B. Not all windows may be stacked such as the Waterfall Display. When
dragging a window , the Docking Points will indicate where the window may be
placed and whether or not stacking is allowed
Stackable Windows
Figure 38: Multiple Docked Windows
Windows that a re stackable such as those see in Figure 38 above may also be
docked on-atop-the-other thus creating a tabbed pages with each stacked window
being represented by a tab. In Figure 47 below the

Page 53
Figure 39: Creating Tabbed Docked Windows
2.5 The View Menu
Figure 40: View Menu Ribbon
The View Menu is used to control the look of SonarWiz which includes the User
Interface itself as well as various internal windows.
The View Menu is divided into four Command Groups, namely:
• Data Displays
• Map Display
• Color and Contrast
• Control

Page 54
Each group is discussed in detail below.
2.5.1 Data Displays

The Data Displays Command Group (Figure 41)contains the command functions
required to turn on/off Sensor Graphs (page 54) as well as various other displays,
Toolbars (page 56), indicators and status windows. As well, the Data Displays
Command Group contains a Layout Manager (page 85) allowing multiple users
on the same PC to quickly save and load their preferred layout or a single user to
save various layouts depending on the specific task at hand.
Figure 41: Data Displays Command Group
Each group is discussed in detail below.
2.5.1.1 Sensor Graphs
The Sensor Graphs function is used to open a Display Window that can be
configured to graphically show data from one of 13 different possible sensors.
Left clicking on the View Menu and then the Sensor Graphs button opens the
Sensor Graphs Display Window (Figure 42).
Figure 42: Sensor Graphs Window

Page 55
The Sensor Graphs Window may be free-floating or docked as discussed in

Section 2.4 on page 44. As well, when the window is docked “Auto Hide” may be
enabled which is also discussed in the previous section.
The Sensor Graphs Window is configured by clicking on the Graph Settings

icon at the top left of the window (See Figure 42). Once the icon is left-clicked the
Sensor Graphs Settings dialog will appear (Figure 43).
The Sensor Graph may be used to display:

• Altitude
• Cable Out
• Heading Fish
• Heading Ship
• Magnetometer
• Mag Field Strength
• Mag Depth
• Mag Altitude
• Pitch
• Pressure
• Roll
• Water Depth
• Water Temp
Left-click on the drop-down list at the top of the Sensor Graphs Settings dialog
to select the desired sensor.
Figure 43: Sensor Graphs Settings
The colors used by the Sensor Graphs window are user selectable using the three
drop down lists for the Grid, Plot and Background colors. The colors shown in
Figure 42 are those used in Figure 43.

Page 56
Finally the X-axis of the Sensor Graphs window may be manually specified or
auto scaled. Auto Scale takes the maximum and minimums of the displayed data
and scales the X-axis to a best fit.
2.5.1.2 Toolbars
Left clicking on the View Menu and then the Toolbars button opens the
Toolbars list (Figure 44)where status and display windows may be selected as on or
off. Below shows the entire list of windows available.
Figure 44: Available Windows Within Toolbars Command
For a discussion on the functionality of each display click on the function below to
jump to the appropriate section within this Section.
• Waterfall Display
• Towfish Altitude
• System Info
• Survey Line Controls Tool Bar
• Sonar Contact Strip
• Sensor Status
• Scope Display
• Real-time (R/T) Bottom Tracker
• File Explorer
• Output Message Log

Page 57
• Map Toolbar
• Left Right Steering Indicator
• Event Setup
• Disk Monitor
• Basemap Depth Scale
• Classification Legend
2.5.1.3 Waterfall Display
The Waterfall Display is a stand-alone window that presents Real-time or

Playback sonar information in a waterfall display. This window allows the user to see
all sonar channels simultaneously in either Horizontal or Vertical View Modes.
Figure 45 below shows 5 channels (Sidescan HF, Sidescan LF and SBP single
channel) in Playback mode setup in Horizontal View.
Figure 45: Waterfall Window in Playback Mode and Vertical View
The Waterfall Display in Floating Mode is especially useful where two or more
monitors are in use, thus allowing the Main Window to show the Mosaic on one
monitor and the Waterfall Display to display the full resolution sonar imagery in
the other.

Page 58
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
Auto Hide Capable: Yes
Extra functions:
Figure 46: Waterfall (Playback) Control Buttons
Playback Control Buttons

Play the active (open) file
Pause the active file
Stop the active file
Rewind to Start of active file
Rewind 10% of active file
Rewind 1% of active file
Fast Forward 1% of active file
Fast Forward 10% of active file
Settings Button
Settings Button
The Waterfall Settings Dialog is used to control the layout of the Sonar
Channels as well as which channels are displayed.

Page 59
Figure 47: Waterfall Settings Dialog
View
Channels are placed side-by-side in the Horizontal View and Stacked on-top of each
other in the Vertical view
SideScan
Controls viability of Sidescan Pairs of Channels (1&2 and 3&4)
Sub-bottom
Controls viability of SBP Channels 1 and 2
Apply Heave Compensation
• Playback Only: If a Motion Reference Unit (MRU) was installed and its
data recorded then the MRU readings are applied to the raw SBP data in
order to remove heave artefacts.
Capture Contact Button
Capture Contact Button
Left-clicking this button turns the cursor into cross-hair and allows the user to left-
click to create a new contact.
N.B. Double-clicking in the Waterfall window has the same effect as selecting the
Capture Contact button and left-clicking to create a new contact.
Real Time Bottom Tracker Button

Page 60
Real Time Bottom Tracker Button
Left-clicking this button opens the Real Time Bottom Tracker. See Section 2.5.1.10
on page 72 for more information.
Display Info Button
Display Info Button
The Display Info Button is used inside Waterfall Window to display current sensor
and metadata about the file displayed in the window. Specifically, when left-clicked
the Display Info Button will show the following information (Figure 48):
• File Name
• File Size
• No. of Sonar Channel
• No. of Bathy Channels
• Bits per Sample
• Samples per Channel
• Individual Channel Ranges and Center Frequencies (if known)
• First Ping Date and Time
• Recorded By: Software name and version
• Coordinates stored as
• Sonar type
• Notes
The information revealed through the use of the Display Info Button can be
very helpful in determining import settings for sonar files.

Page 61
Figure 48: Sample Information Window from Display Info Button
Right-click Context Pop-up Menus

Waterfall Pop-up
The right-click context sensitive menu dialog is opened by right-clicking the

Waterfall window in the top portion (above the A-scan). Figure 49 Shows the
dialog with all the commands matching those found in the tool bar of the
Waterfall Window.

Page 62
Figure 49: Right-click Context Sensitive Dialog
Waterfall Settings Pop-up
The Waterfall Settings right-click context pop-up menu dialog (Figure 50) is
opened by right-clicking the in the main portion of the Waterfall window (i.e. on the
data). The following functions are opened from this window:
Figure 50: Waterfall Settings Pop-Up Menu
Towfish Altitude Window
• See Section 2.5.1.4 on page 64 for more information
Adjust SSS Gains
• See Section on page for more information
Real-time Bottom Tracker

Page 63
Scope Bar
Event Parameter Setup
Capture Contact
• See Capture Contact Button on page 59 for more information
Edit Palette....
The colors of the individual waterfall displays in the Waterfall Window can be
independently controlled via the Palette Settings Dialog (Figure 51).
The color palettes and settings that are available in this window are the same as
those available in the main Color and Contrast Menu. See Section 2.5.4 on page
88 for more information.
Figure 51: Palette Settings Dialog
Real Time and Playback SBP Feature Creation

SBP real-time an playback dialog that allows surveyors to click on a point in the SBP
waterfall window and have that feature automatically added to the map. This is a

Page 64
handy way to map a pipeline. This feature was not working correctly after migrating
to SW5 but now its available again
Figure 52: Left-Click SBP Window to Create Features
2.5.1.4 Towfish Altitude
The Towfish Altitude Window is a Real-time tool that provides a large text
window for displaying the Real-time towfish altitude (Figure 53) in Project Units.
The altitude window may be re-sized by left-click and dragging any edge or corner of
the window to show large font for easy viewing from a distance.
Figure 53: Altitude Window and Alarm Settings Box

Page 65
Dockable: No
Stackable: No
Auto Hide Capable: No
Extra functions:
By right-clicking in the altitude display window, a towfish height alarm may be
enabled and set to a specific upper and lower thresholds. The towfish will trigger the
alarm by moving above or below the upper or lower thresholds. When this occurs
the current altitude value will flash with inverted red/black colors.
An audible alarm may be enabled by activating the Enable Audible Alarm check-
box. A specific .wav file must be selected to be used as the audible alarm; however, a
sound card and speakers are required.
2.5.1.5 System Information
The System Information Panel is primarily intended for Real-time operations as

it displays textual information on just about every aspect of ship, towfish and sensor
values.
The System Information Panel is divided into two sections:

• Non-configurable Header information (Beige area in Figure 54); and
• Configurable Sensor information (White area in Figure 54);
Figure 54 shows the System Information Panel with the Header information
visible and every possible field enabled in the user-configurable Sensor section.

Page 66
Figure 54: System Information Panel - All Fields Displayed

Page 67
Configuring the System Information Panel
Left-clicking the one of the three control buttons in the section between the Header
and Sensor section:
Opens the System Information Settings Dialog (Figure 55) below where the
user selects which Sensor Information is to be displayed in the configurable section
N.B. The order of the enabled fields may be changed by simply left-clicking and
dragging the specific filed to the desired (vertical) location..
Toggles the non-configurable Header Section on and off.
Not yet implemented
Figure 55: System Information Settings Dialog
2.5.1.6 Survey Line Controls Tool Bar

The Survey Line Controls Tool Bar (Figure 56) is used in Real Time to assist the
user in quickly managing predefined survey lines

Page 68
Figure 56: Survey Line Controls
The functionality of each button is as follows:
Select Previous Survey Line
Select Next Survey Line
Steer Currently Selected Line
Toggle Left-Right Steering Indicator On/Off
Reverse Currently Selected Survey Line
Delete Currently Selected Survey Line
Resize Survey Line Controls Tool Bar
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
Extra functions: Nil
2.5.1.7 Sonar Contact Strip
The Sonar Contact Strip (Figure 57) displays all the Real-time sonar contacts
identified (double-clicked or left-clicked using the Capture Contact button) in the
Waterfall Display.
The order in which the contacts are inserted into the Sonar Contact Strip is
controlled via the Sonar Contact Strip Settings Dialog (Figure 58) as is the
color of the box highlighting the currently active contact.

Page 69
Figure 57: Sonar Contact Strip
Figure 58: Sonar Contact Strip Settings
Right-clicking in the Contact area of the Sonar Contact Strip opens the dialog in
Figure 59 below.

Page 70
Figure 59: Contact Strip Right-click Pop-up Menu
See Section 5.15 on page 407 for complete details on the Contact options.
2.5.1.8 Sensor Status
Figure 60: Sensor Status
The Sensor Status Display reports on the status of all external sensors. Sensors
are listed in the first column, whether or not they are Enabled as well as their
connection information (UDP/Serial) in the second column, the Age of the last
received message (in msec) and the Source of the sensor.
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: Yes
2.5.1.9 Scope Display
The Scope Display provides an oscilloscope-type view of a single channel of data.
The Scope Display provides two charts(Figure 61). The top chart represents the
amplitude data for each ping. The bottom chart represents the histogram of the
amplitudes in each ping.

Page 71
Figure 61: Scope Display
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
Extra functions:
The Auto Scale checkbox automatically adjusts the range of the Y-Axis so that the
signal trace chart will always display the entire pings waveform. When Auto Scale
is unchecked, you may enter your own y-axis scaling values in the edit fields
provided. The Auto Scale function has no effect on the histogram chart.
The Data is BiPolar checkbox controls the interpretation of the amplitude trace
data. When checked, the signal trace chart will interpret 8-bit input values as ranging
from -128 to + 127 and 16-bit input values as ranging from -32768 to +32767.
When unchecked, SonarWiz interprets 8-bit values as ranging from 0-255 and 16-bit
values as ranging from 0-65535.
The Show Raw Data and Show Processed Data checkboxes select the point in
the processing stream at which data is charted. The Show Raw Data displays the
ping as it is recorded before any TVG, Automatic Contrast Control or other signal
processing functions have been applied. Show Processed Data displays the ping
after all processing has been completed.
Display Bottom Tracker Values shows a vertical line in the top graph at the first
return representing the Bottom Tracker altitude value. In Figure 61 the Green line
represents the Bottom Tracker value.

Page 72
2.5.1.10 Real-time (R/T) Bottom Tracker
The R/T Bottom Tracker control (Figure 62)allows the user to select whether or
not and how Bottom Tracking on the Waterfall display is performed. Users may
choose from Telemetered Altitude, to Auto Tracking to Manual Tracking.
Figure 62: Real-time Bottom Tracker
Enable Auto Tracker
• The Enable Auto Tracker check box turns Auto Tracker On and Off
with a left-click subsequently disabling and enabling Manual Tracker
Controls (see below)
Use Telemetered Altitude
• Checking this box will cause the Bottom Tracker to use the altitude
derived from the sonar and is included in the data telegram to SonarWiz.
Using Altitude From File
• When replaying a file that already contains bottom tracking information, this
check box makes the Bottom Tracker use that solution.

Page 73
Trace Detected Bottom
• The selected channel to be used for bottom tracking (see above) will have a
solid line drawn where the altitude is calculated or manually indicated. The
color of the line is selectable as Blue, Green or Red.
Channel Tracking
• The actual channel used for bottom tracking. Normally either channel will
work however there can be times where the return from one channel is
better (more distinct) than the other. Reasons for this include surveying on a
slope or noise in one channel due to hull reflections, fauna or flora.
Auto Tracker Controls

Tracking Algorithm
• Threshold Detect: The tracking algorithm looks to automatically detect

the bottom using the pixel threshold vale as set by the user.
• Homomorphic: Homomorphic processing is an advanced non-linear DSP

processing technique. In the bottom tracker this technique is used as an
edge enhancement algorithm to allow the tracker to more easily discern it
from the surrounding clutter.
Threshold
• Used in the Threshold Detect Algorithm. The SonarWiz Bottom

Tracker characterizes the sonar ping by computing the median amplitude
value over the selected samples. The Threshold Coefficient is used as a
multiplier to the median value and is compared to the incoming sonar
values. If the sonar value exceeds the product of the median and the
Threshold Coefficient, that sample will be a candidate for the tracked
bottom sample.
Blanking
• Used in the Threshold Detect Algorithm. The Blanking parameter is

used to set the point in the acoustic signal at which SonarWiz will begin to
detect the bottom. Use the Blanking parameter to skip beyond the
outgoing pulse. This value is entered in meters. A general range of values for
sidescan blanking is 1 meter to about 4 meters. You may enter a higher
value for blanking if the towfish height is sufficiently large.
Duration
• Used in the Threshold Detect Algorithm. The Duration parameter

specifies the number of consecutive samples that must exceed the threshold
computation above. Typical values for duration are 3-12.
Offset Tracker Solution

Page 74
• If a systematic offset is required to be added to / subtracted from the

Automatic Tracking Solution it may entered here.
Enable Tracker Smoothing
Figure 63: Bottom Tracker Smoothing
• Bottom Tracking can be very noisy from ping to ping and present an
almost incoherent bottom trace. This function smooths out the bottom
trace over several successive pings in order to make the trace more
coherent. An example of using the smoothing function is shown in Figure
263.
Display Corrected Waterfall
• The tracked solution will enable slant range corrections to be applied in real-
time joining the first returns of the port and starboard sides (Figure 64).

Page 75
Figure 64: Slant Range Corrected Waterfall Display
Manual Tracker Controls

Manual Fish Height
A set value of the towfish altitude may be entered in this box.
Reset w/Mouse Shift-Click
Holding the Shift Key while left-clicking the waterfall at the range where the user
wishes to mark the first bottom return will result in an altitude value being set. If
Trace Detected Bottom is set then the trace line will appear on the selected
channel. The value will remain constant until another Shift Left-click combination is
pressed.
2.5.1.11 File Explorer

SonarWiz offers the user three File Management windows where files may be
quickly selected for right-click functions or, enabled/disabled (Figure 65). These
three windows are:
• Project MAG Files
• Project SBP Files
• Project SSS Files

Page 76
Figure 65: File Explorer
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: Yes
Extra functions:
Right-click Pop-Up Context Menus:
Any file within each window may be selected and right-clicked to bring up a
context sensitive menu. Refer to the appropriate sections (Sidescan, Sub-
bottom or Magnetometer) for discussions on the right-click functions
within the pop-up menus.
File SubGroups
A File SubGroup is a collection of files grouped together under a main File
heading. SubGroups are used in order to control the display files sharing
similar qualities such as locations (i.e. Western Files) Time (i.e. Day 1 or March
31) or even Survey Platform (i.e. HMCS BRANDON)
In Figure 65 above the Magnetometer Files Section has a SubGroup
called “Western Lines”. File SubGroups may be created within any of the file
types by right-clicking on the (green) File-type header i.e. Sidescan Files.
Once the New SubGroup selection appears (Figure 66) Left-click to select
and enter the name of the desired SubGroup (Figure 67). Once the
SubGroup has been created lines may be left-clicked and dragged onto the
SubGroup header.
A SubGroup may be removed right-clicking on the SubGroup name and
selecting Delete SubGroup. Note that any files contained within the
SubGroup will be placed back under the main heading of that file section.

Page 77
Figure 66: File Explorer Sub-Group
Figure 67: Create New SubGroup
2.5.1.12 Output Message Log
The Output Message Log (Figure 68) window displays ongoing status
information generated by SonarWiz as it runs. It is especially useful for
troubleshooting such as when a sonar file is not importing correctly.
Figure 68: Output Message Log

Page 78
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: Yes
Extra functions: Tab Navigation Arrows: Used for accessing stacked windows left
or right of the current window (Figure 68).
2.5.1.13 Map Toolbar
The Map Controls Toolbar (Figure 69) performs simple Mapping control
functions in the Map window.
Figure 69: Map Controls
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
Copy (Ctrl+C): Puts a copy of the Map Window into the Windows Clipboard.
Useful for grabbing screen shots of interesting objects and pasting them to
documents or e-mails
Pan (Ctrl+A or Middle Mouse Button): When the display is zoomed in, the
mouse cursor may be used as a Pan tool. To Pan, drag the image using the left
mouse button in the direction you wish to move the view area. Release the left
mouse button and the display will be updated, centered at the new location.
Holding the Middle mouse button (wheel) and dragging also Pans the Map
Window.
Zoom Window (Shift+Z) : Left-Click and hold to drag a box over a specific
area in the Map Window to be zoomed.
Zoom In 10% (PgDn): Left-Click the toolbar button to zoom Map Window in
by 10%of current resolution.
Zoom Out 10% (PgUp): Left-Click the toolbar button to zoom Map Window
out by 10% of current resolution.
Fit To View Sonar( Ctrl+F): Left-Click to the toolbar button have Map
Window fit all visible sonar files within the Map Window
Fit To View All (Shift+Ctrl+F): Left-Click to the toolbar button have Map
Window fit all visible sonar and Map files within the Map Window
Swipe (Ctrl+ Shift+W): The swipe tool allows one to interactively peel back the
sonar data and reveal the underlying data by dragging the mouse in the map

Page 79
window.
With No sonar data selected:

This feature is useful in change detection applications where historical mosaics
may be displayed as a base map with the current data from a new survey being
drawn on top. The swipe feature makes it easy to compare features from the old
survey with the new survey.
With one or many sonar data files selected:

This feature is useful in comparing features in overlapping or adjacent lines. The
swipe feature makes it easy to compare features within the current survey.
Measure (Ctrl+M): Measures distance (in Project Units and Nautical Miles) and
true bearing between two points. Left-Click at first point and drag cursor to
second point. Range and bearing line will stay fixed when left mouse button is
released
Center on Current Position (Toggle Switch) (Ctrl+Home): When depressed,
the Real-Time Mosaic will remain centered on the vessel. The Mosaic will not
remain at a “dragged” position when this button is activated
Map Info Button: When depressed, hovering the cursor over a sonar file in the
Map Window results in information about the sonar file at that particular point
will be displayed such as File / Ping / Time / Heading / Course / Speed / Cable
Out/ Towfish height / Nearest Event
Refresh (Ctrl+R): Redraws Map Window at current resolution
Abort Redraw (Ctrl+Q): Used to stop the redraw (refresh) in the Map
Window due to the user wishing to make an immediate change to the display
parameters prior to the completion of the current redraw.
Capture Contact: Allows the user to left-click on the Map Window where a
contact is located. This in turns opens the Digitizer View such that the contact
may be created. See Section 5.15.4 on page 410 for more information on contact
capturing.,
Add Survey Line with Mouse: Allows the user to add a Survey line via left-click
and drag. See 4.3.2 on page 192.
Insert Polyline of Polygon Feature: Allows the user to add a polyline or

polygon feature in the Map Window. See Section 5.16.2 on page 440.
Resize Toolbar :Toggles between Large and small toolbar icon sizes. The larger
sized icons are twice that of the small icons.

Page 80
2.5.1.14 Left Right Steering Indicator
Figure 70: Left Right Steering Indicator

The Left Right Steering Indicator is a graphical tool that indicates the vessel
distance traveled ALONG the active survey line, the active survey LINE name, and
the distance TO END of the active line. The value of the teal vertical hash marks
and the outer extents adjust automatically in order to keep the red vertical hash mark
with the graphic itself. All values displayed are in Project units.
The Left Right Steering Indicator right-click pop-up menu (Figure 71) allows
user to select the position source of the line tracker computation. The two current
selections are ship position and sidescan position.
Figure 71: LR Steering Indicator Pop-Up Menu
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
2.5.1.15 Event Setup
The Event Setup Window (Figure 72) is used to specify whether Events are either
Navigation System and Manually generated or Time Generated.

Page 81
Figure 72: Eventing Setup Window
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: No
Extra functions:
The Eventing Setup dialog is used to determine how events are generated and
what is to be annotated (if desired).
See Section 4.7.4 on page 233 for a full description of Eventing Setup.
2.5.1.16 Disk Monitor
The Disk Monitor (Figure 73)is a real-time tool that displays:

• Currently recording file length in hours:minutes:seconds;
• Currently recording file size in MB; and
• A disk space remaining indicator
Dockable: Yes
Stackable: Yes
Figure 73: Disk Monitor

Page 82
2.5.1.17 Basemap Depth Scale

All Basemaps contain three attributes with the first two being Latitude, Longitude
(or X and Y). For “flat” images such as BSB charts the third attribute is simply the
color of the pixel a each particular position. Other Basemaps can contain a third
attribute that can be color-coded to interpret their information such as Digital
Terrain Maps (DTM) or Magnetometer Total Field Grids.
When a Basemap is loaded with a color-coded third attribute the actual color-code
can be displayed in the Map Window.
To display the Basemap Depth Scale (Figure 74) left-click on the Toolbars
button under the Post-processing tab and select Basemap Depth Scale.
Right-click Context Pop-up Menu
Hide
• Selecting this option closes the Basemap Depth Scale

• The Basemap Depth Scale can also be hidden by re-selecting Basemap
Depth Scale under the Toolbars button (under the Post-processing
tab).
Change Color Table
• Not yet Implemented

Basemap
• If more than one Basemap is loaded in the Map Manager then the
Basemap Depth Scale must be linked to the desired Basemap. Left-click
on the Basemap choice under the right-click context pop-up menu and
select the desired Basemap.

Page 83
Figure 74: Basemap Depth Scale with Right-click Pop-up Menu
2.5.1.18 Classification Legend

For Basemaps created in the Sediment Classification tool (See Section 5.20 on
page 492) and loaded in the Map Manager their color-codes may be displayed in
the Map Window.
To display the Classification Legend (Figure 75) left-click on the Toolbars
button under the Post-processing tab and select Classification Legend.
Right-click Context Pop-up Menu
Hide
• Selecting this option closes the Classification Legend

• The Classification Legend can also be hidden by re-selecting
Classification Legend under the Toolbars button (under the Post-
processing tab).
Change Color Table
• Not yet Implemented

Manage Classes

Page 84
• Open the Manages Classes Menu from the Sediment Classification

Tool. See Section 5.20 on Page 492 for more information.
Basemap
• If more than one Basemap is loaded in the Map Manager then the
Classification Legend must be linked to the desired Basemap. Left-click
on the Basemap choice under the right-click context pop-up menu and
select the desired Basemap.
Figure 75: Classification Legend with Right-Click Pop-Up Menu

Page 85
2.5.2 Layout Manager
Frequently Single Users have preferred window layouts for various functions such as
Real-time collection and post processing. Further multiple users ion the same PC
will likely have proffered layouts for the same functions. The Layout Manager
(Figure 76) allows users to save their preferred window layouts and recall them
whenever they want.
Figure 76: Layout Manager
The Layout Manager is divided in two halves. The left-hand side lists all Layouts
that have been saved with the right-hand side showing a thumbnail image of the
currently selected layout.
Save New Layout
• The current window layout (created prior to left-clicking the Layout

Manager icon) will be saved. The user designates the layout name in the
pop-up window.
Load Layout
• Loads the currently (left-click) selected layout
Delete Layout
• Deleted the currently (left-click) selected layout
Confirm Delete
• SonarWiz will prompt the user to confirm deleting a layout after Delete
Layout has been clicked.

Page 86
2.5.3 Map Display
Figure 77: Map Display Command Group
The Map Display Command Group (Figure 77) controls various aspects of the
Map Window. Left-click on one of the commands listed below to jump to the
appropriate section:
• Overlap Mode
• Drawing Mode
• White Background
• Lat/Lon Grid
• X/Y Grid
• Map Scale
Overlap Mode
Left-clicking the Overlap Mode drop-down box within the Map Display Group
or right-clicking within the Map Window itself and selecting Overlap Mode
offers three choices for displaying overlapping sonar swaths.
• Cover Up: Sonar swaths are drawn in the order that the files are listed in
the Sonar File Manager dialog. Thus, the last file drawn will be displayed
on top of the other files and will obscure them in areas where there is
overlap. The file order may be changed by using the Move Up and Move
down buttons in the Sonar File Manager dialog. The order that a
particular sonar swath is drawn may also be controlled by right-clicking on a
selected sonar swath to invoke it's context menu, and then selecting the
Order item. This provides several options for moving the currently selected
sonar file forward or backward in the drawing order. (Note: to select a sonar
swath, left-click it).
• Average: the values of all pixels at the same point are averaged to obtain
the displayed pixel.
• Shine Through: The sonar sample the highest amplitude value is used to
occupy the pixel space in areas where overlapping data is competing for the
same pixel location.
For more information on Overlap Made including examples see Transparency
in Section 302 on page 302.

Page 87
Figure 78: Overlap Mode
Drawing Mode
SonarWiz provides three modes of screen resolution that can be used for various
purposes. The modes may be selected from the main menu by left-clicking the Drawing
Mode drop-down box within the Map Display Group.
• Draft (default): provides a compromise between rapid refresh rate and

mosaic resolution.
• High-resolution: provides the best screen resolution at the expense of

drawing speed.
• Coverage: displays a solid color of the coverage of each sonar file without
drawing the actual data behind it
• Navigation Plot: displays lines representing the vessel positions during
the recording process.
N.B. No matter what mode is selected for viewing, SonarWiz ALWAYS selects the
High-resolution mode when generating an output file. The original mode will be
restored when the output process has been completed.
White Background

Page 88
The background color of the Map Window is black by default but may be changed
to white by left-clicking the White Background check-box.
Lat/Lon Grid
To display a Latitude versus Longitude grid on the map, left-click the Lat/Lon
Grid check-box within the Map Display Group or press the hot keys Alt+G.
X/Y Grid
To display an X versus Y grid a on the map, left-click the X/Y Grid check-box
within the Map Display Group or press the hot keys Ctrl+G. .
Map Scale
To display a map scale, click the Map Scale icon on the Map menu, or use the hot
key (Ctrl+Shift+M) and a scale (Figure 79) will be displayed in the lower left corner
of the Map Window.
Figure 79: Map Scale
2.5.4 Color and Contrast

The Color and Contrast Command Group (Figure 80) within the View Menu
is used to control the look of the Sonar Data.
The Color and Contrast dialog allows manipulation of the color palette and
contrast levels for the sonar display with eight distinct color palettes being provided.
The palettes can be adjusted using the five slider bars within the Color and
Contrast Command Group.
Figure 80: Color and Contrast Command Group
Invert Palette
• Inverts bright and dark colors in the current palette i.e. shadows that are
black will become white after this function is used and vice versa
Palette Compress
• The Palette Compress slider compresses the 255 available colors of the
palette into a narrower band such that lower sonar amplitudes map to
higher palette colors.
Contrast

Page 89
• Contrast is difference in brightness between the light and dark areas of an

image. Pushing the Contrast slider towards right increases contrast
whereas towards the left decreases contrast.
Brightness
• Brightness is the black level of an image. Pushing the Brightness slider

towards right increases brightness whereas towards the left decreases
brightness.
Saturation
• The intensity of a specific color. Pushing the Saturation slider towards

right increases saturation (or the purity of the color) whereas towards the
left decreases saturation.
Hue
• From Answers.com: The property of colors by which they can be perceived

as ranging from red through yellow, green, and blue, as determined by the
dominant wavelength of the light. Sliding the Hue control from left to right
takes the sonar file hue through the spectrum of colors (Figure 81).
Figure 81: Hue Range
For a complete discussion on Hue, Saturation and Brightness see:

http://www.answers.com/topic/hsl-and-hsv
Palette
• SonarWiz offers 12 predefined color palettes which can be selected an then

customized though the Contrast, Brightness, Saturation and Hue
sliders.
Opacity
• The transparency of the Entire Sonar File Layer . Pushing the Opacity
slider towards right increases opacity (decreasing transparency) whereas
towards the left decreases opacity and increases transparency of the Sonar
File Layer.
Default Color Settings
• The current custom color may be return to its default setting by left-clicking
the Default Color Settings button (Figure 82) at the bottom right side of
the Color and Contrast Command Group.

Page 90
Figure 82: Reset to Default Color Palette
2.5.5 Control
The Control Command Group has the same buttons as the Map Controls
Toolbar with the sole exception that it cannot be customized. See Map Toolbar
on page 78.
2.5.6 Right-Clicking in SonarWiz

SonarWiz assists the user in being more efficient by providing pop-up context
sensitive menus on a right-click. The pop-up context menu activated by this right-
click is dependent upon whatever object is actively selected by a left-click or by the
changes cursor icon when hovering. In this section pop-up context menus in the
Map Window are identified and links to the specific sections describing the tools in
detail are provided.
Single Sonar Files
This pop up context menu is activated by first left-clicking the sonar file that is
desired as active and then right clicking (Figure 83). See Section 5.6 on page 282 for
a details on Sonar File Management.

Page 91
Figure 83: Sonar File Pop-up Context menu
Multiple Sonar Files

Selecting more than one data file via Ctrl+Left-Click or Shift+Left-click and
subsequently right-clicking opens the Multiple Files pop-up menu (Figure 84)

Page 92
Figure 84: Multiple Files Pop-up Menu
The Multiple Files pop-up menu contains quick access to Sonar File Manager
functions.
Apply AGC
• Applies AGC with current settings. See 5.6.5.3 on page 299.

Apply BAC
• Applies BAC with current settings. See 5.6.5.4 on page 299.

Hide
• Disables (Hides) selected files. See 5.6.5.9 on page 299.

Isolate
• Disables (Hides) all non-selected files thus isolating the selected files. See
5.6.5.10 on page 299.
Aggregate
• Joins the selected files together as one CSF file. See 5.6.4.5 on page 292.
Properties
• Displays file properties. See 5.6.5.19 on page 308.

Delete
• Deletes the Selected files. See 5.6.5.23 on page 312.

Page 93
Survey Lines
This pop up context menu is activated by first left-clicking the survey line that is
desired as active and then right clicking (Figure 85). See Section 4.3 on page 190.
Figure 85: Survey Line Pop-up Context Menu
Basemaps
This pop-up context menu is activated by right clicking on any portion of the
Basemap not covered by sonar files, target or features (Figure 86). See Section 3 on
page 137.
Figure 86: Basemap Context Pop-Up Menu

Page 94
Contacts
This pop up context menu is activated by first moving the cursor over the contact
(target) that is desired as active. When the cursor is in proximity of the contact it will
change from standard pointer icon tot he icon shown below in Figure 87. Once this
occurs right clicking will activate the Contact context pop up menu(Figure 88). See
Section 5.15.7 on page 414 for details on Contact Editing. See in Section 4.3.5 on
page 202 for more information on the Add Line to Contact option.
Figure 87: Contact Hover Cursor
Figure 88: Contact Context Pop Up Menu

Page 95
Figure 89: Feature Context Pop Up
Features
This pop up context menu is activated by first left-clicking the feature that is desired
as active and then right clicking. See Section 5.16.2 on page 440.
SonarWiz Shortcut Keys
SonarWiz employs a set of default hot-keys for quickly getting to certain features of
the program without having to use the mouse to traverse the menu structure. Those
default keys and their functions are listed in the table below.
Shortcut keys may be customized which is described in the Customize Quick
Access Toolbar Section on page 39.
Key Function
F1 Launch the SonarWiz User Guide PDF file in Adobe

Reader (if installed).
F2 Configure Sonar Layback Configuration
F4 Stop data recording if active.
F7 Generate Event Now
F8 Digitized Feature Manager
Shift+F8 Contact Manager

Page 96
F9 Capture Screen Image
F10 Configure Project Settings
Ctrl+F10 Open existing mosaic project.
F11 Open Sonar File Manager
F12 Survey Line Manager
Ctrl+3 Export Files to 3D Viewer
Ctrl+A Pan map view
Ctrl+Shift+A Add Line to Target
Ctrl+B Bottom Track
Ctrl+Shift+B Open Map Manager
Ctrl+D Digitizing View
Ctrl+C Copy current view to clipboard
Ctrl+F Fit View to Sonar
Ctrl+Shift+F Fit all basemaps, sonar files and survey lines to window.
Ctrl+G Overlay X/Y grid on sonar mosaic
Alt+G Overlay geodetic (lat/lon) grid on mosaic
Ctrl+I Import Sidescan Files
Ctrl+Shift+I Import Sub-bottom Files
Ctrl+Alt+I Import Magnetometer Files
Alt+L Toggle the Left/Right Steering Indicator
Ctrl+Shift+M Toggle the map scale bar
Ctrl+M Enter the on screen measurement mode.
Ctrl+N New Mosaic Project
Shift+N Toggle Survey Line Status
Ctrl+O Open existing Mosaic Project.
Alt+O Vessel Outline Configuration
Shift+P Select Previous Survey Line
Ctrl+Shift+P Batch Printing

Page 97
Ctrl+Q Abort a redrawing process
Ctrl+R Refresh or redraw map
Alt+R Reverse Current Survey Line
Ctrl+V Insert
Ctrl+Shift+W Toggle Swipe Mode
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+Z Undo
Shift+Z Invoke Zoom Rectangle
Ctrl+Home Auto-Ship Centering (Real-time Only)
Ctrl+Insert Copy current view to clipboard
PgDn Zoom In map view by 10%
PgUp Zoom Out map view by 10%
Esc Exit any all editing modes.
2.6 Getting Started with SonarWiz

Getting started with SonarWiz, whether collecting in Real-time or Postprocessing, begins
with:
1. Creating a New Project or Opening an existing Project (Section 2.7 on page 97)
2. SonarWiz Program Preferences – Section 2.8 on page 98; and
3. SonarWiz Projects– Section 2.9 on page 123
This Section will guide the user in completing the steps above such that the user will be
ready to record data in Real-time or postprocess previously collected data. Once the steps
above are completed the reader may then proceed to appropriate Section depending on
his/her specific task.
2.7 Quick Access Toolbar Functions

The Quick Access Toolbar (main) functions are
New: Opens the Create New Project Dialog. See 2.9.2 on page 128 for more
information on Creating a New Project.

Page 98
Open (Ctrl+O): Opens the Open Existing Project Dialog. See Section 2.9.4 on page 134
for more information.
Save Project: Saves project settings immediately.

N.B. SonarWiz will automatically saves the project on exit.
Project Settings (F10): Opens the Configure an existing Project Dialog. See
Section 2.9.5 on page 135 for more information.
Options:Opens the Program Preferences Dialog. See Program Preferences below.
Exit: Causes the program to save the current project and settings prior to shutting down.
2.8 Program Preferences
The Program Preferences Dialog (Figure 90) is activated by using the Options button
within the Quick Action Toolbar. This dialog contains eight tabs, each controlling a
specific portion of the program and are discussed below.

Page 99
2.8.1 General Settings
Figure 90: Program Options - General Settings
Playback
• Scans per frame: The number of pings that are drawn to the display
during one scroll operation. Larger numbers will produce faster scrolling
speeds but jerkier appearance.
• Playback Speed: A slider bar that controls a timer that affects the rate at
which pings are read and displayed. Range is 50 to 100 ms.
• Playback file continuously: At the end of the file selected for playback,
it will start over at the beginning when checked.

Page 100
Scale Lines
• Enable Scale Lines: Turn scale reference lines in waterfall display on
when checked
• Auto Interval: SonarWiz will automatically pick the optimum number of
scale lines to draw on each channel based on the Scale Line Units and the
sonar range
• Specify Interval: User specified scale line interval based on the Scale Line
Units below
• Scale Line color: User selectable according to background palette
• Scale Line Units: Scale lines interval nay be based on meters, Feet, US
Feet and Milliseconds
Time Reference
• Select whether UTC or Local time is to be used as well as whether Julian
day is to be used rather than the date. The System Info window (See
System Info on page 65 for more information) displays the time and date.
Draw File Names on Map
• Draws the sonar file name at the end of each line in the Map View.
Draw Event Numbers on Map
Draws any/all Event Numbers for each sonar file along each line in its
correct position in the Map View.
SSS Waterfall Images
• When Bottom Tracking, Target Detecting or creating Digitized
Features SonarWiz shows a sidescan waterfall with Ping 0 at the top of the
waterfall by default. Selecting this checkbox flips the image such that Ping 0
is at the bottom of the waterfall image.
Sonar Highlight Color
▪ This is the color of the outline of the polygon used to highlight (box-in) the
currently selected sonar file.

Page 101
2.8.2 File Options
Figure 91: Program Options - File Options
Log Data Files to Path

The path where logged data files will be stored. By default, the location will be
populated with the XTF directory under the current protect directory.
Log redundantly to
• This option allows the user to select a second redundant device (such as a
USB drive or Network drive) where copies of the raw data may be written

Page 102
simultaneously. Taking advantage of this option in Real-time can save a lot

of time at the end of the survey if data must be backed-up and transferred
to another device for in-office processing or archiving.
Default Project Path
• Specify where SonarWiz should initially “suggest” looking for existing

projects to open and where new projects will be created.
File Name Settings
• SonarWiz gives the user full control over the names of the XTF files
recorded to disk.
Root Name
• The name designated by the user is added to the front of the file name. It is
good practice to use a project name or area name for the Root Name as
identifying these files long after the survey is finished in a large database of
numbered files will make the task easier.
• Three choices are given to the user for the core and unique identifying file
names. Examples are given below of the various names created with the
choices available.
Option Result
Root Name Line
Example: Current Data and time 28 February 2007 at Noon UTC (NOT local)
Sequence Number Start 1 Increment Line-1.XTF
1 No Leading Zeros Line-2.XTF...
Sequence Number Start 5 Increment Line-0005.XTF
3 with Leading Zeros Line-0008.XTF...
Date and Time Line-20070228_120001 (Time @ start
record: 12:00:01)
Line-20070228_120538 (Time @ start
record: 12:05:38)
Time Only Line-120001 (Time @ start record: 12:00:01)
Line-120538 (Time @ start record: 12:05:38)
Table 2: File Name Permutations
Auto generate new file after xx MB:

• For longer lines or for sonars with high data rates this option should be
chosen to limit the file sizes to manageable blocks.
Disk Space Alarm
• The pop up window in below will appear in the middle of the screen and
the PC speaker will sound warning the user that Disk Space is lower than
the tolerance level set in this option.
• To set the value of the Disk Space Alarm open the File Options section
of the program Options window, enter the value (in MB) in the appropriate

Page 103
window and check the Disk Space Alarm box. See Section 2.8.2 on page
101.
Figure 92: Disk Space Alarm
Set File Type Specific Options

• See Section 5.3.2 on page 240 for sidescan files and Section 5.4.2 on page
265 for Sub-bottom files.

Page 104
2.8.3 SBP Options
Figure 93: SBP Options Dialog
Auto Scroll Window When Digitizing
• Causes the Digitizing Window to auto scroll ahead by 10% once the
cursor click is inside 10% of the edge of the window.
Draw SBP Reflectors at top of Profile in Map View
• When this option is checked, all SBP reflectors will be displayed at the top
of the rotated profile image in the Map Window. If this option in
unchecked, the reflectors will be shown in their relative offset position from
the top of the profile.

Page 105
Display Polarity
• Allows the SBP data to be re-built within the program after changing the
polarity settings, without the need to re-import the data.
Horizontal Profile Image Resolution
• Decimate: Individual pings are skipped according t the number specified
buy the user (1 = skip every alternate ping, 2 = skip 2 pings between
updates, etc)
• Replicate: Individual pings are repeated the number times specified by the
user in the available value box. This function gives the resultant image a
stretched appearance.
Replicate is VERY useful when looking for subsurface targets such as pipes
Vertical Profile Image Resolution

• Width / Resolution of SBP Waterfall Display is selectable
Topographic Corrections
• This feature is primarily used for AUV applications where the AUV is
maintaining a constant height above the seafloor and Topographic
Corrections displays the actual slope of the bottom with respect to the
water surface.
• Topographic Corrections produces an SBP profile image (in post-
processing) that takes into account the depth of the SBP sensor if the SBP
data contains a delay value in the lag A fields of a SEG-Y file. If
Topographic Corrections is not applied to the AUV data, the profile will
appear as a flat profile as if the depth were constant.
• N.B. Currently, this feature is only implemented in the imported SEGY
data where the sensor depth has been stored in milliseconds in the lag A
(bytes 105-106) trace header field. The current implementation reads the
millisecond value of sensor depth from the lag A field and the microsecond
offset from bytes 181-182. Future iterations will provide a user specification
for where to extract these data
Topo Correction Setup
The Topo Corrections Setup window (Figure 94) allows the user to:
1. Turn Topo Corrections On or Off;
2. Select the amount of data (in milliseconds) to always display; and

Page 106
Figure 94: Topo Corrections Setup
3. A window size control which corresponds to the height of the window or

width of the paper.
2.8.4 Contact Options
Figure 95: Program Options - Contact Options
IMAGES

Page 107
Store Contact Images as
• This option determines the image format of each contact as it is stored in

the Project directory under the “Targets” sub-directory. Users that want to
manipulate the contact images on their own outside of SonarWiz may
choose from the five formats available according to user preference. A good
explanation of each format may be found at:
http://www.dansdata.com/graphics.htm
• N.B. For web reports all images are produced in JPEG format regardless of
this setting.
DISPLAY
Contact Display Defaults
• Color: Choose a default color of the symbol from those available

• Symbol: Choose a default symbol for a contact from those available
• Draw Labels: Turn on/off target labels in the Map Window
• Draw Labels Transparently: Turn on/off text label backgrounds
NAMES
Contact Naming
• Five choices are possible for naming contacts; all are automatic with the
exception of “Prompt at Capture Time”.

Page 108
Option Result
Default with leading zeros Contact0001, Contact0002,

Contact0003, etc
Default without leading zeros Contact1, Contact2, Contact3, etc
User specified Root Name, Starting With leading zeros:

number and increment with or Ship0005, Ship0010, Ship
without leading zeros 0015, etc
e.g. Root Name = “Ship” Without leading zeros:

Ship0005, Ship0010, Ship
Starting Number = “5”
0015, etc
Increment = “10”
Prompt at capture time User will be prompted to enter a name
each time a contact is created
NOAA Format A Date / Time / Location stamp
according to the format:
ddd-HHMMSSs where:
ddd = Julian Day number
HHMMSS = UTC in 24hr format
s = “P” or “S” for Port or Starboard
Swath where the contact was located
Table 3: Contact Naming Options
External Applications
Enable
• Turns on program output of contacts to External Applications

Datagram Type
• The data may be output in one of two formats in NMEA TLL (see below)
or COMEX Subsea.
• NMEA TLL Format: The TLL string is as below with the individual fields
identified in Table 3
$GPTLL,15,4825.6778,N,12326.3652,W,Contact0000,234522,T,R1*A

Page 109
No. Field Sample

1 String Identifier for TLL $GPTLL
2 Contact Sequence Number 15
3 Latitude 44o 25.6778'
4 Hemisphere N
5 Longitude 123o 26.3652'
6 Hemisphere W
7 SonarWiz Contact Name Contact0000
8 Time of creation of contact 23:54:22
9 unknown T
10 Checksum R1*A
Table 4: NMEA TLL Format
• COMEX Subsea Format: The format of the output string is below with
the individual fields identified in Table 4:
“CD,009,10 Mar 2007,23:14:51,-73.335132, 44.233397, 108.10, 19.4,2.0,100,
Main, D:\LakeChamplain\XTF\shipwreck-pass-50m-d.xtf,1600”

Page 110
No. Field Sample

1 String Identifier for Contact CD
Data
2 Contact Sequence Number 009
3 Date 10 Mar 2007
4 Time 23:14:51
5 Longitude -73.335132
6 Latitude 44.233397
7 Heading 108.10
8 Altitude 19.4
9 Depth 2.0
10 Sonar Range 100
11 Disk Volume Name Main
12 File Name with full path D:\Lake Champlain\XTF\shipwreck-
pass-50m-d.xtf
13 Ping Number at contact click 1600
location
Table 5: Contact Output String
Output Device Configuration
• The user may configure either a serial or UDP port to output a data string
with the contact information to a device that can use this string to plot the
contact.
LISTS
Edit (Contact) Pick Lists
• Use these fields to automatically open an attribute list file for editing.
• The Contact Editor dialog allows you to annotate a contact with various
attributes including two classifications and an area location. These can be
typed into their respective fields on the dialog, or they can be selected from
pre-defined lists. The lists are stored in the following text files which are all
located in the project folder:
◦ Primary contact classification: ContactAttributes.txt
◦ Secondary contact Classification: ContactAttributes2.txt
◦ Location Area: ContactLocationAreas.txt
• To extend or modify these lists, the files can be edited manually using any
text editor. Alternatively, you may automatically open one of these files in
Notepad by selecting the file from the drop-down list under Current
Project and pressing the Edit button. Note that changes made to the
current project files lists will not be visible in other projects.

Page 111
• The contact attribute and Location Area list files in the current project are
copied from master files in the SonarWiz5 application folder (usually
C:Program Files\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWiz5\) when the project is
first created. You may edit these master files by selecting the file from the
drop-down list under Global Defaults and pressing the Edit button.
• N.B. Changes made under Global Defaults will be reflected in the lists
for all projects created in the future, but not in the lists for projects that
already exist.
LEASE BLOCKS
Automatically Look Up Lease Block
• The contact capture tool can be configured to automatically search any of

the map overlay layers for the lease block containing the contact being
digitized.
• To configure the automatic look up of the lease block, do the following:
1. Add the lease block map file to the project using the "Add
Overlay" button in the Map Manager dialog.
2. On the Contact Options dialog, check the box labeled "Extract

Lease Block Name from Map Overlay "
3. Select the map overlay layer from the drop down list.
4. Select the attribute from the map overlay layer that contains the
name of the lease block.
• When a contact is captured, SonarWiz will use the contact click location to
look up the lease block in which the new contact is located. The name of
the contact's lease block will be automatically set in the contact file.
Miscellaneous Options
Use Processed Data For Contacts (unchecked uses raw)
• Contacts may now be captured using fully processed or raw sonar

depending on the state of this check-box
• Using Processed Data will do the following:
◦ Remove the water column from the image based on applied Bottom
Track; and
◦ Apply all user applied gains
◦ Figures 96 and 97 below show Processed Data image vs a Raw
Data image respectively.

Page 112
Figure 96: Contact Image Using Processed Data Figure 97: Contact Image Using Raw Data
Warn before deleting contacts from project
• User is given a warning pop-up prior to the program following through on

deleting a contact when this box is checked.
Open Contact Editor when Contact is Digitized
• Opens the contact editor immediately after capturing a contact.

Retain Link to source CSFs on import or move
• Generally most contacts have an associated CSF file that can be linked to
the contact properties; however, a contact can still be imported even if its
original CSF file cannot be found.
• Populating this check box retains the link (reference) to the source CSF file
when a contact is imported or moved. If this check box is not populated
SonarWiz will ignore the source CSF file and search in the current
(destination) project for the CSF file. If the corresponding source file is not
found a warning will be issued via the summary log but the contact will still
be imported.
2.8.5 Digitized Feature Options

Page 113
Figure 98: Program Options - Digitized Feature Options
Feature Naming
• The user is given three choices for Feature Naming when a new feature is
created:

Page 114
Option Result
Auto generate – default The “Feature Name” field will be
format automatically filled with the next
name in the sequence.
(e.g. Feature0001
Feature0002
Feature0003, etc).
You may manually edit the auto
generated name. In this case it
will be used to name the feature,
but will not be added to the predefined
feature name list.
Auto Generate - User specified The “Feature Name” field will be

Format automatically filled with the next
name in the sequence.
User specified Root Name, Starting (e.g. Formation_0003
number and increment Formation_0006
Formation_0009, etc).
e.g. Root Name = “Formation” You may manually edit the auto
Starting Number = “3” generated name. In this case it will
be used to name the feature, but will
Increment = “6” not be added to the pre-defined
feature name list.
Pull-down List based on The “Feature Name” field will be filled with
“FeatureNames.txt” in Project folder the last name that was
used (i.e selected from the predefined
list or manually entered).
● You may use this name, OR

● Select a name from the drop-down
list, OR
● manually type in a new name
If you type in a new name, it will

be added to the list.
The list of feature names stored

in the file “FeatureNames.txt” in
the project folder.
A list of feature names stored in the file

“FeatureNames.txt” in the project folder.
This file may be edited manually, or using the
method described below.
Table 6: Feature Naming Options
• When a feature is edited, either by selecting it on the mosaic or waterfall, or

by selecting it in the Feature Manager dialog, the Create/Edit feature
dialog will be displayed. This allows for the editing of feature name,
description, and other display attributes.

Page 115
• The current name will be displayed in the “Feature Name” field

regardless of the naming mode set in Preferences. From there on, the
behavior depends on the current naming mode:
• Auto-Generated Name (Modes 1 & 2): No list of pre-defined
names will be displayed. You may edit the current name manually
and it will be applied to the feature. However, it will not be added
to the list of pre-defined names.
• Pull-down List (Mode 3): When the feature naming mode in the
Digitized Feature Options dialog is set to “Pull-down List...”
(Mode 3 above), the last entered or selected feature name will
always be displayed when digitizing a new feature. This eliminates
the need to re-select the feature name from the drop-down list.
• Notes:
◦ “Last entered or selected feature name” as used in the
preceding paragraph does not refer to an auto-
generated name. It only refers to a feature name that was
picked from the Pull-down list, or typed in manually.
◦ Display of the last used feature name does not apply if
either of the auto-generate modes have been selected.
This is because the auto-generated names change each
time a new feature is created based on a sequence number..
Feature Description
• When editing a Feature, the current feature description will be displayed in
the “Description” field. With this check-box checked you may manually
edit it, or select from the pre-defined list. If the name is manually changed,
it will be added to the pre-defined list
Automatic Display of Last Used Description
• To eliminate the need to re-select a description when repetitively digitizing
features, the last used description is always displayed in the Feature
Description field when creating a new feature. This is the case regardless
of which mode (as described above) is currently selected. To change the
description simply select from the list, or manually enter a new description
(if permitted).
• Note: “Last Used Description” means the description that was last applied
when creating a new feature or editing an existing feature.
Edit (Feature Name and Description) Pick Lists
• Use these fields to automatically open a feature name or description list file
for editing.
• The Feature Editor dialog allows you to provide a name and description
for a feature. These can be typed into their respective fields on the dialog, or
they can be selected from pre-defined lists. The lists are stored in the
following text files which are all located in the project folder:
◦ Feature Name: FeatureNames.txt

Page 116
◦ Feature Description: FeatureDescriptions.txt

• To extend or modify these lists, the files can be edited manually using any
text editor. Alternatively, you may automatically open one of these files in
Notepad by selecting the file from the drop-down list under Current Project
and pressing the Edit button. Note that changes made to the current project
files lists will not be visible in other projects.
• The feature name and description list files in the current project are copied
from master files in the SonarWiz5application folder (usually C:\Program
Files\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWiz5\) when the project is first created.
You may edit these master files by selecting the file from the drop-down list
under Global Defaults and pressing the Edit button. Note that changes
made will be reflected in the lists for all projects created in the future, but
not in the lists for projects that already exist.
Miscellaneous Settings
• Draw Text Labels Transparently: Removes the solid box behind the
text such that the imagery can be seen under the label.
• Retain link to source CSF on project move: When checked this
retains the link in a feature to the CSF file in its original location when a
project is moved. If the check box is not checked then SonarWiz will look
for the CSF file in the new (moved) project location.
Auto Backup
User may specify how often (after x number of new features have been created)
SonarWiz is to backup digitized features. A value of zero means no auto backup.
2.8.6 R/T Navigation Plot

Page 117
Figure 99: Program Options - R/T Navigation Plot
Recenter Vessel
Recenter the ship when it's within percent of window size :
• The Map Window re-centers the ship based on the distance from the
center to the edge of the map window as a percentage.
• For example, at 100 percent the display will not recenter until the ship
drives out of the window. At 50 percent, the display will recenter when the
ship travels 50 percent or more from the center of the map window. The
available settings are 100, 75, 50 and 25 percent.
Plot Navigation History

Page 118
• The navigation history of an individual node may be activated by the user

checking the “Plot Navigation History” box and then selecting the specific
node from the following list:
◦ Cable Out*
◦ Navigation
◦ Magnetometer*
◦ Reflectivity*
◦ Sensor Depth*
• Water Depth*
* For those nodes requiring a third dimension in order to properly plot the
data a color bar will appear where the user may select the scale (auto or
manual) as well as the color scheme to use. As well, the color coded data
may be annotated with values at a user specified interval (in seconds).
• Once the node has been selected the symbol used to plot the history may be
selected from the next pull down menu containing:
◦ Points
◦ Polyline
◦ Small Circle
◦ Large Circle
◦ Small Rectangle
◦ Large Rectangle

Page 119
2.8.7 Magnetometer Post-Processing Settings
Figure 100: Program Options - Magnetometer Post-Processing
Draw Raw Mag Data in Editor
• Draws raw Mag data in the Magnetometer File Editor

Draw Ambient Mag Data in Editor
• Draws ambient Mag data in the Magnetometer File Editor

Draw Smoothed Mag Data in Editor
• Draws smoothed Mag data in the Magnetometer File Editor

Label Mag Lines in the Map View

Page 120
• Labels the Mag lines with their names in the Map View
Show Anomaly Numbers in Map View
• Displays anomaly numbers in the Map View

Draw Mag Event Numbers
• Displays the Mag Event Numbers in the Map View

Draw Mag Anomalies in SSS Waterfall View
• Displays anomalies in the Digitizer View of any Sonar File that coincides
with the same position as the anomalies
Draw Mag Anomalies Transparently
• Displays the anomaly in the Map View without the symbol filled-in.
Plan View Drawing Method
The user is given two rendering options for real-time and post-processed
magnetometer data both of which affect the real-time and post-processed display of
magnetometer data in the plan view.
Navigation Only
• A basic navigation trace of the mag data
Color Coded Amplitude Segments
• Color coded segment length representing magnetometer amplitude
Color Palette
• 12 color palettes are available to display the color coded data

Ambient Soothing Constant
• Size of Moving Box Car Filter that is used to smooth the Ambient
Magnetometer trace. Higher values correspond to more smoothing with
500 being the Default value.
Observed Smoothing Constant
• Size of Moving Box Car Filter that is used to smooth the Observed
Magnetometer trace. Higher values correspond to more smoothing with
20 being the Default value.
Fill Notes 1/Block Info Field from Selected Map Overlay File
• Used to identify/label the cause (if known) of magnetic anomalies detected

in a Mag survey. Shapefiles of previously reported/surveyed pipelines and
structures are loaded as Overlays in the Map Manager and then may be
selected in the Settings dialog.
• The Notes 1 Map File section allows the user to specify a shape file name
and and 2 attributes from that Shapefile that will be used to populate the
notes portion of the anomaly record which is associated with the cause of
the anomaly.
• When the Identify Known anomaly button is clicked in the
Magnetometer File Editor (see Mag File Editor in Section 5.19.2 on
page 484), SonarWiz searches the selected Shapefile for the nearest pipeline

Page 121
or structure in that Shapefile and displays the nearest segment and its
attribute.
2.8.8 Advanced Settings
Figure 101: Program Options - Advanced Settings
Use Alt Server Folder
• The sonar servers used by the program in Real-time are normally located
under the “Servers” directory in the SonarWiz installation directory. If a
server is desired that is not in this folder the value must be entered here.
Remote Helm Display
Broadcast Navigation on Network
• When checked this box broadcasts Navigation information on the local

network (UDP Port 5200) to allow a SonarWiz remote Helm Navigation
program to receive real-time navigation.
Remote Helm Application
SonarWiz.Nav

Page 122
• This application has been replaced by NavWiz and is no longer being

distributed as of SonarWiz Version 5.03.0012 however navigation broadcast
to SonarWiz.Nav will be maintained.
• See Section 9 on page 721 for more information on SonarWiz.NAV
NavWiz
• See Section 4.5 on page 220 for more information on NavWiz.

Open Last Used Project at Startup
• When this box is checked the active project in use when the program last
exited will be opened.
Warn before deleting files from project
• Safety measure for the indecisive and inaccurate clickers

Warn before deleting survey lines from project
• Another safety measure for the indecisive and inaccurate clickers

Ask user to confirm before exiting SonarWiz
• Just in case...
Build SSS Waterfall Images with the oldest data at the bottom
• By default, the SSS Digitizer View orders the data from lower ping
numbers at the top to higher ping numbers at the bottom like reading a
book. By checking this check box every waterfall image viewed in the
Digitizer view will automatically be generated with the inverted ping
order.
Use Experimental Mosaic Drawing Algorithm
• Beta Testing Routine

• Not recommended for use
Allow Negative XY Coordinates
• Especially useful in high latitude areas where adjacent Projection Zones are
very close together
Sound Velocity
• Entering the most accurate sound velocity in this box will aid the program
more accurate slant range corrections. Valid values may be between 1200
and 1800 m/s.
Compute CMG Using Grid Bearings
• This option is especially useful in high altitudes where lines of longitude

converge rapidly thus affecting heading. Using this option will cause the
program to calculate Course Made Good based on the local grid whose
longitudinal line a parallel.
Sidescan Polarity
Bipolar (+/-)

Page 123
• Default Setting
• Typical for almost all sonars except Benthos sidescan sonars
Unipolar (+)
• Setting for Benthos sidescan sonars

Downsample
Sonars collect backscatter intensities in ranges varying from 0 to 255 up to 32767
and these intensities must be mapped onto the computer display in black, white and
shades of gray in between.
The human eye can not effectively differentiate changes in gray scale beyond 1/256 th
therefore the SonarWiz display uses 256 shades of gray. In order to map the blacks,
whites and shades of gray from a raw sonar record they must be downsampled. i.e. a
sonar whose maximum intensity is 2048 will have the range 0-2048 downsampled to
0-256.
When taking a range of backscatter samples that are to be compressed into a single
sample there are two methods of choosing the resultant value.
Average
• The average value of all the intensities to be combined is used

• This is the Default SonarWiz setting
Max
• The maximum value of all the intensities to be combined is used

Diagnostic Message Thresholds
• SonarWiz uses a UDP network messaging system to route messages to a

remote debugger that can be used for trouble shooting problems which
results in some network traffic being generated by SonarWiz (Real-time
mode only). Setting the diagnostic threshold to -1 for any of the 3 message
types (Trace, Udp or Log) will disable the output of that message type.
• Unless disabling the network traffic mentioned above, these settings should
each be left at the default value of 0.
2.9 SonarWiz Projects

A project is the container or context in which all data collection and post-processing is
performed. Physically, it is a collection of folders and files on the hard disk. Together, these
folders and files store the settings and parameters for the projects (e.g. the geographic
location and coordinate system) as well as the processed sonar data and other ancillary data
such as targets, digitized features and reports. All project files and folders are located under a
root folder – the Project folder.

Page 124
The primary SonarWiz functions such as Data Acquisition, Post Processing and
Map will not work unless a project (new or existing) is open.
When SonarWiz first starts it will either open the last edited project (if this has been
specified in Program Preferences and Settings see Section 2.8.8 page 121) in or it will
start with the Open Existing Project Dialog (Figure 102). From this menu the user may
select an existing project for editing.
Figure 102: SonarWiz Starting with "Open Existing Project"
If the user wishes to create a new project click the Cancel button to close the Open
Existing Project Dialog and show the SonarWiz interface that has no current project
(Figure 103). From this dialog the user may Create a New Project, Open and Existing
Project or simply use the Tools Menu functions.

Page 125
Figure 103: SonarWiz Interface Without an Open Project
When a new project is created, SonarWiz will create the project folder with the name you
specify and will then create all necessary sub-folders and files. You should not delete or
rename any of these folders or files. However, if necessary, you can move the entire project
folder to a new location (e.g. to a different drive), provided no files or sub-folders are lost.
2.9.1 Important Folders and Files

The following tables list the important sub-folders and files stored under the project
folder. Those folders “Not currently used by SonarWiz” are there either for future
planned software modifications or due to specific client requests.

Page 126
Folders Created by SonarWiz

Folder name Description
Project folder -User The root folder for the project. Also contains
specified name important project definition and data files (see next
table)
3DView The default location of the files created in the 3D
export process
Backup Contains backup files of project data that are
automatically created by SonarWiz
CSF Contains SonarWiz “Common Sensor Format” (CSF)
files that are created either in recording raw data or
when importing sonar data files into the program
GeoTiff Contains GeoTiff image files generated by the “ Save
Project as GeoTiff” function
Images Default directory for Batch Image Export from
Sonar File Manager.
MAG Contains CMF Magnetometer files

Misc Not currently used by SonarWiz
Rasters Not currently used by SonarWiz
SHP Default directory for exported .shp files from the
Grid and Contour Utility.
Targets Contains data and image files for all digitized targets.
Targets\Reports Contains HTML target reports and images
Tmp Used by some of the utility programs to store
temporary files
Web Contains the html and associated image files generated
by the “Save Project as Website” function
XTF Contains raw sonar files created during Real-time data
recording
Table 7: Folders Created in New Project

Page 127
Files Created by SonarWiz
File name Description

ContactAttributes2.txt Contains a user-editable list of Secondary
contact attributes used to describe a contact in
the Contact Editor. See Section 2.8.4 on page
106
ContactAttributes.txt Contains a user-editable list of Primary contact
attributes used to describe a contact in the
Contact Editor. See Section 2.8.4 on page
106
ContactDBR001.db3
ContactLocationAreas.txt Contains a user-editable list of Gulf of Mexico
Block areas used to describe a contacts location
in the Contact Editor. See Section 2.8.4 on
page 106
FeatureDescriptions.txt A user-editable list of feature descriptions used
to describe a feature. See Section 2.8.5 on page
112
FeatureNames.txt A user-editable list of feature names used to
describe a feature. See Section 2.8.5 on page
112
<projectname>.COR A non-editable binary file containing Core
information See Section 5.18 on page 469 for
more information on Cores
<projectname>.CSV A comma Separated Value file with...
<projectname>.DIG Contains all digitized features – coordinates
and attributes.
<projectname>.MML The project definition file. Contains
information related to the current state of the
project. This file is an XML file that can be
opened and viewed in any browser.
UnknowMagAnomalyList.txt A user-editable list of Mag Anomaly
descriptions used to describe a magnetic
anomaly. See Section 2.8.7 on page 119
Table 8: Files Created by New Project
Creating a Project
There are two ways in which a project may be created: Manually (See Manually
Creating a Project below ) or Automatically (see Automatically Creating a
Project on page 131).

Page 128
2.9.2 Manually Creating a Project

To create a new project, select New from the Quick Access Toolbar, or use the
shortcut key Ctrl+N. This will display the Create New Project dialog shown in
Figure 104.
Using the information in sub-sections below as a guide, fill in the fields as necessary
for the project and then press OK. The project will be created in the folder
specified. If it does not exist, it also will be created.
Figure 104: Create New Project Dialog
Specifying Project Name and Folder

Vessel Name
• Optional. The vessel name is stored in each contact file.
Project Name
• Enter a name for the new project. This will be used,among other things, to
name the main project definition file (<projectname>.MML).
Project Folder

Page 129
• Use this field to specify the root folder for the project. All project related
files will be stored in this folder or its sub-folders.
• By default, the name of the project typed in above will be inserted here
which the user may change if desired. You may browse to an existing folder
or enter a new folder. If the folder does not exist it will be created.
• SonarWiz requires that a unique folder be used for each new project. If an
attempt is made to put a new project in an existing folder SonarWiz will
instruct the user to select a new folder (Figure 105).
Figure 105: New Projects Must be in Unique Folders
Approximate Project Position

If the Automatically Select Coordinate System option (see page 130 below) is
being used then SonarWiz requires an initial approximate position to set up the
geodesy library correctly. There are several ways to do this:
◦ If you know the approximate position of your work area you can enter this
in the Approximate Latitude/Longitude fields.
◦ Select a major city near the project area by pressing the Select From
World Cities button. The position of this city will be transferred to the
Approximate Lat/Lon fields.
◦ Select an existing existing acoustic data file (XTF or SEG-Y) by pressing the
Get From File button. If the file contains a position it will be extracted and
transferred to the Approximate Lat/Lon fields.
◦ Use the GPS position: If you have GPS configured and feeding data into
SonarWiz (see Section 4.2.3 on page 170 ) clicking this button will cause the
program to grab the current position from the GPS feed.
Note that you can add your own entries to the world cities
list by editing the text file named “AllCities.CSV” in the
MapData sub-folder under the folder in which SonarWiz is
installed.
Coordinate Source

Page 130
Select the source of the sonar coordinates to be used for the sonar mosaic. Typically
the Auto option is the best. The Auto button will use the fish coordinates if they
are available and the ship coordinates otherwise.
The Time Constant for Course Smoothing value controls the amount of
smoothing applied to the real-time navigation. Higher values correspond to more
smoothing. A value of 300 is typical. Navigation, including smoothing, may be
edited, Using ZEdit, in postprocessing (see Section 5.12.2 on page 373 and Section
5.13.4 on page 382)
Selecting a Coordinate System

When SonarWiz generates a mosaic, it is actually drawing a projected map showing
sonar imagery and other data such as digitized features, targets, etc. In order to do
this, it must convert the geodetic coordinates (latitude/longitude) stored in the
navigation record to XY coordinates in a specific Cartesian coordinate system or
map projection.
Automatically Select Coordinate System
• When enabled SonarWiz will compute the UTM zone based on the
geographic location of the project (See Approximate Project Position
on page 129 for more in formation.). Using this technique is the simple
because it does not require any knowledge of coordinate systems or geodesy
on the part of the user.
Manually Selecting a Coordinate System
This feature is essential to cartographers, GIS professionals, and others who need to
present their data in a coordinate system that is specified by the end user. To choose
the target coordinate system simply press the Browse button.
Do you only work with a few projections?
Don t want to see the thousands of coordinate systems SonarWiz supports?
Set-up and use the Simplified View option!

See Section 6.1.5 on page 519 for more details.
Coordinate Systems
• SonarWiz supports more than 1000 commonly used coordinate systems.

These include all UTM zones, all State Plane Zones, several variations
thereof, and many others. There is also an integrated coordinate system
editor which allows for the definition of new coordinate systems based on
any of the 30 supported projections. This editor is described in detail in
Section 6.1 on page 507.
Projections
• SonarWiz supports 30 projections including Transverse Mercator (Gauss-

Kruger), Lambert Conformal Conic, Hotine Oblique Mercator, Albers

Page 131
Equal Area, American Polyconic, Mercator, Lambert Tangential, Azimuthal

Equal Area, Azimuthal Equidistant.
Datums
• SonarWiz supports eight different datum transformation techniques. The

appropriate technique is automatically selected by examining the referenced
datum in the source and target coordinate system definitions. The supported
techniques are: Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe (a.k.a. Seven Parameter
Transformation), DMA Multiple Regression Formulas, WGS72
conversions, NGS NADCON algorithm and data files, NGS HPGN
algorithm and data files, and Canadian National Transformation, Versions 1
and 2. SonarWiz will automatically apply one or more of these techniques,
as appropriate, to accomplish the conversion required by the coordinate
systems involved in the transformation.
Ellipsoids
• SonarWiz's ellipsoid dictionary includes the definition of more than 40

ellipsoids.
2.9.3 Automatically Creating a Project

A Project may be automatically created by “Dragging and Dropping” sonar files into
the Map Window of SonarWiz. The drag and drop project creation uses the most
recently used gain and File specific settings or in the case of a fresh install with no
previous history all of the gains would be off. The only option offered with respect
to gain settings is Auto TVG (See Section 5.11.1.4 on page 362).
Notes:
1. This method is recommended for users whose project settings change
infrequently or for those users that simply wish to see a quick overview of a
data set.
2. Only supported Sonar File types are can be dragged and dropped. See
Section 5.1 on page 235 for a complete list of support Sonar File Types.
Adding Files
To add files and create a new project, start by opening SonarWiz, then simply open
Windows Explorer and navigate to the directory containing the new files. The user
may then:
1. Select the files that are to be added to the new project and drag them to the
SonarWiz Map Window; or
2. Select the folder containing the files and drag it to the SonarWiz Map
Window. When a folder is added, SWM will recursively detect all
supported acoustic files types and add them to the import list.
SonarWiz will then prompt the user to either create a new project, or add the new
files to the current project (if applicable), or playback the first file (Figure 106). As
well, the import list will be displayed such that the user may check or un-check
specific files for inclusion in the import.
•

Page 132
Selecting multiple files:

A consecutive series of multiple files may selected by:
• Left-clicking the first file in the series; and
• Holding the Shift key and left clicking the last file in the series.
A non-consecutive series of multiple files may selected by:
• Left-clicking the first file in the series; and
• Holding the Ctrl key and left clicking each of the remaining, desired
files in the series.
Select Add file(s) to new project and the dialog in Figure 107 will appear.
Selecting Add files(s) to current project will simply import the drag-and-
dropped files to the current project immediately whereas selecting Playback first
file will playback the first file and then add it to the current project but not any of
the other files .
N.B. The Playback first file only appears when individual files have been dragged-
and-dropped but not folders.
Figure 106: Drag and Drop Dialog
Create New Project via Drag-and-Drop

Page 133
After Adding Files by Dragging and Dropping and choosing to create a New
Project above the dialog in Figure 107 will appear.
All fields are automatically filled in by the program including the Project Folder and
Project name; however this does not preclude the user from modifying any of these
fields.
Dragging and Dropping Files into a project (new or existing) does not allow the
user to select File Type Specific Options (See File Type Specific Options
(Sidescan) on page 240 or File Type Specific Options (Sub-bottom) on page
265) meaning the the last settings used by the program will be assigned to
these new files.
Users should manually import files into an existing project if File Type Specific
Options need to be configured. See Importing Sidescan Sonar Data on page
237 or Importing Sub-bottom Sonar Data on page 262 for more information.
Approximate latitude/Longitude
• See Section 2.9.2 above for details on each of the user configurable
fields in Figure 107.
Channels to Mosaic
• Mosaics may only be created using a maximum of two channels (port and
starboard of a specific frequency). When using sidescan sonars with more
than two channels (i.e. dual frequency sonars such as the L3-Klein 3000) the
channels corresponding to the frequency desired for mapping must be
selected.
Percent to Map
• Use the Percent to Map control to specify the duration of the sonar
record you want to use.
• For Example if the sonar was set at a 100 meter range but only the first 60
meters is desired to be displayed then select 60%
Import Gain
• Useful for increasing the base level gain of an acoustic data file that contains
low amplitude sonar data. Try out various gain settings on your first file to
see which setting looks the best. Then, import all of your acoustic files with
the preferred gain setting.
Auto TVG
• May be selected in order to optimize the sonar imagery as it is imported

thus reducing the requirement for additional Signal Processing. See Section
5.11.1 on page 356 for more information on Auto TVG.
Left-clicking OK will cause the program to import the drag-and-dropped files and
display them once imported.

Page 134
Figure 107: Create New Project Dialog via Drag and Drop
2.9.4 Opening an Existing Project

If a project already exists it may be opened for either Real-time data collection or for
postprocessing. Select Open from the Quick Access Toolbar or “CTRL+O” in
order to open an existing project and Browse to the directory where the project file
(“<filename>.mml”) is located.
As well, the Quick Access Toolbar displays the most recently used projects when
the blue SonarWiz “5” button is left-clicked (Figure 108). Simply left-click on the
desired project t listed on the right to open it.
Figure 108: Open Quick Access Toolbar Showing Recent Projects

Page 135
2.9.5 Modifying A Project
Figure 109: Configure an Existing Project Dialog
Once a project is created/opened all settings within the project, with the exception
of the Project Folder and Project Name, the project may be modified
.
Select Project Settings from the Quick Access Toolbar or F10. The Configure
an Existing Project dialog (Figure 109) will appear which is the same as the
Create Project dialog (Figure 104) but without the ability to change the Project
folder name or directory.

Section 3 Basemaps
3.1 Basemaps - Introduction

SonarWiz provides the ability to display multiple reference maps and images in the main
view in addition to the sonar mosaic and other geographically referenced items (targets,
survey lines and digitized features). These maps can be used to provide a visual locational
reference during and after a survey, and also to enhance the quality of the data prior to
incorporation into reports and presentations.
3.1.1 Map Data Types

Compatible map data types fall into two broad categories:
Raster Maps
• A raster map is a file structure in which the map or image is stored as a
rectangular grid of cells or “pixels”. The numeric value of each pixel
represents the color, intensity, amplitude or some other attribute value of
the area covered by the pixel.
• Examples of raster maps are: JPG satellite images from TerraServer, NOAA
Raster (BSB) Nautical charts and GeoTiffs.
Vector Maps
• A vector map is a file structure in which map elements (lines, points, and
polygons) are stored as discrete geometric points and vectors defined by one
or more coordinate pairs. Examples of vector maps are S-57 Charts, ESRI
Shapefiles and USGS Digital Line Graphs.
• A partial list of supported map file formats can be found in Section 7.1 on
page 551.
3.1.2 Map Display Types

Reference maps can be displayed as either basemaps or overlays. As shown in
Figure 110, the difference between these two display types has to do with the
display order relative to the sonar mosaic.
Basemaps
Page 138
• Reference maps displayed as basemaps are drawn “under” the sonar mosaic.
Thus, the sonar data will obscure the basemap in areas where there is
overlap. Basemaps are typically raster images – for example aerial photos,
satellite images or nautical charts.
Overlays
• Overlays are reference maps or drawings that are displayed “over” the sonar
mosaic. Since the elements in an overlay will obscure the parts of the mosaic
that they cover, it is usual for an overlay to be a vector file. In most cases, a
raster image overlay would completely cover up the underlying mosaic.
Usually vector files e.g. SHP, DXF
Overlay
Mosaic
Basemap
Usually raster images e.g. TIF, JPG, BMP
Figure 110: Basemaps vs. Overlays
3.2 Georeferencing
In order for a reference map (basemap or overlay) to correctly register or “line up” with
other spatial data on the display (primarily the sonar mosaic), the coordinates of the
reference map must be in the same coordinate system as the sonar data, or information must
be provided to enable SonarWiz to translate the reference map coordinates.
Moreover, if the reference map is a raster image, real world reference data must be provided
to show how the pixels in the image are translated to coordinates on the display. These data
include the size of a pixel in real-world units, and the location of a reference pixel in real-
world coordinates.
There are several methods by which world reference parameters and coordinate
system/projection data are supplied to SonarWiz. These methods will be discussed in the
following section. The exact method used for a particular file depends on:
1. The reference map data type (raster or vector).
2. The method used to import the map.
SonarWiz5 User Guide Basemaps

Page 139
3.2.1 Specifying Coordinate System and Projection

When required, the coordinate system of a reference map is specified either
manually, or with a PRJ file.
PRJ File
• A PRJ file is an XML-like text file that defines the datum and projection of
a map. An example is shown below in Figure 111.
PROJCS["WGS_1984_UTM_Zone_10N",
GEOGCS["GCS_WGS_1984",
DATUM["D_WGS_1984",
SPHEROID["WGS_1984",6378137.0,298.257223563]],
PRIMEM["Greenwich",0.0],
UNIT["Degree",0.0174532925199433]],
PROJECTION["Transverse_Mercator"],
PARAMETER["False_Easting",500000.0],
PARAMETER["False_Northing",0.0],
PARAMETER["Central_Meridian",-123.0],
PARAMETER["Scale_Factor",0.9996],
PARAMETER["Latitude_Of_Origin",0.0],
UNIT["Meter",1.0]]
Figure 111: Example of a PRJ File
• By convention, a PRJ file has the following name:

<mapfilename>.PRJ
where mapfilename is the filename of the map that the PRJ describes.
• In situations where coordinate system/projection information is required by
SonarWiz, the PRJ file will be used if it exists. Otherwise, the user will be
prompted for the information with the dialog shown in Figure 112.
• PRJ files are often provided with digital maps. If you need to create one to
accompany a map file, this can be done in several ways, including:
(a) Copying, renaming and editing an existing PRJ file that specifies the
correct coordinate system. If there is already a map data file in the
project that is displaying correctly and that has a PRJ file, then this
file can most likely be cloned without modifying it's contents.
Simply copy and rename to match it's parent map file.
(b) Create a new PRJ file using the Coordinate System selection dialog
described in the following section.
Manual Coordinate System Selection
If SonarWiz requires a PRJ file for in order to display a map reference map file, and
the file cannot be found, then a dialog will be displayed so that the coordinate
system information can be entered manually (see Figure 112).

Page 140
Figure 112: Select Projection Dialog
Saving Coordinate System parameters

• If a reference map is to be displayed often, then the coordinate system
parameters should be stored in a PRJ file so that the dialog is not displayed
every time the map file is opened.
• To do this, left-click the Save To File button before dismissing the dialog.
A “Save As” dialog will be presented. Make sure that the PRJ filename
matches the file name of the map file and that it is in same folder. Then
press the Save button to create the PRJ file.
3.2.2 Map Files that use a Custom Coordinate System

• Some map files such as DXF or ESRI shapefiles are based on a user defined
or custom coordinate system that is not part of the SonarWiz mapping
library. SonarWiz is very flexible in creating custom coordinate systems and
datums. The basemap drawing library however uses a different geodesy
encoding scheme than SonarWiz. Therefore a translation between the
SonarWiz geodesy and the map drawing library is required.
• When a SonarWiz project is opened or created it tries to work out the
translation between the selected coordinate system of the project and the
map drawing library. For standard projections on standard datums this

Page 141
happens without the user being involved because everything is well defined.
“Standard projections” are considered to be UTM and State Plane on WGS-
84, NAD-27 and NAD-83 datums. When a user defined projection or
datum is involved the user will be prompted to enter the parameters for the
map drawing library.
• Example:
• The following project uses a custom coordinate system and a
custom datum that have been defined using the SonarWiz
Add/Edit Coordinate System and Add/Edit Datum buttons
(See Sections 6.1 and 6.1.2 on pages 507and 515 respectively) . This
case is for a project in Libya that used a Transverse Mercator
Projection based on a custom datum. When the new project is
created, SonarWiz will display the following dialog which is basically
asking for the definition.
• In Figure 113 below the yellow highlighted areas define the
projection parameters. The user enters the projection parameters
clicks on any numeric values required to be edited and types in the
new value.
Figure 113: Custom Map Projection
• The blue highlighted area however shows a custom Datum named

“Libya-ED50”. The source of this custom datum is from a file that

Page 142
must be manually edited and created with the specific file name:
“custom_datums.txt”. This file must reside in the folder:
“C:\Program Files\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWizMAP”
or the path in which SonarWiz is installed.
• The content of the custom_datums.txt file is as shown in the
example below.
Figure 114: Custom Datum Text File Contents
This custom datum contains a 3-parameter datum definition (Libya-ED50) and a

7-parameter datum definition (TEST).
“Libya-ED50”, “Libya-ED50”, “International 1909 (Hayford/Intl 1924)”,
-87.00000000000000000, -98.00000000000000000, -121.00000000000000000
“TEST”, “TEST”, “Clarke 1866”, 1.00000000000000000,
2.00000000000000000, 3.00000000000000000, 0.00001939254724438,
0.00002424068405548, 0.00002908882086657, 0.00000700000000000
This is a simple text file that can be edited in Notepad. The fields are comma
separated and are:
1. Datum Name
2. Datum abbreviated name
3. Reference Ellipsoid name
4. Shift to WGS84 X (meters)
5. Shift to WGS84 Y (meters)
6. Shift to WGS84 Z (meters)
7. Rotation to WGS-84 X (radians) Only used for 7-parameter shift
8. Rotation to WGS-84 Y (radians) Only used for 7-parameter shift
9. Rotation to WGS-84 Z (radians) Only used for 7-parameter shift
10. Scale Correction to WGS84 (parts per million) Only used for 7-
parameter shift
3.2.3 Specifying World Reference Parameters

In order to correctly display a raster image below other spatial data, SonarWiz must
have information that relates the image to its geographic location in the real world.
This information tells SonarWiz how pixels in the image translate to coordinates in
the real world, and thus allows the image to be drawn in the correct place on the

Page 143
display. This section describes the two ways that world reference parameters are
obtained by SonarWiz.
World File
• A world file is a small text file that accompanies a file containing a raster
map image. It contains six numeric parameters, one per line, as shown in
Table 9.
Line 1: (A) Pixel size in the x direction in map units
Line 2: (D) rotation about y axis
Line 3: (B) rotation about x axis
Line 4: (E) pixel size in the y direction in map units
Line 5: (C) x coordinate of center of upper left pixel
Line 6: (F) y coordinate of center of upper left pixel
Table 9: World File Format
• An example if a world file is shown in Figure 115.
2.5
0
0
-2.5
476181.25
5366947.75
Figure 115: Example of a World File
• Using these parameter values, the coordinates of any pixel in the image can
be calculated as follows:
x' = Ax + By + C
y' = Dx + Ey + F
• Where:
• x' = calculated Easting coordinate of the pixel on the map
• y' = calculated Northing coordinate of the pixel on the map
• x = column number of a pixel in the image counting from left
• y = row number of a pixel in the image counting from top
• A = x-scale; dimension of a pixel in map units in x direction
• B,D = rotation terms
• C,F = x,y map coordinates of the center of the upper-left pixel
• E = negative of y-scale; dimension of a pixel in map units in y
direction
• By convention, the name of a world file is the same as the name of it's
accompanying image file with the extension changed a follows: the second
letter of the original filename extension is replaced with the third letter, and
the third letter is replaced with the letter "w."
• Example:

Page 144
Image Filename World Filename

Extension Extension
.JPG .JGW
.TIF .TFW
.BMP .BPW
Embedded World Reference Parameters

• Some raster image file formats, most notably the TIFF format, allow for
special purpose records or “tags” to be embedded into the file. These
records can be used to store world reference parameters. If a file contains
embedded parameters, a world file may not be necessary, depending on the
method used to import the file.
3.3 Adding/Removing Maps in SonarWiz

The Maps Command Ribbon contains the Command Groups shown in Each Command
Group is discussed below.
Figure 116: Maps Ribbon Commands
• Left-clicking on the Add Basemap, Add GeoImage, or Add Overlay buttons

described below invokes the Open Dialog shown Figure 117 in below.

Page 145
Figure 117: Open Map/Overlay Dialog
• Within this Dialog, the user navigates to the directory containing the desired
map/overlay and selects the map by left-clicking on the file name. The map/overlay
may be loaded as read-only by populating the Open as read-only check box by
left-clicking inside it in order to protect its original display state if desired. Once
selected left-click on Open to load the map/overlay and return to the Map
Window.
3.3.1 Basemaps Command Group
Figure 118: Basemaps Command Group
• Commands in this group add basemaps to the Map Window. Currently

displayed files are shown in the Map Manager (See Section 3.4 on page
156). Any number of basemaps may be displayed simultaneously, but you
must add them to the list one at a time.
• Basemaps are usually raster images, but can also be vector files. The
difference between the Add Basemap and Add GeoImage relates to file
format support and drawing performance as explained below.
Add Basemap
• Adds a single file to the display as a basemap.

Page 146
Supported formats
• A wide variety of raster and vector file types as listed in Section
7.1 on page 551.
Requirements and Restrictions
• Coordinate system/projection parameters are expected in a PRJ
file. If no PRJ file is found, then program will prompt via the
dialog shown in Figure 112. The user may create a PRJ file from
this dialog by pressing the Save To File button. This will suppress
the prompt when the file is loaded in the future.
• If the file is a raster image, embedded world reference parameters

will be used if they exist. If not, the world file will be used. If
there is no world file or embedded tags, then the file will fail to
load.
Benefits
• Broad file format support
When a GeoImage is not in the same projection as the Project use

this command in order to have the program request the projection
parameters
Add GeoImage
• Adds a single file to the display as a basemap.
Supported formats
• TIF, JPG and BMP only.
• Coordinates in the file must be in the same coordinate system as
the current project. No attempt is made to read a PRJ file or to
translate the coordinates. This means that any necessary
coordinate translation must be done before the file is used by
SonarWiz.
• If the file is a raster image, only the world file is used to obtain
world reference coordinates. Embedded tags are not used. If the
world file does not exist then the file will fail to load.
Benefits
• High display speed.
Draw GeoImage First
• Forces all files that were added as GeoImages to be drawn on the
display first. This results in Basemaps being drawn after
GeoImages thus covering the GeoImages

Page 147
3.3.2 Overlays Command Group
Figure 119: Overlays Command Group
• Commands in this group add Vector Overlays to the Map Window.

Currently displayed files are shown in the Map Manager (See Section 3.4
on page 156) Any number of Vector Overlays may be displayed
simultaneously, but you must add them to the list one at a time.
• Vector Overlays are usually vector files, but can also be raster images. The
difference between the Add Overlay and Add Legacy Shapefile relates
to file format support and drawing performance as explained below.
Add Overlay
• Adds a single file to the display as an overlay.
Supported formats
• A wide variety of raster and vector file types as listed in Section
7.1 on page 551 including DXF, S-57 and Shapefiles.
• Coordinate system/projection parameters are expected in a PRJ
file. If no PRJ file is found, then program will prompt via the
dialog shown in Figure 112. You may create a PRJ file from this
dialog by pressing the Save To File button.
• If the file is a raster image, embedded world reference parameters

will be used if they exist. If not, the world file will be used. If
there is no world file or embedded tags, then the file will fail to
load.
• Note that a raster image overlay will obscure all data beneath it,
including the sonar mosaic and basemaps.
Benefits
• Broad file format support
Add Legacy Shape File
• Adds a single file to the display as an overlay.
Supported formats
• Older Shapefiles (SHP) only.
• Coordinates in the file can be in any coordinate system. SonarWiz
will prompt for the coordinate system using the dialog shown in
Figure 122. and file coordinates will be translated if necessary.

Page 148
• This dialog can also be used to set the display characteristics of

features in the file (line style, color, etc).
Benefits
• High display speed.
Always Try Add Overlay for a Shapefile prior to using Add Legacy
Shapefile. If SonarWiz does not recognize the format then use this
option.
• Left-clicking Add Legacy Shape File button the opens the Add
ESRI Shapefile Dialog shown in Figure 120. The user must enter
the requested information in the boxes provided in order for the
file to load into the Map Window.
Figure 120: Open ESRI Shapefile
• Input Shapefile
The user navigates to the directory containing the desired Shapefile

and selects the file by left-clicking on the file name. The Shapefile
may be loaded as read-only by populating the Open as read-
only check box by left-clicking inside it in order to protect its
original display state if desired. Once selected left-click on Open to
load the map/overlay and return to the Map Window.
• Original Coordinate System
Left-clicking the Browse button opens the dialog in Figure 121

below. See Section on Page for more informastion on Selecting a
coordinate system.

Page 149
Figure 121: Coordinate System Selection
• Shapefile Bounds
Automatically displays the calculated file bounds based on the

coordinate system and embedded position
• Color
A pull-down list of colors where the user may select the Shapefile
display color
• Label with attribute
A pull-down list of available attributes that can be used as labels for

the displayed features
• Line Thickness
User-selectable from 1 to 5 pixels
3.3.3 Vector Map Controls Command Group

• The check boxes in this group determine the feature types that are displayed
when a vector file (e.g. A Shapefile) is loaded. Check or clear the boxes as
required.
• N.B. These check boxes only affect files loaded by clicking the Add
Overlays button. They have no effect on Shapefiles added with the Add
Legacy Shapefile button.
Styles
• Click these buttons to set the display characteristics (line style, weight, color)
of predefined features loaded from vector files using the Add Overlays
button.

Page 150
Figure 122: Entering Shapefile Coordinate System Parameters
3.3.4 Remove a Basemap or Overlay

• To remove a basemap or overlay from the display, the Map Manager must
be opened. See Section 3.4 on page 156.
3.3.5 Search Web

The Search Web button allows the user to go directly to the USGS Terra
Server web page and download free Digital Ortho Photo Quads (DOQ) files.
Using the information entered about the current sonar project, SonarWiz will
build the correct query string required to get directly to the map data in the
project area. Topographic image files are also available through this feature.
How to Add a TerraServer Basemap:
1. TerraServer only provides satellite imagery for the US.
2. An Internet connection must be present for this function to work.
3. left-click on the Search Web button within the Map List Command
Group from the Maps Command Ribbon.
4. The computer's default web browser will open automatically and open
the TerraServer web site with the project coordinates in the center of
the image (Figure 123).

Page 151
Figure 123: TerraServer Web Site
5. Left-click on the largest image box (Circled in red in Figure 123)

6. Using the pan controls (blue ovals) and zoom control (yellow rectangle)
center the image and zoom in/out to the desired resolution.
7. Left-Click Download on the web page (orange rectangle). TerraServer
will create a .jpg that can be downloaded.
8. Once the desired image regenerates in the browser, right-click the image
and select “Save Picture as” (Internet Explorer) or “Save Image as”
(Firefox) and a “Save as” dialog will appear. Navigate to the Geotiff
directory inside the main Project Directory. TerraServer will supply
“download.ashx.jpg” by default however it is recommended to use a
relevant name such as “TreasureIsland.jpg” for the example above
(Figure 124).

Page 152
Figure 124: Saving JPG Image
9. The top right portion of the web page has changed slightly and offers
new options (Figure 125). Left-click the “World File” link (green
rectangle)
Figure 125: World File Download Button
10. A new web page will appear with six lines of ASCII numbers which will
be required by SonarWiz to properly georefernce the previously
downloaded image. In the Web Browser select File>Save Page as
(FireFox) or Page>Save as (Internet Explorer). As Save as dialog
will appear; if you are not already in the Project/Geotiff directory

Page 153
navigate to it. The file name of this text file MUST have the same name
as the previously downloaded image with .jgw as the extension.
When saving the text file use double quotation marks around the entire
file name in order to avoid the browser putting an undesired extension
on the file name i.e. “TreasureIsland.jgw”(Figure 126)
Figure 126: Double Quotes Around File Name with .JGW Extension
11. Once the file has been saved the browser may be closed.
12. Check the file you saved. Internet Explorer has an undesirable habit of
saving html codes with the text. Your .jgw file should have 6 lines of
numbers exactly as you saw them in the browser window. Delete any
html code you find added to the file so that it looks like the example in
Figure 127
Figure 127: JGW File Without HTML Codes

Page 154
13. In the Basemaps Command Group left-click on Add BaseMap.

● Note that Add Geo Image is not used due to some
idiosyncrasies in the format of the downloaded TerraServer
File format.
14. Navigate to the Project's GeoTiff folder (or the folder where the image
and coordinates file were saved) and select the downloaded .jpg file and
left click OK.
15. A warning will appear (Figure 128) stating that the projection and datum
for this file are unknown and must be selected. Left-click OK.
Figure 128: Georeferencing Warning
16. In the Select Projection dialog that appears (Figure 129) verify the
projection displayed is that of the project (by default it will be) and left-
click Save to File.

Page 155
Figure 129: Projection Selection
17. The Save as dialog will appear (Figure 130) will appear. Ensure that the
directory appearing is the same directory where the downloaded image
file is located and that he file name is the same as the downloaded file
and then left-click Save.

Page 156
Figure 130: Save Projection Info Dialog
18. Left-click OK in the Select Projection dialog and then in the Map
Manager dialog and the downloaded image should appear in the Map
Window properly georeferenced.
3.4 Map Manager

The Reference Map Manager is used primarily to list all loaded maps and overlays such
that they can be enabled or disabled for map display. Notice that the Reference Map
Manager has all the map controls within it that are also in the Maps Ribbon Menu.
The Reference Map Manager can be opened by selecting Map Manager from the
Maps Ribbon Menu, by using the hot keys CTRL+SHIFT+B, or pressing the manager
toolbar shown to the left..

Page 157
Figure 131: Reference Map Manager Dialog
• The table format in which the maps are listed include 4 columns:
• Enabled:
The check box at the left-hand side of each row toggles the display of the
map in the Map View window (Checked = displayed).
Maps be toggled on or off all-at-once by selecting or de-selecting the check

box beside “Enabled”.
• Description:
The file name of the map

• Map Type:
The type of map (Basemap / GeoImage / Overlay)
• Color:
User-selectable color palette for Overlays. This is a drop-down menu where

the new color may be selected.
The functions and controls provided by the Reference Map Manager (below
the Map List are the same as those in the Maps Ribbon Menu with the
exception of the Remove button
• Remove Button
Left-click-and-selecting a Map/Overlay followed by left-clicking the Remove
Button deletes the Map/Overlay from the project but NOT from the computer.
3.5 Performance Considerations

The Add Basemap command is very flexible in that it will accept raster map images in a
wide variety of file formats that have been generated in coordinate systems that are not the
same as the working coordinate system of the SonarWiz project. However, the price paid for
this flexibility, especially the handling of images in different coordinate systems, is slower
drawing speed. This is because the map must be reprojected each time it is redrawn, thus

Page 158
making performance much slower than a map file that is in the same coordinate system as
the SonarWiz project.
The use of BSB raster charts is especially susceptible to a slower drawing

speed. It is highly recommended that when using BSBs the solution
presented below be used.
Fortunately there is a four step solution to this performance problem.

1. Import the map into SonarWiz
2. Re-project it into the working coordinate system of the project,
3. Store it as a GeoTiff image
4. Remove the original map and import the newly created GeoTiff using Add Geo
Image command.
Section 3.5.1 describes these steps in detail. For the purpose of the explanation an existing
Project in the San Fancisco Bay area with UTM Zone 20 WGS84 as the projection will be
used. A NOAA RNC, with its default Mercator Projection, will be will be added to the
project
3.5.1 Importing a Basemap from a Different Coordinate System

1. Import the RNC into the San Francisco project by left-clicking the Add
Basemap button within the Maps Ribbon Menu. (Figure 132)

Page 159
Figure 132: Adding A NOAA RNC
2. In this example SonarWiz automatically recognizes the RNC format and

automatically reprojects from Mercator into UTM. If the Basemap's coordinate
system is not recognized, SonarWiz will prompt the user to identify the
coordinate system with the dialogs seen in Section 3.2.1 on page 139.
3. The Map Manager dialog should now show the added basemap, and the
SonarWiz display should appear as the one below.

Page 160
Figure 133: Map Display After Adding Basemap.
3.5.2 Saving the Imported Basemap in the Project Coordinate

System
Following the steps above the San Francisco project now has an imported NOAA
RNC whose coordinates have been reprojected into the project's coordinate system.
When zooming in or out the redrawing speed is seen to be slow. This is due to the
fact that the image is being reprojected each time the screen is refreshed. The re-
projection task is slowing down the drawing speed.
In this particular case the solution is to save the Mercator RNC basemap to a
UTM84 (Zone 10) basemap image and then load this UTM image. Using this
strategy, no on-the-fly re-projection is necessary and drawing performance is
enhanced.
1. Center the display on the area of the map desired to be saved. The full extents of the
map can be displayed using the Ctrl+Shift+F key sequence. Any sonar data or
other map objects should be disabled so that they are not exported as part of the
new map image.
2. Use the Post Processing>Export>Save Project as Geo Image dialog
(Figure 134) to export the map image as shown below. The image can be saved at
any resolution but the map should be exported close to the original map resolution
for best results; in this case the original RNC was 2 meters/pixel. Be sure to check
the “Build single image file regardless of size” and the “Output image
even if no sonar data” check boxes.
3.

Page 161
Figure 134: Export Map Window as Geo Image
Figure 135: Saving Reprojected RNC as a GeoTiff

Page 162
4. Open the project folder (Tools>Open Project Folder (Figure 136))to see the
new files created in the GeoTiff folder by the process above. These files in this
case they have the prefix “RNC” with RNC.tfw and RNC.tif being the world file
and the image file of the Mercator RNC now as a UTM geotiff .
Figure 136: Open Project Folder
5. Now remove the Mercator RNC basemap from the SonarWiz project and
replace it with the UTM geotiff that was created above. First remove the RNC
Basemap map by using the Remove button within the Map Manager.
Figure 137: Removing Original Basemap Image
3.5.3 Import Basemap as a Geo Image

To import the new (re-projected) geotiff, do the following:
1. Add the new UTM geotiff image using the Add GeoImage button
either in the Basemaps Command Group or in the Map Manager.
2. The SonarWiz display should now look identical to the original display
(Figure 133). The principal difference is the redrawing speed will be
much faster since as the new image is in the same coordinate system as
the SonarWiz project.

Page 163
Figure 138: Importing the Reprojected Basemap.
3.6 Sources of Digital Map Images

The following is a list of organizations and Internet sites that provide access to digital map
data suitable for importing into SonarWiz as a basemap or overlay. In some cases, access to
these datasets is free.
3.6.1 NOAA Office of Coast Survey
Electronic Nautical Charts

• NOAA provides free download of vector based Electronic Nautical Charts
(ENCs). These are geo-referenced database(s) of NOAA nautical chart
features and their attributes, published in the format of the International
Hydrographic Organization S-57 Standard, "IHO Transfer Standard for
Digital Hydrographic Data."
• Web site:
http://www.nauticalcharts.noaa.gov/staff/charts.htm#ENC
• Format: S-57.
Raster Navigational Charts
• NOAA provides free high resolution raster images of all official nautical
paper charts produced by NOAA's Office of Coast Survey (OCS) for the
United States. These Raster Navigational Charts (RNCs) are geo-referenced,
full-color images of NOAA’s paper nautical charts, published in the .BSB
format.

Page 164
• Web site:
http://www.nauticalcharts.noaa.gov/staff/charts.htm#RNC
• Format: BSB.
3.6.2 National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency

• The National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) publishes
approximately 5000 Digital Nautical Charts (DNCs) that cover the region
between 84° North latitude and 81° South latitude. These charts are vector
based and contain maritime significant features essential for safe marine
navigation.
• Web site:
http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/dnc/
• Format: VPF (Vector Product Format)
3.6.3 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service

• The NRCS Geospatial Data Gateway provides a catalog of and access to all
of the USGS maps for the lower 48 states. The gateway allows you to
choose your area of interest, browse and select data from the catalog,
customize the format, and have it downloaded or shipped on CD or DVD.
• Web site: http://datagateway.nrcs.usda.gov/
• Format: multiple
3.6.4 Microsoft TerraServer

• Microsoft TerraServer provides free access to geo-referenced maps and
aerial photographs for all parts of the United States.
• This is the default website that SonarWiz Opens when the “Search the
Web” button is left-clicked. See Section 3.3.5 on page 150 for more
information
• Web site:
http://terraserver-usa.com
• Format: geo-referenced JPG
3.6.5 US Geological Survey

The USGS national Map Viewer provides a Gateway to all USGS digital maps.
• Web site: http://nmviewogc.cr.usgs.gov/viewer.htm
• Format: multiple

Section 4 Data Acquisition
This Section discusses the Real-time functions of SonarWiz all of which are found in the Data
Acquisition Ribbon Commands Menu (Figure 139)
Figure 139: Data Acquisition Ribbon Commands
4.1 Sonar Servers

A Sonar Server is an application used by SonarWiz to connect to a sidescan sonar, sub-
bottom profiler or remote file that is actively being written to by use of a sonar in Real-time
controlled by another program. Sonar Servers are separate extensions to the main program
and must be purchased from CTI. Clicking on any of the available Servers in the list below
will forward the user to the appropriate section in Section Error: Reference source not found
starting on page Error: Reference source not found where each Server is described in detail:
• Sidescan Sonar Servers
○ Analog Side Scan Server
○ CMAX CM2 USB Server
○ EdgeTech 4100 Server
○ EdgeTech ACI server
○ EdgeTech DCI Server (DF-10000)
○ GeoAcoustics Digital Sonar Server
○ Klein 3K Server
○ Klein 3900
○ Klein 5K Server
○ Marine Sonic Server
○ SonarBeam S150 Server
Page 166
○ SportScan Server
○ Teledyne-Benthos 16xx Server
○ Tritech Seaking Server
○ YellowFin Server
• Sub-bottom Profiler Servers
○ EdgeTech 3100 (XStar) Server
○ Knudsen SBP Server
○ Odom CVM (EchoTrac) Server
○ SyQwest SBP Server
○ Teledyne-Benthos Chirp III Server
• Combined Sidescan and sub-bottom
○ Klein 3K + SBP
○ Teledyne-Benthos 1625 Server
○ HUGIN AUV Server
• Remote File Server
4.2 Configure Sensors

In order to record real-time data users must first create a Project (see Getting Started
with SonarWiz in Section 2.6 on page 97) such that SonarWiz is ready for external inputs.
This Section covers the setup required to have the program recognize and use external
inputs.
A general outline of the devices and functions that need to be identified and setup are as
follows and viewed in Figure 141 below.
• Sonar
• Real-time Mosaic
• Navigation
• Fathometer
• Magnetometer
• Motion Sensor
• Layback
• Outputs
• Thermal Printer
Only the Sonar input plus some sort of position feed is mandatory as the remaining items
may or may not be required / desired depending on the sonar used and the ancillary
equipment used.
Sensor Status Icons
Each Sensor that is configured has a corresponding icon in the Status bar at the bottom right
of the SonarWiz Window. In Figure 140 below we see the following Sensor Status Icons:
SonarWiz5 User Guide Data Acquisition

Page 167
• Sidescan Sonar (Active)

• Navigation (Active)
• Fathometer (active)
• Magnetometer (Not connected)
• Sub Bottom Profiler (not Connected)
• Data Recording (not Recording)
Figure 140: Sensor Status Icons
4.2.1 Vessel
A vessel graphic may be displayed on the Map Window in order to assist the
visualization of the track following. Left-clicking the Vessel button in the
Configure Sensors section of the Data Acquisition Ribbon Menu opens the
Map Display Options Dialog (Figure 141) below.
Figure 141: Map Display Options Dialog

Page 168
Vessel Description
Name
• This window is automatically filled-in with the name of the vessel specified
in the Project Settings. Changing the name in this window will change
the name in the Project Settings dialog as well.
• Vessel names are used by SonarWiz in associating sonar files with a
particular vessel. This parameter is especially important if more than one
vessel is contributing sonar files to the final (post processed) project.
Description
• Optional
• This field is Meta-data only i.e. the information entered here is not used by
the program.
Length, Width & Draft
• Enter the values associated with these fields

Vessel Reference Position
N.B. Although this function exists it is not yet being implemented
completely.
If the Vessel's Reference Position (i.e. COG – Center of Gravity) is not at the 0,0,0
point of the vessel it may be entered here.
Offset From Vessel Center X (m)
• Athwartships measurement with +X being to starboard

Offset from Vessel Center Y (m)
• Athwartships measurement with +Y being towards the bow

Name
• User defined name of the Reference Point

Desc
• Optional Description field

Vessel Display
Draw Ship to Scale
• The ship graphic on the window may be drawn to true scale based on the
dimensions entered.
Draw Ship at Fixed Size at All Scales
• Three possible fixed sizes of vessel regardless of map scale ( Small,

Medium, or Large) are available.
Draw Ship with Projected Bow Line
• A projected bow line may be activated and given a true scale length in order
to assist the visualization of the ship heading.

Page 169
Keep Display Centered on Current Position
• This check box will ensure that the vessel is always in the center of the Map
Window so that the vessel does not “drive off” the screen. This check box
is the equivalent to the Auto Ship Centering Button
Ship Color
• A variety of colors are available in this pull-down menu for the user to
choose based on background colors, basemaps and overlays in use.
4.2.2 Sonar
In order to connect SonarWiz to a Sonar, the specific Sonar Server must be started.
Launching a local server or connecting to a remote server is accomplished by left-
clicking the Sonar Button (left) within the Data Acquisition Ribbon Menu.
Once clicked the Select Sonar Interface Dialog will appear Figure 142.
Figure 142: Select Sonar Interface
Running a Local Server

Page 170
1. Open the the Select Sonar Interface Dialog (Figure 142) by left-
clicking the Sonar Button
2. A list of Local Server modules installed on the local machine will be
displayed in the “Sidescan” and “Sub-bottom” fields. See Section 1.4 on
25 for complete details on the installation of Server modules.
3. Highlight (left-click) the server that you wish to start and press the
Start/Configure button. If the server is not currently running, it will be
started and its configuration dialog will be displayed. If the server is already
running, it's configuration dialog will be brought to the foreground.
4. Selecting AutoStart for either Server will cause the selected server(s) to be
started automatically each time the main program is launched. In Figure 142
the Tritech SeaKing Server is currently the only server running and it
will automatically start each time SonarWiz starts due to the AutoStart
check-box being populated.
5. Press OK to dismiss the dialog. N.B. This dialog is not required to be active
while the main program and server are running.
6. Use the server's configuration dialog to set or change any recording
parameters. See Section Error: Reference source not found starting on page
Error: Reference source not found to configure your specific Sonar Server
for recording.
Connecting to a Remote Server

It is possible to run a Sonar Server without launching SonarWiz thus creating a
“Remote Server” however a valid Hardware Dongle is required. In order to
connect to a remote server, that server must be manually started on the remote
PC. When this has been done, do the following from within SonarWiz:
1. Open the the Select Sonar Interface Dialog (Figure 142) by left-
clicking the Sonar Button
2. A entry for the remote server should be found in the list of remote servers
that are currently running on the LAN.
3. Highlight the remote server that you wish to connect to, press the
Connect button and then the OK button.
4. At this point data should start flowing into the SonarWiz system.
5. Autostart is not available for a remote server.
4.2.3 Navigation
The Navigation Input Interface shown in Figure 143 is opened by selecting
File>Configure>Configure Nav Inputs. This interface is used to set up a serial
or UDP (Ethernet) port to receive position fixes via the worldwide standard
NMEA-0183 protocol or other protocols listed below.

Page 171
Figure 143: Navigation Input Setup
Source and Port Selection

Enable Serial I/O
• A check in this box enables incoming navigation messages to be received

and parsed either via serial or Ethernet communications.
Shared SonarWiz Port
• When running SonarWiz with SonarWiz.SBP, the programs can share the
data from a single serial port. The shared check box sets up an area of
shared memory that both programs can access. The first program that
opens the serial port will copy the data to this shared memory location so
that the other program can also access it. This gets around the issue in
Windows where two programs can not open the same serial port.
Navigation Source
SonarWiz accepts many Navigation sources some of which are very specific to
individual clients. The sources available to be selected are:
• NMEA-0183
• Fugro 'ABHISOVNEh'
• FGSI SonarWiz SSS

Page 172
• FGSI SonarWiz SBP

• GeoWork/Trimble
• GeoWork/Trimble Pro
• HYPACK – Delph DLL
• Seasub7 – ADBMYHISNEGOvyx?>
• HYPACK Shared memory
• Watson – EGG 250
• Capital Signal – Eiva Lat/lon
• Capital Signal – Eiva X/Y
• C and C Technologies
• C and C Technologies Klein 5000
• GeoNav
• ISIS Ship/Fish Lat/Lon (ID Start)
• ISIS Ship/Fish Lat/Lon (ID End)
• Link Quest USBL (LQF) – Ship Fish/Lat/Lon
• Cochrane Technologies X/Y
This section will only discuss NMEA0183 however should the user require
assistance with the other Navigation Sources, contact CTI Support.
NMEA Record Types
• The NMEA-0183 sentences that are currently supported for position
include RMC, GGA (including RTK GGA),and GLL
• A GPS example of each of these sentences is included below. The sentences
supported for Heading include RMC, HDT, VHW and VTG.
• For more information about NMEA-0183 sentence formats, contact the
National Marine Electronics Association ( http://www.nmea.org) or search
the web for one of the many NMEA sentence structure references such as
the NMEA FAQ at:
http://www.acm.uiuc.edu/bug/projects/jason/nmeafaq.txt
• GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data

$GPGGA,123519,4807.038,N,01131.324,E,1,08,0.9,545
.4,M,46.9,M,,*42
• GLL - Geographic position, Latitude and Longitude
$GPGLL,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,225444,A
• RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/Transit data
$GPRMC,225446,A,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,000.5,054.7,
191194,020.3,E*68

Page 173
Serial Port Configuration

• If using a Serial Port to receive Navigation data, select the COM port where
the the navigation device has been connected to the PC.
• For users not familiar with COM ports an introduction to serial ports may
be found at:
http://www.taltech.com/TALtech_web/resources/intro-sc.html
• A more advanced guide may be found at:
http://www.arcelect.com/rs232.htm
• The radio buttons in the center of the dialog allow the serial port
communication protocol to be configured. The four pertinent parameters
are baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits.
Baud Rate / Data Bits / Parity / Stop Bits
• The NMEA-0183 interface standard is 4800 baud, eight (8) data bits, no
parity, and one (1) stop bit; "4800,8,None & 1" for RS-232 experts. Refer to
the user guide of your Navigation Unit in order to determine/configure the
navigation data being passed to SonarWiz via the serial cable.
UDP Port
• Some Navigation Units have the ability to transmit their data via Ethernet
using the User Datagram Protocol (UDP); use this option if this is the case
for the particular Navigation Unit in use.
• Like serial ports that use specific COM ports the UDP option requires a
specific port number. Refer to your Navigation Unit's documentation to
determine/configure the UDP port.
Miscellaneous Output Files
Raw Navigation (.NAV) – Serial Input Only
• ONLY for navigation received via serial port.

• When checked, SonarWiz records received navigation into a Raw
Navigation file
• .RAW Format:
◦ Date, Time, Lat, Lon, followed by the actual string that has just
arrived on the serial port.
◦ Example:
03/19/2007 05:53:01.203 37.275048166667
-121.086047666667$GPRMC,055301.109,A,3716.50289,N,
12105.16286,W,8.985,105.0,190307,0.0,E,A*10
Formatted Navigation File (.FNV)
• When checked, SonarWiz records received navigation into a Formatted

Navigation file which will be stored in the data logging path. By default this
is the XTF folder of the SonarWiz project but maybe customized by the
user.

Page 174
• Recorded file names automatically use the same name as the active XTF or
SEG-Y file if sonar recording is active. If sonar recording is not active but a
survey line is currently active for steering, the files will be named with the
survey line name. If neither of the above are true, then the file will be
named named ddMMMYYYY.FNV, where dd is 2-digit day of month,
MMM is 3 letter month abbrev like "JAN", "FEB", etc and YYYY is 4 digit
year.
• .FNV Format (per line):
◦ System Date,System Time,Ping Date, Ping Time,Ship Lon, Ship
Lat, Fish Lon, Fish Lat, Speed, Heading, Fish Altitude, Event
number, Ping Number @ Ping Rate, Depth At Ship, Cable out.
◦ Example:
◦ 03/20/2007,07:42:29.265,03/20/07 07:42:29,063° 35.8900' W,44°
41.2100' N,063° 35.8500' W,44° 41.2100' N,Spd: 0.0 kt,Hdg:
322.5°,Alt: 0.0 (m),Evt: 0,Ping: 7295 @ 16.98Hz,Dep: 0.0,Cbl: 20
Use SonarWiz Computed Speed
• When checked, SonarWizwill use the speed calculated and passed by the
Navigation Source.
• Only available with the following source messages:
◦ NMEA-0183, GeoWork/Trimble, GeoWork/Trimble PRO,
Capital Signal – Eiva Lat/Lon, Capital Signal – Eiva X/Y, C and C
Technologies, C and C Technologies Klein 5000, GeoNav
Validate NMEA Checksums
• When checked allows the user to ignore NMEA checksum values and still
attempt to parse the payload of the NMEA sentence even if the checksum
is invalid.
Fish Position
Compute Towfish Position
• When checked, SonarWiz will compute and record the position of the
towfish in the raw XTF file based on the Layback Setup whose display
may be activated by clicking the Layback Setup button or by selecting
Cable Payout Button. See Section 4.2.7 on page 181
Navigation Sensor Offset

• Not yet available
4.2.3.1 Loss of Navigation

If SonarWiz loses the configured navigation input the pop-up window in Figure 144
below will appear.

Page 175
Figure 144: Lost Navigation Input
4.2.4 Fathometer Setup

A fathometer (echosounder), capable of RS232 output, used during a survey may be
setup and recorded in SonarWiz. The setup a Fathometer select
File>Configure>Configure Fathometer Input . Once Selected the dialog in
Figure 145 below will appear.

Page 176
Figure 145: Fathometer Setup
Serial Port Setup

• Serial Port setup for the fathometer is the same as the serial port setup for
the Navigation Input. See Serial Port Configuration on page 173
Fathometer Type / Data Format
• The type of NMEA Depth Sentence being output by the Fathometer must
be selected. See your Fathometer to verify/configure your Fathometer's
output.
◦ NMEA DBT - Depth below transducer
$..DBT,xxxx.x,f,yyyy.y,M where xxxx.x is the decimal depth in
feet, f is the unit indicator (feet), yyyy.y is the depth in meters and
M is the unit indicator (meters)
Override the depth data received via the navigation interface
• When checked, the depth data received via the Navigation interface will be
replaced with the fathometer data.
Output File Format
Record Fathometer Data
• Checking this box results in SonarWiz recording Fathometer data in the

user specified format. Recorded file names automatically use the same name
as the active XTF or SEGY file if sonar recording is active.
• If sonar recording is not active but a survey line is currently active for
steering, the files will be named with the survey line name. If neither of the
above are true, then the file will be named named ddMMMYYYY.DEP,
where dd is 2-digit day of month, MMM is 3 letter month abbrev like

Page 177
"JAN", "FEB", etc and YYYY is 4 digit year. The fathometer data files will
be stored in the data logging path. By default this is the XTF folder of the
SWM project but maybe customized by the user.
Recording File Format
Figure 146: Fathometer Recording Format
• The information saved in the external fathometer data file is fully

configurable. The user left-clicks the File Format button and the dialog in
below will appear.
• The variables that the user wishes to have included in the external file are
activated by left-clicking the check-box at the left of the desired variable. All
varables with a check in their corresponding chjeck-box will be included in
the xternal file
• The order of the included variables is user-defined. Left-click and drag each
variable on the list to the desired position in the external file.
Delete
• Deletes a previously defined file format that is selected in the

Saved File Formats List.

Page 178
Confirm Delete
• When populated SonarWiz will ask the user to confirm deletion of a

pre-defined format.
Load
• Loads the selected pre-defined format in order to make it the active

format.
Save
• Saves the currently configured format such that it may be recalled

(Loaded) later.
4.2.5 Magnetometer
SonarWiz is capable of real-time collection of the following Magnetometers:
• AquaScan AX2000
• GEM 19M
• Geometrics 881 & 882
• Marine Magnetics Standard and with Depth
In real-time SonarWiz will both:
• Automatically build a CMF file and load it into the project (see
Section 5.2.1 on page 235 for more information on CMF files); and
• Display the navigation of the magnetometerin the Map Window
behind the vessel.
In order to connect SonarWiz to a serial Magnetometer left-click the

Magnetometer Button (left) within the Data Acquisition Ribbon Menu. Once
clicked the Magnetometer Setup will appear (Figure 147).

Page 179
Figure 147: Magnetometer Setup
Magnetometer Type and Port Selection

Enable Serial IO
• Enable the Magnetometer input by left-clicking and populating the check-

box with as check-mark.
• Select the COM port where the the navigation device has been connected to
the PC.
Magnetometer Type/Data Format
• Select the type of magnetometer connected to the SonarWiz PC and the

data format being output from that magnetometer
Serial Port Configuration
• Serial Port setup for the Magnetometer is the same process as for the serial
port setup for the Navigation Input. See Serial Port Configuration on
page 173. Refer to the user guide of your Magnetometer in order to
determine/configure the data being passed to SonarWiz via the serial cable.
Output File
• A separate data file containing the raw magnetometer data may be saved to
the project XTF folder.
• The format of the .MAG data file may be in one of three formats:
◦ Comma Delimited

Page 180
◦ Space Delimited
◦ C&C MAG format
Navigation and Sensor Offset
• Not yet implemented
4.2.6 Motion Sensor Input

SonarWiz is able to interface and record the following motion sensors in order to
record real-time heave with the aim of compensating SBP data :
• All serial motion sensors sending TSS01 Datagrams
In order to connect SonarWiz to a serial Motion Sensor left-click the Heave

Button (left) within the Data Acquisition Ribbon Menu. Once clicked the
Motion Sensor Setup Dialog will appear (Figure 148).
Figure 148: Motion Sensor Setup Dialog
Enable Serial IO
• Enable the Motion Sensor Serial input by left-clicking and

populating the check-box with as check-mark.
• Select the COM port where the the navigation device has been
connected to the PC.
Serial Port / Baud Rate / Data Bits/ Stop Bits / Parity
• Serial Port setup for the Motion Sensor is the same process as for
the serial port setup for the Navigation Input. See Serial Port
Configuration on page 173. Refer to the user guide of your

Page 181
Motion Sensor in order to determine/configure the data being

passed to SonarWiz via the serial cable.
Motion Sensor Type/Data Format
• Select the type of Motion Sensor connected to the SonarWiz PC or

the data format being output from that Motion Sensor
Output Files
• Separate data file(s) containing the raw motion sensor data may be
saved to the root project folder.
• Record Motion Sensor Data in Separate File
◦ A single file with the name <xxMonyyyy.IMU> will be

created where xx is the date, Mon is the first three
characters of the Month and yyyy is the year. This single file
will be appended with whenever a sonar file is being
written
◦ The format of the file is ASCII with each row rep[resenting
one record. Columns are are follows:
◦ Date Time Ship Latitude Ship Longitude Raw message
• Record Time, Pos, Motion Data
◦ A file with the name <name.IMU> will be created where

name is the same as the sonar file name being recorded. i.e.
there is a separate IMU file for each sonar data file.
◦ The file format is the same as that discussed in the
preceding paragraph
4.2.7 Cable Payout / Layback Setup

SonarWiz has the ability to calculate towfish layback, namely the along-track
distance that the the towfish is behind the vessel. The layback value is a function of
the vessel lever arm, or Sheave Offset, and the amount of cable out.
This section discusses how to configuring SonarWiz to log the values required to
calculate layback. The actual layback calculation will be discussed in Section 5.14.4.
on page 397.
Figure 149 is the Sonar Layback Configuration dialog that is activated by left-
clicking Cable Payout button (left) within the Data Acquisition Ribbon
Menu.

Page 182
Figure 149: Sonar Layback Configuration
Compute Towfish Position

• When the check-box is populated it tells SonarWiz to use the values from
this dialog and the Cable Payout Configuration Dialog to calculate
layback. This check-box is a repeat of the same option located in the
Navigation setup (Section 4.2.3 on page 170)
Sheave Offset from GPS in Meters

• The first step in configuring the layback is to measure and record the
port/stbd and fore/aft offset of the sheave from the GPS antenna. Figure
150 below show s the lever-arm convention used in SonarWiz. Specifically
measurements are taken from the GPS antenna to the sheave with an
athwartship offset positive in the starboard direction (away from the GPS
antenna) and negative aft of the GPS antenna.
• Example:
◦ The Sheave in Figure 149 is 3 meters starboard of the GPS antenna
and 8 meters aft of the GPS antenna; therefore X=3 and Y= -8.
Sheave Height Above Waterline
• The value of Z is the height of the sheave above the sea surface. This
vertical offset value of Z is combined with the towfish sensor depth to aid

Page 183
in the towfish position estimate. For example, a sheave height of two meters
above the waterline is specified as Z=2.
• SonarWiz will not allow the entry of negative numbers for Sheave Height.
Figure 150: Offset Diagram
Cable Out Source

• Users may choose one of three:
• Manual Entry; or
• Cable from Navigation Interface; or
• Payout meter
• Manual Entry
• Selecting this option requires the operator to manually input the

cable out value in the Manual Entry Box (Figure 149)
If the operator does not enter the cable out value in Real-time it is
imperative that the cable out value be recorded in a log such that it
may be applied in post-processing..
Cable out From Nav Interface
• Navigation interfaces such as HYPACK and FGSI contain the cable out
information which SonarWiz is instructed to observe with this selection.
Payout Meter
• SonarWiz accepts many Cable Out sources, and like Navigation Sources,
some are very specific to individual clients. The specific sources available to
be selected are:
• Manual Layback (discussed above)
• Cable Out from Nav Interface (discussed above)

Page 184
• 3PS Cable Counter

• ADAC-P Cable Counter
• MacArtney MKII
• MD-TOTCO
• Measurement Tech NW LCI-90/LCI-100
• Metrox Payout Meter
• Middlebury College Meter
• ORE-BATS-PORE
• RedLion Cable Meter SSI Layback
• SSI Cable Meter
• Subsea PI-5600
• TCount Meter
Figure 151: Drop Down List of Payout Meters
Payout Meter Configuration

• Users that have a cable payout meter may interface these with SonarWiz via
a serial connection.
• Left-clicking the Select/Configure Button in the Sonar Layback
Configuration dialog opens the Payout Meter Configuration Dialog
seen in Figure 152

Page 185
Figure 152: Payout Meter Configuration
Cable Meter Type
• The drop-down list (Figure 151) shows all the payout meters known to
SonarWiz; choose the appropriate meter.
If your particular payout meter model is not listed in the Cable Meter
Type list contact CTI Support with a sample of your meter's output
before you go out to survey so that it may be added to the program.
Cable Offset
• A fixed amount of cable to add or subtract from the Payout Meter

reading. The most likely scenario where this field would be populated
would be where the tow fish is at the waterline but the meter does not read
zero. The Cable Offset would be added to the meter reading to make the
resultant cable out value zero.
Counter Scalar
• The Counter Scalar is the product of two variables:

• Variable A: Conversion to meters: For example, if the counter
outputs its values in feet then the first variable would be 0.3048
• Variable B: Cable Diameter correction: The diameter of the cable
used on the sheave may be such that it does not sit completely in
the well of the sheave. In order to verify this value, pay out a (hand)

Page 186
measured amount of cable (100 meters) and read the counter value.
If the value is anything other than the measured value a scalar must
be applied. For example of the measured amount was 100 meters
but the counter read 110 meters the second variable would be 1.1
• Scalar = A * B In this example the scalar would be product of
0.3048 and 1.1, namely 0.33528
Catenary Coefficient
• An estimate of the along-track distance correction factor due to the

depression angle of the tow cable and the curvature. Figure 153 below
illustrates the effect that the curvature in the two cable (centenary) can have
on the estimate of the towfish along-track offset.
Figure 153: Effects of Cable Catenary
N.B.
• Estimating the catenary coefficient is a matter of experience for a
particular cable, towfish, speed and area and best derived through
layback corrections applied in postprocessing. If the catenary
coefficient is not known, leave the default value of “1” and adjust
for catenary effects in postprocessing (see Section 5.14.5 on page
398) well, the catenary coefficient does not affect the recorded
cable-out value i.e. regardless of the catenary coefficient value if
there are x meters of cable out then x will be stored in the raw data
file.
Serial Port Setup
• Once the correct payout meter has been selected the Com port must be
configured (Figure 154) in order to receive, record and apply the Payout
Meter values. Serial Port setup for a Payout Meter is the same as the
serial port setup for the Navigation Input. See Serial Port Configuration
on page 173.

Page 187
Figure 154: Payout Meter COM Port Settings
4.2.8 Outputs
To configure an output interface that sends ASCII information either via serial or
UDP left-click the Outputs menu within the Data Acquisition Ribbon Menu
which will present the dialog shown in Figure 155
Figure 155: Outputs Dialog

Page 188
Devices
This window lists all outputs currently configured in SonarWiz. Columns include the
name of the output device, the type (serial or UDP), the number of fields if it is a
custom device and the interval between message transmission in milliseconds.
Add
• Left-click ths button to create a new output device. Once created the device
is configured below.
Copy
• Left-click to copy the highlighted device to a new row at the end of the
Device table.
Delete
• Deletes the currently selected output device.

Device Settings
Name
• User specified (optional) name of the output device currently highlighted in

the Devices table.
Enable Output
• Toggles Output on and off

Output Device Configuration
User may select either media below for output message transmission:
• Serial Port: Once selected choose the specific port and parameters
required
• UDP Port: Once selected chose the UDP port number required.
Transmit Interval
Transmit Every ____ milliseconds
• The user-specified number of milliseconds between the start of each output

datagram.
• The green LED will flash at the specified interval when the device is
enabled.
Start on a ____ second boundary
• Output messages can be configured to start on a user selectable time. For

example, it is now possible to send out any message every 5 minutes on the
even minute interval. This request allows users to annotate external devices
on even intervals for example like at: 12:00, 12:05, 12:10, etc.
Datagram Type
The user chooses the type of NMEA 0183 pre-formatted datagram to be output,
unless a custom output is desired. Choices include:

Page 189
• GGA – Position string

• GLL – Position string
• RMC – Position string
• XTE – Autopilot cross-track error string
• APA – Autopilot cross-track error string
• APB (km) – Autopilot cross-track error string in kilometers.
• APB (nm) – Autopilot cross-track error string in nautical miles. Simrad
Autopilots require nm.
• Sensitivity: The higher the sensitivity the more aggressive the
autopilot will be in trying to hold the line (APB only)
See http://www.gpsinformation.org/dale/nmea.htm#nmea for more
information on NMEA 0183 string formats.
Custom Datagram Configuration

• User may choose any or all of the the parameters listed in the Available
Fields Window to be sent as part of the ASCII datagram. Specifically the
following parameters are available:
◦ Age of Differential Correction

◦ Base Station ID
◦ Course
◦ Day
◦ Easting
◦ Fish Latitude
◦ Fish Longitude
◦ Geodesy
◦ Geodesy Key
◦ Geoid Height
◦ GPS Quality
◦ HDOP
◦ Heading
◦ Hour
◦ LineDistAcross
◦ LineDistBegin
◦ LineDistEnd
◦ Minute
◦ Month
◦ Northing
◦ Number Satellites used in GPS solution
◦ Second
◦ Ship Latitude
◦ Ship Longitude
◦ Speed
◦ Water Depth
◦ Year

Page 190
Configuration Icons
>>
• Moves all fields in the Available Fields window to the Output Fields
Window
>
• Moves selected field(s) in the Available Fields window to the Output
Fields Window
<
• Moves selected field(s) in the Output Fields window to the Available
Fields Window
<<
• Moves all fields in the Output Fields window to the Available Fields
Windo variable in the datagram whereas the variable at the bottom og the
list will be the last variable in the datagram.
+
• Moves the selected field(s) in the Output Fields window up in the list
-
• Moves the selected field(s) in the Output Fields window down in the list
Status Window
• Displays the current message being output.
4.3 Survey Lines

SonarWiz can assist you in planning and conducting your sidescan sonar survey using several
tools for laying out preplanned track-lines or survey lines. Survey lines constructed using
these tools are stored as part of the project. During the survey, the Left-Right Steering
Indicator bar can be used to help steer a consistent course along the survey lines.
Figure 156 is a screen capture of SonarWiz being used in Real-time for data collection. The
vessel (blue) is on a northwesterly course and is currently 10.6m to the right of the active
survey line as seen in the Left Right Steering Indicator.

Page 191
Figure 156: Real-time Using Survey Lines
4.3.1 The SHIFT and Control Keys

The Control <Ctrl> and Shift <Shift> keys assist the user to create and modify
survey lines in an efficient and intuitive manner.
Shift Key
Pressing and holding the <Shift> key while creating or modifying a survey line or
group of lines causes the line to snap to bearings in 15 degree increments based on
000 as the starting point.
Control Key
Pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key while the cursor is hovering over the end-
point of a line, or pivot point in a group of lines (See Section 4.3.8 on page 212)
causes the line or group of lines to rotate about the center point.
Pressing and holding the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys together while the cursor is
hovering over the end-point of a line, or pivot point in a group of lines (See Section
4.3.8 on page 212) causes the line or group of lines to rotate about the center point
in 15 degree increments

Page 192
4.3.2 Draw A Base Survey Line

To begin drawing a base survey line, left-click on the Add Line button (left) in the
Survey Lines Section of the Data Acquisition Ribbon and the cursor will turn
into a Pen icon. Begin by left-clicking on the map where you want the line to start
and then left-click on the desired termination point as shown in Figure 157
Figure 157: Drawing a Single (Base) Survey Line with Mouse
4.3.3 Generate Parallel Lines

Select the line to be “cloned” with a mouse left-click and right-click to see the
context sensitive pop up menu in Figure 158
In the specific case above in Figure 157, immediately after completing the line, the
user would need to right-click once more to turn the Pen cursor into a Pointer
cursor, then select the line with a left-click, and finally right click to see the context
sensitive pop up menu in Figure 158
Figure 158: Survey Line Right-click Context Menu
1. Select (left-click) “Generate Lines Parallel to the Selected Line... ”

2. The context sensitive pop-up menu in Figure 159 appears

Page 193
Figure 159: Cloning Pop Up
Root Line
• The name, range and bearing of the selected line to be cloned

Base Name of New Lines
• User-entered line name which serves as a prefix to the new lines and their
numbers to be generated
Number of lines to generate
• User-entered value indicating the number of new lines to be created parallel

to the Root Line
Spacing between the lines (units)
• Spacing (in project units) between lines

• SonarWiz will respect the units of the project i.e. if the project units are in
US Feet then the Spacing between lines must be entered in US Feet. In
Figure 159 the project units are meters.
Use Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM)
• See section 4.3.6 on page 207 for detailed description of the Use Efficient
Survey Pattern (MCM) option.
Generate Lines to the...
Left
• X lines will be generated to the left of the Root Line where X is the value
specified in Number of lines to generate
Right

Page 194
• X lines will be generated to the right of the Root Line where X is the
value specified in Number of lines to generate
Left & Right
• X lines will be generated to the left AND to the right of the Root Line
where X is the value specified in Number of lines to generate
4.3.4 Line Manager

Tabular editing of survey lines is performed in the Line Manager dialog (Figure
160). This dialog is opened by one of several methods:
1. Left-clicking on the Line Manager button (left) in the Survey Lines

Section of the Data Acquisition Ribbon.
2. Selecting Survey Line Manager... in the survey line right-click context
pop-up menu
3. Pressing F12 Hot key on the keyboard
Figure 160: Line Manager
The Line Manager is used to list all the lines in the project and their properties. As
well the Line Manager can be used to perform many line related functions, all of
which are discussed below.
New Line(s)
• Allows for the addition of a new line by entering end point coordinates,
name, etc. by opening the Survey Line Editor Dialog (Figure 162). See
Survey Line Editor on page 197 for more information on this dialog.
Edit Line(s)
• Edits the line(s) currently selected (highlighted) in the Line List by opening
the Survey Line Editor Dialog (Figure 162). See Survey Line Editor on
page 197 for more information on this dialog.

Page 195
N.B. When multiple lines are selected only Range, Bearing, Line Style, Line Color, and
Line Thickness may be edited
Delete Line(s)
• Deletes the line(s) currently selected (highlighted) in the Line List

Reverse Lines
• Switches the Starting and Ending points of the line which is equivalent to
adding/subtracting 180 degrees to/from the Bearing value.
Steer Selected
• Makes the selected line the reference line for the Steering Left Right
Indicator. See section 2.5.1.14 on page 80 for more information.
Survey Time...
• Opens the Survey Time Estimator Dialog in Figure 163 which is used to
give the surveyor an estimate. See Survey Time Estimator on page 200
Select All
• Selects (highlights) all lines in the Line List

Cancel
• Closes the the Line Manager rejecting all changes since the Line Manger
was last opened.
OK
• Closes the the Line Manager accepting all changes since the Line
Manger was last opened.
File
Save Time!!
SonarWiz can directly import your existing HYPACK .lnw files

and Winfrog .pts files!
Import Lines
• Imports lines either a Comma Separate Value (CSV) file in the SonarWiz
format (from above), HYPACK “.LNW” points files or in the WinFrog
“.PTS” format.
• CSV Format: Each line in the file must have the following comma separated
fields below. Note that values for the fields in BOLD are mandatory as are
the commas between (blank) flields.
• Enabled flag (1=enabled, 0=disabled)
• Selected flag (1=selected, 0=deselected)

Page 196
• Starting Latitude (decimal degrees, +'ve = Northern Hemisphere),

• Starting Longitude (decimal degrees, +'ve = Eastern
Hemisphere),
• Ending Latitude (decimal degrees, +'ve = Northern Hemisphere),
• Ending Longitude (decimal degrees, +'ve = Eastern Hemisphere),
• Color ( Not yet implemented - use default value “255”)
• Style ( Not yet implemented - use default value “0”)
• Thickness ( Not yet implemented - use default value “1”)
• Range (meters) (optional – leave blank if required)
• Bearing (decimal degrees) (optional – leave blank if required)
Example:
• BaseSearch,,,44.72234,-63.655667,44.843879,-63.74456,255,0,1,,
• The above example creates a survey line in SonarWiz when
imported into the Survey Line Manager. In this particular case the
Enabled, Selected, Heading and Range were left blank.
Export Lines
• Exports ALL lines in the Line List to either a Comma Separate Value (CSV)
file or an ESRI Shapefile. The user may specify the file name and the
directory where the file(s) will be created.
Send Lines to Helm
• Sends lines to Network PC operating NavWiz (see Section 4.5 on page 220)
Line Groups
Groups Window
• Lists all line groups that the user has created in addition to the default
<all> lines group
Group
• Left-clicking this button will cause all selected lines in the line list to be
grouped together
Ungroup
• Left-clicking this button will cause the selected group to be disbanded

Remove Selected
• Removes the selected line(s) in the line list to be removed from the selected
group
Rename
• Allows user to rename the currently selected group

Drawing

Page 197
Draw Lane Tolerance __ meters
• Draws a “lane” centered on the active survey line equal to twice the user
specified distance in order to assist with Real-time line steering. In Figure
161 below the lane is 30m wide centered on the active line as the user
specified a Lane Tolerance of 15 meters.
Label Lines at SOL
• Draws a label at the start of the Survey Line in the Map Window
Label Lines at SOL
• Draws a label at the start of the Survey Line in the Map Window
Figure 161: Lane Tolerance - Active Line Only
Survey Line Editor

Page 198
Figure 162: Survey Line Editor
When multiple lines are selected only Range, Bearing, Line Style, Line Color,
and Line Thickness may be edited. The other boxes will be grayed-out.
Name
• User-entered line name

Starting Latitude / Starting Y
• User entered coordinates of the starting point of the new line in either
degrees of latitude (DD.dddd, DD MM.mmmm or DD MM SS.ssss) or
Northing in project units format
Ending Latitude / Ending Y
• User entered coordinates of the ending point of the new line in either
• N.B. SonarWiz will automatically calculate this value if the the Range
and/or Bearing box is modified.
Starting Longitude / Starting Y
• User entered coordinates of the starting point of the new line in either
Ending Latitude / Ending Y

Page 199
• User entered coordinates of the ending point of the new line in either
• N.B. SonarWiz will automatically calculate this value if the the Range
and/or Bearing box is modified.
Range
• The user may enter a line length in this box after the Starting coordinates
have been specified which will result in the Ending coordinates being
calculated and their appropriate boxes populated
• N.B. SonarWiz will automatically calculate this value if the the Ending
coordinates are modified.
Bearing
• The user may enter a line bearing in this box after the Starting coordinates
have been specified which will result in the Ending coordinates being
calculated and their appropriate boxes populated
• N.B. SonarWiz will automatically calculate this value if the the Ending
coordinates are modified.
Line Style
• Line styles available include Solid, Dash, Dash Dot and Invisible
Run-in
• An extension of the beginning of the survey that while not part of the actual
survey is used by the helmsman to get on track prior to the start of the
actual line.
Run-out
• An extension of the survey at the end of the line that while not part of the
actual survey is used by the helmsman to stay on track after the ship passes
the end of the line in order to get the sonar to the end of the line as well.
Line Color
• A large spectrum of possible lines are available

Line Thickness
• Five thicknesses are available of which one may be assigned to the line
Edit Mode
OK
• Closes the the Survey Line Editor accepting all changes since the
Survey Line Editor was last opened.
Cancel
• Closes the the Survey Line Editor rejecting all changes since the Survey
Line Editor was last opened.
Reverse

Page 200
Clone
• Opens the Cloning Dialog. See Select the line to be “cloned” with a
mouse left-click and on page 192
Survey Time Estimator
Figure 163: Survey Time Estimator Dialog
Survey Speed (kts)
• User estimate of average speed during the planned survey

Turn Time per Line (sec)
• User estimate of average time per turn between lines during the planned
survey

Page 201
Summary
• Calculated time taken for the slected lines based on the survey Speed, and
Turn Time
Select All
• Selects all lines in the Line List

Line List
• A list of all lines in the project. When the check-box to the left of the line is
populated the line will be used in the survey time estimate.
OK
• Closes the the Survey Time Estimator accepting all changes since the
Survey Time Estimator was last opened.
Cancel
• Closes the the Survey Time Estimator rejecting all changes since the
Survey Time Estimator was last opened.
Report
• Creates a Comma Separated Value (.CSV) file with four columns, namely
Line, Length, Online Time and Turn Time (sec)
4.3.5 Line Tools
The Lines Tools button (left) is located in the Survey Lines Section of the
Data Acquisition Ribbon and opens a drop down list of tools (Figure 164) each
of which are discussed below.

Page 202
Figure 164: Lines Tools Drop Down List
Cut / Copy / Paste Selected Lines

These three functions perform the standard editing functions where a selected line
or set of lines can be cut (removed), copied and/or pasted in the Map Window.
Build Line Set Around Contact
During a survey it may occur that a contact of interest requires further investigation.
SonarWiz allows the user to automatically create a set of offset survey lines around
a contact in the Map Window.
To open the Build Line Set Around Contact Dialog the user may:
1. Left-click the Build Line Set Around Contact selection in the Line
Tools Drop Down Menu (Figure 164)
2. Right-click the selected target in the Map Window and select Build Line
Set Around Contact (Figure 165)

Page 203
Figure 165: Right-clicking a Contact
3. Pressing the Hot-keys Ctrl+Shift+A

Regardless of the method chosen above the dialog in Figure 166 below will open.
Figure 166: Add Survey Line to Target Dialog
The user is presented with a the name of the currently selected contact. The
lateral Distance Off Target and the Line Length (in meters) is entered byt
the user. For the example above the result is shown in Figure 167 below.

Page 204
Figure 167: Result of Building Lines Around Contact
Draw Survey Route Using Mouse

A route is a group of connected lines with zero or more lines parallel to the center
track-line. Routes are useful for harbor surveys where multiple parallel lines are
required for harbor clearance.
1. To begin drawing a route, select the Draw Route Using Mouse option
from the Line Tools Drop Down Menu (Figure 164)
2. Left click on the map where the route should start and continue to add left
click points at the endpoints of each segment of the route. It is not
necessary to hold the mouse button down while drawing a route.
3. When you have drawn all of the segments press the right mouse button and
the dialog shown in Figure 168 will be displayed. Note as well that the
Group Icon appears (See Grouping Lines on page 212)

Page 205
Figure 168: Survey Route Building Dialog
4. Use this dialog to specify how many lines to construct parallel to the line
just drawn (the root line).
5. You may also specify distance between lines, and the location of the
constructed lines relative to the root line.

Page 206
Figure 169: A Completed Survey Route
6. The constructed lines will be given names consisting of the base name
specified followed by a sequence number, Followed by the letter R or L to
indicate whether the line if left of right of the root line. Example:
harbor0001-R. Figure 169 shows a collection of parallel survey lines
constructed in this manner.
Edit Selected Line
• Opens the Survey Line Editor dialog for the line(s) currently selected line
in the Line List. See Survey Line Editor on page 197.
Delete Selected Line
• Deletes the currently selected line(s) in the Line List
Steer the Selected Line
• Makes the selected line the reference line for the Steering Left Right
Indicator. See section 2.5.1.14 on page 80 for more information.
Generate Lines Parallel to the Selected Line

• Opens the Clone dialog in order to generate parallel line(s) to the currently
selected line in the Line List

Page 207
• See Generate Parallel Lines on page 192 for more information on the
Cloning Dialogue.
Lock Survey Lines

• Prevents on-screen (graphical editing).
Reverse Current Survey Line
Select Next Survey Line
• Makes the next sequential survey line active in order to be the the reference
line for the Steering Left Right Indicator. See section 2.5.1.14 on page
Select Previous Survey Line
• Makes the previous sequential survey line active in order to be the the
reference line for the Steering Left Right Indicator. See section 2.5.1.14
4.3.6 Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM)

Small-object and Mine Counter Measure surveys focus on detecting sub-meter
objects and as such cannot ignore the area directly below the fish whose poor
resolution due to geometry acts as a blind-spot to small objects. Generally this blind-
spot, known s the “nadir-gap”, extends form nadir (directly under the Towfish) to
the first return (about 30-40 degrees either side of nadir).
In order to “see” any objects in the nadir gap of any one line, a second line must be
run such that the entire nadir gap from the first line is ensonified in the second (see
Figure 170)
Figure 170: Complete Nadir Gap Coverage
Typically, when covering the nadir-gap, surveyors will choose a single value for line
spacing and generate a survey pattern similar to the one in Figure 171. Unfortunately

Page 208
this pattern quite inefficient as the nadir gap is covered twice for every line bounded
by the first and last lines.
Figure 171: Inefficient Survey Pattern
SonarWiz uses an efficient survey line pattern that reduces the time required to
cover the same area as Figure 171 above by over 40% by following the formulae in
Figure 172 below.
Figure 172: Efficient Survey Pattern
Example:
For a 1 nm2 Area to be surveyed at 75m range with an planned maximum altitude of
10m and an overlap of 10m: Using the Standard Pattern in Figure 171 yields 34 line
miles + 32 turns. Using the SonarWiz Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM) yields 20
line miles + 18 turns which is a 40% Savings! See Figure 173.

Page 209
Figure 173: Efficient Pattern vs Non-Efficient
To use the the Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM) simply calculate the interline
distance required base on the sonar range, maximum planned altitude and the
overlap (helmsman's accuracy)and enter that number in the Spacing between
lines box and the Use Efficient Survey Pattern (MCM) check box is activates
(Figure 174)
From the example above:
Minor Distance = 75m – (10m + 10m) = 55m
Major Distance = 2 x 75m – 10m = 140m
Figure 174: Entering Efficient Survey Pattern Values

Page 210
4.3.7 Graphical Line Editing

To graphically edit a survey line first select it with a left-click. When selected the line
will appear as “bold” (Figure 175)
Figure 175: Two Survey Lines with Upper Line Selected
Move
• To move the currently selected line, hover the cursor over the line, such
that the 4-headed move arrow appears (Figure 176a) and then left-click and
drag the line to its desired location. The line will be moved to the location
without a change in either the line bearing or length.
Change Length And Bearing
• To change the length or bearing of a line hover the cursor over one of the
end-points and the cursor will change to a two-headed arrow (Figure 176b).
Left-click and drag the end-point to change the length and/or orientation of
the line.
Change Length Only
• To change the length of a line without changing the bearing, hover the
cursor over one of the end-points and the cursor will change to a two-
headed arrow (Figure 176b). Hold down the <Alt> key and Left-click and
drag the end-point to change the length of the line.
Shift Key
• Pressing and holding the <Shift> key while creating or modifying a survey
line or group of lines causes the line to snap to bearings in 15 degree
increments based on 000 as the starting point.
Control Key
• Pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key while the cursor is hovering over the
end-point of a line, or pivot point in a group of lines (See Section 4.3.8 on
page 212) causes the line or group of lines to rotate about the center point.

Page 211
• Pressing and holding the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys together while the
cursor is hovering over the end-point of a line, or pivot point in a group of
lines (See Section 4.3.8 on page 212) causes the line or group of lines to
rotate about the center point in 15 degree increments
a. Move Cursor b. Change Cursor c. Rotate Cursor
Figure 176: Modify Survey Line Cursors
If the line will not move, it is probably locked. Unlock by using the pop-up
context menu.
To display the pop-up menu for the currently selected line (Figure 177), right click
on the line.

Page 212
Figure 177: Survey Line Pop-up Context Menu
Items in the survey in the pop-up menu are a subset of those accessible from the
Survey Line Manager. See Section 4.3.4 on page 197 for a discussion on the
Survey Line Manager and information on each of the functions in the context
menu in Figure 177
4.3.8 Grouping Lines

Lines may be grouped together in order to perform line edits to more than one line
at a time.
To Group 2 or More Lines
• Left-click select the first line of the desired group and then hold the
<Ctrl> key while left-click selecting one or more additional lines. The
Group icon will appear as soon as a second line is selected (Figure 178).
Once all the desired lines are selected release the <Ctrl> key and left-click
the Group icon.

Page 213
Figure 178: Selected Lines and Group Icon
Modifying Grouped Lines
• To move the entire group, without changing any line rages or bearings, left-
click and drag the group while the 4-headed arrow cursor is visible
• To Stretch or Compress in either the X or Y axis, without affecting the
other axis, left-click and drag either of the two X axis nodes or either of two
Y Axis Nodes (Figure 179)
• To Stretch or Compress in the X and Y axis left-click and drag any one of
the four X/Y Axis Nodes (Figure 179). Holding the <Shift> key on any of
the corner nodes scales the lines equally in the X and Y directions
• To Rotate the entire group left-click and drag the Rotate Node (Figure 179).
Holding the <Shift> key while rotating the group constrains the line group
bearings to 15 degree increments.

Page 214
Figure 179: Group Manipulation Nodes
Right-click Grouped Lines Functions
• When the survey line group is selected the Group Icon is always visible.
Right-clicking the Group Icon reveals the pop-up context menu in Figure
180 below
Ungroup Selected
• Ungroups the current group allowing editing of individual lines

Remove Selected from Group
• Within a group it is possible to select a line by left-clicking the desired line

(Figure 180)
• Using the right-click pop up menu on the Group icon left-click Remove
Selected from Group to exclude the selected line from the group

Page 215
Figure 180: Group Right-Click Functions
Rename Selected Group
• Opens a pop-up menu where the user may name or rename the group
(Figure 181)
• Group names are used in the Survey Line Manager (See Line Manager on
page 194

Page 216
Figure 181: Rename Survey Line Group
Delete Selected From Group
• Deletes the selected survey line within the group
4.3.9 Adding Lines Within a Feature

If a closed Feature or Rectangle has been created (See Section 5.16.2 on page 440),
such as the one shown in Figure 182 below , survey lines may be generated inside
that feature. This is useful for automatically creating survey line within an irregular
area such as a marina or harbor.

Page 217
Figure 182: Build Survey Line within Feature
To create survey lines within a Feature:

• Center on the feature in the Map Window
• Right click on the Feature border (Figure 182)to open the right-click
pop-up menu
• Select Build Survey Lines in Selected Feature to open in the
dialog in Figure 183
Figure 183: Build Survey Lines Within Feature Dialog
• Fill in the boxes in Figure 183 with the appropriate information. See
Section 4.3.6 on page 207 for more information on Efficient Survey
Pattern

Page 218
• Click OK and results similar to those shown in Figure 184 should

appear.
Figure 184: Lines Within a Feature
4.4 Survey Line Following

The previous section (4.3.2) discusses how to create, edit, import and export survey lines.
Once the user has a set of survey lines for use in the active project, SonarWiz can guide the
helmsman along the desired track.. This section discusses how to use SonarWiz alone for
active navigation. See Section 9 starting on page 721 for instructions on the use of
SonarWiz.NAV in concert with SonarWiz for active navigation.
4.4.1 Display Survey Lines

If the existing survey lines for the project are not already displayed on the Map
Window, select:
• Line Manager... (left); or
• F12
Once the Line Manager is open, select the specific lines desired displayed by
individually selecting check box to the left each each line. All lines may be made
visible by selecting the check box at the top of the left hand column beside
“Enable”. The user may then click OK to close the Line Manager and return to
the Map Window or make a line active from within the Line Manager (see next
section).

Page 219
4.4.2 Steer the Selected Line

A survey line that is desired to be followed by the helmsman with assistance from
the program must first be made active. A line may be made active by either one of
the following methods:
• Within Line Manager, select the desired line (left-click) and click on the
Steer Selected button
• In the Map Window select the desired line (left-click), Right-click to bring
up the context pop-up menu (Figure 177) and select Steer the Selected
Line; or
• Left-click Steer Selected icon in the Survey Line Controls Toolbar

(See Section 2.5.1.6 on page 67)
4.4.3 Activate Next/Previous Survey Line

The Next or Previous survey line may be activated for steering by:
• Left-clicking on the desired line to select it and then right-clicking and
selecting Steer the Selected Linee from the context pop up menu
(Figure 177)
• Using the hot-keys Shift+N for next line and Shift+P for previous line; or
• Left-click the Next or Previous icons in the Survey Line Controls
Toolbar (See Section 2.5.1.6 on page 67)
4.4.4 Build Line Set Around Contact

A set of offset survey lines may be automatically drawn around a contact in the Map
Window. See Section 4.3.5 on page 202 for details.
4.4.5 Reverse Survey Line

The “direction” of a survey line is the program's assumption of the direction of
travel of he vessel during the actual survey. Frequently the assumed/planned line
direction does not reflect the reality of the situation during the survey and the vessel
ends up starting at he “end” of a line rather than the start. In order to correct the
line direction to reflect reality the line direction must be reversed.
To reverse the direction of a survey line the user has four options:
• Within Line Manager, select the desired line (left-click), click on the Edit
Line(s) button, and click the Reverse button within the Survey Line
Editor; or
• In the Map Window select the desired line (left-click), right-click to bring up
the context pop-up menu (Figure 177) and select Reverse Current
Survey Line;
• In the select the desired line (left-click) and type the hot-keys Alt+; or

Page 220
• Left-click Reverse icon in the Survey Line Controls Toolbar (See

Section 2.5.1.6 on page 67)
4.4.6 Left Right Steering Indicator

The Left Right Steering Indicator is a graphical tool that indicates the vessel
distance traveled ALONG the active survey line, the active survey LINE name, and
the distance TO END of the active line. The value of the teal vertical hash marks and
the outer extents adjust automatically in order to keep the red vertical hash mark
with the graphic itself.
All values displayed are in Project units.
The Left Right Steering Indicator may be displayed by
• Selecting Left Right Steering Indicator under the Toolbars button on
the Data Display Command group within the View Ribbon Menu;
• Typing “Alt+L”; or
• Left-click LR Steering Indicator icon in the Survey Line Controls
Toolbar (See Section 2.5.1.6 on page 67)
Figure 185: Left Right Steering Indicator
4.4.7 Vessel (Ship Display) Options

visualization of the track following. See Section 4.2.1 on page 167 for more
information on viewing the vessel in the Map Window in Real-time.
4.5 NavWiz
NavWiz is a program installed with the rest of the SonarWiz Suite of tools that used as a
helm display on a remote computer connected to the same network as a licensed copy of
SonarWiz Real-Time.
Requirements to run NavWiz:
1. Master PC: A PC running a licensed version of SonarWiz Real-Time with
a) A network connection and defined IP Address
b) The installed firewall must be modified to allow SonarWiz to access the network

Page 221
c) In the program Advanced Options the Remote Helm Display must be set
to Broadcast Navigation on Network and the Remote Helm
Application must be set to NavWiz (See Section 2.8.8 on page 121)
2. NavWiz (remote) PC: A PC with SonarWiz installed plus:

a) A program dongle is NOT required
b) The PC must be connected to the same Network as the Real-Time PC with a
compatible IP address
c) The Program “NavWiz.exe” (normally located in the C:\Program Files
(x86)\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWiz5 directory) must be running
4.5.1 NavWiz Display

The NavWiz display interface (Figure 186) is intentionally designed to be as simple
an interface as possible. This design allows for those helmsmen who are not
surveyors or even masters of Windows to steer the vessel with minimal software
training.
Figure 186: NavWiz Program
View
The View Section turns the Status and Map Toolbars as well as open the Maps
Controller (see below).

Page 222
Status Bar
• Displays Cursor Latitude and Longitude

• If a DTM is loaded as a basemap then the Z value field will be populated
Map toolbar
• The Map Toolbar allows the user to select the following functions:
When the display is zoomed in, the mouse cursor may be used as a
Pan tool. To Pan, drag the image using the left mouse button in the
direction you wish to move the view area. Release the left mouse
button and the display will be updated, centered at the new location
Zoom Window: Left-Click and hold to drag a box over a specific
area in either window to be zoomed. Release the mouse button to
activate the zoom.
Zoom In 10%: Left-Click the toolbar button to zoom the active
window in by 10% of current resolution.
Zoom Out 10%: Left-click the toolbar button to zoom the active
window out by 10% of current resolution.
Fit To View: Left-Click to the toolbar button have the Map

Window fit all visible basemaps files.
Measure: Measures horizontal distance and true bearing. Left-Click

at first point and drag cursor to second point. Range and bearing line
will stay fixed when left mouse button is released
Resize Map Control Tool Bar
Maps
A simplified version (Figure 187) of the SonarWiz Map Manager where the user may
select a Map to display in the background of the Map Window or close a currently
listed map.
See Section 3.3 on Page 144 for more information on maps.

Page 223
Figure 187: NavWiz Map Manager
Toolbars
Ship Info
• Displays textual information on ship navigation attributes

Towfish Info
• Displays textual information on towfish navigation attributes
4.5.2 Survey Lines in NavWiz

Survey Lines are not loaded in NavWiz but Sent from SonarWiz using the Survey
Line Manager (See Section 4.3.4 on page 194).
Once lines have been sent to NavWiz a line is automatically made active in NavWiz
according to the line active in SonarWiz.
4.6 Data Recording
4.6.1 Record
Left-clicking the Record button (left) will open the Save as dialog in Figure 188
below and prompt the user for a file name BEFORE any data is recorded.
This button is not available when data recording is active in order to prevent any
data loss.

Page 224
Figure 188: Record "Save As" Dialog
Once the save button is left-clicked the sonar data will be recorded to the directory
specified and program state will switch to Active
Configure Server
• Foregrounds the active server window
4.6.2 Quick Record

Left-clicking the Quick Record button (left) will immediately start recording sonar
data, or if already recording, switch to a new file without any data loss, using the file
name template as specified in the File Options Section of the Program
Preferences and Settings. As well the and the program state will switch to
Active. See Section 2.8.2 on page 101 for more information on file naming.
4.6.3 Record Turn

Left-click the Record Turn button (left) to recording data through turns at the
end of a normal survey line. The Record Turn button uses the standard file user-
defined file naming but prepends the auto generated line name with the text
_Turn_ to make these files easily identifiable from normal survey file.

Page 225
The Record, Quick Record, and Record Turn

buttons support acquiring fathometer or magnetometer
data when a sonar is not being used.
The user may start and stop the magnetometer or

fathometer recording independently (left). The Quick
Record button allows the user to log any of the active
sensors using the pre-configured file naming options in
the preferences dialog.
All recorded data is written to the XTF folder. The

default file extension for magnetomter data is .mag and
for fathometer data is .dep.
4.6.4 Stop Recording

Left-clicking he Stop Recording button (left) will immediately close any active
sonar data files being recorded and switch the program state to Idle.
4.6.5 Real-time Mosaic

Some projects can be so large in scope that displaying all the recorded sonar files
may be too computationally intensive for the PC and cause the program to slow
down to the point where it starts to falter. Other projects may have specific Real-
time mosaicking requirements such that not all (or even any) sonar files are desired
displayed in the Map Window.
Left-clicking the Real-time Mosaic button (left) opens the Configure Real-
time Mosaic Options Dialog in Figure 189 below.

Page 226
Figure 189: Configure Real-time Mosaic Options Dialog
Figure 189 shows that the display of Real-time XTF sonar files may be made with
one of three choices:
• No real-time mosaic, XTF recording (OFF); or
• Only the last N files drawn into the real-time mosaic (ON); or
• XTF recording with ALL of the files drawn into the mosaic.
For dual frequency sidescan sonars users may select which two channels to mosaic
in Real Time
4.6.6 Thermal Printer Setup

SonarWiz can interface with a supported thermal printer in order to provide a hard
copy of the waterfall display in either Record or Playback mode.
The Printer Selection and Setup Dialog Figure 190 is displayed when the
Thermal Printer Button (left) is left-clicked

Page 227
Figure 190: Printer Setup
Enable Thermal Printer
• Left-clicking this check-box enables an attached thermal printer to print in

Real-time when the check-box is populated.
Allow Background Printing in Playback
• Left-clicking this check-box enables an attached thermal printer to print

during playback when the check-box is populated.
Thermal Printer Selection
• SonarWiz supports most of the popular thermal printers used for real-time
and gray scale printing, specifically:
• Raytheon/ODEC TDU 850/1200/2000
• EPC 9205/98XX/GSP-1086/MP-1086NT LAN/9206
LAN/HSP 100
• Printrex 840 DL/G
• Alden 9135 CTP / 9135 CTP Ethernet
• Isys V8.5e/V8.5e Networked/V12 RGS Centronics/V12 RGS
Ethernet

Page 228
• Ultra Electronics 120/200

• Virtual Printer Application
• Once a printer is selected the dialog box to the right will present one of
two possible options:
1. Parallel Printers
Recommendations for printer set-up appear
2. LAN printers
IP address and Port values are requested. Refer to your printer
documentation to determine/configure your printer IP address and
Port
Gain Slider
• Overall printer gain may be adjusted with the slider bar provided
Thermal Printer Options
Invert Raster Colors
• When checked, raster color (shade) values will be inverted where black
becomes white and vice versa.
Flip Rasters While Printing
• Raster images are flipped left-to-right

Print Events
• Events (manual or automatic) will be printed to the printer record. See

Event Setup in Section 2.5.1.15 on page 80.
Print Slant Range Corrected
• Data will be printed as slant corrected i.e. no water column will be present
as the first returns (directly below the sonar) on both sides will be joined.
Only Print When Recording
• Printing will not occur unless in record mode (Active State)

Flip Annotation Text Left to Right
• Printed text is flipped left-to-right

Flip Annotation Text Top to Bottom
• Printed text is flipped top-to-bottom i.e. upside down

Print Annotations Transparently
• In transparent mode the block around the printed character is transparent

so that the underlying data shines through. When unchecked, the block
behind the character is set to white or black depending on invert raster color
setting in order to increase the readability of the text.
Enable Scale Lines
• Scale lines will be included over the data at the user-specified range interval

Page 229
Along Track Annotation Interval in Inches
• Actual plotter distance between annotation intervals

Across Track Annotation Interval
• A drop-down list offers the user the following:

• Every
• Top Only
• Bottom Only
• Top and Bottom Only
Annotation Height
• Users may choose Small, Medium or Large heights for the annotations
Type of Printing
• Users may select from the following types of printing in the drop-down list:
• LF SSS – Low Frequency Sidescan Sonar
• HF SSS – High Frequency Sidescan Sonar
• LF SSS and SBP – Low Frequency Sidescan Sonar and Sub-
bottom Profiler
• HF SSS and SBP - High Frequency Sidescan Sonar and Sub-
bottom Profiler
• LF SSS and HF SSS - Low and High Frequency Sidescan Sonars
• LF SSS, SB0 and SB1 – Low Frequency SSS plus 2 channels of
SBP
• SBP Only – Sub-bottom Profiler Only
• SB0 Zoomed View – Sub-bottom Channel 0 Zoomed. SB0
Zoomed means match the zoom settings in SB0 view when
printing.
• SB1 Zoomed View– Sub-bottom Channel 1 Zoomed. SB1
Zoomed means match the zoom settings in SB1 view when printing
• LF SSS and SB0 Zoomed View - Low Frequency Sidescan
Sonar and Sub-bottom Profiler Channel 0 Zoomed to match the
zoom settings in SBP view when printing.
• LF SSS and SB1 Zoomed View - Low Frequency Sidescan
Sonar and Sub-bottom Profiler Channel 1 Zoomed to match the
zoom settings in SB1 view when printing.
• SB0 (RTM) Zoomed View
• SB1 (RTM) Zoomed View
Speed Correction

Page 230
• Pings will be printed to represent actual ground speed of the towfish. i.e.
individual pings will be added or removed to reflect the theoretically
required ping to achieve non-overlapping along-track coverage over the
seabed for the speed f the vessel.
Print Settings on Exit
• Current Printer Settings will be annotated to the printer when the dialog is
closed with an OK click.
4.7 Data Acquisition Controls

Data Acquisition Controls are used to control Real-time Sidescan and Sub-bottom gains,
Bottom-tracking and Eventing.
4.7.1 Real-time Sidescan Gains

The Real-time Sidescan gains control is opened by left-clicking on the
Sidescan... button (left) within the Controls Section of the Data Acquisition
Ribbon.
Real-time Sidescan gains are exactly the same as post processing gains with one
exception: If the user has a dual-frequency sonar the user must specify via radio
button (Figure 191) which channels are being adjusted. See Section 5.11.1 on page
356 for information on each gain control available to Real-time sidescan.

Page 231
Figure 191: Real-time SSS Gain Controls
4.7.2 Real-time Sub-bottom Gains

The Real-time Sub-bottom gains control is opened by left-clicking on the Sub-
bottom... button (left) within the Controls Section of the Data Acquisition
Ribbon.
Real-time Sidescan gains are exactly the same as post processing gains with one
exception: If the user has a dual-frequency sonar the user must specify via radio
button (Figure 192) which channels are being adjusted. See Section 5.11.2 on page
367 for information on each gain control available to Real-time sub-bottom.

Page 232
Figure 192: Real-time SBP Gains
4.7.3 Bottom Tracker
The Real-time Bottom Tracker control is opened by left-clicking on the Bottom

Tracker button (left) within the Controls Section of the Data Acquisition
Ribbon and is used to tack the seafloor for both sidescan and sub-bottom sonar
data
Activating this control allows the user to select whether or not and how Bottom
Tracking on the Waterfall display is performed. Users may choose from
Telemetered Altitude, to Homomorphic, to Auto Tracking to Manual
Tracking. For more information on using the Real-time Bottom Tracker, see 5.9.1
on page 335 for sidescan or Section 5.10.1 on page 345 for sub-bottom bottom
tracking.

Page 233
4.7.4 Event Setup
The Eventing Setup Dialog is opened by left-clicking on the Event Setup...

button (left) within the Controls Section of the Data Acquisition Ribbon and is
used to tack the seafloor for both sidescan and sub-bottom sonar data
The Eventing Setup dialog is used to determine how events are generated and
what is to be annotated (if desired).
Events are always written to the XTF file as a 'Notes' record and if the " Annotate
Events" button is checked then the event mark will be displayed and printed.
When the Use XY Coords check-box and either the ship or fish position are
selected for event annotation, SonarWiz will annotate the record with the grid
coordinate of the project map projection as specified in Project Settings.
Figure 193: Eventing Setup Dialog
Referring to the Eventing Setup Dialog in Figure 193

Navigation System and Manual Eventing
• An Event will be recorded on either
◦ a Navigation system trigger on the COM Port where the Navigation
System is connected; or
◦ a Manual Event Now! Button push
Generate Events Every ____ Seconds
• Events are created based on the User Specified Time Interval in integer
seconds
Next Event Number
• User Specified value for next event number
Print Event Interval

Page 234
• User Specified value indicating which Events are to be printed

Annotate Events
• When checked, Events will receive additional text information according to
the checked boxes inside the “Annotate Event Mark With...”
Beep on Event
• The PC speaker will beep whenever an Event is recorded
4.7.5 Event Now!

Left clicking the Event Now! Button (left), or pressing F7 on the keyboard
manually creates an event recorded according to the settings in Event Setup
above

Section 5 Post Processing
5.1 Post-Processing Data

This section describes all aspects of importing and processing sonar and magnetometer data
such that they are ready for export into finalized formats.
All functions covered in this Section are those found in the Post Processing Ribbon Menu
shown in Figure 194 below.
Figure 194: Post Processing Ribbon Menu
5.2 Sonar File Tasks
5.2.1 What Happens When a File is Imported?

When an acoustic file (an XTF file for example) or a Magnetometer file is imported
into SonarWiz, a new intermediate file – a CSF file – is created in the project CSF
sub-directory, or a CMF file in the Mag sub-directory. These files have the same
names as the original raw data files but with a .CSF or .CMF extension. One CSF (or
CMF) file will be created for each imported file.
The CSF and CMF files contain data structured in a way that facilitates efficient
processing and rapid display. When data are modified or adjusted in any way by
SonarWiz, say by applying a gain function, or by bottom tracking to determine
towfish altitude, it is the CSF (or CMF) file that is modified, not the original raw
data file.
The following events occur during the Sonar Data import process with the
Magnetometer Import process being equivalent but with CMF files being created
and placed in the Project Mag sub-directory :
Page 236
Read the acoustic file

XTF, etc
Original acoustic file

Apply navigation coordinate
data conversion as
specified in the Import Options.
Apply other import

options, eg. Gain
Create CSF file in project folder CSF
Compact Sonar File
Add the file to the project
Display the file in the map view
Figure 195: File Import Process
Immediately after a sonar file has been imported, its resultant CSF file will
appear in the list of project files in the Sonar File Manager dialog (see Section
5.6 on page 282) and its “Enabled” flag will be checked, meaning that it will be
displayed in the map view.
Similarly, immediately after a magnetometer file has been imported, its resultant
CMF file will appear in the list of project files in the Magnetometer File
Manager dialog (see Section 5.19 on 475) and its “Enabled” flag will be
checked, meaning that it will be displayed in the map view.
Either File Manager may be used at any time to disable (hide) a file(s). A file
that has been hidden can be displayed again by simply checking its Enabled box
in its respective File Manager. Both of these actions can also be taken through
the context pop-up menu that is displayed when a sonar file is selected and then
right-clicked.
A CSF or CMF file may be deleted from the project by using the appropriate
File Manager or the pop-up context menu. Note that this action does not
remove the actual file from the hard disk. Rather, it just removes it's reference
from the project. To return a file to the project use the Add button in the
SonarWiz5 User Guide Post Processing

Page 237
appropriate File Manager. There is no need to re-import since the CSF (or
CMF) file already exists.
It is important (and reassuring) to remember that with the exception of File

Utilities (See Section 6 on page 507)SonarWiz never modifies, deletes or
moves original acoustic files. Only the CSF files are modified, and these can
be re-created at any time from the original acoustic files.
5.3 Importing Sidescan Sonar Data

This section describes all aspects of importing and processing sonar and magnetometer data
such that they are ready for export into finalized formats.
Sidescan sonar data may be imported either Automatically or Manually. (see Adding Files on
page 131) this section covers the Manual importation of Sidescan sonar data.
N.B. Automatic importation of sidescan data is covered in Section 2.9.3 on page 131.
SonarWiz can import sidescan data recorded in the following formats:
• CMax (*.cm2)
• CODA (*.COD)+
• EdgeTech (*.JSF)+
• eXtended Triton Format (*.XTF)
• GeoAcoustics (*.GCF & *.RDF)
• Humminbird (*.SON, *.DAT)
• HYPACK (*.HSX)
• Imagenex SportScan (*.81S)
• Imagenex Yellow Fin (*.872)
• Imagenex DeltaT Backscatter (*.83P)
• Konsgberg EM Backscatter (*.all)
• Kongsberg (Simrad) EA400/EA600 Backscatter (*.RAW)
• Klein – Including K5000 V2 (*.SDF)
• Marine Sonic (*.MST)+
• ProSAS (*.IMG)
• QMips (.DAT & .QMP)
• Reson 7000 Series Backscatter (*.S7K)
• SeaBeam2100 (*.MB41)
• SwathPlus Raw/Processed (*.SXR/*.SXP)+
• Swedish Geo Survey (*.SEG)
• Tritech (*.V4Log & LogDoc)
• Swedish Geo Survey SEG-Y (*.seg)

Page 238
5.3.1 Manual Sidescan Data Import

To manually import (any) sonar or magnetometer data from existing acoustic or
magnetometer files (e.g. XTF files) left-click the Import Button (left) within the
Sonar File Tasks group from the Post Processing Ribbon Menu As well the
hot keys Ctrl+I may be used. This option will display the dialog shown in Figure
196 below. As well the hot-keys Ctrl+I may be used to go directly to the Open
dialog shown in Figure 197
With the list open below the Import button select the specific data type to be
imported. In this section it is Sidescan Files...
Figure 196: Left-Click on Sidescan Files...
Once the Sidescan Files option has been left-clicked the Open dialog (Figure
197) will appear.
In General, to import one or more files:
1. Set any required general or file type specific options (see following
sections).
2. Browse to the desired folder, highlight the file(s) to import and
press Open.

Page 239
Figure 197: Sidescan Import "Open" Dialog

Page 240
5.3.2 File Type Specific Options (Sidescan)

The File Type Specific Options button allows you to configure settings that are
unique to a particular file format and can not be handled in a generic manner.
XTF Import Options
Figure 198: XTF Specific Options
Source of Cable Out Data

The XTF file format contains two fields that can be populated by a sonar recoding
program when surveying: Cable Out and Layback.
• Read the cable out form the cable out value in the XTF
header
• Interpret cable out from the layback value in the XTF
Header
Depending on the system used to record data only one of these fields may be
populated with a value. SonarWiz always populates the Cable Out field. Isis for one,
is configurable in how it stores cable out and the cable out value may actually be

Page 241
stored in the XTF header under Layback depending on how the original survey was
configured..
Source Of Event Numbers
Event numbers are recorded in an XTF file in two possible ways depending on the
specific recording programs.
Normally the default option is to select the Auto Detect option; however, there
may be conditions where the auto detect method can't determine the correct
location of the event numbers. In those cases, two other options are included as a
way to force a specific interpretation of events.
For SonarWiz and ISIS v4.3 or earlier choose the first radio button.
For CODA XTF and post v4.3 ISIS choose the second radio button.
Source Of Heading Data
For XTF files that were recorded with the both ship and sensor headings the source
to be used upon import may be selected here.
As a good rule-of-thumb Ship heading (Course Made Good) should be selected
unless the sensor's gyro was an Inertial Motion Unit. Normally the flux gate
compass fitted on most sidescan towfish is not of a high enough for mosaicking.
Source of Altitude Data
This option exists primarily to support data collected by Isis.
In SonarWiz, with the Klein 3K and 5K systems that send telemetered altitude, that
telemetered value is now always stored in the aux altitude slot. If the user elects to
use the manual tracker or no tracker during data collection, the telemetered value us
always available the Auxiliary Altitude Sensor to for post processing.
Source Of Speed Data
For XTF files that were recorded with both the ship and sensor speeds the source to
be used upon import may be selected here
Apply Weighting Factor (XTF v18 and later to support EdgeTech 4200)
• Use this option if you are using an EdgeTech 4200 and the recording
system used XTF v18 which has been around since ~2005. As of
Spring 2008 the most current version of XTF is v23. If the weighting
factor is not applied then horizontal banding will occur as shown in
(Figure 199).

Page 242
Figure 199: Banding Due To Incorrect Weighting Factor
Renumber XTF Ping with Ordinal Numbers on Import

• Regenerate the ping numbers when an XTF file is imported. This
corrects for those XTF files recorded by Isis where the ping numbers
were reset to 0 every 4096 pings.
Always record X/Y coordinates (applies to real-time acquisition only)
• Forces X/Y data recording of XTF files even when the input navigation
coordinates are lat/long. The X/Y coordinate system logged will be the
same X/Y coordinate system of the current project.
Write Dual Frequency Sonars into 2 Files
• The option applies to real-time operations where the sonar in use has
two separate simultaneous frequencies i.e. Klein 3000 or EdgeTech
4200.
• The structure of a CSF File is such that only 2 channels (port and
starboard at one frequency) are stored in the file meaning that when
operating a dual frequency sonar the R/T Channel to Mosaic option
chosen in the Project Settings (See Section 2.9.5 on page 135)
determines which two channels channels get written to the CSF file.
• This options creates two CSF Files for dual frequency sonars each with
a single frequency.
• Regardless of the single-frequency limitation on CSF Files, the XTF file
recorded during Real-time operations contains both frequencies.
Use Navigation and Heading from New XTF Navigation records (XTF
v29 and later)

Page 243
• The user may now opt to use the new XTF v29 navigation (type 42) and
gyro (type 84) time stamped position and heading packets navigation source
instead of the navigation data that is recorded with the actual
XTFPINGHEADER. This would seemingly only apply to data collected
with Isis and probably only with multibeam echo sounders or
interferometers. We have first seen these new records in Isis data with the
Benthos C3D.
Along Track Downsampling
• If the import process is too lengthy for the nature of the information
desired, the data may be downsampled in the along-track direction in
order to increase the input speed.
• The interval is the number of pings to be skipped during the read
process. So if the user enters a 2 it reads one, skips two. Similarly, if
interval=10, read 1 skip 10.
SEA SwathPlus Import Options
Figure 200: SEA SwathPlus Specific Options

Page 244
The only file specific option for the SEA Submetrix XTF format is the nature of
the navigation format; four choices exist for the user to choose:
• NMEA;
• Custom; or
• MCOM (F-180)
• POS MV Binary Packets
If the user is uncertain of the navigation format an SXR file may be examined to
determine the exact format using the “Examine Navigation from SXR
File...”
SXP Amplitude Source

The Amplitude Source of the backscatter values to be used must be selected in
the SXP Amplitude Source section of the dialog. The two possible choices are
Raw or Processed.
CODA Import Options
Figure 201: CODA Specific Options

Page 245
The Peek at CODA File button allows the user to first examine the contents of
a .COD file in order to glean the navigation coordinate system and channel
content in use prior to importing.

Page 246
JSF Import Options
Figure 202: JSF Specific Options
Signal Component to Use

JSF stores sonar samples at complex numbers. So, one can choose the real,
imaginary or envelope portion of the complex pair to use when converting to a
real number when importing data. The envelope, e =sqrt(r*r+i*i) where
e=envelope value, r = real component and i=imaginary component.
The envelope is what most users will require.
JSF Amplitude Scalar
• The JSF amplitude scalar is used to scale the envelope, real or imaginary
number into a useful 16-bit integer display range.
• Refer to the sonar manufacturer's documentation for a full explanation
on JSF format.
Apply AGC Gain from JSF Sonar Packet
• AGC gain from the recorded JSF packet is applied which assists
processing new Chirp 4125 JSF files (files recorded by new 4125 sonars
manufactured after July 2010)
Position Source

Page 247
• Source Coords: EdgeTech stored coordinates

• Group Coords: EdgeTech stored coordinates but higher resolution
than Source coordinates.
• NMEA Coords: coordinates from the raw GPS data.
• Swap X/Y Coordinates: allows for swapping the X/Y coordinates if
required
Heading Source
• Sonar Ping: Default selection. Heading information is taken from the
heading value stored with the ping.
• Sonar Ping (unscaled): Heading information is taken from the
recorded heading value where the heading is not scaled to .01 deg
(JAMSTEC)
• DVL: Heading information is taken from the recorded heading value
associated with the Doppler Velocity Log (if fitted).
• NMEA: Heading information is taken from the heading value stored
with a secondary NMEA heading source.
• Situation:
Magnetometer Channel
• Indicates to SonarWiz on which channel to find recorded
Magnetometer data.
Skip First N JSF Pings
• Skips past the first N sonar pings in a JSF file. This is useful for
skipping past errantly positioned pings in a JSF file.
Process JSF Packet Delay (SBP Only)
• Reads the Packet Delay variable in the JSF Header that defines the delay
from the time that the trigger fired to the time that the digitizer started.
Some operators use this field to eliminate some of the water column
from a SBP record.
• See your EdgeTech documentation for more details.

Page 248
GeoAcoustics Import Options
Figure 203: GeoAcoustics Specific Options
GCF Amplitude Scalar may be adjusted in this dialogue in order to control

the overall gain of the GCF data being imported.

Page 249
MST Import Options
Figure 204: MST Specific Options
AUV Mode
• Checking this box is for MST systems installed on AUVs. The program
will interpret the fathometer value (if present) from the AUV as the
altitude.

Page 250
HSX Import Options
Figure 205: HSX Specific Options
HYPACK HSX Files are ASCII files that identify each device used by the Prefix
“DEV x” where x is the device number.
In the example below the first 13 lines from an HSX file are shown. Note that Dev
0 is HYPACK navigation and Dev 1 is an EdgeTech 4200 sidescan sonar.
FTP NEW 2
HSX 0
TND 19:26:13 05/27/2008
INF "2008 Crew" "Bella Marie" "SB SS Survey " "CC Bay" 0.00 0.00
1500.00
HSP 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 0 150.00 0.00 0 9
DEV 0 52 "Hypack Navigation"
DV2 0 34 0 1
OF2 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
OF2 0 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Page 251
PRI 0
DEV 1 0 "EdgeTech 4200 System"
DV2 1 8 0 1
OF2 1 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
For this particular example there is no depth device.

Apply Position Device Offsets on Import
If the devices recorded in the HYPACK files had their Device Offsets (Lever Arms)
measured and entered into HYPACK Hardware prior to recording then these we
recorded in the raw HYPACK files.
To apply the Device Offsets (Lever Arms) and have them included in the position
calculation performed by SonarWiz check this box.
Sniff File...
Allows the user to open an HSX file and SonarWiz will identify the Device numbers
as they appear in the HSX file selected. Below is an example of an HSX file of C3D
data.
Figure 206: Sniff'ed HSX File Results

CMAX CM2 Import Options

Page 252
Figure 207: CM2 Specific Options
CM2 files may contain multiple sources of position. Ping location is assigned by the
user-defined in the drop-down box.

Page 253
Imagenex DeltaT Backscatter
Figure 208: DeltaT Specific Options
Imagery Source
The Imagenex DeltaT multibeam echosounder can record echo intensity
(backscatter) for each beam which resembles low-resolution sidescan sonar imagery.
Process Intensity Data
• If the backscatter option in the DeltaT has been enabled then select this
option for the .83P files to view the swath in SonarWiz.
Process Range Data
• If the backscatter option in the DeltaT has been not enabled then select
this option to view pseudo-backscatter imagery SonarWiz.
Transducers are reversed. Flip port/starboard data
• For sounders that were reverse-mounted for collection

Page 254
Aggregating Files
• Aggregation provides a means of ‘connecting’ small acoustic data files
into longer logical line segments.
• Aggregation is primarily intended to work with MST files that are
inherently small files usually only representing a few minutes worth of
data. The advantage to aggregating data files is that you typically end up
with fewer files to manage in your project.
• The Aggregation checkbox will only be enabled when the file type has
been set to Marine Sonic (MST).
• To Aggregate non-MST sonar files, use the Aggregate tool button in the
Sonar File Manager once the files have been imported. See Section 5.6.4

Page 255
Klein SDF
These controls configure the pressure transducer scaling if the settings were
incorrectly applied in the field during recording. Users unfamiliar with this
control should consult with L-3 Klein prior to adjusting these values.
Figure 209: SDF Import Options
5.3.3 Import Settings
Project Sonar Data Using

Sonar data is plotted at right angles to the sensor's track; therefore, SonarWiz must
be instructed which heading to use for plotting data. Two possible choices exist:
Course Made Good
• The calculated course between successive GPS fixes and is the
recommended heading sensor to use. This value can vary significantly
from fix-to-fix which is why course smoothing is set in Project
Settings at a relatively high value (300 - See Time Constant for
Course Smoothing on page 130)
Sensor Heading

Page 256
• Taken from a Heading sensor inside the towfish. Sensors such as

fluxgate compasses are not normally accurate enough for projecting
sonar data as they are subject to magnetic variations and local variation.
Unless the heading sensor being used is a very accurate such as an
inertial gyro, this setting should not be used.
Rotate Port / Stbd
• If Sensor Heading is chosen and a known bias is affecting the
heading sensor, Rotate (deg) should to be used.
Import Instructions
Aggregate
• Aggregation provides a means of ‘connecting’ small acoustic data files into
longer logical line segments.
• Aggregation is primarily intended to work with MST files that are inherently
small files usually only representing a few minutes worth of data. The
advantage to aggregating data files is that you typically end up with fewer
files to manage in your project.
• The Aggregation checkbox will only be enabled when the file type has been
set to Marine Sonic (MST).
• To Aggregate non-MST sonar files, use the Aggregate tool button in the
Sonar File Manager once the files have been imported. See Section 5.6.4 on
page 291 for more information.
Setting Import Gain
• Import Gain is useful for increasing the base level gain of an acoustic
data file that contains low amplitude sonar data. Try out various gain
settings on your first file to see which setting looks the best. Then,
import all of your acoustic files with the preferred gain setting.
Custom Gain
• For users who find that the choices in the drop down list are not
adequate.
Preview
• This button allows the user to see what the effect of the selected gain
will be on one of the selected files.
Auto TVG
• The Auto TVG function operates by dividing the data into many
parallel swaths, attempting to equalize the backscatter of each swath.
The Route Mean Square (RMS) power of each swath is compared to a
desired power level. The error signal is fed back to an IIR filter and the
gain for that swath is adjusted in the opposite direction. See Section
5.11.1.4 on page 362.
• Auto TVG works best when the bottom tacking in the file to be
imported is known to be accurate
Percent of Sonar Range to Map

Page 257
• Used to specify the duration of the sonar record you want to use. This
feature is particularly useful for trimming off the far field data from
high frequency sonars that do not provide good returns at long range.
• This feature is particularly useful for:

• Trimming off the far field data from high frequency sonars that do not
provide good returns at long range
• On Klein sonars where the last 3 per cent of the data is of poor quality
•
Split Files when Time Gaps Occur
• During normal sidescan recording operations it frequently occurs that
pings are dropped by the sonar due to any number of factors. When
large gaps ( more than 2 seconds) occur the SonarWiz repeatedly
mosaics the last valid ping prior to the time gap until the next valid
ping. For time gaps of less than two seconds this repeated mosaicking is
not a problem but after two seconds the mosaic appears to be smeared.
• Populating the Split Files When Time Gaps Occur check-box will
create a new CSF file whenever a time gap of more than 2 seconds
occurs.
Channels
• The structure of a CSF File is such that only 2 channels (port and
starboard at one frequency) are stored in the file; therefore the user
must select which two channels are to be imported.
• If port ans starboard channels are reversed they can be swapped on
import (Figure 210)
Figure 210: Import Channels
Import Geodesy

Page 258
Configuring the settings related to the coordinate system of the data to be imported
(Import Geodesy) is a critical step in successfully generating a mosaic.
SonarWiz will allow you to produce a mosaic in virtually any map projection. This
flexible feature is accomplished by storing all of the sonar navigation data internally
as WGS-84 geodetic (latitude/longitude) coordinates and re-projecting the data into
the user specified projection.
Most acoustic data is recorded in WGS-84 geodetic coordinates using a differential
GPS system. However, some surveyors will prefer to record the acoustic data in a
grid or X/Y coordinate system or possibly in a latitude/longitude in a local datum
other than WGS-84.
When importing acoustic data that has been recorded in an X/Y or in geodetic
coordinates that are not WGS-84, you must tell SonarWiz what that X/Y format is
so that it can correctly convert the imported data to geodetic coordinates.
Navigation data in XY or grid format
• If the files to be imported contain navigation data stored as WGS-
84 Latitude/Longitude, the check-box under Import Geodesy
must be turned off. This indicates that no (internal) conversion of
the incoming data is necessary.
• If the file(s) to be imported contain navigation data recorded in XY
projected coordinates (e.g. State plane or UTM) or in non WGS-84 geodetic
coordinates, then the box must be checked, and you must select the
applicable coordinate system by pressing the Browse Coordinate
Systems button. For more information about coordinate systems see


Import Execution
Once the input files have been selected and the the OK button is pressed, the sonar
files will be read into the system. During the Import processes a dialog will be
displayed showing the progress of each file as it is being imported as in Figure 211.

Page 259
Figure 211: Importing Acoustic Files
Notes on Importing Klein 3K and 5K Sonar Files

When importing Klein 5000 or Klein 3000 data it is almost always necessary to use
the manual import gains. It is recommended that the user start with 32X or 64X
gain and import one file first to determine the most appropriate import gain for the
entire data set. Once the optimal gain has been found the rest of the Klein files will
likely require the same import gain setting.
The nature of the TVG within the Klein sonar processor renders the last 3% of the
range as very poor quality. Users should set Percent of Sonar Range to Map at
a maximum of 87% for best results.
5.3.4 File Playback
Only CSF, XTF and SEG-Y files can be read in the Playback function
SonarWiz has the ability to Playback CSF, XTF and SEG-Y sonar files such that
the data may be viewed in the Waterfall Display. As well, SonarWiz can
automatically mosaic and convert to CSF any XTF or SEG-Y (sub-bottom) file that
is replayed through the system using the standard replay function. Thus, replaying a
file provides an alternative method for importing sonar data from an XTF or SEG-
Y file into SonarWiz.
The difference between importing and replaying a file is that during Playback
SonarWiz also displays the waterfall image data. Bottom tracking, and TVG may be
adjusted on the replayed file at any time. The adjustments affect the mosaic but
never the original XTF file.

Page 260
Sonar files may be played back either through the “Drag-and-drop” method or Manual
Playback.
Drag-and-Drop Playback
See Section 2.9.3 on page 131 for information on the Drag-and-drop playback method.
Manual Playback
To Playback sonar data left-click the Playback Button (left) within the Sonar
File Tasks group from the Post Processing Ribbon Menu to display the dialog
shown in below
Figure 212: Playback "Open" Dialog
Open Dialog
Playback All Files in Folder
• Checking this box will cause the program to play back all files sequentially
starting from the selected file.

Page 261
Auto TVG
• Apply Auto TVG (See Section 5.11.1.4 on page 362)

Gain
• Standard gain levels as well as custom gain may be specified in this box.
Add File to Mosaic
• Only when this box is checked will the “played” file(s) be added to the
current mosaic i.e. imported into the CSF Format.
When a file is being replayed by SonarWiz, the Playback Buttons at the top of the
Waterfall Display window become active.
Figure 213: Playback Toolbar
See Waterfall Display on page 57 for more details on the Playback buttons.
Note that SonarWiz disables the use of the rewind and fast forward controls
when an XTF file is being replayed into a mosaic.
Playback Preferences
Playback preferences can be set on the General Settings tab of the Options
dialog ( Figure 214): See Section on page for more information on setting
Options.
Figure 214: File Playback Preference Settings
Scans per frame
• The number of pings that are drawn to the display during one scroll
operation. Larger numbers will produce faster scrolling speeds but jerkier
appearance.
Playback Speed
• A slider bar that controls a timer that affects the rate at which pings are read
and displayed. Range is 50 to 100 ms.
Playback file continuously

Page 262
• At the end of the file selected for playback, it will start over at the beginning
when checked.
NOTES:
• Care should be taken to only replay files that are in the geographic area of
the mosaic, otherwise the selected map projection may not be valid and
unpredictable results may occur.
• The SBP waterfall windows display the SBP data with any DC Offset that
might be set in the SEGY File Specific Options window. The DC Offset
is useful for correcting a DC bias in the analog output signal digitized by the
SonarWiz analog interface. The DC Offset does not affect the recorded
data.
5.3.5 Printing Sonar Records

If a Thermal Printer is attached and configured (see Section 4.6.6 on page 226)
the sonar records may be printed while they are being played back.
To print a sonar record on playback:
1. Ensure Playback is stopped
2. Select Data Acquisition>Thermal Printer
3. Select the Enable Thermal Printer check-box.
4. Enable “Eventing” if desired – see Section 4.7.4 on page 233 .
5. Follow the procedure for opening and playing back files as described in
Section 5.3.4 above on page 259.
5.4 Importing Sub-bottom Sonar Data

Sub-bottom data can be imported into SonarWiz from several different file formats. Once
imported, these data may be displayed in a 2D map style view much like a single channel of
sidescan, viewed in a standard profile view or viewed in a choice of 3D viewers including the
built-in 3D viewer.
Sub-bottom sonar data may be imported either Automatically or Manually. (see Adding
Files on page 131) this section covers the Manual importation of Sub-bottom sonar data.
N.B. Automatic importation of sub-bottom data is covered in Section 2.9.3 on page 131.
SonarWiz can import the following SBP file formats:
• SEG-Y (*.seg)+
• XTF (*.xtf)+
• EdgeTech JSF (*.jsf)+
• GeoAcoustics (*.gcf)
• CODA (*.cod)+
• Klein 3000 (*.sdf)
• Kongsberg (.RAW)

Page 263
• Tritech (*.V4Log)
• StrataBox ODC (*.odc)
• Knudsen KEB (*.keb) including D0-D3 and B9 formats
+
File-type Specific options exist
5.4.1 Manually Importing Sub-bottom Data

Sonar File Tasks group from the Post Processing Ribbon Menu This option
will display the dialog shown in Figure 215 below. As well the hot-keys
Ctrl+Shift+I may be used to go directly to the Open dialog shown in
imported. In this section it is Sub-bottom Files...
Figure 215: Import Sub-bottom Files
N.B. For an explanation of What Happens When a File is Imported? see

Section 5.2.1 on page 235.
Once the Sub-bottom Files option has been left-clicked the Open dialog () will
appear.
1. Set any required general or file type specific options (see following
sections).
2. Browse to the desired folder, highlight the file(s) to import and press
Open.

Page 264
Figure 216: SBP Import "Open" Dialog

Page 265
5.4.2 File Type Specific Options (Sub-bottom)

The File Type Specific Options button allows you to configure settings that are
unique to a particular file format and can not be handled in a generic manner.
SBP XTF Import Options
Figure 217: SBP XTF Specific Options
The options available here (Figure 217)are the same as those offered in the File
Type Specific Options for Sidescan Sonar. See XTF Import Options on
page 240 for specific details.

Page 266
SEG-Y Import Options
Figure 218: SEG-Y Specific Options
Navigation Source
Provides a set of radio buttons that allow the user to select the source coordinates.
The SEG-Y format specifies a position for the Receiver and the Source of the
seismic data. Some data acquisition systems use one or the other or both. Some
systems store the ship position in one location and the towfish position in the other.
This dialog allows for the control of which coordinate source to use as the position
reference for your data files.
Amplitude Offset
• A tool for compensating for systems that do not store 0VDC as a digital
value of zero.
• Some data acquisition systems store the analog to digital converter (ADC)
value that reference -5V as the ADV value of zero. If left uncorrected, this
bias will induce a strong offset to the image.
• The Amplitude Offset control provides a method of backing off this
offset. This is particularly useful with CODA data that has been converted
to SEG-Y without compensating for the ADC offset. Usually, a value of
-2048 is useful in these cases to compensate for the 12-bit ADC.
Treat IBM Floating Point as IEEE Floating Point (C&C AUV)

Page 267
• This option has been added specifically for those systems that use the IEEE
floating point format such as C&C's AUV. Refer to the recording device's
manufacturer's specifications to determine which settings are to be used in
SonarWiz.
Display Images with Topographic Correction (post-processing)
• Topographic Corrections may be enabled for systems where the sensor

maintains a constant altitude above the seafloor by varying the sensor depth
See Topographic Corrections on page 105 for more information on
Topographic Corrections.
Byte Swap IEEE Floating Point Samples
• See Below
Records contain 1-way travel time(e.g. Chirp II)
• The 1-way travel time option may be set here which is used for for very old
SEG-Y files, in particular the DataSonics Chirp II.
Always record X/Y coordinates(applies to real-time acquisition only)
• The user may force SonarWiz to record SEGY data in X/Y coordinates
even if the input navigation system is sending latitude/longitude.
• This is considered an advanced option and should be carefully configured
and tested before implementing to avoid the loss of navigation data.
Read Files Using Little Endian (Intel Byte Order)
• This option is used to force the SEG-Y reader to treat an imported file as
Little Endian (Intel) byte order. The SEG-Y standard specifies the byte
order as big endian but some recording systems record as Intel style
ordering. When possible the software detects the byte ordering by testing
selected values but if these value are not set the automatic logic can fail.
• This is a manual override of the auto-detect logic.
Read Sensor Depth / Read Sensor Altitude / Read Shot Number / Read
Event Number from Bytes:
• Refer to the SEG web site www.seg.org and in particular:

http://www.seg.org/publications/tech-stand/seg_y_rev1.doc as well as the
recording device's manufacturer's specifications to determine which settings
are to be used in SonarWiz. Map.
• Specific Options: In Read Event Number from Bytes the SEG-Y event
number selection option (labeled Benthos Chirp II) instructs SonarWiz to
read the event numbers from the OLD Benthos Chirp II files.
Read Heave from Bytes
• When SonarWiz records a SEGY file, the heave value is stored in the user
defined area of the SEGY trace header in bytes 189-190. The heave value is
stored as centimeters X 10 in a short integer value in big endian format. The
storage location is also indicated in the SEGY file’s EBCDIC header
• Since other vendors may store the heave value in locations other than bytes
189-190, this option may be configured.

Page 268
• When working with SonarWiz data this setting should always be set to bytes
189-190 as shown in Figure 218:
Save Profile
• Once a particular SEG-Y format has been configured into the file
preferences the format may be saved in order to load it at a later date for the
same sonar/format.
Load Profile
• Loads a saved SEG-Y format that has previously been saved.

SBP CODA Import Options
The Peek at CODA File button (Figure 219)allows the user to first examine the
contents of a .COD file in order to glean the navigation coordinate system and
channel content in use prior to importing.
Figure 219: CODA File Type Options

Page 269
JSF Import Options
The JSF options available (Figure 220)are the same as those offered in the File
Type Specific Options for Sidescan Sonar. See JSF Import Options on page
246 for specific details.
Figure 220: JSF File Type Options

Page 270
ODC Import Options
Figure 221: ODC Import Options
Pixel Swap
• Use for data recorded prior to 2002 in order to correct faulty pixel ordering
Data Type
• Syqwest stores StrataBox, HydroBox and recently Bathy 2K sonar data

using the same file suffix “ODC”, but these data types are quite different in
their processing requirements. Auto detection of the data type stored in the
ODC file is dependent on detecting a $PNTI,101 record. If the 101 record
is not present auto detection will fail. Some of the Bathy 2K ODC files we
have encountered do not include the 101 record anywhere in the file.
Syqwest, users are advised to set this flag to match the sonar type for their
ODC files.
Bi/Unipolar Data Type
• Select the polarity-type of the SBP data being imported. Refer to the specific
SBP user manual/specifications for this information.

Page 271
5.4.3 SBP Import Settings

Data is bipolar / Data is unipolar
• Typically only Benthos sonars are unipolar. If in doubt refer to the sonar
manufacturer's sonar documentation
Display Polarity
Positive / Negative / Full
• Refer to your SBP manufacturer's documentation to determine the polarity

of your unit.
Channels
• Select the seismic data channel desired to be displayed. Some seismic file
formats support only a single channel of data. With these file types you
should always choose the CH-1 option.
• When SonarWiz imports a sub-bottom data file into a project it appends the
channel name to the intermediate CSF file so that you know which channel
of data is being processed. It is possible to work with multiple channels of
SBP data from the same acoustic data file by importing CH1 first then CH2
next.
• CH 3 is present for 3-Channel SEG-Y data typically for systems such as the
CODA acquisition system that records Klein 3000 with SBP attachment as
a 3-channel SEGY file.
Import Gain
Setting Import Gain
• Import Gain is useful for increasing the base level gain of an acoustic
data file that contains low amplitude sonar data. Try out various gain
settings on your first file to see which setting looks the best. Then,
import all of your acoustic files with the preferred gain setting.
Custom Gain
• For users who find that the choices in the drop down list are not
adequate.
Auto Gain
• A ping to ping function and depends on the altitude being well known. For
most SBP applications, avoid the use of the auto gain function until after
the data has been imported and the seafloor surface has been tracked.
Band Pass
• See Section 5.11.2.1 on page 369 for details.
Pct Range to Map
• Specifies the duration of the sonar record desired top be used. This feature
is particularly useful for trimming off the far field data from high frequency
sonars that do not provide good returns at long range.

Page 272
• This feature is particularly useful for:

• Trimming off the far field data from high frequency sonars that do not
provide good returns at long range
• Latter part of an SBP record where there is no return
•
• Split Files When Time Gaps Occur
• During normal sub-bottom recording operations it frequently occurs that

pings are dropped by the sonar due to any number of factors. When large
gaps ( more than 2 seconds) occur the SonarWiz repeatedly mosaics the last
valid ping prior to the time gap until the next valid ping. For time gaps of
less than two seconds this repeated mosaicking is not a problem but after
two seconds the mosaic appears to be smeared.
• Populating the Split Files When Time Gaps Occur check-box will create a
new CSF file whenever a time gap of more than 2 seconds occurs.
Import Geodesy
other than WGS-84.
• If the files to be imported contain navigation data stored as WGS-
84 Latitude/Longitude, the check-box under Import Geodesy
must be turned off. This indicates that no (internal) conversion of
the incoming data is necessary.

Page 273


SBP Import Execution

Once the input files have been selected and the OK button is pressed, the sub-
bottom files will be read into the system. During the Import processes a dialog will
be displayed showing the progress of each file as it is being imported as shown in
Figure 222.
Figure 222: SBP Import Progress
5.4.4 Sub-bottom File Playback

Sub-bottom files may be played back in the same manner as sidescan files. See
Section 5.3.4 on page 259 for more details.
5.4.5 Printing Sub-bottom Sonar Records

Sub-bottom files may be printed in the same manner as sidescan files. See Section
5.3.5 on page 262 for more details.
5.5 Importing Magnetometer Data

Magnetometer data can be imported into SonarWiz from several different file formats. Once
imported, these data may are displayed in a 2D map style with a single polyline representing
the file.(see Section 5.5.2 on page 278
Magnetometer data may be imported either Automatically or Manually.

Page 274
N.B. Automatic importation of magnetometer data is covered in Section 2.9.3 on page 131 .
SonarWiz can import the following Magnetometer file formats:
• AquaScan AXL;
• C&C Magnetometers;
• CSF Magnetometers;
• HYPACK RAW File Magnetometer
• Lat Lon Magnetometer Files
• Lon Lat Magnetometer Files
• Maglog GPS-POS w/ Altitude
• Maglog GPS-POS-Alt-MAG2-MAG3
• Maglog [Standard] Magnetometer
• Maglog w/ Altitude
• PLR Magnetometer [feet]
• PLR Magnetometer (m) [meters]
• SeaLink Magnetometer
• SonarWiz MAG 882
• SonarWiz SEASPY
• SonarWiz SEASPY_XY
• TBSmith HYPACK MAG; and
• XYZ MAG
5.5.1 Manually Importing a Magnetometer File

Sonar File Tasks group from the Post Processing Ribbon Menu This option
will display the dialog shown in Figure 223 below. As well the hot-keys
Ctrl+Alt+I may be used to go directly to the Open dialog shown in
imported. In this section it is Magnetometer Files...
Figure 223: Import Magnetometer Files

Page 275
N.B. For an explanation of What Happens When a File is Imported? see

Section 5.2.1 on page 235.
Once the Magnetometer Files option has been left-clicked the Open dialog ()
will appear.
1. Set the file type;
2. Browse to the desired folder, highlight the file(s) to import and press
Open.
Figure 224: Magnetometer Import "Open" Dialog
File Template
• The format of the recorded Mag data. Choices available are listed at the
beginning of this section.
• N.B. In order for SonarWiz to be able to import HSX MAG files the
device number of the Magnetometer in the HSX file must be known; this
must be set in File Type Specific Options. Currently the File Type
Specific Options dialog is only available through the Sidescan and Sub-

Page 276
bottom import dialogs (See Sections 5.3.2 or 5.4.2 on pages 240 or 265 ).
Go to either the Sidescan or Sub-bottom import dialog, set the File Type
Specific Options, then Cancel the Sidescan or Sub-bottom import
and return to the Magnetometer import dialog.
File Type Specific Options
XTF File Import Options
Figure 225: XTF File Type Specific Options
See XTF File Import Options in Section 5.3.2 on page 240.
HYPACK File Type Import Options

Page 277
See HYPACK File Import Options in Section 5.3.2 on page 240.
Import Geodesy
other than WGS-84.

Page 278
• If the files to be imported contain navigation data stored as WGS-84
Latitude/Longitude, the check-box under Import Geodesy must be
turned off. This indicates that no (internal) conversion of the
incoming data is necessary.
Import Execution
Once the input files have been selected and the the OK button is pressed, the
Magnetometer files will be read into the system. During the Import processes a
dialog will be displayed showing the progress of each file as it is being imported as in
Figure 226: Mag Import Progress
Once imported, a new file will be created in the Project MAG directory using the
same file name as the imported file but with a .CMF extension.
5.5.2 Viewing Mag Data

Once successfully imported Mag data will appear as a solid line on top of any sonar
imagery that may already be displayed Figure 227.

Page 279
Figure 227: Magnetometer Files Over Sidescan Files
5.5.3 Trimming Mag File Data

Unlike Sonar File Data that may be trimmed graphically, Magnetometer files cannot.
If a Magnetometer file is desired to be trimmed to a specific area then the use of a
feature must be employed.
To trim a mag file using a feature:
1. Create a closed polyline or rectangular feature around the Mag File(s)
portions desired to be retained. See Digitizing in the Map Window in
Section 5.16.2 on page 440 for more information on creating features.
In Figure 228 below the green mag line portions that fall within the red
feature (Feature0000) are to be retained.

Page 280
Figure 228: Mag File Prior to Being Trimmed Inside Feature
2. Select the feature by left-clicking and then right-click on the feature and
select “Trim the Magnetometer Data to Feature Extents” (Figure
229)

Page 281
Figure 229: Right-click Over Selected Feature
3. The resultant image in Figure 230 shows how all portions of the Mag Files
outside of the feature have been removed.
Figure 230: Resultant Mag Files after Trimming

Page 282
N.B. To restore all portions of a Mag file that have been trimmed the file
must be re-imported.
5.6 Sonar File Management

Data files imported into SonarWiz are placed withing their appropriate File Manager, the
Sonar File Manger for Acoustic Data Files and the Magnetometer File Manager for
Magnetometer files.
This Section discusses the functionality of the Sonar File Manger.
Sonar Files, once imported, can be edited and displayed in many ways. The aim of this
section is twofold: to discuss the Sonar File Manager and the Sonar File context pop-up
menu for both sidescan and sub-bottom sonar data files. This section discusses how to edit
and manipulate sonar files in order to make the overall image (mosaic) look finished in the
Map Window; however, critical tasks such as Bottom Tracking, Navigation, and
Layback must be completed prior to making the mosaic ready for export.
The Sonar File Manager is opened by left-clicking the File Manager button (left)
which is part of the Sonar File Tasks Group within the Post Processing Ribbon
Menu. As well the F11 hot key may be pressed on the keyboard or the Sonar File
Manager option may be selected in the sonar file right-click context pop up menu
(See 5.6.5 on page 298)
Figure 232 shows the Sonar File Manager (SFM) with 5 sidescan files.
The layout of the SFM is divided into four sections:
1. Information (Green Box)
2. Sonar Files (Blue Box)
3. Batch Processes (Red Box)
4. File Tools (Purple Box)
Each of the sections is discussed in detail below.

Page 283
5.6.1 Sonar File Manager Information Section
Figure 231: Sonar File Manager Information Section
Figure 231 lists the specific information that is provided by the information
section about:
• the current Project;
• the number of files in the project;
• the number if enabled (displayed) files in the project;
• the geographical limits of all the files; and
• the geographical limits of the enabled file
5.6.2 Sonar File Manager Sonar Files Section

The Sonar Files section of the SFM not only lists the sonar files in the project but
allows for file properties to be changed. Each sonar file in the project is listed on a
separate row within the Sonar file section. Specific columns of the Sonar Files
section include:
Figure 232: Sonar File Manager

Page 284
Enable
• Toggles the display of the sonar file in Map View (Checked = displayed)
File Name
• Displays the full path and file name of the sonar file.
Size
• Size of the (CSF) sonar file in KB.

AGC
• Toggles Automatic Gain Control for the sonar file (Checked = enabled).
See Section 5.11.1.2 on page 359 for complete details on AGC.
UGC
• Toggles User Gain Control for the sonar file (Checked = enabled). See User
Defined Gain Controls on page 364 for complete details on UGC.
BAC
• Toggles Beam Angle Correction for the sonar file (Checked = enabled). See
Beam Angle Correction on page 358 for complete details on BAC.
Chan
• Lists which channel (Port/Starboard/Both) of the sonar file is actively

displayed and also allows the user to change the channel(s). See Section
5.6.5.15 on page 302 for additional information on channel display.
LBK Algorithm
• Lists which of the two possible layback algorithms is applied to the Sonar
File. See 5.14.4 on page 397
Layback
• Lists the current Layback percentage applied to the sonar file and also
allows the setting to be changed. See 5.14.5 on page 398
5.6.3 Sonar File Manager Batch Processes Section

This section provides four tools that will perform the same function on any number
of project sonar files.
5.6.3.1 Sheave Offset

Allows for batch offsetting the towpoint (sheave) position in post-processing
layback calculations (Figure 233). See the Layback discussion on page 392for more
information on applying this correction.

Page 285
Figure 233: Batch Sheave Offset Dialogue
5.6.3.2 Batch Image Export

The entire waterfall of a sonar file may be captured and exported to a single image
file using this function. Clicking on the Batch Image Export button will activate the
dialog in Figure 234.

Page 286
Figure 234: Batch Image Export - Main
Output folder to store images
By default the “Images” directory within the current project folder will be displayed
as the output folder. If desired, the browse button may be selected and another
directory chosen instead.
Output Image Type
Three types of image formats are available for the exported image file(s) depending
on user preference:
• BMP
• JPG and
• TIFF
Options
Allows the user to select Annotation Options. See Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288.
Files Selected for Export
All project files are listed in this section. The files desired to be output may be
selected by left clicking the check-box to the left of each file. Any file with a check
mark in the box will be exported. To select all files in the project left-click the
Check All box

Page 287
N.B. An Annotation text file is created in the main Project directory that contains
annotated information and has the same file name prefix as the selected file but the
extension “.ann.txt”.
5.6.3.3 Batch Bottom Track

See Section 5.9.3 on page 343 in Bottom Tracking for complete details on Batch
Bottom Tracking.
Figure 235: Batch Bottom Track Dialog
5.6.3.4 Make Like Selected

The Make Like Selected dialog allows the user to quickly apply any number and
combination of settings on one particular file to any number or combination of
other files within the project.

Page 288
Figure 236: Make Like Selected Dialog
5.6.3.5 Annotation/Display Options

The image export Options dialog (Figure 237) controls a large number of features
in the exported image and are discussed below.

Page 289
Figure 237: Image Export Options
Enable Image Annotations
• Toggles annotations overlaid on exported images (Checked = On)

Annotate With
A total of 11 text annotations may be enabled for overlay on the exported images.
Annotation Frequency
Users may choose from:
• Annotating the image at a specific user-entered Specified Ping Interval
from 100 to 1000 pings; or
• With Event Number Changes using a modulo operation; or
• At a Specified Time Interval; or
• At a Specified Distance Interval
Write Event Numbers to CSF File
• N.B. This Option is (Figure 238) only available when the Annotation
Dialog is opened from the SBP Digitizing Window

Page 290
• This dialog allows users to rewrite the CSF Event number according to the
specified annotation interval above this button in Figure 237
Figure 238: Rewrite CSF Event Numbers
Scale Line Interval (m)
• Scale lines may be overlaid onto the the image at a user defined range
interval in either meters (m) feet (ft) or milliseconds (ms).
Annotation Text Background
Annotation text may be overlaid directly onto the image (Transparent) or a white
background (Opaque)
Font
• The font of the annotations is selectable by clicking the Use Font: button.
Annotation Color
• The color of the font annotations is selectable by clicking the Annotation

Color drop down list.
Draw Reflectors & Digitized Features
• All features intersecting the sonar file will be included in the exported image
when the check-box is populated.
Draw Core Locations
• All cores intersecting the sonar file will be included in the exported image
when the check-box is populated.
Flip Image End to End
• Since the SBP “waterfall” scrolls from right to left, lines that are exported to
image files will have the first ping at the left of the image and the last at the
right which can be confusing for lines run in east-to-west direction. This
command flips the image such that the last ping in the file is on the left.
Speed Correct (SSS Only)
• Sidescan file pings will be displayed to represent actual ground speed of the
towfish. i.e. individual pings will be added or removed to reflect the true
ping rate over the seabed for the speed.

Page 291
Swap Port and Stbd Channels (SSS Only)
• Port and and starboard channels will be swapped when the check-box is
populated.
Flip SSS Waterfall Images Top to Bottom
• Pings from the waterfall will be stacked in reverse order such that the most
last ping (in time) will be displayed at the bottom of the SSS waterfall.
Flip SBP Lines with bearing:
SBP Lines on an average heading between the user specified bearings will be flipped
in the Map Window when the Drawing Mode is Draft or High Resolution.
Apply Swell Filter (SBP Only)
• For situations where a survey was conducted in sea swell conditions the
resultant SBP image may show an undulating seafloor which is a symptom
of the swell rather than a real sea bed feature. See Section 5.10.2 on page
Apply Heave Compensation (if data available)
• If the sonar data has heave (motion sensor) data recorded in the raw data
file it may be applied here. See Section 4.2.6 on page 180 for more
information.
5.6.4 Sonar File Manager File Tools Section

The tool buttons in the File Tools section are described below:
OK
• Exit dialog and save changes.

Cancel
• Exit dialog without saving changes.
5.6.4.1 Add File(s)
• Any files previously imported into SonarWiz (in any project) and converted
into a .CSF format may be selected for addition to the current project.
• Files not in .CSF format must be imported using the Import command
(see either Importing Sidescan Sonar Data on page 237 or Importing Sub-
bottom Sonar Data on page 262).
• When a CSF file is imported, any processing flags that were set during a
previous edit session are removed thus eliminating to need to re-Import
Sidescan Files for a “clean” CSF file.

Page 292
In addition to using the Add Files Button; or the Drag-and-Drop process

may be used where Individual CSF files, multiple CSF files or even entire
directories may be selected from Windows Explorer and left-dragged
and dropped to the Sonar File Manager window. When an entire
directory is dropped onto the Sonar File Manager non-CSF files are
ignored.
5.6.4.2 Delete File(s)
• Selected files are deleted from the project.

• Notes:
• Using the “Delete” key on the keyboard also deletes the selected
file(s).
• Deleting a file from the project using the Delete button deletes
neither the .CSF file nor the original .XTF from the computer.
Users must manually delete these files outside of the program if
they are desired deleted from the entire system.
5.6.4.3 Rescan Limits
• A new box around the extreme limits of the sonar data displayed in the
Map View will be calculated and displayed in the Sonar File Manager
Information Section (page 283).
5.6.4.4 Select All
• All files in the Sonar File Manager are selected for a subsequent
operation.
5.6.4.5 Aggregate
Selected files will be aggregated into one continuous file in the Map View.
This is similar to the Aggregate option when importing MST sidescan files
(See Section 5.3.2 on page 254)
5.6.4.6 Bottom Track
See Section 5.9.2 on page 339 for sidescan files or Section 5.10 on page 345
for sub-bottom files.
5.6.4.7 Digitizer View
Opens the Digitize New Features window for either sidescan (Section
5.16.3 on page 445) or sub-bottom (Section 5.16.4 on page 446 ) files.

Page 293
5.6.4.8 Navigation
See Section 5.13 on page 373.

Properties
Opens the properties dialog displaying sonar file metadata. Figure 239
shows an example of the information contained in the Properties dialog.
Figure 239: Sonar File Properties
5.6.4.9 Settings
Gain Settings: See Section 5.11on page 354.
5.6.4.10 Report
Automatically creates a comma separated value file, saves it in the root
Project directory, and and opens the associated viewer with the following
values:
• File Name

Page 294
• # Pings
• XTF File Size(MB)
• Bits/Sample
• Recorded By
• File Type
• Import Gain
• AGC
• TVG
• BAC
• Layback
• Offset X
• Offset Y
• MapProj
• MinX
• MinY
• MaxX
• MaxY
• Start Time
• End Time
• Line Length
5.6.4.11 Coverage
• The Coverage Report creates either an “.xls” (default) or PDF file that
summarizes a number of lineal and aerial parameters including:
• Per-Line Statistics Including:
• File Name
• Area Covered
• Perimeter
• Line Length
• Per cent of Total Coverage
• Total Survey Coverage Statistics including:

• Grid Area
• Grid Area without data
• Area Mapped at 100 Pct
• Area Mapped > 300 Pct and a
• Color-coded image illustrating the coverage statistics
• As well a GeoTiff will be created and placed in the Project root

directory.
• Left-click the Coverage button and the the Sonar Coverage Report
Options dialog will appear (Figure 240) giving the user choices for coverage
color codes and GeoTiff Max size in Pixels. If the Save Report as PDF
option is not selected an xls file will be created.

Page 295
Figure 240: Sonar Coverage Report Options
• After the options dialog is dismissed the dialog in Figure 241 will appear for
a maximum of 3 seconds and then the report will run in the background.
Once the report is generated (In Microsoft Excel Format .xls) it will
automatically be opened in the default spreadsheet editor on the PC (Figure
242).
Figure 241: Build Survey Coverage Report Backgrounder Info
N.B. All files generated in the report are located in the project root
directory.

Page 296
Figure 242: Partial Survey Coverage Report
5.6.4.12 Set Cable Out

• See Section 5.14.3 on page 395.
5.6.4.13 Offset Cable Out

• See Section on page .
5.6.4.14 Set Sensor Depth

• This is a global variable change for Sensor Depth in all the lines selected;
therefore, the user should be confident that the sensor depth did not change
during the recording process.
• The most likely scenario for using this function is for a hull (or pole)
mounted sensor where the Sensor Depth was constant for the entire survey.
• If the Sensor Depth (distance from the sea surface to the sensor) must be
corrected it may be done using this dialog (Figure 243)

Page 297
Figure 243: Set Sensor Depth
5.6.4.15 Import Bottom Track

• Imports the Bottom Track from a previously determined tracking iteration.
Normally used if the sonar file was previously Bottom tracked but then re-
imported from the recorded format.
• After a file has been Bottom Tracked (See Section 5.9.2 on page 339 for
sidescan files or Section 5.10 on page 345 for sub-bottom files) the actual
bottom track values are stored in a separate file in the CSF directory with
the same name as the original CSF file but with the extension “.btk”. If a file
is re-imported it is not necessary to re-do Bottom Tracking; the previous
.btk files may be assigned to the newest iteration of the CSF file. Note
however that this must be done BEFORE opening the Bottom Track
Window for the newest iteration of the CSF File.
• To apply an existing Bottom Track to a newly re-imported CSF file(s)
• Re-import the CSF file(s) whose previous version(s) was/were
already Bottom Tracked
• Left-click the Import Bottom Track button and all existing .btk files
will be applied to the selected CSF Files
• The dialog in Figure 244 below will display the result of the
Import Bottom Track operation

Page 298
Figure 244: Results of Import Bottom Track
5.6.5 Sonar File Right-Context (Right-click) Pop-up Menu

The Sonar File context pop-up menu (Figure 245) is activated by selecting a Sonar
File in the Map Window and immediately right-clicking. The majority of the
selections are available for both sidescan and sub-bottom sonar files with any
exceptions noted in the sections that follow.
Figure 245: Sonar File Context Pop-up Menu
5.6.5.1 Sonar File Manager
See Section Sonar File Manger on page 282.

Page 299
5.6.5.2 Settings
Gain settings. See Signal Processing on page 354.
5.6.5.3 AGC
Automatic Gain Control . See Section 5.11.1.2 on page 359 in Signal

Processing.
5.6.5.4 BAC
Beam Angle Correction. See Section 5.11.1.1 on page 358 in Signal

Processing.
5.6.5.5 UGC
User Defined Gain Control . See Section 5.11.1.6 on page 364 in Signal
Processing.
5.6.5.6 Use Heading From Towfish
SonarWiz projects sonar data n the Map Window from each ping perpendicular to
the towfish heading; by default GPS Course Made Good heading is used. When
active, the Use Heading From Towfish function reads the towfish heading and
projects the sonar data on the screen according to this heading.
This option is not recommended over the default GPS Course Made Good heading
unless the user is certain that the heading senor is very accurate i.e. inertial
navigation sensor.
5.6.5.7 Bottom Track
See Section 5.9.2 on page 339 for sidescan files or Section 5.10 on page 345 for sub-
bottom files.
5.6.5.8 Digitize New Features
See Section 5.16.3 on page 445 for Sidescan sonar data or Section 5.16.4 on page
446 for Sub-bottom sonar data.
5.6.5.9 Hide
Disables display of the currently selected file. Equivalent to removing the check
mark in the Display column of the Sonar File Manager for the selected file.
5.6.5.10 Isolate
Hides display of all sonar file except the currently selected file. Equivalent to
removing the check marks to all but the currently selected file in the Display column
of the Sonar File Manager.

Page 300
5.6.5.11 Export image of selected section

This function allows the user to graphically select and export a portion of a sonar
file using the mouse.
Steps:
1. Select the desired sonar file (Left-click)
2. Right-click to get the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select Export
image of selected section.
3. The cursor will turn into a cross hair and the Select Section to Export
as Image dialog will appear (Figure 246).
4. Place the cursor at the start of the desired selection. Left-click and hold
while dragging the cursor to the end of the desired section (Figure 246).
Le
ft-c
(an lick
y d and
ire
cti drag
on
)
Figure 246: Export Selection
5. The Select Section to Export as Image dialog will populate the

From/To fields for Ping, Event and Time values.
6. Clicking the Options button will open the Image Export Options
dialog seen in Figure 237 and discussed in Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288.
7. Click Save to have the program open the Save As dialog. By default
the file will be given the same root name as the selected file (with a .jpg
extension) and the Save-to directory will be the Project Images
directory.

Page 301
5.6.5.12 Flip
For sub-bottom sonar files only.
This function flips the sub-bottom image from top to bottom making images from
westbound survey lines easier to interpret as by default the layout would have the
first return at the bottom of the image rather than the top.
Figure 247 is an uncorrected image where the top line, running northwest, has not
been flipped. As such, the north-up display of the Map Window makes the top line
appear inverted such that he first return is under the last return.
Figure 247: Northwest Line not Flipped
Figure 248 has the top line “flipped” allowing for a more intuitive interpretation to
the display where the first return is above the last return.

Page 302
Figure 248: Northwest line Flipped
5.6.5.13 Move
See Section 5.14.8 on page 406 for details.
5.6.5.14 Navigation
See Section 5.13 on page 373 for details.
5.6.5.15 Mosaic Channels

Sidescan function only.
Controls which channel (Port/Starboard/Both) of the sonar file is actively displayed
in the Map Window. This function is also accessible through the Sonar File
Manager Sonar Files Section in the Channels column (see Section 5.6.2 on page
283)
5.6.5.16 Transparency
Sidescan function only.
This function makes a user-defined range of data, on either side of nadir,
transparent.
This function is particularly useful where a file lies under another and contains useful
information that the nadir regions of the top file cannot “see”.

Page 303
This function does not suffer from the loss of shadows like an overlap mode such as
shine-through or average.
Figure 249 shows the Transparency sub-menu with the four possible choices.
Selecting the Set Transparency this File option activates the Set Nadir
Transparency dialog (Figure 250) where the user may enter the Transparent Nadir
Range in meters.
Figure 249: Transparency sub-menu
A setting of “x” meters means that the sonar data will be made transparent x meters
either side of nadir result in a 2x transparency.
Figure 250: Set Nadir Transparency Dialog
Figure 251 Shows a 10 meter transparency setting on a Sonar File. Figure 252
Illustrates how tan object in an underlying file can be revealed without resorting to
an overlap mode thus preserving any shadows.

Page 304
Figure 251: 10m Transparency Applied to Sonar File

Page 305
Figure 252: File Lying Under has a Contact
5.6.5.17 Order
Sonar files are drawn in the Map Window in the order that the files are listed in the
Sonar File Manager dialog. Thus, the last file drawn is the last file listed in the
Sonar File Manager and will be displayed on top of the other files obscuring
them in areas where there is overlap.
The file order may be changed by right-clicking on a selected sonar swath to invoke
its context menu, and then selecting the Order item (Figure 253). This provides
several options for moving the currently selected sonar file forward or backward in
the drawing order.
Figure 253: Order Menu Selections
Bring to Front
• Makes the selected file on top of all other lines i.e. drawn last. In the Sonar
File Manager the file is moved to the bottom of the file list.

Page 306
Send to Back
• Makes the selected file on the bottom of all other lines i.e. drawn first. In
the Sonar File Manager the file is moved to the top of the file list.
Bring Forward
• Moves the selected file on top of the next drawn file. In the Sonar File
Manager the file is moved down one row in the file list.
Send Backward
Moves the selected file under the previously drawn file. In the Sonar File
Manager the file is moved up one row in the file list.
Specify Drawing Order
Activates the dialog in Figure 254 which displays ALL the sonar files in the
project, not just the active files. The user may drag each file up or down,
using a left-click hold, until the desired order is achieved with the last file in
the list being drawn last i.e. on top of all other files.
Figure 254: Mosaic File Order Dialog
5.6.5.18 Contact Hiding

It may occur that a project contains a contact whose existence or position may not
be releasable to some end users viewing the final exported mosaic. This function
(Figure 255) allows the user to graphically hide a contact using the mouse.

Page 307
Figure 255: Contact Hiding Menu
To hide a Contact:
2. Right-click to get the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select Contact
Hiding>Use Mouse to hide target
3. The cursor will turn into a cross hair.

4. Place the cursor on one side of the contact to be hidden. Left-click and hold
while dragging the cursor to the other side of the contact.
5. The program will paste coherent imagery from sections adjacent to the
contact postilion. See Figure 256
To Un-hide Contacts:
For contacts in a specific file only:
1. Select the file
2. Right click and select Contact Hiding>Un-hide targets on
selected line
For all contacts in the project:

1. Select the file
2. Right click and select Contact Hiding>Un-hide targets on
selected line

Page 308
Figure 256: Contact Hiding: Before & After
5.6.5.19 Properties
See Section 5.6.4.8 on page 293 for details.
5.6.5.20 Adjust Displayed Range

Allows the interactive display of individual sonar files in the mosaic view. This
option does not affect the range displayed in the waterfall views.
The Make Like Selected dialog in the Sonar File Manager (see Section 5.6.3.4
on page 287) transfers the Displayed Range setting to any particular file from a
reference line to any other line in the project.
5.6.5.21 Trim
Frequently sonar files contain data at the beginning or the end of the file that show
the vessel in a turn or maneuvering to get on track. This data may cover other good
sonar data and makes the mosaic look untidy. This function allows the user to select
a portion(s) of a sonar file that is not to be displayed.
To trim the end of a sonar file:
2. Right-click to open the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select Trim
3. Select Trim
5. Place the cursor at the start of the section to be hidden. Left-click and hold
while dragging the cursor to the end of the section
6. When the left mouse button is released a confirmation dialog will appear
(Figure 257).

Page 309
Figure 257: Trim Ends
To undo trimming function, whether by mouse or by feature:

2. Right-click to open the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select either:
a) Undo Trimming on this File
b) Undo Trimming on All files
5.6.5.22 Split
Sonar files may be split either automatically or manually (Figure 258) such that the
new files created from that split may be treated differently. The need to split sonar
files may be for a variety of reasons but the most common being:
• The original file is too large to be manipulated easily
• The original file overlaps itself i.e. multiple passes over the same seafloor
• An abrupt change in seafloor reflectivity affecting gain settings.
N.B. A sonar file that has been Trimmed (See Section 5.6.5.21 on page 308) must
first be un-Trimmed prior to performing the split function.

Page 310
Figure 258: Spit Choices: Auto or Manual (With Mouse)
For complex sonar files where the navigation returns upon itself standard Splitting
(with mouse) may prove to be too difficult to do graphically. If this is the case then
use the Auto Split function.
Auto Split...
The Auto Split function analyzes the selected sonar file and determines where the
turns occur in the file. Once the turns are identified the file will be broken up in to
separate files each comprising of either a straight-away or a turn. For example: A
single sonar file that consists of two reciprocal passes over an object with a turn in
between will be split in to 3 separate files.
2. Right-click to get the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select Auto
Split...(Figure 258)
3. The menu in Figure 259 will open

Clip Out turns
• Leaving this option un-checked results in all new sub-sections of

the split file being displayed in the Map Window.
• When checked, all sub-files determined to be turns will be deleted.

Page 311
Figure 259: Auto Split Dialog
Advanced Options(Not for the Timid)
SonarWiz uses factory default variables to aid the program in determining

where to split the selected file which is suitable for about 90% of all possible
situations. If however Auto Split does not work as desired the factory
defaults may be adjusted by selecting the >> button and adjusting the
variables in Figure 260 as described below:
Figure 260: Auto Split - Advanced Settings
Average #
• The number of pings over which the instantaneous average heading

will be determined
Max length of turn in Pings
• This value determines the maximum time (in Pings) that the
function will go before splitting the file.
• Helpful numbers:
Sonar Range Max Ping Distance traveled in

Setting Rate (Hz)** meters at 3 knots with
100 pings
25 30 5
50 15 10
75 10 15
150 5 30

Page 312
250 3 51
500 1.5 102
750 1 154
** Assumes Sound Velocity of 1500m/s
Angle
• The size of the angle that indicates a turn exists

Stop turn angle
• The instantaneous average heading required between two averaged

headings (from Average # above)to indicate that the turn is
completed
To Split a Sonar File with Mouse
2. Right-click to get the Sonar File context pop-up menu and select Split
Sonar File With Mouse

4. Place the cursor at the point where the file is desired split and left-click.
5. When the left mouse button is released a confirmation dialog will appear
(Figure 261).
6. The Map Window will refresh and only one side of the original file that
was split will be selected.
Figure 261: Split Sonar File Confirmation
5.6.5.23 Delete Selected Sonar File

Deletes the file from the current project after clicking OK to the confirmation dialog
(Figure 262).

Page 313
Figure 262: Confirm File Deletion
N.B. Neither the original sonar file nor the CSF file are deleted. The CSF file
is simply removed from the Sonar File Manger List.
• CSF Files
5.6.6 Multiple Sonar Files Right-Context (Right-click) Pop-up

Menu
Selecting multiple Sonar Files and right-clicking opens the multi-file context pop-up
menu (Figure 263).
Figure 263: Multi-file Right-Click Pop-up Menu
5.6.6.1 Sonar File Manage

Opens the Sonar File Manager. See Section 5.6 on page 282

Page 314
5.6.6.2 AGC
See Section 5.6.5.3 on page 299
5.6.6.3 BAC
5.6.6.4 Hide
5.6.6.5 Isolate
5.6.6.6 Aggregate
Combines the selected sonar file into one continuous file.
N.B. This function should only be used on files that are continuous in time and
ping sequence numbers.
5.6.6.7 Delete Selected Sonar File

5.6.7 Trimming Sonar Data to Feature Extents

Sonar data (mosaics) may be trimmed to the extents of a polygon, rectangular or cicular
feature.
After creating a closed polygon, including rectangular and circular features, (See Section
5.16.7 on page 460) select the feature and right-click Trim the Sonar Data to Feature
Extents...(Figure 264).

Page 315
Figure 264: Trim Sonar Data
Once selected the menu in Figure 265 below will appear which asks the user to specify what
should be done with any sonar file that exists outside the polygon, i.e. sonar file(s) that do
not touch or intersect the selected polygon ,
Do Nothing...
• The display state of any files not touched by the polygon will be unaffected
Hide Them...
• Files not touched by the polygon will be hidden but still available to be re-
enabled via the Sonar File Manager.
Remove from Project...
• Files not touched by the polygon will be removed from the project i.e. un-
linked” but still available in the project CSF directory to be added to the
project via the Sonar File Manager (See 5.6.4.1 on page 291)
Delete CSF Files...
• Files not touched by the polygon will be removed from the project and their
associated CSF file will be deleted. IN order to restore a file deleted ith this
option the raw sonar file will have to be re-imported.

Page 316
Figure 265: Trim Sonar Files to Polygon Dialog
After left-clicking OK SonarWiz will trim the files that intersect the polygon and take the
desired action for those that do not. The result of the sonar data trimmed from Figure 265 is
shown in Figure 266 below.
Figure 266: Result of Polygon Trimming

Page 317
Trimming may be “undone” if desired. See 5.6.5.21 on page 308 for details.
5.7 Export
The Export button (left) within the Post Processing Ribbon Menu has a drop-down
menu (Figure 267) that offers several options for outputting the sensor data from
SonarWiz.
SonarWiz can take the data processed within it and Export several different products as
either standalone reports or for use into external GIS or CAD systems.
• Specifically SonarWiz offers the following Export options:
• Save Project as Geo Image
• Save Individual GeoTiffs
• Save Project as Website
• Export Files to 3D Viewer
• Export Mosaic to Google Earth
• Batch Image Export
• Sonar Coverage Report
• Capture Screen Image

Page 318
Figure 267: Export Drop-down Menu
5.7.1 Save Project as Geo Image

The SonarWiz Export process is “WYSIWYG” - What you see is what you get.
Whatever is framed in the Map Window and whatever is enabled (contacts, charts,
features etc) will be exported.
SonarWiz will export the image framed in the Map Window in several different
image formats including:
• GeoTiff
◦ SonarWiz creates GeoTiffs with both the embedded georeferencing
component and the associated .tfw ASCII text file.
• GeoJPG
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .jgw ASCII text file.
• GeoPNG
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .Pgw ASCII text file.
• ERDAS Imagine
• Windows BMP
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .bpw ASCII text file.
• ECW
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .eww ASCII text file.
◦ Recommended for AutoCAD users
• BIL Raster
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .blw ASCII text file.
• JPEG 2000
◦ SonarWiz creates the associated .j2w ASCII text file.

Page 319
• GeoPDF
Notes:
• The maximum size of a standard GeoTIFF or TIFF image is 4 Giga-pixels.
SonarWiz will display a warning message to the user if a TIFF image of
more than 4G pixels is to be created. Should the size of the desired image
exceed 4Giga-pixels the user should choose an alternate unrestricted format
such as GeoJPG or ERDAS Imagine.
• A number of ancillary files specific to each output format are also created in
the Export process. For example when exporting a GeoTIFF the files
created include dbf, shp, shx, tfw and prj files are created regardless of
which option is chosen.
To export a mosaic to a Geo Image:

1. Frame the image. The image that appears in the Map Window will constitute the
entire Geo Image; therefore, frame the mosaic in the Map Window using the
following considerations:
a) the background image and/or any overlays on or off;

b) which specific sonar files are to be displayed;
c) the display order of the visible sonar files;
d) survey lines on or off;
e) digitized features on or off;
f) captured targets on or off
g) GeoGrid and/or Grid on or off; and
h) the desired zoom level;
2. Select Save Project as Geo Image under the Export button (Figure 267) in
order to bring up the dialog in Figure 268.

Page 320
Figure 268: Save as Geo Image Dialog
3. Enter the full path and name of the Geo Image to be created. By default the
project's GeoTiff directory will appear as the full path.
4. Either:
a) Specify Image Resolution of the exported image in meters per
pixel. The information window to the right of this option automatically
calculates the image size and displays the file size in megabytes.; or
b) Specify Image Size in Pixels as either:
i. The same size as the current view
ii. To fit a connected printer or
a user specified size.
5. Specify the Background Color as either Black or White
6. Crop the output image to selected Feature
A drop-down list of any polygons or rectangles on the Map Window
available to be used as a cropping template.
7. Launch Viewer after Saving
The default image viewer for th current system will be started in order
to display the exported GeoTiff.
8. Averaging Filters

Page 321
This function de-speckles high-contrast images but at the cost of a loss

of resolution resulting in a more blurred image. Choices include No
Smoothing resulting in no resolution loss from 2x2 up to 10x10 with the
largest filter resulting in the highest loss of resolution.
5.7.2 Export Individual Images to GeoTiff

To export an individual GeoTiff for each enabled sonar file in the project:
1. Select Save Individual Geotiffs... under the Export button to open the
dialog seen in (Figure 269) below
2. Select the Image File Type. See Section 5.7.1 on page 318 above for
descriptions of the various raster formats used in SonarWiz.
3. Specify the image resolution
4. Select the Background color for the unpopulated raster cells
5. Click OK
6. Images will be exported to the Project\GeotTiff directory
Figure 269: Save Individual Geotiffs
5.7.3 Exporting Entire Project to Web

One of the most powerful features of SonarWiz is its ability to export the entire
processed project to a website, thus allowing non-licensed and non-technical
uses access to the full report through their web browsers.
To export the entire project to a website:
1. Select Save Project as Website under the Export button in order to
bring up the dialog in Figure 270

Page 322
Figure 270: Save Project as Website Dialog
2. Output Folder
• Enter the full path (file location) of website to be created. By
default the project's Web directory will appear as the full path.
3. Logo Image
• A logo image (.bmp, .jpg, or .gif formats only) may be inserted into
the report.
4. Logo URL
• A link to any website may be added to the report such that clicking
on the inserted logo will open a new browser window to the
designated URL.
N.B. Be sure to put the full URL starting with “http://”
5. Company Name
• Enter your company name here.
6. Title
• Enter the project Title here.
7. Description

Page 323
• Enter the project description and designate whether or not to

include this description on every page of the report.
8. Colors
• Select Background Color and Text Color
9. Link Target Report
• If an HTML Target Report was created (see Report Generator in
Section 5.15.8.5 on page 426) and is desired inserted into the
website Browse to its location and select it.
• Any existing contact HTML reports will from the database and
their name(s) inserted here with the option of including scales (or
not) on the target images (Figure 271). The most recently generated
contact report is shown at the top of the list. The last item in the list
is an option for not including hyperlinked contacts.
Figure 271: Drop Down List of Any Existing Contact Reports
10. Image Resolution

• Select the desired resolution of the output mosaic. The program will
automatically choose the size and number of tiles to be created in
the website. The information dialog to the right of this option
shows how many tiles will be created, the total pixel size of the
mosaic, the dimensions of each tile, the dimensions of the mosaic
and and the total file size. SonarWiz will limit individual tile size to
16MB.
11. Waterfall Image
• If desired the user ma y insert the waterfall images of each sonar file
into the website. The Waterfall Image Annotation button
opens the Image Export Options dialog as discussed in Section
5.6.3.5 on page 288.
12. Once the OK button is clicked, depending on the size of the project, it
may take a significant amount of processing and time for the computer
to create the website.
5.7.3.1 Viewing the Web Project

Once the project has been created as explained in Section 5.7.3 above, the PC's
default web browser will open automatically to the project's “Home Page”.

Page 324
General Notes:
1. The entire web site has been placed in the directory specified in Section
5.7.3 above. By default, the project's Web directory will have been suggested
to the user at the time of the Web Project creation.
2. The entire Web Project may be copied to another location (i.e. CD-ROM,
DVD, or USB Drive) by simply copying the contents of the folder specified
during the creation process.
3. In order to open the Project Web Site either:
a) Open a Web Browser and type Ctrl+O and then browse to the
directory containing the Web Project and select the file index.htm; or,
b) Use a file system browser such as Windows Explorer®, browse to the
directory containing the Web Project and double-click on the file
index.htm
4. Users with Internet Explorer® will get a security warning about ActiveX
content (Figure 272). FireFox® users are immune from this problem.
Figure 272: Internet Explorer ActiveX Warning
One-Time Fix (IE8) or only fix (IE7 and earlier)

• left-click on the warning for more options (Figure 273) then left-
click on Allow Blocked Content
Figure 273: Allow Content
• Yet another warning will appear (Figure 275). Left-click on Yes and
the Project Web Site is available for viewing.
Permanent Internet Explorer 8 Fix

Page 325
Figure 274: Permanent IE8 Active X Fix
5. Once the web site is open in the browser, the user may click on a
number of different images / links within the web site in order to view
more detailed information, specifically:
• URLs: Clicking on the company logo or company name at the top
left hand portion of the Project Home page will direct the user to
the web site specified during the creation of the web site.

Page 326
Figure 275: Final IE Nag Screen
• Clicking on the main image of the Home Page will open a new
window with a higher resolution image. If more than one tile was
created by the program the main image will appear in tiles and any
one may be clicked on for greater detail.
• Once a higher resolution image is open, the user may click on any
contact in order to have a detailed contact pop up window open
appear. This function will only work if a Contact report was Linked
with the Web Site in Section 5.7.3 above.
• If waterfall images for each file in the project were selected to be
included in the Web Site in Section 5.7.3 a table will appear below
the main image(s) where the user can click on a file name and have
the full waterfall of the line open in a separate window.
• When viewing SBP lines, a left-click will cause the file to be resized
such that it fits within the entire viewing window. A subsequent
click will cause the image to return to its original size and vice versa.
5.7.3.2 Exporting the Web Project to CD/DVD

The Save Project as Website function builds an autorun.inf file for the convenience of
users that burn the web export to a CD or DVD.
Once the Website has been created, the entire contents of the specified Output
folder in (Section 5.7.3) may be copied to a CD or DVD. It is important that the just
the files in the Web folder are copied to the root directory of the CD/DVD and not
the folder itself.
Once the CD/DVD has been created the autorun.inf file will automatically launch the
web browser on the index.html file unless CD autorun is disabled on the viewing
computer.
5.7.4 Export to 3D Viewer

SonarWiz has the ability to export both sub-bottom and sidescan soar files to an
external 3D viewer.

Page 327
Figure 276: 3D Viewer SBP and SSS Options
5.7.4.1 Export SBP files to 3D

Viewing Sub-bottom files in the Map Window can be difficult to conceptualize as
SBP files exist in the Y/Z plane whereas the Map Window displays the X/Y plane.
In order to aid the user in “seeing” the third (Z) dimension SonarWiz can export
SBP files to 3D Viewers.
To Export SBP Files to a 3D Viewer
Select Export Files to 3D Viewer>Export SBP Files to 3D... under the
Export button (Figure 276) to open the dialog in Figure 277.
Output folder to store images
• By default the Project's 3DView folder is automatically inserted into this

filed. Users may select a different folder if desired.
3D Output View/File Format
Chesapeake .XYZ
• Creates a SonarWiz specific file format compatible with the CTI 3D

Viewer. See CTI 3D Viewer below on page 331 for details on the CTI
3D Viewer
Fledermaus .SD
• Generates the output images in the IVS3D Fledermaus proprietary .SD

format such that they SBP files may be viewed in the Fledermaus or the
freeware iView4D application.
• iView4D is available for download free-of-charge from IVS3D at the
following link:

Page 328
http://www.ivs3d.com/download/iview3d_download.html
Launch 3D Viewer when Export Completes
• Checking this box will open the selected 3D viewer after the image is
compiled.
SBP Files Selected for Export
• SBP files may be selected individually for export into the 3D image or all
files may be selected using the Check All box.
Aggregate into single SD File
• Checking this box will create a single Fledermaus “.sd” file which makes
loading the exported file in the Fledermaus compatible viewer faster.
SD Version
• Choose either SD version 6 or 7 according to the version of Fledermaus or

iView on your computer.
• Note that Version 7 SD files are not compatible with iView3D whereas
both versions are compatible with iView4D.
Options
• Open the Annotation Dialog – See Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288.

Open Last Scene
• Opens the 3D Viewer with the last set of files that were viewed.

Page 329
Figure 277: Export Files to 3D Viewer Dialog
5.7.4.2 Export SSS Files to 3D Viewer

To Export SBP Files to a 3D Viewer
Select Export Files to 3D Viewer>Export SBP Files to 3D... under the
Export button (Figure 276) to open the dialog in Figure 278.
Output folder to store
• By default the Project's 3DView folder is automatically inserted into this

filed. Users may select a different folder if desired.
Optional Grid File
• Grid files in the “.grd” format from Surfer 7/8 or those .grd files created in
the Grid and Contour Utility (See Section Error: Reference source not
found on page Error: Reference source not found for more information )
may be imported into the program.
Include Geo-referenced Image File
• GeoTiff images may be inserted into the output image file. As the GeoTiff
exists in the X/Y plane, the elevation where the image is to be “anchored”
may be specified such that it does not interfere with optimal viewing of the
3D files.

Page 330
Draw Map at Elevation
• The GeoTiff (if selected) may be projected on to any Z-plane (single depth)
in order to achieve a separation between the SBP imagery and the map such
as putting the map below the SBP imagery rather than on top.
Drape image Over Grid
• Checking this box will drape the GeoTiff over the .grd file selected thus
giving the resultant image a textured appearance more representative of the
actual seafloor.
SBP Files Selected for Export
• SBP files may be selected individually for export into the 3D image or all
files may be selected using the Check All box.
Launch 3D Viewer
• Checking this box will open the selected 3D viewer after the image is
complied.
Options
• Open the Annotation Dialog – See Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288.

Open Last Scene
• Opens the 3D Viewer with the last set of files that were viewed i.e. no build
is performed when OK is left-clicked.

Page 331
Figure 278: Export SSS Files to 3D Viewer
CTI 3D Viewer
CTI3D Viewer: 3D Viewer that is installed with SonarWiz.
Commands:
Mouse Wheel: zoom in/out
Drag Left/Right: rotate left/right
Drag up/down: rotate up/down
Right Arrow: Orbit camera right.
Left Arrow: Orbit camera left.
Up Arrow: Orbit camera up.
Down Arrow: Orbit camera down.
PgUp: Camera zoom in.
PgDown: Camera zoom out.
Home: Decrease vertical exaggeration factor.

Page 332
End: Increase vertical exaggeration factor.

Shift+Home: Decrease Grid's Y scale.
Shift+End: Increase Grid's Y scale.
Shift+Up: Pan view forward.
Shift+Down: Pan view backward.
Shift+Left: Pan view left.
Shift+Right: Pan view right.
Q: Pan view up.
Z: Pan view down.
Shift+A: Toggle transparency.
Shift+M: Toggle MipMapping.
Ctrl+L: Load User-defined points from file.
Ctrl+S: Save User-defined points to file.
R: Reset view.
W: Toggle rendering mode.
B: Toggle AABB bounding box.
N: Toggle axis.
M: Toggle axis scale.
H: Toggle (this) help.
Ctrl+R: Start/stop video capture.
ESC or Ctrl+Q: Quit application.
IVS Free Viewer: see http://www.ivs3d.com/products/iview4d/
Fledermaus: see http://www.ivs3d.com/products/
Draped SSS Viewer: To be promulgated
5.7.5 Export Mosaic to Google Earth

Mosaic images may be exported to Google Earth by first exporting the image in
the Map Window to a GeoTiff (See Section 5.7.1 on page 318) and then
selecting Export Mosaic to Google Earth under the Export button (Figure
276).
In order to use the Export to Google Earth function the Google Earth
Program must be installed.
Download Link: http://www.google.com/earth/download/ge/
Image File
• This is the GeoTiff that must be created prior to opening this dialog (See
Section 5.7.1 on page 318)

Page 333
Refer to URL
• A link to any website may be added to the report such that clicking on the
inserted logo will open a new browser window to the designated URL.
• N.B. Be sure to put the full URL starting with “http://”
Title
• Enter the project Title here.
Description
• Enter the project description here

Make background image transparent
• The option sets the space outside the sonar data out to the bounding
rectangle of the Tiff image to be transparent.
• This function in fact converts the Tiff to a Png which is a format that
supports the notion of transparency This is a useful option when you wish
to see only the mosaic against the Google Earth Backdrop.
Launch Google Earth upon Completion
• Google Earth will be started and exported GeoTiff will be activated for
display.
Figure 279: Export Image to Google Earth
5.7.6 Batch Image Export

See Batch Image Export in Section 5.6.3.2 on page 285.

Page 334
5.7.7 Project Reports
5.7.7.1 Sonar Coverage Report

See Coverage in Section 5.6.4.11 on page 294.
5.7.7.2 Project Summary (CSV)

Automatically creates a CSV file and opens it in the default CSV viewer (i.e.
MSExcel/OpenOffice Calculator).
Columns in the CSV File include:
• File Name
• # Pings
• File Size (MB)
• Bits/Sample
• Recorded By
• File Type Import Gain
• AGC
• TVG
• BAC
• AutoTVG
• EGN
• LaybackOffset X
• Offset Y
• MapProj
• MinX
• MinY
• MaxX
• MaxY
• StartTime
• EndTime
• Line Length
5.7.7.3 First and Last Event Numbers

• Date
• Line Name
• First Event Number
• Last Event Number

Page 335
5.7.7.4 Sonar File Summary Report


• Line Name
• Start Date/Time
• End Date/Time
• Start Latitude
• Start Longitude
• End Latitude
• End Longitude
• Range
5.8 Sonar File Processing

Sonar Data, once imported, in almost every case must be processed before a final product is
ready for export.
Referring to the work-flow process in Section 1.6 on page 29, after sonar data has been
successfully imported and basic Sonar File Management functions such as Split,
Aggregate, Trim and, Delete are completed (see Section 5.6.5 on page 298)the next and
CRITICAL step is Bottom Tracking.
5.9 Sidescan Bottom Tracking

SonarWiz includes an integrated manual and automatic bottom tracker for both sidescan and
sub-bottom data; see Section 5.10on page 345 for sub-bottom bottom tracking information.
The purpose of the bottom tracker is to identify the first acoustic return thereby setting the
altitude of the towfish above the seafloor.
The towfish altitude is crucial to creating a slant range corrected record, a prerequisite for
applying the beam angle correction function, and crucial before implementing Automatic
Gain Control.
5.9.1 Real-time Bottom Tracker

When collecting data in Real-time or importing data by Playing Back a sonar file, a
Real-time Bottom Tracker is available (Figure 280)and can be displayed by
selecting R/T Bottom Tracker from the Toolbars button within the View
Ribbon Menu or by right-clicking inside the Waterfall Display (page 57) and
selecting Real-time Bottom Tracker.
The Real-time Bottom Tracker is exactly the same in functionality for Sidescan
and Sub-bottom data with the exception of the Tracking Channels. For sidescan,
the channels are Port or Stbd whereas they are SBP0 and may also include SBP1
if it is a two-channel sub-bottom system.

Page 336
Figure 280: Real-time (Sidescan) Bottom Tracker
Enabling the Auto Tracker
• The Enable Auto Tracker check box turns Auto Tracker On and Off with a
left-click subsequently disabling and enabling Manual Tracking (see below)
Apply Button
• Changes waiting to be applied indicated by an asterisk and will not be

applied until this button is left-clicked.
Use Telemetered Altitude
• Checking this box will cause the Bottom Tracker to use the altitude
derived from the sonar (if that particular sonar provides this function) and
included in the data telegram.
Using Altitude From File
• When replaying a file that already contains bottom tracking information, this
check box makes the bottom tracker use that solution.
Trace Detected Bottom
• The selected channel to be used for bottom tracking (see above) will have a
solid line drawn where the altitude is calculated or manually indicated. The
color of the line is selectable as Blue, Green or Red.
Channel Tracking
• The actual channel used for bottom tracking.

Auto Tracker Controls

Page 337
Tracking Algorithm
• Threshold Detect: The tracking algorithm looks to automatically detect

the bottom using the pixel threshold vale as set by the user. The following
variable are used by the Threshold Detect Algorithm
Threshold
• The SonarWiz Bottom Tracker characterizes the sonar ping by

computing the median amplitude value over the selected samples.
The Threshold Coefficient is used as a multiplier to the median
value and is compared to the incoming sonar values. If the sonar
value exceeds the product of the median and the threshold
coefficient, that sample will be a candidate for the tracked bottom
sample.
Blanking
• The Blanking parameter is used to set the point in the acoustic

signal at which SonarWiz will begin to detect the bottom. Use the
blanking parameter to skip beyond the outgoing pulse. This value is
entered in meters. A general range of values for blanking is 1 meter
to about 4 meters. You may enter a higher value for blanking if the
towfish height is sufficiently large.
Duration
• The Duration parameter specifies the number of consecutive

samples that must exceed the threshold computation above. Typical
values for duration are 3-12.
• Homomorphic: Homomorphic processing is an advanced non-linear DSP
processing technique. In the bottom tracker this technique is used as an
edge enhancement algorithm to allow the tracker to more easily discern it
from the surrounding clutter.
Offset Tracker Solution
• If a systematic offset is required to be added to / subtracted from the

Automatic Tracking Solution it may entered here.
Enable Tracker Smoothing
Bottom Tracking can be very noisy from ping to ping and present an almost
incoherent bottom trace. This function smooths out the bottom trace over
several successive pings in order to make the trace more coherent. An example
of using the smoothing function is shown in Figure 281.

Page 338
No
Smoothing
Smoothing
Figure 281: Tracker Smoothing
Display Corrected Waterfall
• The tracked solution will enable slant range corrections to be applied in real-
time joining the first returns of the port and starboard sides (See Figure
296).
Figure 282: Corrected Waterfall Display

Page 339
Manual Tracker Controls

Disabling Auto Tracker allows this portion of the Real-time Altitude Tracker
window to be accessed.
Manual Fish Height
A set value of the towfish altitude may be entered in this box.

Reset w/Mouse Shift-Click
• Holding the Shift Key while left-clicking the waterfall at the range where
the user wishes to mark the first bottom return will result in an altitude
value being set.
• If Trace Detected Bottom(page 336) is set then the trace line will appear
on the selected channel (see Channel Tracking on page 336). The value
will remain constant until another Shift Left-click combination is pressed.
5.9.2 Sidescan Bottom Tracker

The Sidescan Bottom Tracker is used for post processing data i.e. the sonar data
stored on disk and processed after the actual survey has taken place.
The Bottom Tracker (Figure 283) is opened by one of the following:

• Left-clicking Bottom Tracker button (left) in the Sonar File
Processing Group within the Post processing Ribbon Menu
• Selecting a line and subsequently right-clicking and selecting Bottom

Tracker from the pop-up menu
• Left-clicking on the Bottom Track button within the Sonar File

Manager
• Using the hot keys Ctrl+B

Page 340
Figure 283: Sidescan Bottom Tracker Dialog
Overview
The Bottom Tracking Window in Figure 283 shows the sidescan record in a
port/starboard view. The solid orange line at the first return of the port channel
indicates that the record has been automatically tracked.
The window provides two modes for applying first return (sensor altitude) to the
record:
1. Manual: the user creates points along the record using the mouse to
indicate the location of the bottom based on visual interpretation. The
points are automatically connected by a line to represent the continuous
bottom. See Manual Tracking on page 341 for detailed information.
2. Automatic: the program attempts to determine the first return along the
whole record using an amplitude/threshold algorithm. This correction is
initiated by pressing the Track It button. See Auto Tracking on page 342
for detailed information.
Bottom tracking corrections made to the sonar record, whether automatically or
manually, are applied by pressing the Save button.
Note that this affects only the file in which the processed sonar record is stored (the
CSF file). It does not in any way change the original sonar data file (e.g. the XTF
file).
Channel Control
Port / Starboard Radio buttons allow the user to pick which channel to use for
correcting the record. It is only possible to apply corrections using a single channel.

Page 341
It may occur in some data that one channel is better than the other for bottom
tracking for reason such as surveying parallel to steep contours, bottom geology or a
noisy water column in one channel.
Visual Control
The image manipulation controls are intended to aid in the visual detection of the
seafloor and do not affect the project outside of the bottom tracker window.
Gamma Correct
• Adjusts the intensity of colors in a bitmap by changing the gamma constant

that is used to map the intensity values.
Histo-Equalize
• Linearizes the number of pixels per gray level in a bitmap. This can be used
to bring out the detail in dark areas of an image.
Normalize
• Increases the contrast in an image by centering, maximizing, and

proportioning the range of intensity values.
Copy to Clipboard
• Copies the current sonar image as displayed in this dialog to the clip board..
Note that other screen elements (e.g. Menus, buttons) are not included.
Manual Tracking
The manual bottom tracking tools allow you to define the location of the bottom
along the sonar record by adding and, if necessary, removing points using the
mouse. As well, manual bottom tracking allows the user to “clean up” any automatic
tracking or sensor telemetered tracking (i.e. Klein 5500).
Insert Points
• Selecting Insert Points causes the left-mouse button to insert points with
a single click, the right-mouse button to delete points within a rectangle that
is right-click dragged to size.
• Within the waterfall area insert inflection points with a single mouse left-
click along the trace where the bottom is varying. As you Insert Points
you will see the bottom profile redrawn to reflect the newly added data
point. The data points are sorted according to their along track position so
that you can insert data points anywhere along the file in any order.
Remove Points
• The opposite of Insert Points above.

• Selecting Remove Points causes the right mouse button to insert points
with a single click, and the left-mouse button to delete points within a
rectangle that is right-click dragged to size. The line defining the bottom will
be adjusted accordingly.
Offset Alt...
• Adds / Subtracts a fixed value from the current Bottom Track solution at
each ping

Page 342
• To apply a fixed towfish altitude offset to the entire sonar record, click on
the Offset Alt button and enter the offset value. A negative value will
move the towfish altitude closer to the sea surface. A positive value will
move the altitude towards the sea floor.
• This function is particularly useful for sonars that have altimeters with a bias
due to tuning or local conditions such as a very soft bottom causing higher
than actual altitude readings.
• Note that Offset Alt is cumulative in that each time an offset altitude is
centered the new altitude is a sum of all previous offset altitudes plus the
current offset altitude.
Clear All
The Clear All button to eliminates any existing tracking information. Use this
button when starting bottom tracking from scratch rather than edit any existing
bottom tracking information.
Auto Scroll
The Auto Scroll check box causes the waterfall image to scroll up when a point is
manually inserted in the within bottom 10% of the waterfall display.
Auto Tracking
The Track It button can be used to run the automated bottom tracker on the
current file. As the tracker progresses through the file, a progress bar at the bottom
of the main view will show the percent complete.
There are four controls that allow you to configure the bottom tracker to the
particular environment the sonar was operating in. Experiment with these settings
for different bottom types and water column environments.
Blanking
• The Blanking parameter is used to set the point in the acoustic signal at
which SonarWiz will begin to detect the bottom. Use the blanking
parameter to skip beyond the outgoing pulse. This value is entered in
meters.
• A general range of values for blanking is 1 meter to about 4 meters. You
may enter a higher value for blanking if the towfish height is sufficiently
large.
Threshold
• The SonarWiz bottom tracker characterizes the sonar ping by computing

the median amplitude value over the selected samples. The Threshold
Coefficient is used as a multiplier to the median value and is compared to
the incoming sonar values. If the sonar value exceeds the product of the
median and the threshold coefficient, that sample will be a candidate for the
tracked bottom sample.
Duration

Page 343
• The Duration parameter specifies the number of consecutive samples that

must exceed the threshold computation above. Typical values for duration
are 3-12.
Smooth
When the Smooth check box is enabled a boxcar filter is run against the detected
altitude. The filter is a weighted moving average using a fixed sample size of 30.
Combining Manual and Automatic Tracking
If the bottom tracker is responding favorably to your particular data but is not quite
tracking the entire line you may use the manual and automatic tools together.
First, press the Track It button to auto-track the line.
Next, use the Remove Points button to eliminate the areas where the auto-tracker
failed. New points can be manually inserted as needed.
Save
• Digitizing efforts are saved by clicking on the Save button and the
Bottom Tracking Window will close.
Save & Next
• Clicking the Save & Next button saves the changes to the current file's
bottom tracking and opens the next file in the Bottom Tracking
Window.
Cancel
• The current changes to the file's bottom are discarded after confirmation by
the program (Figure 284)
Cable out Node Editing
See Section 5.14.3 on page 395 for information on using the Cable Out Node
editing function within the Bottom Tracker.
Figure 284: Confirmation to Cancel Current Edits
5.9.3 Batch Bottom Tracker

SonarWiz includes a tool for applying bottom tracking corrections to several files in
a batch mode. The principle is to first track a few files manually and determine the
most effective bottom tracking parameter values for the particular data set. Once
these settings are known, the batch bottom tracker can then rapidly apply the
correction to a set of files without having to load and process them individually.
The Batch Bottom Tracker tool is launched from the Sonar File Manager
dialog (hot key F11) by clicking the Batch Bottom Track button.

Page 344
The Batch Bottom Tracker dialog is shown in Figure 285.
Figure 285: Batch Bottom Track Dialog
The bottom tracker controls are identical to those used in the Automated bottom
tracker described in Section 5.9.2 on page 342. The file list contains check boxes that
allow you to select which files you want to run the tracker on automatically. Place a
check beside each file that you want to batch process. There are two operations that
can be performed in batch mode:
Track Selected Files
• Runs the SonarWiz Bottom Tracker against the selected sonar files using
the bottom tracking parameters as set at the top of the dialog. If an offset
value has been entered, the program will also add in any offset after the
bottom tracking correction has been applied.
Apply Offset
• Offsets the current (per ping) bottom tracking values in the selected files by
the value entered at the top of the dialog.
Make Default
• Saves the current Bottom Tracker settings as the default values to be used
on subsequent batch operations.

Page 345
5.10 Sub-bottom Bottom Tracking

Sub-bottom or SBP Bottom Tracking SonarWiz includes an integrated manual and
automatic bottom tracker for both sidescan and sub-bottom data; see Section 5.9.2 on page
339 for Sidescan Bottom Tracking information.
The purpose of the SBP Bottom Tracker is to identify the first acoustic return thereby
setting the altitude of the SBP head above the seafloor.
5.10.1 Real-time SBP Bottom Tracker

The Real-time Bottom Tracker is exactly the same in functionality for Sidescan
and Sub-bottom data with the exception of the Tracking Channels. For sidescan,
the channels are Port or Stbd whereas they are SBP0 and may also include SBP1
if it is a two-channel sub-bottom system.
See the Real-time Bottom Tracker in Section 5.9.1 on page 335 for instruction
son how to use the Real-time Bottom Tracker.
5.10.2 SBP Bottom Tracker

The SBP Bottom Tracker is used for post processing data i.e. the sonar data
stored on disk and processed after the actual survey has taken place.
The SBP Bottom Tracking window is the same window as the Digitize New
Features window for sub-bottom data.
Overview
The Bottom Tracking Window in Figure 286 shows the sub-bottom record in an
along-track view. The solid red line at the first return indicates that the record has
been tracked.
The window provides two modes for applying first return (sensor altitude) to the
record:
1. Manual: the user creates points along the record using the mouse to
indicate the location of the bottom based on visual interpretation. The
points are automatically connected by a line to represent the continuous
bottom. See Manual SBP Bottom Tracking on page 349 for detailed
information.
2. Automatic: the program attempts to determine the first return along the
whole record using an amplitude/threshold algorithm. This correction is
initiated by pressing the Track It or Track from Ping button. See Auto
SBP Tracking on page 349 for detailed information.
Bottom tracking corrections made to the sonar record, whether automatically or

manually, are applied by pressing the OK button.

Page 346
Note that this affects only the file in which the processed sonar record is stored (the
CSF file). It does not in any way change the original sonar data file (e.g. the SEG-Y
file)
Figure 286: Digitizing Features Display
The Clear button removes all bottom tracking information whether automatically
determined or manually applied.
The remaining controls in the SBP Bottom Tracker are described in the following
sections.
Tool Bar Buttons
Save Project: Saves project settings immediately.

N.B. SonarWiz will automatically save the project on exit regardless.
Copy: (Screen Capture): Put a copy of the Map Window on to the Windows
clipboard. Useful for grabbing screen shots of interesting features and pasting
them to documents or e-mails
Measure: Measures horizontal distance and true bearing, Vertical distance and
time-of-flight as well as vertical dip angle between two points. Left-Click at first
point and drag cursor to second point. Range and bearing line will stay fixed when
left mouse button is released
Zoom In 10%: Zoom SBP Window in by 10%of current resolution.

Page 347
Zoom Out 10%: Zoom SBP Window out by 10% of current resolution.
Zoom Normal: Displays the sub-bottom data at the default resolution
Create Polyline or Polygon Feature: – See Section 5.16.2 on page 440 for more
information
Add Quick Thickness: See Section 5.16.5.2 on page 451 for more information
Reflector Thickness: See Section 5.16.5.1 on page 450 for more information
Add a Core: See Section Error: Reference source not found on page Error:
Reference source not found for more information
Core List: See Section 5.18.3 on page 474 for more information
Image Appearance
Figure 287: Image Appearance Controls
The image appearance controls (Figure 287)are intended to aide in the visual
detection of the seafloor and do not affect the project outside of the bottom tracker
window.
Histo-Equalize
Normalize


Page 348
Invert
• All colors are inverted – strong reflectors are dark and nil reflectors are
light.
Restore
• All image enhancements are removed and the image is returned to its
original state.
Annotation
• See Image Export Options in Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288..

Rebuild
• Rebuild forces SonarWiz to regenerate the image in the SBP viewer using all
of the current system settings. This function would be used if the color
palettes or contrast were changed and the user wished to see the effects on
the SBP viewer.
Gain Settings
• Opens the SBP Settings dialog. See Section 5.11.2 on page 367.
Preferences
• Opens the SBP Options tab from Program Options. See Section 2.8.3
on page 104 for detailed information
Info at Cursor
Figure 288: Cursor Info
The position of the cursor in the current file is tracked b the Info at Cursor Window
(Figure 288)and detailed information about that particular position is displayed. This
information includes:
Date and Time of Ping
Ping Number WDEP (Water Depth) SDEP (Sensor

Depth)
Latitude Northing
Longitude Easting

Page 349
Heading Course Made Good

Range from sonar Speed
in meters and milliseconds
Altitude / Heave Event Number
Bottom Tracker
Figure 289: SBP Bottom Tracking
Manual SBP Bottom Tracking

The manual bottom tracking tools allow you to define the location of the bottom
along the sonar record by adding and, if necessary, removing points using the
mouse. As well, manual bottom tracking allows the user to “clean up” any automatic
tracking or sensor telemetered tracking.
Insert Points
• Selecting Insert Points causes the left-mouse button to insert points with
a single click, the right-mouse button to delete points within a rectangle that
is right-click dragged to size.
• Within the waterfall area insert inflection points with a single mouse left-
click along the trace where the bottom is varying. As you Insert Points
you will see the bottom profile redrawn to reflect the newly added data
point. The data points are sorted according to their along track position so
that you can insert data points anywhere along the file in any order.
Remove Points
• The opposite of Insert Points above.

• Selecting Remove Points causes the right mouse button to insert points
with a single click, and the left-mouse button to delete points within a
rectangle that is right-click dragged to size. The line defining the bottom will
be adjusted accordingly.
Auto SBP Tracking
The Track It and Track from Ping buttons use Blanking, Threshold and
Duration values specified by the user in order to automatically determine the first
(bottom) return.
Track It

Page 350
• Runs the automated bottom tracker on the entire current file using the
Blanking, Threshold and Duration values in the left part of the dialog
in Figure 289
Blanking
• The Blanking parameter is used to set the point in the acoustic

signal at which SonarWiz will begin to detect the bottom. Use the
blanking parameter to skip beyond the outgoing pulse. This value is
entered in meters. A general range of values for blanking is 1 meter
to about 4 meters. You may enter a higher value for blanking if the
towfish height is sufficiently large.
Duration
• The Duration parameter specifies the number of consecutive

samples that must exceed the threshold computation above. Typical
values for duration are 3-12.
Threshold
• The SonarWiz bottom tracker characterizes the sonar ping by

computing the median amplitude value over the selected samples.
• The Threshold Coefficient is used as a multiplier to the median
value and is compared to the incoming sonar values. If the sonar
value exceeds the product of the median and the threshold
coefficient, that sample will be a candidate for the tracked bottom
sample.
Track from Ping
• Runs Automatic tracking starting at a specific ping number and either

tracking forward or backward through the file (Figure 290).
Figure 290: Track From Ping Dialog
• As either tracker progresses through the file, a progress bar at the bottom of
the main view will show the percent complete.
• Three controls (Blanking, Threshold, and Duration) allow the user to
configure the bottom tracker to the particular environment where the sonar
was operating. Experiment with these settings for different bottom types
and water column environments. See the previous section for details on
Blanking, Threshold, and Duration.

Page 351
Reflectors
See Section 5.16.4 on page 446 for complete details on SBP Reflectors.
Combining Manual and Automatic Tracking
If the bottom tracker is responding favorably to your particular data but is not quite
tracking the entire line you may use the manual and automatic tools together. First,
press the Track It or Track from Ping button to auto-track the line. Next, use the
Remove Points button to eliminate the areas where the auto-tracker failed. New
points can be manually inserted as needed.
Converting Bottom Track to a Reflector
Once the Bottom Track of the sonar file has been edited to the point where it is
acceptable, it must be converted into a Reflector in order make it a proper feature
that can be viewed and exported as well being used as the reference surface for
Thickness calculations (See Section 5.16.5 on page 450).
To convert the Bottom Track to a Reflector left-click the Reflector button in

the Bottom Tracking portion of the SBP Bottom Tracking window which will
open the window in Figure 291.
In the Convert Bottom Track to Reflector window the user may select the
amount of downsampling to occur when the Bottom Track is converted in to a
Reflector.
Figure 291: Convert Bottom Track to Reflector
A value of “1” will take each bottom value from EVERY point into the Reflector
whereas a vale of “10” will only take every 10th point thus reducing the size of the
data object making up the Reflector.
Swell Filter
For situations where a survey was conducted in sea swell conditions the resultant
SBP image may show an undulating seafloor which is a symptom of the swell rather
than a real sea bed feature (Figure 292).
The Swell Filter in SonarWiz can be used to used to remove the effects of ship
heave caused by swell on the first return of the sonar pulse.

Page 352
Figure 292: Effect of Swell on a SBP Record
Using the Swell Filter requires two steps:

• The the seafloor must be tracked such that the Swell Filter has a reference
line.
• Second, left-click the Swell Filter:OFF button in the Bottom Tracker
portion of the SBP Bottom Tracker which will open the Swell Filter
Configuration window (Figure 293).
Figure 293: Swell Filer Configuration Window
The Swell Filter is enabled by clicking on the Enable Swell Filter box and the
period of the swell must be estimated (in seconds) in the field below. This period is
used to generate a low pass filter set of bottom tracked points. The sonar data is
adjusted at each shot by comparing the low-pass filtered altitude to the original raw
altitude. This process moves each ping up or down depending on the relationship of
the filtered surface to the uncorrected surface thereby flattening the acoustic data. It
may take several iterations of applying different swell periods to find the best result
in removing swell effects.
Once the Swell Filter is enabled the Swell Filter button in the Bottom
Tracking window will change from “Swell Filter: Off” to “Swell

Page 353
Filter:On:X.x” where “X.x” is the specified period of the swell. shows the results
of the Swell Filter applied on the SBP profile in Figure 294.
Figure 294: After Swell Filter Applied (Red Line = Pre-Filter Bottom Track)
Swell Filter Tip:
If the period chosen is too long for the actual condition at the time of the
survey, then actual seafloor features such as small mounds and debris might
be made to appear flat.
The best approach is to enter the smallest wave period value that removes
just the sea state motion without affecting the bottom topography.
Heave Compensated SBP Data

For sonar data that has Real-time heave (motion sensor) recorded, the heave value
may be applied by checking the Apply Heave Compensation (if data
available) check-box located in the Annotation Display Options Dialog.
Left-click the Annotation button (See Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288)

When this option is selected the SBP imagery will be corrected for heave in the SBP
Bottom Tracking Window.

Page 354
Figure 295: Annotation/Display Options Dialog
5.10.3 Batch Bottom Tracker

See Section 5.6.3.3 on page 287 for details.
5.10.4 Acoustic Reflectors

See Section 5.16.4 on page 446.
5.10.5 Cores
5.11 Signal Processing

Signal Processing in SonarWiz involves a variety of methods to apply gain to sidescan and
sub-bottom files in order to present the best possible image. In short it is image
enhancement.
SonarWiz offers several levels of signal processing:
• Sidescan:
• Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

Page 355
• Beam Angle Correction (BAC)

• Auto Time Varying Gain (TVG)
• User-designed Gain Controls - Manual (UGC) and Time Varying (TVG)
• Sub-bottom
• Band Pass Filtering
• Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
• User-designed Gain Controls - Manual (UGC) and Time Varying ( TGV)
These signal processing functions are applied on a file by file basis with each file having
independent settings. If multiple gains are applied, they are processed in series beginning
with AGC, UGC, BAC and finally TVG.
Individual (AGC, UGC, BAC) gains can be turned on or off of file at any time by selecting
the file in the Map Window (left-click) and either:
• Invoking the pop-up context menu (right-click), and then selecting the desired
gain from the menu (see Figure 296); or
• Selecting the desired gain by populating the gain check-box (left), located in the
Sonar File Processing Group withing the Post Processing Ribbon Menu;
or
• Highlighting the file within the Sonar File Manager and left-clicking the
Settings button
A dialog for specifying settings for each gain function is displayed by selecting Settings
from the pop-up context menu (Figure 296).

Page 356
Go to Gain Controls
Gains On/Off
Figure 296: Sonar File Gain Controls
The Settings dialog (Figure 297 shows the sidescan Settings Dialog)can also be displayed
by selecting a file in the Sonar File Manager and then clicking the Settings button.
Individual (AGC, UGC, BAC) gains can be turned on or off of file at any time by selecting
the file in the Map Window (left-click) and either:
5.11.1 Sidescan Gain Controls

The Gains Settings Control (Figure 297) controls all sidescan signal processing
functions within SonarWiz. Each Gain control is discussed in detail below; however,
note the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog:
OK
• Applies the current gain settings to the sonar file and closes the dialog.
Apply
• Applies the current gain settings to the sonar file and re-draws it without
closing the dialog. This allows you to immediately view the effect of a gain
setting on the rendering of the sonar image.
Save

Page 357
• Saves the current gain settings to a file so that they can be recalled in the
future, used in another project or sent to another user.
Load
• Loads gain settings from an existing file.

Project Sonar Data Using...
Sonar data is plotted at right angles to the sensor's track; therefore, SonarWiz must
be instructed which heading to use for plotting data. Two possible choices exist:
Course Made Good
• The calculated course between successive GPS fixes and is the

recommended heading sensor to use. This value can vary significantly from
fix-to-fix which is why course smoothing is set in Project Settings (See
Section 2.9.2 on page 130 for more details) at a relatively high value (300).
Sensor Heading
• Taken from a Heading sensor inside the towfish. Sensors such as fluxgate
compasses are not normally accurate enough for projecting sonar data as
they are subject to magnetic variations and local deviation.
• Unless the heading sensor being used is a very accurate, such as an inertial
gyro, this setting should not be used.
Offset (deg) should to be used when a known bias is affecting the heading sensor
in either channel.

Page 358
Figure 297: Gain Settings Control
5.11.1.1 Beam Angle Correction

The Beam Angle Correction function (BAC) attempts to compensate for non-
linear response characteristics of the sonar transducers. It was developed by Bill
Danforth, U.S. Geological Survey:
“Data records collected from any sonar system generally have
artifacts that are related to the non-linear response of the
transducers for that system. This results in areas that may be
darker or lighter in the data record as you look in the along track
direction. Time varied gains applied by the system attempt to
compensate for this, however many times this is inadequate
depending on the system and bottom type. For example, older
analog Klein systems usually have very high backscatter values at
nadir unless the operator finely tunes the system prior to launching
the towfish. If the data file were to be mapped without correcting
for this effect, the result would be a “stripy” data file that would
detract from the overall backscatter variations as seen in the
mapped image and hinder interpretation.”
Danforth, William W., 1997 Xsonar/ShowImage: A Complete

System for Rapid Side Scan Sonar Processing and Display,
U.S. Geological Survey Open File Report 97-686, 77 p.
The are two BAC settings available in the dialog:

Pings

Page 359
• The number of sonar pings on which the averaging function will work. This
setting should usually be in the 200-300 range.
Average
• The “Average” slider controls the amount of overlap between adjacent

processing blocks. Averaging helps to smooth the transition from one
processing block to the next.
Note: The BAC function is computationally intensive. In general, it is best to
process the mosaic with this option turned off initially. Enable the function
when the mosaic is setup the way you want it and bottom tracking has been
performed.
Tip: Adjust the Intensity value to a suitable level first and keep the
Resolution setting as high as possible reducing it only to normalize images
with highly varying intensities across track..
Figure 298: BAC Example
5.11.1.2 Automatic Gain Control

For most sidescan sonar applications, the amplitude of a reflected signal should
imply small-scale “local” relief on the ocean floor such as ridges, rock formations or
man-made objects. To achieve this, the large-scale effects of the incidence angle and
propagation distance on the amplitude of a signal’s reflection must be eliminated.
This is the purpose of the auto-gain control.
Incidence angle: a reflected signal that has an incidence angle of 0° from the
normal (for example, one reflected by a horizontal floor directly beneath the signal
source) will be much stronger than the reflection of a signal with a high incidence
angle (a signal that was propagated nearly parallel to the floor) and therefore which
reflects very little towards the receiver. This means that remote terrain will reflect a
“quiet” background, whereas close terrain will reflect a “loud” background. This
disparity in background adversely affects how objects of interest are highlighted.

Page 360
N.B. Incidence Angle = 90o – Grazing Angle

Propagation distance: a reflection that is received at a distance of 5 yards will be
proportionally stronger (by the inverse square of the distance) than one that is
received at 50 yards. For this reason also, proximate terrains will reflect more loudly
than remote terrains.
The AGC Algorithm
The AGC algorithm used by SonarWiz measures a local average signal strength, and
then rescales all the data so that the local average is shifted to some chosen global
average that determines on the large-scale how quiet or loud the data will be after
rescaling. More specifically, the local average at a given ordinate is computed by
averaging some number of samples (amplitudes) to the left and right of this
ordinate.
The number of nearby samples that are used in this average can be varied. In one
extreme, if zero samples are used on either side, then the local average at a given
ordinate is its original amplitude. Then the rescaling essentially shifts all of the local
averages, and hence the original data, to some constant, the global average. In this
case, the rescaled data is a constant, and all information is lost. In the other extreme,
the entire domain of samples is averaged, so that there is one (constant) local
average. The rescaling in this case will move all the data roughly uniformly, so that
the single local average is shifted to the chosen global average. In either case, the
large-scale effects are not canceled at all. Rather the entire set of data becomes either
uniformly louder or quieter. Thus, an intermediate window of samples that will most
effectively strengthen the quiet regions and diminish the loud regions must be
chosen.
After a local average is computed at each ordinate, the data is rescaled so that the
local average is shifted to some chosen global average. Additionally, the rescaling
function fixes silent signals (zero amplitude) and signals that are as loud as the range
allows. This preserves the contrast of the data so that the extremely quiet and
extremely loud reflections remain such. Also, for aesthetic reasons, the function is
differentiable (smooth) and symmetric, so that data that is shifted downward
(meaning the local average at that ordinate was greater than the global average) is
treated exactly oppositely to the data that is shifted upward.
AGC Settings
The AGC Gain control offers two settings for adjusting both the darkness
(Intensity) of the gain as well as the aggressiveness of the smoothing
(Resolution) applied by the function.
All sonar data should be be bottom tracked prior to applying AGC.
Intensity
• This slider setting determines the overall brightness of the of the processed
image.

Page 361
• The greater the Intensity setting the greater the brightness of the
processed image.
Resolution:
• This slider sets the size of the the gain sampling window in the across track
direction.
• A value of 100 would result in the maximum possible number of sample
windows to be compared with each other and normalized. A
• resolution setting of 1 would make the entire across track swath 1 sample
and normalize accordingly.
• Users will notice that a lower slider value number results in the image
developing an “embossed” look and the resolution decreasing.
• A higher slider value leaves resolution in tact but reduces the effect of the
normalizing filter.
Figure 299: TVG Control

Page 362
Figure 300: AGC Example
5.11.1.3 De-Striping
The De-striping function can be used to reduce the effects of a ‘pitching’ sonar that
is characterized by a stripy1 pattern perpendicular to the direction of travel. A sample
of a section of data before and after the de-striping function has been applied is
displayed below(Figure 301). Apply de-striping to a file by checking the Apply De-
striping checkbox on the Settings dialog.
Figure 301: Before (left) and After (right) De-striping
5.11.1.4 Automatic TVG

The Auto TVG function operates by dividing the data into many parallel swaths,
attempting to equalize the backscatter of each swath. The Route Mean Square
(RMS) power of each swath is compared to a desired power level. The error signal is
fed back to an IIR filter2 and the gain for that swath is adjusted in the opposite
direction.
1
Stripy: Similar in style to Stephen Colbert's “Truthiness” but likely not yet in Wikipedia
2
“IIR filters are one of two primary types of digital filters used in Digital Signal Processing (DSP) applications (the other
type being FIR). "IIR" means "Infinite Impulse Response" From http://www.dspguru.com/info/faqs/iirfaq.htm

Page 363
The Auto TVG function can be envisioned like a large graphic equalizer where the
sliders automatically adjust to keep the power in each band (swath) constant over
time.
The final gain curve applied to the data is a filtered version of the swatch
coefficients. This prevents banding due to discontinuities at the swath edges.
Using Auto TVG
The port and starboard gain/attenuation controls can be used independently to
balance two channels whose overall reflectivity differ significantly from each other.
The sliders operate from -100 to +100:
• Negative values (0 to -100) produce attenuation by multiplying the Auto
TVG result by (1.0 to .01), respectively.
• Positive values (0 to +100) will multiply the result of the Auto TVG
function by 1.0 to 2.0, respectively.
5.11.1.5 Empirical Gain Normalization

Empirical Gain Normalization (EGN) is a relatively new gain function that
works extremely well in most situations and can be considered a replacement for
BAC.
EGN is a function that sums and averages up all of the sonar amplitudes in all pings
in a set of sonar files by altitude and range.
The amplitude values are summed and averaged by transducer (port and starboard)
so there are actually two tables. A given sonar amplitude sample is placed in a grid
location based on the geometry of a ping.
On the x-axis of the grid is range. On the y-axis of the grid is altitude. The resulting
table is used to work out the beam pattern of a sonar by empirically looking at
millions of samples of data."
A note from a CTI client on EGN:

“I have found that EGN is far superior in its results than BAC. It brings up the
contrast ratio of the imagery extremely well with less "washout" of the data
thus preserving resolution. The key with EGN however is lots of coverage in
your mosaic with the more data the better.
When I process data I normally do the following:
• Ensure Bottom Tracking is correct and complete.
• Get the TVG to a point where it looks good
• Select EGN and click on "Rebuild Empirical Gain Normalization Table"
selecting all lines in the project.
• Adjust the EGN Intensity to a level that is satisfactory.”

Page 364
5.11.1.6 User Defined Gain Controls

Two types of User defined gain functions are provided by SonarWiz.
5.11.1.7 Manual Gain Control

In Manual Gain Control (Figure 302)the user has a series of nodes that can be
manipulated in pairs (port and starboard) or independently.
The nodes are adjusted by a left-click and drag such that an overall gain curve is
created and then applied to the selected file. The user will likely iteratively adjust
nodes, apply the new curves and repeat until the sonar file is at level where the user
may see the features that are being investigated.
Figure 302: Manual Gain Mode

Page 365
Figure 303: Manual Gains Applied from Figure 302 Above
5.11.1.8 Time Varying Gain Control

Time Varied Gain: (TVG) A process where amplifier gain is
changed based on time and matched with the returning signals
between outgoing pulses of a side scan sonar. Time Varied Gain
attempts to create an even display of sonar data from the near
ranges tot he far, while dealing with progressively weaker signals
from longer distances.
Fish, J.P. & Carr, H.A., 2001, Sound Reflections, Orleans, MA
The SonarWiz TVG function is used to multiply the sonar samples by a gain value
that increases with elapsed time from the transmit pulse. The TVG is applied
logarithmically so that stringer gain values are applied at the far field of the sonar
signal.
Figure 304: TVG Example

Page 366
Port/Stbd TVG Curves

The TVG of the Sonar data may be adjusted in one of two waya:
Mouse
• A left-click and drag may be applied to the individual curves for the Port
and Starboard curves in order to adjust the imagery.
• In Figure 305 below each TVG curve are divided into three areas by two
magenta lines. Left-clicking and dragging the curves in those areas changes
the corresponding values in the corresponding TVG empirical formula
below each curve.
TVG Formula
• Instead of mouse-dragging the TVG Curves the variables within the TVG
formulae may be typed in or chaged via the up and down arrows.
Apply TVG Starting at...
Time Zero
• The TVG curve is applied at time zero (regardless of Bottom Track)

Detected Seafloor
• The TVG Curve is applied at the first return which is the altitude of the
sensor above the seafloor and applied in Bottom Tracking.
Sync Port/Stbd Gains
• “Marries” the two curves such that any changes introduced in one is
mirrored in the other

Page 367
Figure 305: TVG Control
5.11.2 SBP Gain Settings

Individual gains can be applied to or removed from a sub-bottom sonar data file via
the Settings Window (see Figure 306). Section 5.11 on page 354 discusses how to
quickly apply AGC, BAC or UGC as well as how to open the Settings window.

Page 368
Go to Gain Controls
Gains On/Off
Figure 306: SBP Context Pop Up Menu
The Settings Window (Figure 307)is used to specify settings for each gain function is
displayed by selecting Settings from the pop-up context menu (Figure 306).

Page 369
Figure 307: SBP Gain Settings Context Pop Up Menu
The Gains Settings Control (Figure 307) controls all SBP signal processing
functions within SonarWiz. Each Gain control is discussed in detail below however
note the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog:
OK
• Applies the current gain settings to the sonar file and closes the dialog.
Apply
• Applies the current gain settings to the sonar file and re-draws it without
closing the dialog. This allows you to immediately view the effect of a gain
setting on the rendering of the sonar image.
Save
• Saves the current gain settings to a file so that they can be recalled in the
future, used in another project or sent to another user.
Load
• Loads gain settings from an existing file.
5.11.2.1 Bandpass Filter

A Bandpass Filter is a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filter that attempts to
attenuate unwanted data that is outside the acoustic spectrum of interest and
consists of a low pass and a high pass filter combination.

Page 370
Most sub-bottom systems have them built into the receiver hardware because the
piezoelectric elements are tuned to a specific frequency. However, both seismic
sources and receiver arrays are broadband (the streamers often have significant
response ~100Hz -10kHz).
In a quiet setting, looking at the high frequency component of the response can add
information (detail) that would otherwise lost. Typically, in noisy setting, the high
frequency needs to be eliminated to deal with noise.
For a bubble pulser they are typically set to ~ 400Hz high pass and ~1500Hz low
pass.
For a complete discussion on FIR Filters see the dspGURU at:
http://www.dspguru.com/dsp/faqs/fir
The SonarWiz Bandpass Filter (Figure 308)is used to remove unwanted
frequencies from the resultant image by only letting the desired frequencies pass
though the filter.
Figure 308: Band Pass Filter
Enable Bandpass Filter
• Toggles the Bandpass function on and off

Low-cut Freq Hz
• All frequencies below this user-defines value will be attenuated

High-cut Freq Hz
• All frequencies above this user-defined value will be attenuated

Num Taps
• (from dspGURU.com) A FIR "tap" is simply a coefficient/delay pair. The

number of FIR taps, (often designated as "N") is an indication of
• the amount of memory required to implement the filter,
• the number of calculations required, and
• the amount of "filtering" the filter can do; in effect, more taps
means more stopband attenuation, less ripple, narrower filters, etc.

Page 371
Filter Type
• Choices available are:

• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Rectangular
• See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Window_function for a complete
discussion on these filters.
Enable AGC
See Automatic Gain Control on page 359
Enable AutoTVG
See Automatic TVG on page 362.
Apply De-striping
See De-Striping on page 362.
5.11.2.2 Stacking
Stacking refers to a sliding window average from one ping to the next. Stacking
reduces Gaussian noise at the expense of resolution (both vertical and horizontal).
A stack of 3 implies that the new value of the ping is the average of the old value of
the ping preceding and subsequent ping. A stack of 5 means the ping and the 2
preceding and 2 subsequent pings are averaged.
Stacking enhances features that are common in the records of adjacent pings. In
noisy data it can help pull out a reflector; however, it can also enhance an unwanted
features too.
User Defined Gain/Attenuation
User Defined Gain/Attenuation for sub-bottom processing is the same as for
sidescan sonar data but for one channel only.
See User Defined Gain Controls on page 364 for complete details and
application of this function.
5.11.3 Batch SBP Gains

It occurs frequently that once an optimum level and mixture of gains have been
determined for a single file, other files within the Project area benefit from the same
settings. SonarWiz has the capability to perform “Batch Operations” on files within
a project making their settings “match” a reference file.
See Make Like Selected on page 287 for details on copying gain setting from a
reference file to other file withing the Project.

Page 372
5.12 Editing Navigation & Sensor Data

The ultimate aim of sonar surveying is to produce georeferenced data with associated sensor
data such that seafloor, or sub-seafloor, information may be classified and positioned for any
number of purposes.
The accuracy of the positions and sensor data recorded or calculated in SonarWiz is key to
the success of the survey's final product. SonarWiz offers a Navigation and Sensor editor to
evaluate and correct the reordered navigation and sensor data in order to ensure accurate and
relevant output.
5.12.1 Fish versus Ship Position

Some sonar systems provide the orientation and coordinates of the towfish directly.
For others, it must be estimated using the coordinates of the towing vessel.
As seen in Section 2.9.2 on page 129, one of the project configuration settings is the
selection of which coordinates to use to locate the towfish.
Under the Project Configuration dialog the coordinate source options are as
shown in Figure 309.
Figure 309: Specifying Navigation Coordinate Source and Smoothing.
It is most helpful when importing sonar data to know exactly what the setup was
onboard the survey platform and whether or not Ship and/or Fish position were
accurately calculated and recorded.
Auto
• This will cause SonarWiz to use the fish coordinates if they are available and
the ship coordinates otherwise.
• This can be a chancy option if little is known about the survey platform set-
up.
Always Use Fish Position
• Use this option if the Fish position was accurately calculated in Real-time
and recorded on the sonar data.
Always Use Ship Position
• Use this option if either:

◦ No fish position was recorded

Page 373
◦ The fish position was recorded but was not accurately calculated in
real-time i.e. layback or cable out was not applied correctly and
consistently.
5.12.2 Smoothing
The reality of the survey is that vessel heading change are gradual from ping-to-ping
but Course Made Good calculations from ping-to-ping can jump 10s of degrees at a
time. In order to model the reality of the ping-to-ping survey headings smoothing
must be employed.
SonarWiz employs a smoothing function for removing navigation spikes and
outliers from the stream of navigation coordinates. This smoothing function is
controlled from the Project Configuration dialog as shown in Figure 309.
The function used is a splining function that fits a smoothed track to the raw data
points contained in the original sonar data file or coordinate input stream. The
Time Constant for Course Smoothing represents the number of pings between
Bezier control points and is used to control the relative smoothing of the navigation
data.
The default value is 300 pings. This means that SonarWiz will use navigation data
from every 300 pings as control points for the curve fitting function. Larger values
produce more smoothing, lower values produce less smoothing.
5.13 ZEdit Editor

SonarWiz includes ZEdit that allows for editing, filtering and smoothing navigation, heading,
magnetometer, water depth and other values contained in a CSF file.
ZEdit (Figure 310) is invoked by doing one of the following:
The ZEDit Navigation Editor (Figure 310) is opened by one of the

following:
• Left-clicking the Navigation button (left) within the Sonar File
Processing Group of the Post Processing Ribbon Menu.
• Selecting a line and subsequently right-clicking and selecting

Navigation from the pop-up menu
• Left-clicking on the Navigation button within the Sonar File

Manager

Page 374
Figure 310: ZEdit Main Window
5.13.1 ZEdit Anatomy

ZEdit is divided into six separate areas:
• Menu Bar
◦ Contains Text Pull-down menus for program actions

• Button Bar
◦ Quick tools for program actions

• Map Window
◦ Displays the Navigation for the current CSF line. Tis is the area
where Navigation may be edited and smoothed.
• Graph Window(Red Box)
◦ Displays Navigation or Sensor data along the Y (vertical) axis versus

the Ping Number along the X (horizontal) axis.
• Status Bar (Blue Box)

Page 375
◦ Displays program status, Range & Bearing, cursor location as well

as Num lock and Caps Lock.
• Side Window(Magenta Box)
◦ Reserved for future use

Button Bar
The ZEdit buttons are as follows:
New Document: Creates an “Untitled” CSF file using the current file as the
template.
Open CSF File: Brings up the “Open” dialog allowing the selection of a CSF file
to be opened for editing.
Save: Saves the edits to the current CSF file
Cut: Not yet implemented
Copy: Not yet implemented
Paste: Not yet implemented
Print: Not yet implemented
Show Grid (Ctrl+G): Turns on/off the Overlay Grid in the active window (Map
or Graph)
Fit To View (Ctrl+F): Left-click to the toolbar button have all visible data within
the active window (Map or Graph)
Measure (Ctrl+M):
● In the Map Window it measures distance (in Project Units) and true
bearing between two points. Range and bearing is displayed in the Status
Bar.
● In the Graph Window it measures the value in the Y (vertical) axis and
displays the result in the Status Bar.
● In either window Left-click at first point and drag cursor to second point.
Plot Layback Position: Plots ZEdit calculated layback positions in the Map
Window
Zoom In 10% (PgDn): Left-Click the toolbar button to zoom the active
window in by 10% of current resolution.
Zoom Out 10% (PgUp): Left-click the toolbar button to zoom the active

Page 376
window out by 10% of current resolution.

Pan (Ctrl+A): When the display is zoomed in, the mouse cursor may be used as a
Pan tool. To Pan, drag the image using the left mouse button in the direction you
wish to move the view area. Release the left mouse button and the display will be
updated, centered at the new location
Point Raw: Allows the user to select a raw sonar record (ping) in the active
window (Map or Graph). The CSF Record Information window will
automatically open when a record is selected.
Point Filtered: Allows the user to select an filtered sonar record (ping) in the
active window (Map or Graph) providing one has been created by the user. The
CSF Record Information window will automatically open when a record is
selected.
Zoom Window (Shift+Z): Left-Click and hold to drag a box over a specific area
in either window to be zoomed.
Interpolate in Box: This is the most efficient method to interpolate data in a

straight line between two raw data points. The raw data in a “Left-Clicked and held
drag box” will be interpolated from the top most raw data point in the box to the
bottom most raw data point in the box. If the desired interpolation is not in a
straight line use “Enter Curve Fit Points”
N.B. The function can be performed in the Map Window (rather than using Zedit).
See “Fix Navigation Spikes Inside Feature Extent” on page 462
Enter Curve Fit Points: Allows user to left-click a series of points upon which
the raw data will be filtered.
Fit Data To Curve Points: Moves raw data from current path to curve created by
user. Can be “Undone” if the result is not satisfactory.
Finalize Curve Fit: Removes the user entered curve to be fitted.
Show Curve Points in Plot: Shows the series of points upon which the raw data
will be filtered. This button is “on” by default when the Enter Curve Fit Points
button is selected.
Undo: Removes most recent edit such as Interpolate or Fit Curve.
Execute Smoothing Filter: Opens the Filter Settings dialog
Limit Raw Range: Used in the Graph Window only. Left-click and drag the
upper and lower limits of the Y (vertical ) axis. All data falling outside the new limits
will be constrained to the max/min value.
Update XY from Lat/Lon: Updates XY values in the CSF file when the MAP
Graph axes are Latitude and Longitude
Table 10: ZEdit Buttons

Page 377
5.13.2 The ZEdit Map Window

The Map Window displays a number of different pieces of information including:
● Source of Data
○ Ship or Fish
● Grid
● Data – Raw & Filtered
○ Color-coded boxes represent each individual record (ping)
● Line – Raw & Filtered
○ Color-coded lines represent each individual record (ping)
● Range – Raw and Filtered
○
Figure 311 and Figure 312 show the Map Window with the various data displayed.
The data can be toggled on or off via Right-clicking inside the Map Window
(Figure 311)or the clicking the Map pull-down menu (Figure 312)and selecting the
option to be displayed.
Figure 311: Map Window Display: Grid, Data and Line Plots (Raw and Filtered)

Page 378
Figure 312: Map Window with Range Data Displayed
Choose Map Data

CSF Files have only one set of position data in them with layback variables stored
and applied on screen. XTF files however can contain either ship or fish navigation
data and may even contain both.
When editing XTF files the Map Window can display either Ship or Fish (Sensor)
navigation data subject to the data fields being populated in the CSF file. Depending
on how the data was recorded during the survey one of these vales may be absent.
To switch between Ship and Fish position select Map>Choose Map Data or
Choose Map Data from the right-click pop-up menu in the Map Window
(Figure 311).
Once selected the Choose Map Data dialog will open and the user may select
either Fish or Ship position if those field are populated in the XTF file.
The words Fish or Ship will appear in the bottom right-hand corner of the Map
Window in order to indicate to the user which data are displayed.

Page 379
Figure 313: Choose Map Data
5.13.3 The ZEdit Graph Window

The Graph Window displays Navigation or Sensor data along the Y (vertical) axis
versus the Ping Number along the X (horizontal) axis. Specifically it displays the
following data:
• Altitude
• Cable Meters
• Cable Percent
• Course Made Good
• Water Depth
• Distance to Prev
• Event Number
• Fish X
• Fish Y
• Heading
• Layback
• Layback X
• Layback Y
• Magnetic Field
• Magnetic Strength
• Orig Lat 84
• Orig Lon 84
• Port X
• Port Y
• Range
• Reflectivity
• Speed
• Stbd X
• Stbd Y
Like the Map Window the Graph Window has the following functions which
may be accessed via the Menu bar “Graph” selection or right-clicking in the Graph
Window itself.(Figure 314)

Page 380
Figure 314: Graph Window Right-Click Pop-up Context Menu
In order to select which data to be plotted on the Y Axis select

Graph>Choose Graph data from the Menu bar or select Choose Graph
Data from the Right-click pop-up context menu (Figure 314). Once selected the
the Choose Graph Data Menu will appear (Figure 315). Simply choose which
data are to be displayed using the pull-down menu provided.

Page 381
Figure 315: Choose Graph Data Dialog
After specifically choosing the data to be graphed the Y Axis is labeled with the
type of data being graphed (“Speed” in Figure 314 above).
Information on Raw & Filtered Data Points

In order to view information associated with a specific ping select View>Point
Raw or click on the (blue pointer) Point Raw tool bar button for a raw record
or select View>Point Filtered or click on the (green pointer) Point Filtered

tool bar button. Once selected the cursor will change to either the blue or green
cursor.
Using either cursor left-click on the desired record and a dialog similar to that in
Figure 316 below will appear. Note that this dialog was opened using the Point
Raw cursor.
Information on Raw & Filtered Data Points

Page 382
Figure 316: RAW Point Information Dialog
5.13.4 Smoothing Data

Filtering Data
Data, whether Navigation data displayed in the Map Window, or navigation

and sensor data displayed in the Graph Window may be smoothed via a boxcar
filter, which is type of weighted moving average filter.
With either window active select either
• Smooth>Execute Smoothing Filter; or
• Right-click in the desired window and select Execute Smoothing
Filter; or
• Click the Execute Smoothing Filter tool bar button (at left).
Once selected the Filter Settings dialog will appear (Figure 317).

Page 383
Figure 317: Filter Settings
Filter Settings
Filter size
• The number of points to use to create a weighted moving average at the

current node. The higher the number the smoother the resultant line will be.
The Filter Size may be typed in or the More or Less buttons may also be
used.
Delete Filtered
• Deletes current (green) filtered line result

Apply
• Applies the current filter and Outlier Removal settings

Outlier Removal
Trim Factor:
• The fraction of outliers removed.

• Entering 0 does not remove any outliers from the data and the smoothing
function is the Mean.
• Entering 0.1 removes the 5 percent highest and 5 percent lowest values,
leaving only 90 percent of the original data set.
• Entering 0.5 it removes 25 pct highest and 25 pct lowest.
• Entering 1.0 removes (almost) 100 percent of the data points, leaving only 1
point remaining. The number of points higher and lower than this point are
equal so the remaining point is the median of the data. In this case it is a
Median Filter. The median filter preserves edges better than the mean.
• Checking the Trimmed check box removes outliers from the set of data
used to compute the smoothed curve - it does not remove them from the
raw data plot.

Page 384
5.13.5 Limiting Raw Ranges
If the overall range of the data in the Graph Window exceeds user defined
acceptable parameters it may be restricted or constrained within a user-set range.
This function would likely be used in a case where a sensor recorded data with a
large number of gross outliers. An example of the need for this function would be a
depth sensor that was recording bad sensor values that were numerous in their
appearance (Figure 318).
1. In order to Limit the raw ranges Select Graph>Limit Raw Range from
the Menu bar (left) or click the Limit Raw Range Tool bar button.
When selected the button will appear depressed and the cursor will turn in
to the Limit Raw Range cursor (below left).
2. Left-click and drag the cursor from the upper range to the lower range (or
vice versa). When the left mouse button is released the Range Filter
dialog will appear showing the upper and lower limits. If required these
limits may be edited using the keyboard.
3. Clicking OK on the Range Filter dialog applies the limits (Figure 319).
4. The new user-imposed limits will remain until Graph>Limit Raw Range
from the Menu bar is selected or the Limit Raw Range Tool bar button is
clicked.
Figure
Figure 318:
319: Setting
Setting Upper
Upper and
and Lower
Lower Raw
Raw Ranges
Ranges

Page 385
Figure 320: Result of Limit Raw Range
5.13.6 Calculating and Applying Layback in ZEdit

ZEdit offers users the ability to add layback to navigation data separately from
SonarWiz for any of the three file formats it reads, namely CSF, XTF and CMF.
To apply layback to the current navigation data open in ZEdit select Map>Layback
Setup and the Layback Setup Dialog (Figure 321) will open.
Figure 321: Layback Setup
Layback Algorithm
The Layback Setup dialog offers three possible algorithms to calculate layback

Page 386
Manual Layback
• The simplest of the three algorithms, Manual Layback is best used when
the cable scope and fish depth do not change during the entire period the
data was recorded.
• Speed changes normally change the sensor depth for towed sensors so
carefully consider if speed changed (including speed through the water i.e.
current) prior to using this algorithm.
Percent of Cable Out
• This algorithm is normally used for towed sensor whose cable scope
changed during the period the data was recorded and the sensor had no
fitted depth sensor.
• As discussed above the depth of a towed sensor changes with speed
through the water so data files at different speeds (including current) may
require different values of percent cable out.
Pythagoras (Cable out and sensor depth)
• This algorithm is the most accurate estimate of layback however cable out
and sensor depth must have been accurately recorded.
Forward Layback
• Reverses the sign of the applied layback such that the offset distance is
applied forward of the raw position rather than aft.
Calculate ZEdit Layback
Once the Layback Algorithm has been chosen the calculation may made
automatically or manually by choosing Map>Compute Layback Automatically
or Map>Compute Layback Positions respectively.
Compute Layback Automatically
• New layback positions are calculated immediately after the OK button in the
Layback Setup dialog is selected.
Compute Layback Positions
• New layback positions are calculated only after this option is selected.
Displaying ZEdit Layback
The navigation data with calculated layback applied is viewed by either
• Selecting the Plot Layback Position button (left) or
• Selecting Map>Plot Layback Position
When Layback Positions are applied the Plot Layback Position button appears as
“pressed-in” the button bar and the Map>Plot Layback Position selection has a
check-mark beside it.
•

Page 387
5.13.7 Editing Navigation Data

In order to edit the navigation data two choices are available depending on whether
the edit is a straight line (two points) or a curve (multiple points).
Interpolate In Box
If the raw navigation is incorrect due to a (number of) incorrect position calculations
within a discreet time period and a the correct path is a straight line between the two
good positions then Interpolate in box is the best method to correct the
navigation.
To Interpolate in box:
1. Select the Interpolate in Box tool bar button (left) or select

Smooth>Interpolate in Box from the pull-down menu to bring up the
Interpolate in box cursor(Figure 322).
2. Left-click and drag a box encompassing the bad positional data(Figure 323)
3. ZEdit will automatically interpolate between the extreme navigational pints
eliminating those points in between (Figure 324)
Figure 322: Start of Left-Click and drag Figure 323: Left-Click and drag Interpolate Box
Interpolate finish position
Figure 324: Resultant Interpolation

Page 388
Fitting Points to a Curve

If the raw navigation must be corrected (Figure 325)along a number of discrete
nodes (curve) rather than a straight line then the following procedure should be
used:
Figure 325: Raw Data Line Needing Correction
1. Select the Enter Curve Fit Points tool bar button (left) or select
Smooth> Enter Curve Fit Points from the menu bar.
• N.B. The Show Curve Points in Plot button will be activated

by default when the Enter Curve Fit Points button is selected.
2. Enter the new curve nodes by left-clicking at the desired location.

• If a point is misplaced (other than the first point) select
Smooth>Remove End Curve Point to remove it. Multiple
selections of Remove End Curve Point will eliminate the next
most recent up to and including node number 2.
• If the first node is incorrect then the Finalize Curve Fit button
or selecting Smooth> Finalize Curve Fit from the menu bar

Page 389
Figure 326: Entering Curve Nodes
3. In order to smooth the raw pings on to the entered curve select the “ Fit
Data to Curve Points” tool bar button or select “Smooth> Fit Data
to Curve Points” from the menu bar.
Notice in that two separate things (Figure 327) will happen after clicking:
i. The raw (black) data line is now fitted to the drawn curve
ii. A new (green) smoothed line will be created. The smoothing factor will
be set to the most recently used Filter setting or if the Filter has not
yet been used in the current session, the default setting will be used. To
change the Filter settings of the smoothed lines see Section 5.13.4 on
page 382.

Page 390
Figure 327: Results of the "Fitted Curve Procedure"
After the the Fit Data to Curve Points stage the user may either:
Undo the curve fit by

• Left-clicking the Undo button (left); or
• Selecting Smooth> Undo; or
Copy the changes to the loaded CSF File by
• Clicking the Finalize Curve Fit button (left),or
• Selecting Smooth> Finalize Curve Fit from the menu bar
Note that the navigation changes are not written to the CSF until the Save
button in the tool bar is left-clicked or File>Save is selected from the menu bar

Page 391
If during the Fitting Points to a Curve operation the dialog in Figure 328 below
appears this indicates that the end points of the user generated curve was too far
from the raw data.
Figure 328: Execute Filter Warning
When this dialog appear two actions are taken by the program:
1. The raw data is fitted to the user created curve; and
2. The smoothing filtered window appears prompting the user to smooth
the newly created line.
If this was not the intended result simply click the Undo button and remove the
curve by clicking the Finalize Curve Fit button.
5.14 Layback & Offsets

Towed sensors' (towfish) positions are normally determined via acoustic positioning or by
layback.
Acoustic positioning is the preferred method of determining a towfish position as it is more
accurate than layback however it requires specialized equipment and software. Acoustic
positioning systems determine the location of the towfish and pass the geographical or X/Y
position to the sonar recording software.
Layback is an estimate of the towfish position using a various assumptions, depending on
the specific layback method being used; however, all share one critical Achilles Heel: The
assumption that the towfish travels directly behind the towing vessel i.e. no effect from
turns, shear or hydroplane tow-off.
Examples of layback calculation methods include:

Page 392
Method Assumption(s) Required information

Pythagoras Theorem Towfish directly behind vessel Towfish Depth
Cable Out
Look-up Tables Towfish directly behind vessel Tow Cable type
No (along track) effect from Depressor type (if any)
currents Cable Out
Vessel speed
Horse & Cart Towfish directly behind vessel Cable Out
5.14.1 Layback in SonarWiz

Section 5.13.6 discussed applying Layback in ZEdit however the primary method of
applying layback is within SonarWiz itself.
SonarWiz uses Pythagoras Theorem exclusively in Real-time Mode but offers two
choices in post processing:
1. Pythagoras Theorem; or
2. Horse & Cart
Regardless of which method is chosen in the LBK Algorithm column of the
Sonar File Manager, SonarWiz then uses a percentage of cable out value to apply
as an along-track offset in order to correct for the catenary effect; this percentage is
entered by the user (See Layback Percentage on page 398).
Prior to applying layback the the position of the towpoint (sheave) must be
spatially correct which is covered in the following section.
5.14.2 Lever Arm a.k.a. Sheave Offsets

The Lever Arm (or Sheave Offset) is the 3-D offset (See Figure 329 below) from
the GPS antenna to the towpoint.
This information is normally entered prior to recording sonar data (See Section 4.2.7
on page 181) but if the data that is being post-processed does not have these values
entered, or they are incorrect, then Sheave Offsets must be corrected prior to
applying layback.

Page 393
Figure 329: Offset Diagram
Sheave Offset Editing should only be performed on data

whose position is based on “Ship” rather than “Towfish” which
is selected during the Sonar Data Import process. See
Section 2.9.2 on Page 129 for more information on importing
Sonar Data
Editing Offsets on data whose position is based on “Towfish”
should be done using the Move Tool (See Section 5.14.8 on
Page 406)

Page 394
The Primary method to set the Sheave Offset in post processing is to open the
Sonar File Manager and select the Sheave Offset button (See Section 5.6.3.1
on page 284 for more information) that will open the dialog in Figure 330 below.
Figure 330: Sheave Offset Dialog
Using this dialog allows for the possibility of multiple (ship) configurations as the
desired Sheave Offset may be applied to specific lines rather than the entire
project.
To use this function:
• Select the checkbox beside “Apply Sheave Offset to Layback
Calculations”
• Enter the sheave offset from the GPS Antenna (or the position reference
point) where:
• X is athwartships with positive values to Starboard of the GPS Antenna
• Y is fore-and-aft with positive values forward of the GPS Antenna; and

Page 395
• Z is sheave height above waterline, and only positive values should be

used
• Select individual or all sonar files to apply the offsets.
5.14.3 Cable Out

Setting-up SonarWiz to record cable out is discussed in Layback Setup on page
181. This section discusses the two post processing methods of applying cable out,
namely Per-file settings and Cable node entry.
When setting cable out in SonarWiz the total distance from the positioning
reference (GPS antenna) to the towfish must be included not just the cable out
from the tow-point to the towfish.
Setting Per-file Cable Out

Setting a “global” cable out value for an entire file is done within the Sonar File
Manager. (see Section 5.6 on page 282)
In Sonar File Manager (Figure 331) select the Set Cable Out button
(highlighted with the red arrow) in order to set every ping in each selected file to the
same cable out value. Use this method when the cable out is fairly constant over the
entire length of the line.
The Offset Cable Out button (highlighted with the blue arrow in Figure 331 ) is
used when a file is encountered where the cable counter was not zeroed out when
the towfish entered the water. The result of applying in a global offset to individuals
Cable Out values within a file.
Figure 331: Sonar File Manager - Cable Out
Cable Node Entry

Page 396
If, during the survey, the cable out value was changed frequently and an independent
external record of when the cable was paid in or out was maintained then this
method should be used.
The cable out value may be set on a per ping basis via the Bottom Tracking
Menu. When using the Cable Node Entry method in the Bottom Tracker
window the individual locations (moments in time) in the data file where the cable
out value was changed will be edited.
The Bottom Tracker dialog (see section 5.9.2 on page 339) provides a cable out
editing function for sonar data files in the form of replacing any existing cable out
values with inserted values.
The process for adding cable out values consists of inserting nodes where the cable
out value is known. The object is to create nodes at the locations where the cable
out values change. SonarWiz will then compute an interpolated value for cable out
over the entire length of the file based on the values in the node positions.
To add a cable out node to a sonar record, scroll to a position in the record where
the cable out is known to have changed. Right click at that position and select Add
Cable Out Node from the context menu. Enter the cable out value in feet or
meters. Continue this process for all of the cable changes in the record.
cable out nodes will be displayed as shown in Figure 332.
Figure 332: cable out Node Display
Previously entered nodes may be edited or deleted by moving the cursor over the
node, right-clicking and selected the Edit Selected Cable Out Node or Delete
Selected Cable Out Node from the pop-up context menu.

Page 397
When all cable out values have been entered, left-click the Save button. SonarWiz
will then display a dialog containing a chart that summarizes the interpolated cable
out values that have been computed (Figure 333).
At this point, the user may either Accept these values, at which time they will be
applied to the sonar record, or they may may reject them by pressing the Cancel
button and continue the editing process.
Figure 333: cable out Confirmation Dialog
5.14.4 Layback Algorithm

As discussed in Section 5.14.1 SonarWiz offers two layback algorithms. Both of
which use cable out values:
1. Pythagoras Theorem; or
2. Horse & Cart
In the Sonar File Manager the second last column (red box) allows the user to select
the desired Layback Algorithm (Figure 334).
If only Cable out was recorded and correct then use Cable-Percent; however if
the towfish had a depth sensor and it was accurately recorded then select Cable –
Sensor Depth.

Page 398
Figure 334: Layback Algorithm and Cable Out Choices
5.14.5 Layback Percentage

When Cable out values are correct and the Layback Algorithm is chosen, the
percentage of cable out to apply must be set in the Sonar File Manager dialog
(blue box in Figure 334).
The cable out value and the layback are multiplied to work out the along track
distance behind the vessel which will be assigned to the towfish position.
Many factors may affect the layback percentage to be applied however if vessel
speed is maintained as close to constant as possible, layback percentages between
survey lines should not change significantly.
One factor that affects layback percentage between lines is water current. Running
with the current will cause the towfish to go deeper whereas running against the
current increases drag and causes the towfish to rise. If a survey involved current,
two layback percentages may be required: one for up-current lines and the other for
down-current lines.
The following sections discuss suggested techniques for determining layback
percentage.
5.14.6 Determining Layback Percentage
Sidescan & Charted Objects

1. Find a charted object that was ensonified by the sonar. In this example we
will use a jetty (Figure 335). Warning: Ensure the object you are using for a

Page 399
reference is well charted. Do not assume the position for a charted wreck
(or any other submerged object) is accurate.
Figure 335: Uncorrected Sonar File on Jetty
2. Ensure the bottom tracking for the sonar file to be used is accurate (see
Section 5.9.2 on page 339) in order to ensure slant range corrections are
correct.
3. Ensure that Cable Out has been set for the file (Section 5.14.3 on page
395).
4. Ensure Layback Percentage is set to Zero in Sonar File Manager
(Figure 334).
5. Hide (See page 299)or adjust the Opacity (see page 89) of the file such that
the corners of the jetty may be seen. In this example we have three
prominent corners.
6. Use the Add Text button (Section 5.16.2 on page 440) to create labels on
the corners (Figure 336)

Page 400
Figure 336: Labeled Corners with Temporarily "Offset" File
7. Display (See Enableon page 284) or adjust the Opacity of the sonar file
(see page 89) such that it can be seen.
8. Measure the along-track distance between the corner(s) of the charted
object and its ensonified image. If you have more than one point measure
all and use the computed average(Figure 337). In this particular example the
average is 15 meters.

Page 401
Figure 337: Measure Along-track Distance
9. Layback percentage may be calculated using the following formula:

Layback % = ((Along-track dist) / Cable out) * 10
10. Select the calculated Layback Percentage for this file to the file in
Sonar File Manager (see Figure 334)
Figure 338: Correct Layback Percentage Applied

Page 402
11. Verify that the Layback Percentage is correct (Figure 338). If it is

not, measure the new along track distance and recompute the Layback
Percentage.
Figure 339: Reciprocal Lines – Common Object in Red
Sidescan & Reciprocal Lines

1. Find a distinct object that was ensonified in reciprocal lines. In this
example we will use what appears to be a large steel object (Figure 339).
2. Ensure the bottom tracking for the sonar files to be used is accurate in
order to ensure slant range corrections are correct (see Section 5.9.2 on
page 339).
3. Ensure that Cable Out has been set for the two files (Section Cable
Out on page 395).
(Figure 334).
5. Set Overlap Mode (See Overlap Mode on page 86) to Cover Up.
6. Use the Capture Target Utility (See Section 5.15.4 on page 410) to
create a contact on the center of the position of the target in the line
“on top” (Figure 340).

Page 403
Figure 340: Create Contact on First Line
7. Send “on top” line to back (See Section 5.6.5.17 on page 305) and create
a contact on the center of the position of the contact in the second line
(Figure 341)
Figure 341: Create Contact on Second Line

Page 404
8. Measure the along-track distance between the two contacts(Figure 342).

Remember that lateral offsets cannot be corrected for in layback.
Figure 342: Along-Track Distance Between Contacts
9. Divide the measured distance in half and use this value to infer Layback
percentage using the following formula:
Layback % = (0.5 * (Along-track dist) / Cable out) * 10
10. Apply calculated Layback Percentage to the two lines in Sonar File
Manager (Figure 334).
11. Delete the original contacts and repeat Steps 7 and 8, The Red line with
arrowheads in Figure 342 below represents the along-track direction and
the yellow line is a perpendicular reference line to determine if layback
percentage is correct. If it is not correct, repeat from Step 9 onwards
with the new contacts.
Figure 343: New Contacts with Layback

Page 405
12. Optional: Set Overlap Mode (See Section 5.6.5.17 on page 305) to
Shine Thorough. Both objects should appear if the gain levels on the
two lines are equally matched (Figure 344). In this the layback is correct
(along track) and the correction for the lateral offset observed between
A and B can found in Section 5.6.5.13 on page 302.
Figure 344: Both Instances of the Same Object Visible

with Shine Through
Sub-bottom & Reciprocal Lines

Using sub-bottom only to determine Layback Percentage is possible but
requires to reciprocal lines that must have been navigated with only the
smallest of helmsman off-track error as the across track swath of the
SBP is very narrow.
1. Find a distinct object that was ensonified in reciprocal lines.
2. Ensure the Bottom Tracking for the sonar files to be used is accurate
(see Section 5.10.2 on page 345) .
3. Ensure that Cable Out has been set for the two files (Section 5.14.3 on
page 395).
(Figure 334)
5. Use Digitize New Features (See Section 5.16.4 on page 446) to
create a feature on the center of the position of the target in the line “on
top”.
6. Send “on top” line to back (See Section 5.6.5.17 on page 305) and create
a new feature on the center of the position of the contact in the second
line.
7. Measure the along-track distance between the two contacts.
8. Divide the measured distance in half and use this value to infer Layback
percentage using the following formula:

Page 406
9. Apply calculated layback percentage to the two lines in Sonar File

Manager (Figure 334).
10. Delete the original contacts and repeat Steps 5 and 6. If it is not correct,
repeat from Step 7 onwards with the new contacts.
5.14.7 Batch Layback Operations

If the Cable Out value or Layback Percentage is constant for a large portion of
the survey SonarWiz has the capability to perform “Batch Operations” on files
within a project making their settings “match” a reference file.
See Make Like Selected on page 287 for details on copying Layback settings from
a reference file to other file withing the Project.
5.14.8 Move Tool

The Move tool is used to offset a sonar file (in the Map Window) in order to
correct for such things as systematic offsets or positioning biases.
The Move tool dialog is activated by right-clicking on a sonar file and selecting
Move which results in a sub menu offering four possible choices as seen in Figure
345.
Figure 345: Move Context Pop up Window
Move File With Mouse

The selected sonar file may be moved by dragging it with the mouse. After selecting
Move Selected Sonar File the cursor will change to the image at the left. Simply
left click and hold on the selected file and drag he file to the desired location.
N.B. Holding the Shift Key while dragging the file constrains the move parallel to
the current line position i.e. the line can only be moved laterally, not vertically in the
Map Window
This option is useful to compare two files side-by-side that over the same seafloor or
for situations where a well charted contact is to be used as a reference for correcting
the sonar file positioning.
Enter X/Y Offsets
Entering Sonar File X/Y Offsets

Page 407
• Allows the user to correct for systematic errors in positioning for an entire
file. Corrections may be applied in either Absolute or Relative coordinates.
Absolute Offsets
• Select this method and enter the value of the offsets to be applied (in
meters) in the positioning grid with +X as a Northing and +Y as an Easting.
Relative Offset
• This offset uses the vessel frame and heading as the reference with +X as a
Starboard offset and +Y as a Forward offset.
• This tool is especially useful when a systematic error exists due to the GPS
antenna or the sonar not being installed along the center line of the vessel.
Another instance where this tool is useful is when the towfish is maintaining
a constant off-center-line position.
Figure 346: Sonar Offsets
Clear Offsets
Offsets for sonar files may be removed for the selected sonar file or all the sonar
files in the project. Select the desired action in the Move context pop up menu.
5.15 Contacts
Contacts (also called Targets) are used only for sidescan and are like digitized point features
(see Section 5.16.3 on page 445) in that they provide a means by which the location and
characteristics of observed objects can be captured and saved. However, contacts are
different from point features in several important respects:
1. Contacts include a portion of the sonar image immediately surrounding them.

Page 408
2. Contacts can be captured while a sonar survey is in progress (i.e. in Real-time).

3. Contact metrics (measurements) may be determined and stored.
SonarWiz can capture contacts in Real-time in the Waterfall Display and in post
processing in both the Map View and the Digitizing Waterfall View.
In all cases, SonarWiz extracts the target imagery at full resolution from the underlying
acoustic data file along with an area that is approximately square, based on the sonar range
scale at the target capture point. For example, if the sonar range is 50 meters, then SonarWiz
will generate a 50m x 50m image about the target capture point. In this process, every single
digital sample in both the along track and cross track directions are used to generate a very
high resolution target image.
5.15.1 How Contacts are Stored

When a contact is captured, the contact image file is created under the project folder
in the “Targets” sub-folder. The name of this file is identical to the contact name.
The extension will depend on the type of image selected on the Contact Preferences
dialog (.bmp, ,jpg, etc).
The contact data are stored in the contact database file which can be found in the
root directory of project folder.
5.15.2 Contact Preferences

Prior to capturing contacts, the contact preferences should be reviewed and changed
if necessary. To see the current preferences, select Options button from the Quick
Access Toolbar and then left-click the Contact Options icon. (See Section 2.8.4
on page 106). for an explanation of each field in the Contact Options dialog in
Figure 347 below.

Page 409
Figure 347: Contact Preferences
5.15.3 Real-time Contact Capture

In order to capture contacts in the Waterfall Display SonarWiz MUST be in
recording (Active) mode.
Operating in Real-time implies that all sensors are configured (Section 4.2 on page
166) and the Waterfall Display is open (Section 2.5.1.3 on page 57).
To capture contacts in the Waterfall Display the user may:
1. Left-click the Capture Contact button (left) in the toolbar section of the
Waterfall Display and then left-click on the contact itself in the
waterfall; or
2. Right-click in the waterfall itself and select Capture Contact and then
left-click on the contact itself in the waterfall; or
3. Double-click on the waterfall at the point of the target
After any of the above actions the contact will be created in the project contact
database. Subsequently the contact will be displayed in the Map Window and, (if

Page 410
enabled) the contact will appear in the Sonar Contact Strip (Section 2.5.1.7 on
page 68). Below shows the resultant state of a Map Window where the Contact
Strip is enabled.
Figure 348: Contacts Captured in Real-time
The new contacts may be edited later “offline” (see next section).
5.15.4 Off Line Contact Capture

To begin a contact capture session with existing (imported) data, left-click on the
Capture Contact toolbar button shown at left. The cursor will change to a cross-
hair shown below left.
Once the cursor indicates that SonarWiz is in capture mode (left), left-click on the
contact location in the sonar mosaic in the Map Window. This will launch the
Digitizing View (Figure 349), and the waterfall image will scroll to the point in
the waterfall that was clicked on in the Map Window.

Page 411
Within the Digitizing View the cursor will change to a pen symbol. Left-click on
the exact contact location. If the contact naming preference has been set to
“Prompt”, a dialog will be displayed for entering the contact name. Otherwise, the
contact will be displayed with a name automatically generated by SonarWiz.
5.15.5 Digitizing Window

The Digitizing View is used for sidescan sonar data primarily in order to digitize
Contacts (targets) and features.
To open the Digitizing View the user may:
Capture a contact as described in the previous section which will automatically

open the Digitizing View; or
Select a Sonar File in the Map Window and either:
• Left-click the Digitizing View button (left) within the Post
processing Ribbon
• Type Ctrl+D
• Right-click on the selected sonar file and select Digitize New Features
from the pop up menu; or
Open the Sonar File Manager, select a line and left-click the Digitize button
Digitizer Anatomy
Figure 349: Contact Capture

Page 412
Image Appearance (Light Cyan Box)

All the Image Enhancement functions located in this section are temporary i.e. they
affect only the sonar image in the Digitizing View and are not carried forward or
saved anywhere else in the program.
Histogram Equalize
Invert
• All colors are inverted – strong reflectors are dark and nil reflectors are
light.
Stretch Intensity (Normalize)

Restore
original state.
Contrast:
• Pixel values on the lighter (higher) half of the tonal scale are made lighter,
and the pixel values on the darker (lower) half of the tonal scale are made
darker which results in a larger difference between the two ends of the scale
giving the image an appearance of greater depth.
Rebuild
• Rebuild forces SonarWiz to regenerate the image in the SBP viewer using all
of the current system settings. This function would be used if the color
palettes or contrast were changed and the user wished to see the effects on
the SBP viewer.
Gamma Correct
• A very useful tool for quickly adjusting an image overall brightness and
contrast levels to a satisfactory level by Technically speaking, it adjusts the
intensity of the colors in a bitmap by changing the gamma constant that is
used to map the intensity values.
Slant Range Corrected
• Allows the image to be displayed with/without slant range correction

applied. This feature (viewing with Slant Range Correction Off) is especially
useful when viewing targets that rise above the seafloor and into the water
column.
Info At Cursor (Red Box)
See SBP Info at Cursor on page 348 for details
Digitized Features (Magenta Box)

Page 413
Targets (Green Box)

Toolbar Buttons (Yellow Box)
Save: Immediately saves all additions/changes made in the Digitizer

Window.
Copy: Copies the image window to the Clipboard.
Measure: Measures distance and true bearing between two points. Left-click
at the first point and drag cursor to the second point. Range and bearing line
will stay fixed when left mouse button is released
Add Single Point Text Feature: See Section 5.16.3 on page 445 for details.
New Feature: See Section 5.16.3 on page 445 for details.
Capture Sonar Target: Changes the current cursor into a Pen cursor in
order to click on new contacts to be edited.
Previous File: Opens previous file
New Target: Changes the current cursor into a Pen cursor in order to click
on new contacts to be edited.
Options
• See Section 5.6.3.5 on page 288 for a description of the available options.
The two most frequently used options in the resulting dialog are:
Split
• For complex sonar files where the where Manual and Auto Splitting (see
Section 5.6.5.22 on page 309) may prove to be too difficult to do graphically
or Auto Split. If this is the case then use this button to select the position to
split the file using the cursor.

Page 414
5.15.6 Dual Digitizing Windows
Figure 350: Side-by-Side Synchronized Scrolling
Change Detection
In cases where the same survey line has been run in the same direction on two
separate occasions it may be helpful two compare both lines side-by-side (Figure
350).
This is accomplished by the following method:
• Ensure both lines are imported into the current project;
• Open the Digitizer View (see Section 5.15.5 on page 411) separately for
each line
• Manually scroll each Digitizer View waterfall to arrive at the same point
along the survey line in each waterfall display by using a position or seafloor
contacts as a reference;
• Scrolled the two Digitizer View waterfalls at once by holding the Shift key
while scrolling either window.
5.15.7 Contact Editor
Starting the Contact Editor

The contact editor enables the user to view and enhance the contact image, move
the contact location, make and record contact measurements, and classify the
contact by adding text attributes and a description.
Prior to editing contacts it is imperative that Navigation, Layback and Bottom

Tracking operations be completed such that positioning and altitude are
correct. Once a contact is created and edited, any subsequent changes in
towfish position or altitude will not be applied to existing contacts.

Page 415
There are several ways to open the Contact Editor in order to edit a contact:
• Via the Contact Manager (see Section 5.15.8 on page 422)
• Via the Digitizing View by selecting a Target in the Targets Drop-
down list and left-clicking Edit Target (Figure 351);
Figure 351: Targets - Sonar Digitizing View
• Via the Map Window

• Position the cursor over the contact . The cursor will change to the arrow
symbol at left.
Figure 352: Mouse Hover over a Contact
• Right-click to display the context pop-up menu (Figure 353).

• Select Edit Selected Contact to display the Contact Editor dialog as
shown in Figure 354
Figure 353: Contact Context Pop Up Menu
Contact Editor Layout

Page 416
Refer to Figure 354 for descriptions of layout.
Figure 354: Contact Editor
Title Bar:
The name of the contact and the channel (Port / Stbd) is displayed in the
title bar of the Contact Editor
Position:
The position of the contact symbol is displayed in Latitude and Longitude
as well as X and Y coordinates at the top left portion of the editor window,
highlighted here by the green box.
Image
The left half of the editor window (yellow box) is an image centered around
the point of interest of a size equal to the range of the sonar file in the X
and Y directions. In Figure 354 the image has been zoomed in using the
Variable Zoom control.
Image Enhancement Tools
The Image Enhancement tools are highlighted by the maroon box in Figure
354 and are discussed in the Image Enhancement section on page 418.
Contact Name:
Displays the name of the current contact and produces a drop-down list to
select other existing contacts for editing.
Info at Cursor:

Page 417
Information presented in this table is tied to the position of the cursor in

the image window:
Date and Time
Ping Number Depth (Fathometer)
Latitude Northing
Longitude Easting
Heading Course Made Good

Sonar Altitude Ship Speed
Cursor Range from sonar Cable Out
Event Number Magnetometer Reading
Sonar File Name
Move Contact
See the Moving the Contact Section on page 418.
Previous/Next Contact
The Previous / Next Contact function and images are highlighted by the
blue box in and discussed in the Previous / Next ContactSection on
page 419.
Draw and Zoom
The Draw and Zoom functions are highlighted by the red box in and
discussed in Draw & Zoom Section on page 419.
Mensuration
Target measurement is discussed in the Mensuration Section on page 419.
Contact Symbol Properties
The Contact Symbol Properties functions are highlighted by the black box
in and discussed in the Contact Symbol Properties Section on page 420.
User Entries
Defined by the black box in Figure 354 See the Classification Section on
page 420 for details on centering classification in formation and notes on a
contact
Delete
Deletes current contact.
Search Other Files...
See the Search Other Files Section on page 421 for details on searching
other sonar files for the same target.

Page 418
Image Enhancement
Histogram Stretch:
• Linearizes the number of pixels per gray level in a bitmap which can be used
Invert
• All colors are inverted – strong reflectors are dark and nil reflectors are light
and vice versa.
Stretch Intensity

Gamma Correct
• Adjusts the intensity of colors in a bitmap by changing the gamma constant

that is used to map the intensity values.
Contrast
• Pixel values on the lighter (higher) half of the tonal scale are made lighter,
and the pixel values on the darker (lower) half of the tonal scale are made
darker which results in a larger difference between the two ends of the scale
giving the image an appearance of greater depth.
Brightness
• Overall intensity of the image. Too much brightness can cause the loss of
shadows in an image.
Restore
original state.
Moving the Contact
• To move the location of a contact symbol on the contact image, click the
Move Contact button(directly below the Image Enhancement button in ).
The cursor will change to the pen (Figure 355).
• Click the image on the location that the contact is to be moved to. The contact
will be re-positioned.

Page 419
Figure 355: Pen Icon Indicates Move Function is Active
Previous / Next Contact

Images of the Previous and Next Contacts in the target queue are shown
here whose labels are also buttons that, when clicked, make that particular
contact active in the Contact Editor.
Draw & Zoom
Draw Label
• Draws the Contact Label when checked.

Rotate Label
• Rotates the Contact Label 90o counter-clockwise when checked.

Draw Symbol
• Draws the Contact Symbol when checked.

Fit To Window
• Resets Variable Zoom to 1x such that the original bounding image is equal
to the sonar range is visible in the image area.
Variable Zoom
• Variable Zoom slider from 1x to 5x.

Mensuration
Contacts may be measured in order to assist with their classification and
identification. Four possible measurements may be made, each of which is discussed
below. In order to measure any one of the four attributes click on the box associated
with the measurement desired, then left-click and drag the mouse from the start of
the measurement to the end.
Length

Page 420
• Allows the user to measure the longitudinal axis of the contact.

• N.B. The user is left to decide which axis of the contact is the longitudinal
axis.
Width
• Allows the user to measure the width of the contact.

• N.B. The user is left to decide which axis of the contact is the width.
Shadow
• The measurement of the shadow length. Using the towfish altitude and
range to target, the Target height value is automatically calculated and
populated.
Notes
1. The user is constrained to measure shadow in the across track direction

only.
2. The user should measure the longest shadow in order to determine the
highest point of the contact.
3. If the user decides to measure a particular shadow of a complex object
that is not necessarily the longest then the “>” symbol in the Target
Height box should be selected such that readers of any subsequent
reports are aware that the target height may in fact exceed what is
displayed.
Scour
• Targets in an area with current may cause a scour (depression) to be created

around themselves. The size of the scour may be measured.
Clear
• Clears all measurements and returns Target Height to zero.

Contact Symbol Properties
Contact Color
• Users may choose from over 130 different symbol colors in the drop-down
menu list.
Contact Style
• Users may choose between seven different symbols to represent the

contact.
User Entries aka Classification
Contacts can be classified/annotated by adding classification text strings as shown in
Figure 354
Classification 1
• Select a predefined classification from the drop-down list, or enter a new

classification by typing into the text field.

Page 421
• The predefined classification list is contained in the file

“ContactAttributes.txt”, stored in the project folder.
• This file is derived from a master default file in the SonarWizMAP
application folder at the time the project is created. It can be edited using
any Text Editor such as Notepad. Alternatively, it (and the master default
file) can be edited from withing the Contact preferences dialog (see Edit
(Contact) Pick Lists on page 110).
Classification 2
• Select a predefined classification from the drop-down list, or enter a new

classification by typing into the text field.
• The predefined classification list is contained in the file
“ContactAttributes2.txt”, stored in the project folder. This file can be
edited as described above.
Area
• Select from a predefined list of survey areas, or enter a new area by typing
into the text field.
• The predefined area list is contained in the file
“ContactLocationAreas.txt”, stored in the project folder.
• This file is derived from a master default file in the SonarWizMAP
application folder at the time the project is created. It can be edited using
any Text Editor such as Notepad. Alternatively, it (and the master default
file) can be edited from withing the Contact preferences dialog (see Edit
(Contact) Pick Lists on page 110).
Block
• Block number of the associated Area (intended for Gulf of Mexico Block
areas)
Avoid
• Intended for Gulf of Mexico surveys where structures may requires a saftey
perimeter
Mag Anom
• Magnetic anomaly associated with the target

• Manually entered by the user
Target Description
• User entered description

Search Other Files
Clicking on this tool button will cause the program to search all other files in the
project whose coverage overlaps the specific position of the current contact with an
8 meter tolerance.
Any files matching the search criteria will be opened in separate Digitizing View
windows.

Page 422
5.15.8 The Contact Manager

The Contact Manager (Figure 356) dialog provides a selection of tools for
managing contacts, including editing, deleting, importing, exporting, sorting, creating
backups, and generating HTML and MS Word reports.
To display the Contact Manager:

• Select Contact Manager button (left) from the Post processing Ribbon
Menu; or
• Press the hot-keys “Shift-F8”; or
• Right Click on a Contact and select Contact Manager from the pop-up
menu
Contact Manager Anatomy

Refer to the labels in Figure 356 for the breakdown of each section. All functions
are discussed in the following sections.
Contact List and Status
This section lists all contacts according to Filter applied in the Filter Building
section (see Filtering Contacts on page 423)
Columns in this section include:
Display
• User controllable. Left-clicking and populating / de-populating the global or

individual check-boxes controls Contact display
Rotate Label

individual check-boxes controls labels as horizontal or 90 degree
counterclockwise rotated
Draw Label

individual check-boxes controls Contact labels as displayed or hidden
Draw Symbol

individual check-boxes controls Contact symbols as displayed or hidden
Name
• Contact Name
Latitude / Longitude
• Geographical position
X/Y
• Project coordinates
File

Page 423
• Raw sonar file linked to the contact

P/S
• Location of the contact – Port or Starboard swath

Class 1
• Contents of User assigned Classification 1 attribute (See Classification on

page 420)
N.B. Contacts may be sorted in the Target Manager dialog list by clicking on
column headings. Sorting is available for contact name, lat, lon, X, Y, acoustic file
name, and classification 1.
Figure 356: Contact Manager
5.15.8.1 Filtering Contacts

All contacts created in SonarWiz are stored in a DataBase (DB3) format which gives
the user a lot of power and flexibility in searching for and subsequently displaying
contacts.
The Current Box within the black box in Figure 356 above shows the default
display query which is show all non-deleted contacts.
If the user wishes to change the display query this may be done by typing a query
directly into the Build box (Figure 357) or more realistically, left-clicking the Build
button in order to open the Contact Query Builder in Figure 358

Page 424
Figure 357: Step 1: Open the Query Builder
Within the Contact Query Builder the User may choose an Attribute, an
Operator and a Value and Write it to the resultant query at the bottom of the
dialog.
Further, should the user require a more complex, multi-parameter query then a
Group must be built.
In order to Build a Group:

1. Select Begin Group
2. Select and Attribute, Operator and Value
3. Select either AND or OR depending on the case
4. Select Write
5. Repeat steps 2-4 as required
6. Select End Group
In the example in Figure 358 below the multi-parameter query soecifies that all
contacts within Line-20090302_105836 and NOT having the name Contact0000 will
be displayed once this query is activated.
Figure 358: Contact Query Builder
Once the desired query has been built the user must close the Contact Query
Builder by left-clicking OK and then left-click Apply in the Filter area. Once apples
the new query the Current Box within the black box in Figure 356 above shows the
new query.

Page 425
Queries may also be Saved and Retrieved later depending on the specific
application of the data and finally queries may be Removed.
5.15.8.2 Deleted Contacts

Contacts deleted by the user are in fact not permanently deleted in SonarWiz
they are simply unlinked from the Contact Manager.
In order to restore a deleted contact the user must populate (left-click) the
Show Deleted Contacts check-box and the Contact List will display any/all
deleted contacts.
The user may then select any/all deleted contacts to be reinstated in the project
and then left-click on UnDelete.
Function Buttons
5.15.8.3 Edit Contact(s)

Single Contact Editing:
• Select a contact record in the Contact List and left-click the Edit button.
Alternatively, simply double click on the contact record. See Section
5.15.7on page 414 for instructions on editing contacts.
Multiple Contact Editing
• Selecting two or more contacts and left-clicking the Edit button opens the
dialog in Figure 359 below
• Populating any/all of the Apply check boxes will assign the chosen
attribute to all of the selected contacts.

Page 426
Figure 359: Set Attributes on Multiple Selected Contacts Dialog
5.15.8.4 Select All

• Clicking this button selects all the contacts in the Contact List.
5.15.8.5 Report Generator

• SonarWiz provides a Contact reporting tool that builds either an HTML
(Web Page), Microsoft Word®, PDF, or OpenOffice report containing all
filtered contacts in a project
• N.B. In order to build a Word file, you must have at Microsoft Word
installed from Office 2000® or later.
• To build a report, left-click the Report Generator button to display the
dialog shown in Figure 360 below.

Page 427
Figure 360: Report Generator Dialog
Report Name
• The user entered Report Name will be used to name the files created by
the Report Generator and also to name the folder into which the files are
written.
• This folder will appear under the Targets\Reports folder in the project. In
the example shown below the report will appear in the folder:
“Targets\Reports\Survey Contacts\” under the root Project directory.
Report File Type
• Specify the Report Type that you want by clicking the appropriate button.
Choices available are

Page 428
• HTML (Web Page)

• MS Word ®
• PDF
• OpenOffice
Notes on HTML Reports:
1. In selecting HTML report, a collection of linked HTML files and
supporting image files will be be created in the report folder. These
constitute the report “web site”.
2. To open the report, once created, simply double click on the HTML
file that has a name identical to the report name located under the
Targets\... folder. This will open the report in your default browser.
3. By default, Internet Explorer does not allow the Active Content in

the Report to run without the user allowing permission on each
page.
4. This annoying behavior can be disabled in IE8. See below:
Figure 361: IE8 Protecting You from ActiveX Enabled Web page

Page 429
Figure 362: Freeing Yourself from Annoying IE8 Behavior
Report Format
Large: 1 Contact is placed on each report page
Small: 3 Contacts are placed on each report page
Title Page: A summary page will be inserted at the beginning of the report
Check the “Title Page” box if you wish the first page of the document to be a
summary title page – MS Word function ONLY.
Title Image
A Title Image may be used in order to give the report an overall look or context.
Specify the image, by browsing to its location, and its relative size (10% - 100%) in
the report.

Page 430
Page Size
Users may choose from:
• A4
• Legal; and
• Letter
• in Portrait or Landscape layout

Include coordinates...
Users may choose any/all from the following list:
• WGS-84 LL (Lat/Lon)
• NAD27 LL (if valid)
• Local LL; and
• Projected XY
N.B.: There are three possible datums: WGS84, NAD27, and local. Coordinates for
WGS84 will always be present in the contact data file and therefore will always be
written to the report. Coordinates for NAD27 and local may or may not be present.
If they are found in the contact.txt file they will be written to the report with an
appropriate label. For clarity, the coordinate label (e.g. WGS84) is placed after the
coordinate values.
Measurement Output Dec Places
Users may choose 0, 1, or 2 decimal places for the target measurement fields.
Image Settings
Flip Target Image
• The exported image in the report may be “flipped” such that all colors are
inverted – strong reflectors are dark and nil reflectors are light.
Draw Scale Bars
• A Scale Bar will be overlaid on each target image in the report
A pop-up message will appear when the user attempts to create a report that
exceeds the recommended maximum number of contacts in the report.
5.15.8.6 Export
To export contacts to a file on the hard disk, click the Export button and select the
export file format from the “Save As Type” drop-down list.
The following export formats are supported;

Page 431
• ASCII CSV
• Autocad DXF
• ESRI Shapefile
• FGSI AutoCad PLD
• C & C AutoCad TDF
• Simple text file
• C & C Extended CSV
• C & C MMS CSV
• MMS 2008
Notes:
• Attributes (in the exported files) labeled “AlsoIn_1” through “AlsoIn_5”
indicate the other acoustic files in the project in which a contact position
will be found. If a contact location occurs within files other than the one it
was digitized from, an entry (up to 5) will be added for each distinct file
which contains this contact location. This feature satisfies the NOAA
mapping requirement where each reported contact must also be listed with
other files that contain this contact.
• An associated .prj file is created with each Shape file.
• Only contacts that have the Display box checked will be exported.
5.15.8.7 S-57 Export
Figure 363: Export Contacts to NOAA S-57 Format
This function allows for NOAA S-57 target generation from SonarWiz target files
using the Obstruction S-57 feature. Exported targets may be combined into one file
or each may have a separate file.
Click the S-57 Contact Export button to open the dialog shown in Figure 363. One
of two options for the S-57 Feature Id may be selected:
• The SonarWiz Time Stamp; or

Page 432
• A Globally Unique ID (GUID)

GUID definition from http://www.webopedia.com/ is: “a unique 128-bit
number that is produced by the Windows OS or by some Windows
applications to identify a particular component, application, file, database
entry, and/or user. For instance, a Web site may generate a GUID and
assign it to a user's browser to record and track the session. A GUID is also
used in a Windows registry to identify COM DLLs. Knowing where to look
in the registry and having the correct GUID yields a lot information about a
COM object (i.e., information in the type library, its physical location, etc.).
Windows also identifies user accounts by a username (computer/domain
and username) and assigns it a GUID. Some database administrators even
will use GUIDs as primary key values in databases. GUIDs can be created
in a number of ways, but usually they are a combination of a few unique
settings based on specific point in time (e.g., an IP address, network MAC
address, clock date/time, etc.). “
Once the Feature ID type is selected then choose to export the contacts as either
• Separate s-57 Files for each contact; or
• A Single S-57 File for all contacts
Regardless of the choice made, the target directory must be chosen. In the
case of single files for each contact the file names are chosen automatically.
In the case where a single file contains all the contacts, select the directory
where the exported contacts will be created.
By default the Project \Targets directory will be suggested.
5.15.8.8 Import
Contacts from other SonarWiz projects in .DB3 format may be imported into the
current project by using the Import Button.
Once the desired .DB3 file has been selected SonarWiz will read the database and
present a list of the contacts contained in the .DB3 file. All contacts eligible to be
imported may be checked; those which are not eligible (i.e. duplicate names) are
grayed-out (Figure 364).

Page 433
Figure 364: List of Contacts Contained in Selected .DB3 FIle
Importing contacts allows the user to restore contacts from a backup or import
contacts from another SonarWiz project. Click on the Import button and navigate
to the directory where the Contact database (.db3) file is located. Select the .db3 file
and click OK.
Generally most contacts have an associated CSF file that can be linked to the
contact properties; however, a contact can still be imported even if its original CSF
file cannot be found.
In the Contacts Preferences dialog (Figure 347) populating the “Link to
source CSFs on Import or move ” check box retains the link (reference) to the
source CSF file when a contact is imported or moved.
If this check box is not populated SonarWiz will ignore the source CSF file and
search in the current (destination) project for the CSF file. If the corresponding
source file is not found a warning will be issued (Figure 365) via the summary log
but the contact will still be imported.

Page 434
10/14/08 11:52:19: INFO: Contact: 152/061829S references CSF

file:C:\Projects\SonarWiz\LakeChamplain\shipwreck-pass-50m-d.CSF
but that file does not exist. Trying to locate...
10/14/08 11:52:19: ERROR: Unable to locate CSF filename associated
with contact: 152/061829S
10/14/08 11:52:19: INFO: Contact <152_061829S> imported.
Figure 365: Sample Warning When No CSF File Found
5.15.8.9 Sort Contacts

The contact records in the Contact Manager list may be alphabetically sorted by
location (west-to-east, south-to-north, distance from southwest corner), or
alphabetically by contact name. This can be helpful if you want to visually group
contacts by location or name for the purpose of editing or deleting. It will also
determine the order in which the features are exported.
To sort the records, click the Sort button and then select the sort key as shown in
Figure 366
It is possible to automatically rename the contacts after they have been sorted, based
on a root name and a sequence number. To do this, check the Rename box.
Note that all contact files will be renamed by this action. Because of this, SonarWiz
will automatically make a backup of all contact files immediately prior to the
renaming the files.

Page 435
Figure 366: Contact Sorting Options
5.15.8.10 Backup Contacts

To manually create a backup copy of all contact data in a project (both the textual
and numerical information, and the contact image), press the Backup button.
By default, the contacts will be saved in a uniquely named folder under the projects
“Targets” folder. The name of this folder will be “user_<mmdd>_<xxxxx>”,
where mmdd represent the current month and day, and xxxxx is a unique number
based on the current time. In this way, successive contact backups can be made
without overwriting previous backups.
Figure 367: Contact Backup
5.15.8.11 Recompute All

Recomputes ALL the target locations after navigation has been edited or replaced or
layback is altered.

Page 436
5.15.8.12 Recompute
Recomputes the location of the selected target(s) after navigation has been edited or
replaced or layback is altered.
5.15.8.13 Preferences
Opens the Contact Preferences Dialog (Figure 347).
See Section 2.8.4 on page 106). for an explanation of each field in the Contact
Preferences Dialog.
Left-clicking the small arrow in the lower-left hand corner of the Contacts Group
(Figure 368) opens the Contact Options Window.
Figure 368: Open Contact Options
5.15.9 Contact Tools

The Contact Tools button (left) within the Post Processing Ribbon menu
offers the user several contact options for the actively selected contact in the Map
Window (Figure 369) which are discussed below.
Edit Selected Contact
• Opens the Contact Editor with the currently selected contact active.
• See Contact Editor in Section 5.15.7 on page 414 for more information on
the Contact Editor.
View Selected Contact in Waterfall
• Opens the Digitizing View centered on the currently selected contact.

• See Section 5.15.5 on page 411 for more information on the Digitizing
View
Rotate Contact Label

Page 437
• Rotates / Un-rotates the currently selected contact's label 90 degrees

counterclockwise and back to horizontal.
Delete Selected Contact
• Deletes the currently selected contact.

• See Deleted Contacts in Section 5.15.8.2 on page 425 for details on un-
deleting contacts.
Figure 369: Contact Tools
5.15.10 Sonar Contact Strip

The Sonar Contact Strip is used in real-time to display all captured contacts
(see Sonar Contact Strip on page 68 for more information).
With the Sonar Contact Strip active, right-clicking on a captured contact
open the pop-up menu shown in Figure 370.
Open Contact Manager
• Opens the Conatact Manager.

• See Section 5.15.8 on page 422
Capture Contact
• Enables Contact Capture Mode on the Map Window

• See 5.15.4 on Page 410
Edit Selected Contact

Rotate Contact Label

Page 438

View Selected Contact in Waterfall

Delete Selected Contact
Figure 370: Sonar Contact Strip Right-click Pop-up Menu
5.16 Digitizing Features

A feature is a point or area of interest on the sea floor, lake-bed, or shoreline. It will
usually be a physical area or object such as an area of a specific bottom type, a
pipeline, shipwreck, rock, scour mark, etc; however, it may also represent the
location of some observed phenomenon.
SonarWiz allows the user to digitize features on either the Map Window or the
Digitizing View in postprocessing only. Select the method most appropriate to the
type of features being captured.
For example, a point feature may be easier to locate on a Digitizing View, but a
line feature that spans more than one sonar swath may be easier to locate on the
Map Window. Regardless of which method is used, the digitized feature will always
be displayed on the map. Moreover, while locating a feature on the waterfall display,

Page 439
a moving cross-hair will show the corresponding location on the map, and vice
versa.
SonarWiz provides tools for digitizing the locations of features on the mosaic or the
sonar waterfall, for tagging the features with user defined names and descriptions,
and for exporting them in a variety of formats.
NOTE: Feature digitizing must be done as a post-processing activity after a survey
has been completed. Features cannot be captured in Real-time as the sonar data is
being acquired. For sidescan, in order to record the locations of objects in Real-time
the Target Capture tools provided by SonarWiz must be employed (see Section
5.15 - Contacts on page407).
All digitized features are stored in a single binary file in the project folder. The file
name is the same as the project name with the extension .DIG.
Since this is a binary file, it cannot be manually edited. Any attempt to do so will
most likely corrupt the file. All feature editing must be done using the tools provided
in SonarWiz such as the Feature Manager (See Section Error: Reference source
not found on page Error: Reference source not found).
5.16.1 Pre-Digitizing Preparation
Feature Names and Description Lists

When a feature is digitized, it's two primary attributes may be described– name and
description which may be used to sort features,and are included in all export files.
These are both character strings that can be entered manually or selected from a pre-
defined list stored in two text files in the project folder. These files are called
FeatureNames.txt and FeatureDescriptions.txt.
When a new project is created, default feature list files are created and, in the case of
the description list, populated with example feature descriptions. In the case of
feature name, the system provides the option of having the name generated
automatically based on a user specified prefix concatenated to a sequence number
(See Digitized Feature Options on page 112).
The name and description files can be customized at any time by opening and
editing them with any text editor (e.g. Notepad). Alternatively, they can be edited
from withing the Digitized Features preferences dialog (See Digitized Feature
Options on page 112). This would typically be done at the beginning of a project.
Depending on the preference settings, new names and descriptions will be appended
to these files automatically if they are entered manually while digitizing.
Automatic Backups
Since feature digitizing can be a time intensive process, SonarWiz provides an
automatic backup function to prevent loss of valuable data in the event of accidental
file corruption. This is done by copying the project .DIG file to a backup folder
each time SonarWiz is started. The backup folder is a sub-folder of the project
folder and a unique serial number is appended to the .DIG file name so as not to
overwrite previous backups.

Page 440
The backup function is ON by default. The advantage of this is that during active
digitizing work, a history of the work is maintained and can be retrieved in the event
that features are accidentally deleted, moved, or otherwise damaged.
Once all features have been digitized, you may want to consider turning the
automatic feature backup OFF in order to prevent the unnecessary accumulation of
files in the backup directory. This is also done in the Digitized Feature Options
and is discussed in detail on page 112).
5.16.2 Digitizing in the Map Window
To Digitize a new Feature in the Map Window left-click the Add Feature
button (left) in the Post Processing ribbon menu. This action will open the
drop-down list shown in Figure 371.
Figure 371: Add Feature Drop-down List
Select either Point, Line/Polyline/Polygon, Rectangle or Circle feature

from the drop-down list and the corresponding Create Feature dialog will be
displayed.
New Text Feature
To digitize a New Text Feature in the Map Window:
1. In the Create New Text Feature Dialog (Figure 372) manually enter
or select the feature name and description.
Note that in order to manually enter a custom Feature Description
the Allow user to enter new descriptions of features check-box
must be enabled in the Digitized Feature Options (See Digitized
Feature Options on page 112).

Page 441
Figure 372: Create New Text Feature
2. Change Drawing attributes as desired (line color, thickness, etc).

Particular attribute combinations may be Saved and Loaded if
different repetitive combinations are frequently used.
3. Left-click the OK button closing the dialog and the cursor will turn into
a pen (Figure 373).
Figure 373: Pen Tool Cursor
4. Left-click in the Map Window where the New Text Feature is to be

located.
New Line / Polyline/ Polygon Feature
To digitize a New Line/Polyline/Polygon Feature in the Map Window:

Page 442
1. In the Create New Polyline Feature Dialog (Figure 374) manually

enter or select the feature name and description.
Figure 374: Create New Polyline Feature
2. In order to digitize a closed line feature (polygon) populate the Close

Polyline Feature check-box by left-clicking in it.
3. Left click on the map for each node in the line/polyline/polygon.

4. If you zoomed the mosaic view and the area to be selected for your
polyline / polygon feature is not all visible, you may drag the mosaic
view by pressing down the middle mouse button (or wheel), dragging
the mosaic, and releasing, so that the next place to click for a node
placement is visible.
5. Right click to end the line/polyline/polygon creation. SonarWiz will
automatically connect the first and last points if the Close Polyline
Feature check-box has been selected.
New Rectangle Feature

To digitize a New Rectangle Feature in the Map Window:
1. In the Create New Rectangle Feature Dialog (Figure 375)
manually enter or select the feature name and description.

Page 443
Figure 375: New Rectangle Feature

2. Once the dialog in Figure 372 above has been completed and OK is
clicked then the pen cursor appears
3. Left-click and drag a rectangle as would be done for the Zoom-Area
function
4. Once the Rectangle is created its position, size and orientation may be
changed by left-clicking and dragging a specific corner of the shape (See
Figure 376 below)
Height Rotation
Left-Click and Drag a corner to

change the indicated properties
Position Width
Figure 376: Rectangle Adjustment - Corners

Page 444
New Circle Feature

To digitize a New Circle Feature in the Map Window:
1. In the Create New Circle Feature Dialog (Figure 377) manually
enter or select the feature name and description.
Figure 377: New Rectangle Feature

2. Once the dialog in Figure 372 above has been completed and OK is
clicked then the pen cursor appears
3. Left-click and drag a circle as would be done for the Zoom-Area
function
4. Once the Circle is created its position, and size may be changed by left-
clicking and dragging the center of the circle or one of the boxes at the
3, 6, 9 or 12 o'clock positions.
If during digitizing you run to the edge of the Map Window and need to
continue the feature “off of the page” simply hold the Shift Key and the
cursor will turn into the Pan hand. You may click and drag the map to
allow for continued feature creation. Once the drag is completed release
the shift key and you may continue editing the feature.

Page 445
5.16.3 Digitizing View: Sidescan Features

The Digitizer View consists of several sections which are the same as in Contact
Capture. See Section 4.3.2 on page 192 for a full description of the window.
To open the Digitizing View the user may:

Select a Sonar File in the Map Window and either:
• Left-click the Digitizing View button (left) within the Post
processing Ribbon
• Type Ctrl+D
• Right-click on the selected sonar file and select Digitize New Features
from the pop up menu; or
• Capture a contact as described in the Section 5.15 on page 407
• Open the Sonar File Manager, select a line and left-click the Digitize
button
The Digitizer Anatomy is discussed sin Section 5.15.5 on page 411.

Once the the Digitizer View is open the sonar waterfall of the selected file will be
displayed in a feature digitizing and editing dialog (Figure 378).
To Digitize a New Feature within the Digitizer View:
1. Select the point or line digitizing tool from the toolbar. The New Feature
dialog will be displayed.
2. Proceed to digitize the feature as discussed in New Text Feature or New
Line / Polyline/ Polygon Feature above on page 440 and 441 respectively..

Page 446
Figure 378: Digitizing on the waterfall display
5.16.4 Digitizing Sub-bottom Reflectors

As with Digitizing Sidescan Features in the previous section, SonarWiz
provides tools for digitizing the locations of reflectors (Sub-bottom features), for
tagging the reflectors with user defined names and descriptions, and for exporting
them in a variety of formats.
Point and line features can be digitized directly in the Map Window over a SBP file
however this is primarily a sidescan tool (See Section 5.16.2 on page 440). Sidescan
features exist in the X/Y plane (along/across track) whereas Sub-bottom reflectors
exist in the Y/Z plane (along track/ depth axis).
When digitizing Sub-bottom reflectors be sure to use the Digitizing View button
for a selected SBP file selected as using the Map Window directly can have
unpredictable results.
Features may be created in the SBP window in both Real time and Playback
modes. See Section 2.5.1.3 on page 57 for more details.

Page 447
5.16.4.1 Add Reflector

To Add a Reflector to a sub-bottom file the Bottom Tracker Window must be
opened.
In SonarWiz, when dealing with SBP data, the Bottom Tracker and Digitizer are
the same window.
The Bottom Tracker (Figure 283) is opened by first selecting sub-bottom data file
plus one of the following:
• Left-clicking Bottom Tracker button (left) in the Sonar File
Processing Group within the Post processing Ribbon Menu
• Selecting a sub-bottom file and subsequently right-clicking and selecting

Bottom Tracker from the pop-up menu
• Within the Sonar File Manager left-clicking the Bottom Track or

Digitizer View Buttons one a file has been selected in the Sonar Files
section.
• Using the hot keys Ctrl+B
The various sections of the SBP Bottom Tracker shown in Figure 379 below
are explained in Section 5.10.2 on page 345.
Figure 379: SBP Bottom Tracker
To Add a new Reflector:

Page 448
Select the Add Reflector Button from the tool bar in the Acoustic
Reflectors section (Figure 380).
Figure 380: Acoustic Reflectors Control
The Create New Reflector dialog will appear (Figure 381).

Enter feature name and description. Change display attributes as necessary (line
color, thickness, etc).
Figure 381: Create New Reflector
The Create New Reflector dialog provides a function for saving the display
attributes of a feature to a file so that they can be efficiently applied to
subsequent features.
To save the attributes, click the Save button and enter a filename in the Save
As dialog. By default, the file will be saved in the Attributes sub-folder under
the main SonarWiz folder; however, you can chose to save it in any folder by
browsing to that folder before saving.
To load display attributes that have been previously saved, press the Load
button and select the required file. The display attributes will be applied to the
current feature.

Page 449
Left-click on the SBP View to place the first point of the reflector and
continue to left click on each point of the polyline. SonarWiz will connect the
points for you.
Right-click to end the line.
To convert a Bottom Track solution into a Reflector see Converting Bottom
Track to a Reflector in Section 5.10.2 on page 351.
5.16.4.2 Delete Reflector

To Delete a Reflector:
• Select Reflector to be deleted either by Name in the Acoustic
Reflector drop down list (Figure 380) or by left-clicking the reflector
itself.
• Click the Delete Button (Figure 380) or the Delete key on your
keyboard.
5.16.4.3 Insert Points

To Insert Points into a Reflector:
• Select the Reflector to be modified either by Name in the Acoustic
Reflector drop down list or by left-clicking the reflector itself (Figure
380).
• Click the Insert Points Button (Figure 380).
• Left-click in the location where the new point is to be located. The
program will automatically determine if the point is between two
existing points or a new extension.
• Right-click to end the procedure
5.16.4.4 Delete Points

To Delete Points within a Reflector:
1. Select the Reflector to be modified either by Name in the Acoustic
Reflector drop down list or by left-clicking the reflector itself (Figure
380).
2. Click the Delete Points Button (Figure 380).
3. Left-click the existing point(s) to be deleted.
4. Right-click to end the procedure
5.16.4.5 Edit Reflector

To Edit a Reflector:

Page 450
1. Select the Reflector to be edited either by Name in the Acoustic

Reflector drop down list or by double-clicking the reflector itself
(Figure 380).
2. Click the Edit Button (Figure 380).
3. The Edit Reflector Dialog () will appear whose functions are the same
as the Create New Reflector Dialog. See Create New Reflector
on page 448.
Figure 382: Edit Reflector Dialog
5.16.5 Thickness Functions
5.16.5.1 Compute Reflector Thickness
To measure the thickness between two reflectors left-click the Thickness button
from the tool bar (left) or the Thickness button in the Acoustic Reflectors
section (Figure 380)
The Compute Reflector Thickness Dialog will appear (Figure 330)

Select the Top and Bottom Reflectors from the available reflectors in the two
drop down menus. Note that SonarWiz will allow calculations between reflectors
from different channels.

Page 451
Select the Downsampling reflector points value to be used. A smaller number

enables fine scale thickness vectors to be created.
Click Compute Thickness
Figure 383: Compute Reflector Thickness
The resultant calculation will be graphically displayed (Figure 384)

To use the Bottom Track as the reference surface in the Thickness calculation, the
Bottom Track must first be converted in to a Reflector. To convert a Bottom Track
solution into a Reflector see 5.10.2 on page 351.
Figure 384: Resultant Thickness Feature
5.16.5.2 Quick Thickness

A Quick Thickness or “QT” feature consists of a 2-point vertical line where the
top point is usually placed at the seafloor and the bottom point is normally placed at
the top of a pipe or other buried feature.

Page 452
To create a QT Line:
• Left-click the Quick Thickness button (see left)
• Follow the Add Reflector Steps as described in Section 5.16.4.1 on page 448
• Left-click the top of the seafloor
• Left-click the bottom point where the thickness is to be calculated
• The resultant vector will be created (Figure 385)
Figure 385: Quick Thickness Result
N.B. QT features' nodes may be dragged like other features in the SBP digitizer but
the logic will always keep the two points vertically aligned.
5.16.6 Feature Manager

The Feature Manager dialog provides a selection of tools for managing
digitized features, including deleting editing, selecting, exporting, importing
preferences and sorting (Figure 386).
To display the Feature Manager:

• Select Feature Manager button (left) from the Post processing
Ribbon Menu; or
• Press the hot-keys “F8”; or
• Right Click on a Feature and select Feature Manager from the pop-
up menu

Page 453
Figure 386: Feature Manager Dialog
Feature List and Display Status

Columns in this section include:
Display

individual check-boxes controls Feature display.
Label

individual check-boxes controls Feature as displayed or hidden
ID
• Feature ID number
Name
• Feature Name
Description
• Feature description as specified in the Feature properties. See Section 5.16.2

on page 440.
Acoustic File
• Raw data file linked to the contact

Points
• Number of points (nodes) comprised in the Feature

N.B.Features may be sorted in the Feature Manager dialog list by clicking on
some of the column headings. Sorting is available for Id, Name, Description, and
Acoustic File.

Page 454
5.16.6.1 DXF Export Options

DXF SBP profiles are exported such that each reflector added to the profile is
drawn relative to the start of line. Specifically, the X axis starts at zero and each
reflector is plotted in its relative distance down-line from the start of line.
For exporting to DXF format three options may be selected at the lower portion of
the Feature Manager:
Include Text Labels:
• Text labels for the feature(s) will be included in the DXF file and be
displayed in the user's external CAD program when checked.
Export 3D:
• The third dimension of the DXF format will be populated with height
depth) data, if available.
Use Description as DXF layer:
• The feature description will be used as the DXF layer name rather than the
feature name itself when this box is checked.
5.16.6.2 Deleted Features

To delete a feature, highlight the feature record in the Feature List and left-click
the Delete button or the Delete key on your keyboard..
Multiple features may be deleted simultaneously by selecting several records using
either the Shift key to select a group of consecutive records, or the Ctrl key to
select non-consecutive records.
Note that when a feature is deleted, its record is retained in the DIG file so that it
can be un-deleted if the need arises.
To display the features that have been deleted, check the Display Deleted
Features box.
The deleted features will be added to the list highlighted in orange (Figure 386).
Also, an Undelete Feature(s) button will be displayed. To undelete a feature,
select it in the list and then click this button.
5.16.6.3 Edit Feature

To edit the attributes of a feature – name, description, display color, style, etc. -
select the feature in the list and press the Edit button. Alternatively, double click on
the feature record. A dialog similar to that shown in Figure 387 will be displayed.
Change the attribute values as required and left-click OK. See Section 5.16.2 on page
440 for a complete discussion on each field in the Edit dialog.

Page 455
Figure 387: Sample Edit Feature Dialog
Editing Multiple Features

The display attributes of several features can be edited and saved simultaneously. To
do this, select several features on the list using the Shift or Ctrl keys. Left-lick the
Edit button and change the display attributes as necessary. Click OK – the new
display attributes will be applied to all the selected features.
N.B. Feature name and description cannot be changed for multiple features
simultaneously. These must be edited on a feature-by-feature basis.
Saving and Loading Display Attributes
The feature editing dialog provides a function for saving the display attributes of a
feature to a file so that they can be efficiently applied to subsequent features.
To save the attributes, click the Save button and enter a filename in the Save As
dialog. By default, the file will be saved in the “Attributes” sub-folder under the
main SonarWiz folder. However, you can chose to save it in any folder by browsing
to that folder before saving.
To load display attributes that have been previously saved, press the Load button
and select the required file. The display attributes will be applied to the current
feature.
5.16.6.4 Export
To export features to a file on the hard disk, click the Export button such that the
dialog in Figure 388 appears.
Features may be exported in any of the formats listed below; however, only features
that have the Display box checked will be exported.

Page 456
Figure 388: Export Digitized Features
Export by feature name
• Selecting this option (magenta box) will group features of the same name
into the same file.
• Features of different names will be in their own separate files unless the
Export all Seafloor Features to a single file (black box) )is checked..
• The specific features to be exported by name must have their names

selected in the Feature Names list (red box).
Export Format
The following export formats are supported:
ASCII CSV
• Comma delimited fields, coordinates and attributes

Page 457
ASCII Simple Thickness (.csv)

• For SBP Features only.
• Quick Thickness features are exported in a simple X,Y,Thickness and line
name ASCII CSV file
Autocad DXF
• Output includes the Z component on all features where Z is available. This

function uses the distance downline as the scale for the X-Axis.
XYZ Text File
• Simple XYZ text file with one point per row

XYZ Topo Text File
• For SBP Features only

• In this format the Z value of each reflector point will account for the depth
of the transducer. This is useful in AUV operations where the transducer
maybe hundreds of meters below the surface.
Fledermaus SD file
• IVS3D Fledermaus .SD Format (Version 7 only)

• Not available when Exporting by Feature name
ESRI Shapefile
• ESRI .SHP Format

• Not available when Exporting by Feature name
XYZA (amplitude) Text

• Simple XYZ Amplitude text file with one point per row
XYTime (milliseconds) Text

• Simple XYTime (milliseconds) text file with one point per row
XYTime (seconds) Text

• Simple XYTime (seconds) text file with one point per row
5.16.6.5 Export SBP DXF Profile

This option creates a DXF profile image of only the SBP reflectors. One DXF file is
created for each SBP file loaded into the project.
There is no secondary dialog, the files are immediately created in the Project DXF
sub-directory according to the DXF Export Options (see Section 5.16.6.1 on page
454).

Page 458
5.16.6.6 Import
Features may be Imported into SonarWiz in the following formats:
● Name, Latitude, Longitude ; and
● Name, X, Y
● MarineSonic Marker Files (.mkr); and
● C&C Boundary files (.bnd)
To import a point feature file click on Import and navigate to the directory
containing the file to be imported, select the file and click OK.
Sample X/Y Point Feature .txt file:
a,465394.08,5389784.92
b,465467.07,5389731.54
c,465412.60,5389633.50
d,465313.47,5389703.22
e,465526.99,5389835.04
Sample Lat/Lon file:

Point1, 28 59 15.0, -91 26 37.0
Wreck, 28 58.2, -91 26.6
Point2, 28.901, -91.43
Important Notes for Lat/Lon Files:

1. Standard geodetic sign conventions must be followed i.e a negative sign for
southern latitudes and western longitudes.
2. The program will automatically identify and parse DD.ddd, DD MM.mmm and
DD MM SS.ss formats but ONLY if you remember to put a space between the D’s,
M’s and S’s.
5.16.6.7 Sort
The feature records in the Feature Manager list may be alphabetically sorted by
name, description or by sonar filename. This can be helpful if you want to visually
group features of a particular type for the purpose of editing or deleting. It will also
determine the order in which the features are exported.
Features may be sorted by left-clicking the column header in the Feature List as
described in Section 5.16.6 above on page 453 or by left-clicking the Sort button
and then select the sort key as shown in Figure 389.

Page 459
Figure 389: Specifying Feature Sort Key
5.16.6.8 Backup
This manual backup option is in addition to the automatic backup function (See
Digitized Feature Options on page 112) to prevent loss of valuable data in the
event of accidental file corruption.
The backup folder is a sub-folder of the project folder and a unique serial number is
appended to the .DIG file name so as not to overwrite previous backups.
Left-clicking the Backup button will immediately create a backup and the dialog in
below will appear to indicate the success of the transaction.
Figure 390: Backup Success
5.16.6.9 Recompute All

Allows features that have been digitized from either the SSS waterfall view or the SB
waterfall view to be recomputed to reflect layback adjustments that were made after
the features were digitized.
This function has no effect on features that were directly digitized on the map
window.
5.16.6.10 Preferences
Displays the Digitized Features tab from Preferences. (See Digitized
Feature Options on page 112 for more details)

Page 460
Left-clicking the small arrow in the lower-left hand corner of the Digitized
Features Group () opens the Digitized Feature Options Window.
Figure 391: Open Digitized Feature Preferences
5.16.7 Graphical Feature Editing in the Map Window

A feature can be graphically edited either in the Digitizer View (See Section 5.16.3
on page 445) or the Map Window by selecting the feature (left-click) and using the
mouse to move individual points.
To select the feature, position the mouse cursor over the point or line that defines
the feature and left-click. If the feature is successfully selected, the vertices will be
displayed as shown in Figure 392.
To move a vertex, position the cursor over the vertex, left-click and drag.

Page 461
Figure 392: Graphically Selecting a Feature
To edit or delete the attributes of a graphically selected feature, right-click to display

the pop-up context menu (Figure 393), then select Edit Selected Feature or
Delete Selected Feature.
Figure 393: Digitized Features Right-click Pop-up Menu
5.16.7.1 Polygon Map Feature Right Click Context Menu

Build Survey Line in Selected Feature

Display Selected Feature on Map
Selecting this menu item will turn off the currently selected feature
Trim Magnetometer Data to Feature Extents

Page 462

Enable Only the Magnetometer Lines Inside Feature Extents
Selecting this menu item will turn off all Magnetometer lines that do not intersect
the currently selected feature.
Fix Navigation Spikes Inside Feature Extent
Automatically detects any navigation spikes that fall outside of a polygon feature and
interpolates the navigation data across the spike.
Trim the Sonar Data to Feature Extents
5.16.8 Graphical Feature Editing on the Waterfall Display

If a feature has been digitized on the waterfall display it will have a file associated
with it as shown in the Acoustic File column of the Feature Manager and can
therefore be graphically edited in the Digitizer View.
To edit the feature in the Digitizer View two methods are possible:
1. Select the feature on the map as described above and right-click to display
the pop-up menu (Figure 393) and select View Selected Feature in
Digitizer.
N.B. If this menu item is greyed-out, it means that the selected feature was
not digitized on a waterfall display and as such has no associated Acoustic
File.
2. Select (left-click) the Sonar File that contains the feature left-click the
Digitizing View button in the Post Processing Ribbon Menu select or
type Ctrl+D
The waterfall display will be opened (Figure 394) at the position of the
selected feature. To move a vertex, position the cursor over the vertex, left-
click and drag. You may also Delete the feature or Edit it's attributes by
pressing the appropriate buttons at the top of the dialog.

Page 463
Figure 394: Edit in Digitizer View
5.16.9 Using Features For Automated Editing Functions

A feature can be used to perform Automated editing functions including:
Building Survey Lines

Trimming Magnetometer Data
• See Section Trimming Mag File Data on page 279.
5.16.10 Feature Tools

The Feature Tools button (left) within the Post Processing Ribbon menu
offers the user several contact options for the actively selected Feature in the Map
Window (Figure 395) which are discussed below.
Edit Selected Feature
• Opens the Feature Edit Dialog (Figure 387)for the currently selected
contact active.
• See Edit Feature in Section 5.16.6.3 on page 454 for more information on
the Feature Edit Dialog.
View Selected Feature in Digitizer

Page 464
• Opens the Digitizing View centered on the currently selected feature.

• See Section 5.16.8 on page 462 for more information on editing a feature in
the Digitizing View
Build Survey Lines in Selected Feature

Delete Selected Feature
• Deletes the currently selected Feature.

See in Deleted Features Section 5.16.6.2 on page 454 for details on un-
deleting Features.
Figure 395: Feature Tools
Figure 396: Core Location List

Page 465
5.17 Intersections
SonarWiz offers the ability to identify and work with intersecting Sub-bottom profile
navigation lines.
Figure 397: Intersections Displayed in Navigation Mode
5.17.1 Calculating Intersections
In order to display intersecting Sub-bottom profile lines of navigation as shown in

Figure 397 the points of intersecting themselves must first be calculated. Left-click
the Intersections button located in the Post Processing Ribbon Menu in order
to bring up the drop-down menu shown Figure 398 in below.

Page 466
Figure 398: Intersections Drop-down List
To open the Intersection Manager, either

• Select Intersection Manager from the Intersections Button drop-down list;
or
• Select and right-click an existing Intersection from the Map Window
and select Intersections Manager from the pop-up menu.
Figure 399: Intersection Manager
5.17.2 Intersections Manager

When opened for the first time the Intersections Manager list will be blank.
The Intersections Manager offers the following options:
Compute
• Clicking the Compute button will populate the list with any/all intersecting
points between all Sub-bottom lines in the project, regardless of whether or

Page 467
not they are being displayed. Figure 399 shows the Intersection
Manager.
Delete
• Deletes all highlighted (selected) intersections. The Delete key on your

keyboard may also be used
Select All
• Selects all intersection in the list

Export
• Exports an ASCII text file with the following information for each
intersection:
• ID, Intersection Latitude, Intersection Longitude, Intersection X,
Intersection Y, Coordinate System, Line1 Name, Line2 Name
Report
• Reserved for Future Use
5.17.3 Displaying Intersections

In order to view the calculated intersections Drawing Mode (See Section 2.5.3 of
page 87) the Map Window must be in Navigation Plot Mode.
Once in Navigation Plot Mode the intersections will be displayed as shown in
Figure 397.
Right-clicking on an intersection open the context pop-up menu shown in Figure
400.

Page 468
Figure 400: Intersections and Right-click Pop-up Menu
5.17.4 Quick View 3D

The Quick View 3D option will take 300 pings on either side of the intersection
point from each intersecting file and export them as Fledermaus “sd” objects and
open the associated Fledermaus viewer Figure 401.
N.B. In order for this function to work the user must have either iView4D viewer
Fledermaus software installed. iView4D is available for download free-of-charge
from IVS3D at the following link:
http://www.ivs3d.com/download/iview3d_download.html

Page 469
Figure 401: Quick View 3D Export Results
5.18 Cores
Core reports may be entered into the SonarWiz project and graphically represented in order
to consolidate acoustic and in situ data

Page 470
Figure 402: Cores in SBP Bottom Tracker
The Cores Button (left) located on the Post Processing Ribbon Menu list all the Cores
contained withing the current project.
All Core Management functions including Add, Edit and Delete are conducted from the
SBP Bottom Tracker Window.
Core Attributes
When a core is created, you will be able to specify it's two primary attributes – name and
description. The core names and descriptions can be used to sort features,and are included
in all export files.
In addition to name and description, each feature is given display attributes (symbol size size
and color, label size, font and color) that can be changed as required.
Automatic Backup
Since core digitizing can be a time intensive process, SonarWiz provides an automatic
backup function to prevent loss of valuable data in the event of accidental file corruption.
This is done by copying the project .DIG file (containing Reflectors and Cores) to a backup
folder each time SonarWiz is started.
The backup folder is a sub-folder of the project folder and a unique serial number is
appended to the .DIG file name so as not to overwrite previous backups.
The backup function is ON by default. The advantage of this is that during active digitizing
work, a history of the work is maintained and can be retrieved in the event that features are
accidentally deleted, moved, or otherwise damaged.
Once all features have been digitized, you may want to consider turning the automatic
feature backup OFF in order to prevent the unnecessary accumulation of files in the backup
directory. This is done in the Digitized Feature Options tab of the Program
Options(See Section 2.8.5 on page 112).

Page 471
CSV Core File

When SonarWiz exits, a Comma Separated Values (.csv) file containing information about
the cores will automatically be save to the Project directory under the filename followed by
“.csv”. For example, if the name of the Project is “EastLake”, when the program exits a file
called “EastLake.csv” will be created in the Project directory and it will contain information
about the manually entered cores in the following format:
Name,Description,Type,Width,Latitude,Longitude,Depth,Record,File
5.18.1 Adding a Core
In order to add a core to the project the SBP Bottom Tracker must be active and
either the Add Core button from the Acoustic Reflectors Section (Figure 380)
or the Add Core tool button must be clicked (left). Once either button is clicked
the Add New Core dialog will appear (Figure 403)
Create New Core
Figure 403: Create New Coring Location Dialog
Name:
• User entered name. There are no automatic prompts.

Copy Core:

Page 472
• Allows the user to copy (and then edit) an existing core in order to reduce
the amount of repetition required to manually enter a large number of
similar cores.
Description
• User entered.
Width (pixels)
• Width of coring icon on the SBP View. Default is 16 pixels

Depth to Top:
• This field should be left blank unless the user specifically measured and
recorded the depth of the top of the core at the time of the drop. Once all
the core information has been entered the user will be prompted to mouse-
click the position of the core in the SBP View, causing the program to
automatically populate the Depth to Top field.
Display Core:
• The core icon (width specified above) will be displayed in the SBP View.
The overall depth of the core icon is determined by the user entered Band
information (see below).
Display Core Label:
• The core label will be displayed in the SBP View, next to the core icon,
when checked.
Text Color & Font:
• The user may decide what color to make the text as well as the text font
properties using these two tools.
Add Band:
• See Editing a Core below (Section 5.18.2 on page 473)

Positioning the Core:
• Once the all the core information has been entered into the New Core
dialog and the user clicks OK, the dialog box in Figure 404 will appear
prompting the user to click on the position of the new core. As well, the
user is informed that double-clicking on an existing core will open the edit
dialog.

Page 473
Figure 404: Position Core Pop Up
5.18.2 Editing a Core

A core may be edited in one of two ways: by selecting the core in the Core
Location List (see Section 5.18.3 on page 474)and left-clicking Edit or by double-
clicking in the core icon itself.
Once activated the dialog is exactly the same as the Create New Coring
Location dialog Figure 403.
Add Band
• Clicking on the Add Band button in the Create New Coring Location
or Edit Coring Location dialogs will open the dialog in Figure 405. The
information about each band in the core may be entered in each Core
Band Editor dialog such that an entire coring profile may be created.
Figure 405: Core Band Editor
Remove Band
• A complete core may look something like the example in Figure 406. Bands
may be removed from the core by selecting the Remove Band button
after left-clicking on a particular band or selecting multiple bands

Page 474
Figure 406: Band Information within Coring Location Dialog
Edit Band
A particular band may be edited by first selecting the band and then clicking on
the Edit Band button or by double-clicking on the band itself.
Reorder Bands
Bands may be reordered in the Band List simply by left clicking and dragging
particular band to its new location in the Band List.
5.18.3 Core Location List
The Core Location List (Figure 407) summarizes all cores within the project and
is activated by clicking on the tool button at left from within the SBP Bottom
Tracker Window.
The functions in the dialog are as follows:

Display
• Click the top most box to turn all cores display on or off or click each core
individually.
Label
• Click the top most box to turn all core labels display on or off or click each
core label individually.
Edit
• To edit a core, select it by left-clicking on it and then clicking on the Edit

button. See Section 5.18.2 on page 473 for more details on Editing Cores.
Delete
• To delete a core(s), select a core by left-clicking on it (or multiple cores) and

then clicking on the Delete button or the pressing the Delete key on your
keyboard.

Page 475
Figure 407: Core Location List
5.19 Mag File Management

The Magnetometer File Manager (Figure 409) is used to control the display settings of
each Mag file as well as a number of other functions, each of which is discussed below.
The Magnetometer File Manager is opened by:

• Clicking the Magnetometer button (at left) located within the Post
Processing Ribbon Menu and then selecting Magnetometer File
Manager from the drop-down list (Figure 408)
• Right-clicking a selected Mag file in the Map View and selecting
Magnetometer File Manager from the pop-up menu; or
Figure 408: Mag Button Drop-down List

Page 476
Mag File Manager Columns

Each Mag file in the project is listed on a separate row within the Mag File List
and Status section. Specific columns of the Mag Files section include:
Draw
• Toggles the display of the Mag file in Map View (Checked = displayed)
File Name
• Displays the full path and file name of the Mag file.
Layback
• Lists the current Layback percentage applied to the Mag file and also allows
the setting to be changed. See Layback Percentage in Section 5.14.5 on page
398 for more details.
Color
• Contains a drop down list of the available colors that can be used to display
the Mag line in the Map View.
Records
• Number of Mag records in the file.
Figure 409: Magnetometer File Manager
Mag File Manager Function Buttons

Delete File(s)
• Deletes selected file(s) from the project.

Select All
• Selects all Mag files in the project

Page 477
Editor
• Starts the the Mag File Editor (see section 5.19.2 on page 484 for more
details). N.B. The Editor button is disabled if more than one Mag file is
selected.
Properties
• Displays the Property dialog shown in Figure 410.
Figure 410: Mag File Properties
Set Cable Out

Export
• Opens the Export Dialog in Figure 411 such that Magnetic trace files may
be exported
• Browse to the desired output directory;
• Choose the file format for export:
◦ AutoCAD DXF
◦ ESRI Shapefile
◦ GoogleEarth KML
◦ MapInfo MIF
◦ MapInfo TAB
◦ WaSP Map
◦ ASCII XY Text File
▪ X,Y,Gamma
◦ Enhanced ASCII (.CSV)
▪ Date, Time, Raw Lat, Raw Lon, Raw X, Raw Y,
Layback Lat, Layback Lon, Layback X, Layback Y,
Event, Gamma, Mag Depth, Mag Alt
• Choose the files to be exported
• Click OK.

Page 478
Figure 411: Export Mag File Dialog
Settings
• Opens the Preferences and Settings Dialog in Figure 412 which is

discussed in Section 2.8.7 on page 119
Anomalies
• Opens the Magnetometer Anomaly List see section on page for more
details.

Page 479
Figure 412: Mag Preferences and Settings Dialog
5.19.1 Magnetometer Anomaly List

The Magnetometer Anomaly List (Figure 413) contains all Mag anomalies in
table format added for each file in the Mag File Editor.
Magnetic Anomalies are displayed in both the Map Window and, when both sonar
and magnetometer anomalies exist in the same project, in the center of the sonar
waterfall viewer at the nearest sonar ping.
Figure 413: Magnetometer Anomaly List

The Magnetometer Anomaly List may be opened by:
• Selecting Magnetometer Anomaly List, from the Magnetometer button
drop down list (Figure 408);

Page 480
• Clicking the Anomalies button in the Magnetometer File Manager; or

• Right-clicking the selected Mag file in the Map View (Figure 414) and
selecting Magnetometer Anomaly List
Figure 414: Magnetic Anomaly Right-Click Pop-up Menu
The columns in the Magnetometer Anomaly List table (Figure 413) include:
Display
• When checked, the anomaly will be displayed in the Map View

Anomaly
• Anomaly Number
Line
• Line Number
Peak-to-Peak
• The peak-to-peak amplitude of the anomaly

Altitude
• Altitude of the sensor above the seafloor at the time f observation

Duration
• Duration of the anomaly in meters

Description
• The user entered information from the Notes section of the Anomaly
Properties Window of the Mag File Editor.
Filename

Page 481
• Name of the file where the anomaly was detected.

Magnetometer Anomaly List Buttons:
Delete
• Deletes selected anomaly(ies) from the Project

Select All
• Selects all anomalies in the table

Editor
• Starts the the Mag File Editor (see Section Error: Reference source not
found on page Error: Reference source not found for more details)
Export
• Opens the Save As dialog in Figure 415 such that Magnetic anomalies may
be exported in one of several formats:
• ASCII Comma Separated Value (*.csv)
• Enhanced ASCII Comma Separated Value (*.csv)
• ML file (*.ml)
• Database File format (*.dbf)
• MMS 2008 CSV File (*.csv)
• AutoCAD DXF File (*.dxf)
• ESRI Shape File (*.shp)
• GoogleEarth KML File (*.kml)
• Export Which Anomalies
• Export All anomalies
• Export Selected anomalies
• Export only anomalies designated as “Debris”

Page 482
Figure 415: Export Anomalies - Save As Dialog
Settings
• See the Magnetometer Post-Processing Settings on page 119.

Sort
• Sorts anomalies in their proper numerical sequence.

• N.B. Any column header in the list may be left-clicked to sort the anomalies
by that attribute.
Refresh
• Refreshes the Map View – used after changing display properties but
without the need to exit the dialog to see the changes.
Report
• Currently Displayed Magnetic Anomalies may be exported to one of three

types of reports which are placed in the Project's Mag sun-directory. The
types of reports available are:
• an HTML Report (Not Yet Implemented)
• a (Basic) MS Excel file that uses the ID, Easting, Northing,
Latitude, Longitude, Line, Gamma, Duration, Type Description,
Depth, Sensor Depth and Altitude
• an MS Excel file as above but with a Mag chart Graphic for each
anomaly (See Figure 417)
• N.B. MS Excel must be installed for the Excel reports.

Page 483
• Figure 416 below shows the Magnetometer Anomaly Report options.

Left-click the desired report type and then OK.
• Saved Report as PDF: Creates a PDF file of the report.
Figure 416: MAG Anomaly Report Options
Figure 417: Mag Anomaly Excel Report
Recompute
• Forces SonarWiz to recompute the positions of the Anomalies. This is

normally used after a change in the CMF file navigation parameters such as
layback.

Page 484
5.19.2 Mag File Editor

The Magnetometer File Editor is used to manage Magnetic Anomalies that are
contained in the currently selected Mag file. Anomalies may be user defined or an
Auto Detect algorithm may be used based on a user-defined threshold.
The Magnetometer File Editor (Figure 418) may be opened by:

• Selecting Map>Magnetometer Files>Edit Selected Mag File, or
• Right-clicking the selected Mag file in the Map View and selecting Edit
Selected Mag File or;
• Clicking the Editor button in the Magnetometer File Manager; or
• Clicking the Editor button in the Mag Anomalies List.
5.19.2.1 Mag File Editor Anatomy

The different sections of the Mag File Editor (Figure 418)are described below:
Figure 418: Mag File Editor
Cursor Info Bar (Green Box)
• Displays cursor information when the cursor is in the Data Window:

•

Page 485
Figure 419: Cursor Info
The position of the cursor in the current file is tracked b the Info at
Cursor Window (Figure 419)and detailed information about that particular
position is displayed. This information includes:
Date and Time of Record
Record Number Northing
Latitude Easting
Longitude Course Made Good
Heading Speed
Mag Depth Depth below Keel
Altitude Event Number
Cable Out with % Layback Layback Offsets
Data Window (Red Box):
• Every record in the entire file is graphed in the data window with the
observed mag value as the Y axis and the Record number as the axis. The

Page 486
Raw Trace, Smoothed Trace, Ambient Trace as well as anomalies are

displayed in this window.
• Anomalies in the Data Window are graphical representations of the
anomalies listed in the Anomaly Management Window with shot point
numbers at the top of the anomaly.
• Anomalies may be graphically edited for overall span and center point. See
Section 5.19.2.4 on page 491 for more details.
Tool Bar Buttons (Magenta Box):

Page 487
Anomaly Management Window (Yellow Box):
• The Anomaly Management Window (Figure 420) is used to Add

(manually and auto detect), Delete and Edit anomalies as well as control
their display settings.
Figure 420: Mag Anomaly Management Window
Columns in the Anomaly List

Display
• When checked, the anomaly will be displayed in the Map View

Anomaly
• Anomaly Number
Amplitude
• Amplitude of the anomaly from the Ambient Mag Record

Duration
• The physical distance that the anomaly spans in the record.

Cable Out
• Current cable out and layback percentage applied at the anomaly.

X
• Easting
Y
• Northing
Ambient
• Ambient Mag Value
5.19.2.2 Add / Delete Anomalies

Add Anomaly

Page 488
• Clicking this button turns the cursor into a combined pen/magnet icon and
allows the user to left-click on a desired point of the graph where a new
anomaly is desired added (Figure 421).
Delete Anomaly
• Deleted the highlighted (selected) anomalies in the Anomaly list.
Figure 421: Manually Add New Anomaly
Auto Detect Anomalies
• Forces the program to run Auto Detection.

Auto Detect Threshold
• User defined magnitude threshold for Auto Detect Algorithm. Once this
filed is populated all anomalies of at least the specified threshold value will
be annotated in the Display and inserted into the anomaly table.
Anomaly Properties Window
• This window is activated by left-clicking on any anomaly in the anomaly list

(Figure 422).

Page 489
Figure 422: Anomaly Properties
Anomaly Info
• Specific values describing the anomaly at the cursor position are displayed.
Type of Anomaly
• User selected anomaly type as either Monopolar, Dipolar, or Complex.

Cause of Anomaly
Known
• If a Shapefile has been loaded that contains possible causes, such as

strictures, wrecks or pipelines etc, the Identify Cause button will
be enabled. See Magnetometer Post-Processing Settings in
Section 2.8.7 on page 119 for a discussion on pre-loading overlay
files.
• See Identify Source of Known Anomaly below.
Unknown
• The user may select a pre-defined description or enter a custom

description for the anomaly.
Notes
• User entered notes

Min Avoid Distance
• Clearance distance around an anomaly for future surveys an/or seabed

work.

Page 490
Altitude
• Magnetometer altitude at time of anomaly record.

N.B. Text cells are set to red when user edits amplitude, altitude or cause.
5.19.2.3 Identify Source of Known Anomaly

The Identify Source of Known Anomaly Window (Figure 423) is only available
when the user has pre-loaded a Shapefile in the Magnetometer Post-
Processing Settings (Section 2.8.7 on page 119) such that its features my be
linked to magnetic anomalies detected with the sensor.
Figure 423: Identify Source of Known Anomaly
Overlay Map File
• A drop down list of the pre-loaded Shapefiles available

Features
• All Features within the selected Overlay Map File sorted from closet to
farthest away from the current anomaly
Distance
• Distance from the currently selected Feature above to the anomaly

Description
• Resultant information made up from the Attribute 1 and Attribute 2

selections below.
Attribute 1
• A list of attributes within the Shapefile to be used to Describe the source

of the cause of the anomaly
Attribute 2
• Optional with use of check-box

Page 491
• The same list of attributes within the Shapefile as Attributes 1 above to be

used to further Describe the source of the cause of the anomaly
Display Settings
Draw Raw Trace
• Draw the Raw Magnetometer Trace (in black) in the Data Window
Draw Smoothed Trace
• Draws the Smoothed Trace (in green) in the Data Window

Draw Ambient Mag Trace
• If Ambient Mag data is present in the file it will be displayed in the Data
Window in grey.
Y-Scale: The Scale of the Y axis can be controlled via this feature. The following
selections are avaiable:
• Fit To View
• User Defined
• 0.01 Gamma / Pixel
5.19.2.4 Graphically Editing Anomalies

In the Data Window (red box in Figure 418) anomalies may be edited for starting
point, end point and center point.
Left-edge adjust
• Use LEFT-SHIFT key and the left/right arrow keys adjust the left edge of
the anomaly; or
• Use the mouse to left-click and drag the left edge of the anomaly
Right-edge adjust
• Use RIGHT-SHIFT key and the left/right arrow keys control the right edge
of the anomaly; or
• Use the mouse to left-click and drag the right edge of the anomaly
Center of anomaly adjust
• When no shift key is pressed, the left/right arrow keys move the position of
the anomaly along the chart; or
• Use the mouse to left-click and drag the center of the anomaly

Page 492
5.20 Sediment Classification
5.20.1 Overview of the Seabed Classification Function

The Seabed Classification process discovers different textures in the sidescan images. It
produces a color-coded map image of where these different textures are found in the images.
Algorithm
The Seabed Classification process looks at square windows in the sidescan images, and uses a
range of statistical processes to measure “texture” measures in the window. The current
algorithm calculates entropy and standard deviation; other measures may be added later.
Each pixel is then placed into a multi-dimensional “classification space”. Peaks in this
classification space (areas where there are more pixels than elsewhere) correspond to classes
that can appear in the classification. Thus, the location of each pixel in the classification
space allows it to be allocated a class number.
The process of dividing up the classification space is called Training, and needs to be done
before the main classification task.
Classification is performed separately on each survey line, and the results are merged into
a single map in a Merge process. The merged map can be filtered to produce coherent areas
of classification.
5.20.2 Classification Steps
1. Prepare sonar files for Classification

• Open a SonarWiz project in the usual way, and load the sidescan images to
be processed.
• Use the File Manager dialog from the Post Processing tab in the
SonarWiz ribbon or the File Explorer Toolbar to select the lines that are
to be classified i.e. the lines to be classified must be displayed.
• Ensure that the Bottom Tracking process has been performed on each of
the survey lines and that all lines are displayed slant-range corrected in the
Map Window.
• All lines should also be well normalized across track using Gain Settings.
See Section 5.11 on page 354 for more information on Gain.
2. Open the Seabed Classification tool
• Left-click the Classification button in the Post Processing tab in the

SonarWiz5 ribbon menu to open the Seabed Classification Manager
(Figure 424).

Page 493
Figure 424: Seabed Classification Manager
3. Click “Classify All”

4. Check that a classification map is produced
5. Match the classification map to the image
• Use the Classes dialog to match the classes by color to the sidescan image.
For example, areas of sand may be identified by sand-waves in the sidescan
image. Edit the Class names in the Classes dialog.
6. Delete any unwanted classes
• Done by selecting them in the Classes dialog and clicking the Delete button.
• In the Settings dialog, un-check Retrain on Classify All
• Note that repeating the Train process resets the Classes information
• Click Classify All
7. Check the classification images again
• Repeat the above steps if necessary.

Page 494
5.20.3 Seabed Classification Settings

• Click the Settings button at the bottom left of the Seabed
Classification Managerto show the Seabed Classification Settings
dialog (Figure 425). The settings are shown in several groups.
• In most cases, the default settings are adequate for a first pass through the
seabed classification process.
Figure 425: Seabed Classification Settings
Input Files
• The near range (nadir) and far-range part of the sidescan swaths tend not to
represent the texture of the seabed well, and so are best removed. Entering
10% in each of the “Trim” boxes causes the first and last 10% of the sonar
range to be ignored. Some experimentation may be needed to find the best
value of these settings.
Training
Use first line only
• In the Training process, the classifier discovers the different classes of

texture that are available in the sonar data. It is usually acceptable to use just
one survey line for this. However, if the sonar images change significantly
between survey lines, disable this check-box.
Retrain on Run All
• The Run All button runs all of the Classification steps automatically, one
after the other. However, if you have manually edited the class information,
you must un-check this selection, otherwise the class data will be over-
written by the new Train function, and your manual changes will be
ignored.
Texturers

Page 495
The Texturers are statistical processes that measure a particular parameter of the
image. Select the Texturers that give the best result for each data set. At least two
Texturers are required. Standard Deviation and Entropy are used by default.
The Settings dialog gives you a selection of groups of Texturers that have been
found to work on different data sets. Start with the Simple Texturers (these are
the fastest to run), and then try the other sets if the first set doesn’t give the results
required.
Custom Selecting Groups of Texturers
• Left-click the Adivanced Texturers radio button in order to enable the
Texturers Advanced Selection button: Left-click this button to open
the Seabed Classification Texturers dialog (Figure 426)
Figure 426: Seabed Classification Texturers
• Select the desired Texturers - see Section 5.20.5 (Simple Texturers) or

Section 5.20.6 (GLCM Texturers) on pages 500 or 500 for a description of
the algorithm used in each Texturer
• Note that the group settings in the main Settings dialog take account of the
Texturers selected in the Texturers Advanced dialog, and vice-verse. So, to
see which Texturers are used in a particular group:
• Select the button next to the group (e.g. Custom Selection 1)
• Select Advanced Selection to activate the Texturers
Advanced Selection button left-click that button

Page 496
• The Texturers used in the first group that you chose are shown in
the Seabed Classification Texturers dialog.
Widow Size / Window Step
• The Texturers work within a small window on the data. The size of each
window in pixels, and the step from one window, can be set. This allows
processing time to be balanced against resolution of the classification result.
• A Window Size of 9 (giving windows 9 by 9 pixels), and Window Step
of 5 (causing each subsequent window to be stepped on 5 pixels from the
previous window) gives reasonable results in most cases.
• A Window Step of 1 could result in the classification process taking
several tens of minutes. A window size of, say, 15, with a step of 9 gives
better texture definition with a lower spatial resolution. Again, some
experimentation may be necessary with each data set. Always start with a
large Window Step to make the first classification runs go quickly, and
then reduce it to improve classification resolution later if desired.
Classification
The Training process identifies a finite set of classes of ttexture within the sonar
image. These classes can be edited before starting the Classification process.
The number of classes can be reduced to a required number, using the Number of
Classes selection. The classes that give the strongest grouping of image texture
results are retained.
After the first classification run, the classes found by the Training process can be
edited to tune the classification process. Left-click the Manage Classes button to
open the Seabed Classification Class Settings dialog (Figure 427).
Figure 427: Seabed Classification Class Settings
Seabed Classification Class Settings

Page 497
• The Classes dialog is empty until a Train is performed

• Any edits and deletions performed in the Class Settings dialog are cleared
by repeating the Train process
• The class number is an arbitrary index allocated by the Train process, and
cannot be changed.
• The color used to draw each class is listed on the table
• The text used to label the classes in the vector file drawn by the Export
process is also shown.
To change the color and text:
◦ Click on a class to highlight its row
◦ Click the Edit… button
◦ Select the color from the Color combo box
◦ Enter the required text in the Description box
◦ Click “OK”
◦ Check that the new information appears in the Class Settings dialog.
To delete a class:
◦ Click on the class to highlight it
◦ Click the Delete button
◦ Classes are displayed in reducing order of strength, so preferably
delete the classes towards the end of the list
Merge
Merge File Name
• User defined name of the merge file to be set.

Draw classification legend on merge & filter classes
• The resultant GeoImage will have a legend comprising class numbers and
names at the bottom of the image when this box is checked.
Export
Generate Polygons for Each Class
• Checking this box results in polygons, of the selected type below, being
created for each class with the font size selected by the user
File Format
• The format used to write the classification area borders to file may be
selected in the File Format drop down list
• Export formats include:
◦ AutoCAD (.dxf)
◦ Google Earth (.kmz)

Page 498
◦ ESRI Shape (.shp)
Text Font Size
• The size of the font used to write the class names may be selected here
Defaults
• Use the Defaults button to return all of the Seabed Classification

settings to their default values. A confirmation dialog will appear prior to
this change taking effect.
Advanced...
Input Files
If the task of tuning the Seabed Classification settings takes a long time
on a large data set the “Truncate sonar files at” selection may be
experimented with in order to process only the first “x” pings in each
selected survey line.
Filter
Used to control the filtering of the merged files.
• A Mode filter with a window size of 5 pixels works well to remove
the occasional outlier in the classified image.
• If the user wishes to bring out the second-commonest classification
class, use the Enhance filter. This replaces each pixel with the
second-commonest class, as long as fills at least the percentage of
cells in the filter window that the user specifies.
• The Interpolate filter fills in gaps, replacing the center value of
each moving window with the mode value of the window.
Initially it is recommended that only the “Mode” filter, with a window size
of 5 is used.
5.20.4 Running the Classification Process

After selecting the required settings, the entire classification process may be run
from start to finish using the Classify All button.
As the classification process runs, the progress is shown in the text window in the
Seabed Classification Manager dialog box. The same information is also shown
in the Output window of the main SonarWiz window.
A small progress LED flashes next to the button for each of the separate
classification steps, as each step runs.
The individual steps may be run as follows:
• Click the Train button to train the classifier. The process uses the first file
in the list. Therefore, if one particular line is better than the others for
training purposes, then de-select all the others except that one in the File

Page 499
Manager dialog. If a particular feature is only found in one part of the

survey, make sure that it appears in the line used in the Train process.
• Watch the Output window for confirmation that training has completed.
The time taken to perform each step is shown in this window. This can help
in selecting the down-sampling and Window Step values.
• A progress bar appears at the bottom of the Seabed Classification
Manager dialog box. It fills from left to right as the process continues, and
is removed at the end of the process.
• When training is complete, click Classify. Again, watch for confirmation of
completion. The Classify process is multi-threaded, and so can use all of
the cores on a multi-core processor. Even so, classification can take a
minute or two, depending on the sub-sample and Window Step settings.
• The results of the Classify process can be seen as bitmap (.bmp) files in a
Classify folder under the main SonarWiz project folder. The raw image
data from “line1.csf” appears as file “line1.cIn.bmp” and the classification
output is shown as “line1.cOut.bmp”.
• The Train and Classify processes can be stopped using the Abort button.
• Merge the files together into a geo-coded grid using the Merge button. A
completion notice is given in the usual place. However, merging is usually a
quick process, taking one or two seconds at most.
• The results of the merge also appear in the Classify folder, as
“MergeFile.merge.bmp” (an alternative to the “MergeFile” part can be
specified in the Settings dialog). There is also a “MergeFile.merge.bpw” file,
which is used in geo-coding the image to show it in the SonarWiz window,
or in other applications that can display geo-coded bitmaps. GeoTIFF files
are also created.
• Click Filter to filter the merge file; the results appear in
“MergeFile.filter.bmp”, and an equivalent GeoTIFF.
• Click Export to export the borders of the classification areas to a file. The
name of each class is written inside the borders as text. This file can be
overlaid on the SonarWiz5 map, viewed stand-alone with a third-party
viewer appropriate for the file format used, or imported into a CAD
program.
• When the Classification process is complete, one or more classified image
files appear in the Output Files box of the Seabed Classification
Manager dialog box. Select one of these by clicking on it, and then use the
Add as basemap button to show it in the main SonarWiz5 mosaic
window.
• Use the Swipe (Section 2.5.1.13 on page 78) tool Map Window toolbar to
peel back the sonar image data and compare it with the classification data
beneath.

Page 500
5.20.5 Simple Texturers

Simple Texturers run a single statistical calculation on each image window that is
processed.
5.20.5.1 Standard Deviation

This Standard Deviation Texturer calculates the Standard Deviation of the grey-scale
values in the window. It is a measure of the spread, or range of values in the image.
Standard Deviation is defined as:
where xi is the value in the ith pixel of the sub-image, and x

is the average of all the pixel values.
5.20.5.2 Entropy
Entropy is a measure of the “orderliness” of the image. It is at a maximum when most of
the pixels in the image are middle of the range of possible values. Very dark or very bright
images will both have low values
Entropy is defined as follows:
where xi is the value in the ith pixel of the sub-image
5.20.5.3 Intensity
This simply calculates the average brightness of the pixels in the image, in other words:
It will bring out areas that are particularly bright or dark in the classification,
which can be useful if you are looking for such areas in the criteria for
classification. However, it can also bring out any bias in brightness across-
track, caused by any problems with the image normalization function.
5.20.6 GLCM Texturers

Page 501
GLCM stands for Grey-Level Co-occurrence Matrix.

These texturers run in two stages:
• A GLCM matrix is built up. This matrix counts the number of times that two image
brightness values are found next to each other. This step is common to all the
GCLM texturers. If each pixel can take four possible grey-level values (0 to 3), then
the GLCM is a 4x4 matrix. The value at, say, index (2,3) is the number of times that
a value of 3 is found next to a value of 2.
• A selected statistical measurement is made on the resulting GLCM; a different
statistical measurement is made for each GLCM texturer.
Most GLCM measurements are weighted averages of the contents of the matrix, with
different weightings applied for different statistical measures.
The GLCM Texturers can be grouped as follows:
Contrast Group
• GLCM Contrast, GLCM Asimilarity, and GLCM Homogeneity all measure the
contrast in the image: how much variation there is between adjacent pixels.
Orderliness Group
• GLCM ASM, GLCM Energy, GLCM Entropy and GLCM Max measure
“orderliness”. They pick up regular, tidy patterns in the image.
Descriptive Statistics Group
• The remaining GLCM values perform simple statistics on the GLCM values, rather
than on the values in the image themselves. These are: GLCM Mean Horizontal,
GLCM Mean Vertical, GLCM Variance Horizontal, GLCM Variance Vertical,
GLCM Std Dev Horizontal and GLCM Std Dev Vertical
Correlation
• GLCM Correlation could be classed as a descriptive statistics measure, but its effect is
different to the others, so can be considered in a group of its own.
Using Texturers Together

The Simple Texturers work directly on the image, and so measure something different to
the GLCM Texturers. Therefore, it can be useful to use Simple and GLCM Texturers
together in the same set.
The GLCM Texturers in each group measure a similar property of the base image, so no
more than one texturer from each group should be chosen, and if you choose only two
texturers, make sure that they don’t come from the same group. The Simple Texturers all
do something different to each other, so it’s OK to use them together.
GLCM Texturer Descriptions

Page 502
5.20.6.1 GLCM Contrast

This measures the contrast in the image. It is large when the values in the image vary a lot. It
is defined as:
In this equation, means “add up all the values resulting from

using all the index numbers (i and j) in the
matrix.
is the value in the

is the weighting applied in
matrix at index i,j,
this case.
and
It works as follows: i and j are the index numbers of the grey-level co-occurrence matrix. If
large counts are found where i and j are the same, that means that lots of the pixels in the
image have the same value as adjacent pixels. So ( i – j )2 is largest when values are most
different to each other, and increases exponentially with difference.
This value will be largest for image areas that have a lot of variation, such as rough, rocky
bottoms. However, it will also pick up artefacts such as image “speckle”.
5.20.6.2 GLCM Asimilarity

This value is similar to contrast, but the weighting with difference is linear, not exponential.
This will pick up similar features as GLCM Contrast, but not so strongly. It is
recommended to try using Asimilarity instead of Contrast, if the classification result is
using the difference between pixel values too strongly.
5.20.6.3 GLCM Homogeneity

Homogeneity is the opposite of Contrast: the weighting is literally the inverse of that
used in Contrast. It gives the strongest return for images that have smooth variation.

Page 503
Homogeneity is used in a similar way to Contrast. The classification “clustering” process

works the same if the sign of the Texture values is reversed, so in principle it shouldn’t make
much difference whether one uses Homogeneity or Contrast in the mix of Texturers
used. However, it may help to group certain sets of values together, so some benefits are
possible for different data sets.
It is generally not a good idea to use Homogeneity and Contrast as a pair for
classification, as they are basically measuring the same thing.
5.20.6.4 GLCM ASM

ASM stands for Angular Second Moment. It measures orderliness.
It is defined as:
In ASM, each pixel value is, in effect, its own weight. Therefore it is large when lots of pixels
have the same value as their neighbors.
5.20.6.5 GLCM Energy
Energy also measures orderliness.

It is simply the square root of ASM:
It is therefore a slightly toned down measure of orderliness relative to ASM.

Page 504
5.20.6.6 GLCM Entropy

Entropy is similar to the term in thermodynamics of the same name: it is larger with more
“disorder” in the image. It is effectively the opposite of the Energy measure.
5.20.6.7 GLCM Max

This simply returns the largest number in the matrix. Therefore, it will be large if one
combination of pairs of values occurs more often than any other combination.
5.20.6.8 GLCM Mean Horizontal

This is the first of the Descriptive Statistics Group of GLCM Texturers.
It is defined as:
The ‘i’ value is the actual gray-scale value.
If we just used we would get the average of pixel values.
But we are weighting the average by the number of times that the value appears in
combination with other values.
5.20.6.9 GLCM Mean Vertical

This measure is very similar to the above, but instead of the ‘i’ value of the matrix, we use
the ‘j’ value, which is the value that we are comparing with (these are sometimes called the
reference value and the neighbor value). In practice, these two measures should return similar
results.
N.B. The horizontal and vertical terms refer to the axes of the GLCM matrix, not the axes of
the original image (which are across- and along- track).

Page 505
5.20.6.10 GLCM Variance Horizontal

Variance and Standard Deviation measure the “noisiness” of the GLCM matrix, as opposed
to the image itself.
Variance is defined as:
where µi is the GLCM Mean Horizontal value, which is

explained above.
This value says something about the distribution of the probability of finding two pixels with
the same value next to each other.
5.20.6.11 GLCM Variance Vertical

As with the GLCM Mean Values, the Variance can be calculated using the horizontal
rows or vertical columns of the GLCM matrix: in this case we use the columns: the result
should be similar to the horizontal, and again it has nothing to do with the horizontal or
vertical (along or across track) dimensions of the original image.
5.20.6.12 GLCM Std Dev Horizontal

Standard deviation is simply the square root of the variance, in this case GLCM Variance
Horizontal.
5.20.6.13 GLCM Std Dev Vertical

As above, but using the columns instead of rows on the GLCM.
5.20.6.14 GLCM Correlation

Correlation measures the linear dependency of gray levels on those of neighboring pixels. It
is defined as:
where µi is GLCM Mean Horizontal, µj is GLCM Mean Vertical,

σi2 is GLCM Variance Horizontal, and σj2 is GLCM Variance
Vertical
It is a rather different measure to the other texturers, and so it can work well used together
in a set with other values.
References
Most of the statistical measures used in Seabed Classification are covered well on Wikipedia.
For an excellent description of the GLCM algorithms, see
http://www.fp.ucalgary.ca/mhallbey/tutorial.htm .

Page 506

Section 6 Tools
This Section discussed all the functions accessed on the Tools Ribbon Menu in below.
Figure 428: Tools Ribbon Menu
6.1 Geodesy Utility

If the SonarWiz geodesy library does not contain the exact coordinate system required for a
particular project, it is possible to create your own using the stand-alone CTI Geodesy
Tools program which is a coordinate system and datum editor.
The CTI Geodesy Tools (Figure 429) is opened by either by either:

• Left-clicking the Coordinate Systems button locate in the Tools Ribbon
Menu; or
• Go to the Windows START button and select: Programs->SonarWiz5-
>CTIGeodesyTool
Page 508
Figure 429: CTIGeodesy Tools Program
6.1.1 Create Coordinate System

This section describes how to create a user-defined coordinate system by using an example:
creating a transverse Mercator projection for the island of Taiwan which uses a custom 2-
degree projection centered on longitude of 121 degrees east.
To create a custom user-defined coordinate system
1. Start the CTI Geodesy Tools (Figure 429) and left-click Create and select
Create Coordinate System to open the dialog in Figure 430
2. Select an existing coordinate system from the Identification tab of the editor's
main dialog using the drop-down list for the Key Name field (Figure 430).
Figure 430: Coordinate System creation
SonarWiz5 User Guide Tools

Page 509
This coordinate system should use the same projection type as the coordinate
system you are creating. If you do not know a coordinate system with the same
projection, use the Browse button. This will display a dialog with expanded
information about each coordinate system in the list.
In this example we have selected any arbitrary coordinate system that uses a
transverse Mercator projection.
6. Click the New button to begin the creation process opening the dialog shown in
Figure 431
Figure 431: Coordinate System Creation - Entering New Name
Enter a name for the new coordinate system in the New Key Name field. You
may enter up to 23 characters, one of which must be a colon (:). This is to
prevent naming conflicts with built-in coordinate system names.
Press OK when done.
7. Enter source and location information.
Figure 432: Coordinate System Creation – Identification Tab
This information is used to describe and annotate the new coordinate system. It
is entered on the Identification tab of the Coordinate System Editor, as

Page 510
The edit fields on the Identification tab are used as follows:

• Key Name is the actual key name assigned to the coordinate system
definition. This is the name by which you access the definition when
performing coordinate conversions. The key name assigned to a given
coordinate system definition must be different from the key names assigned
to all other coordinate systems. You may select a coordinate system for
display or edit by selecting its name from the drop down list, or by clicking
on the Browse button located to the right of this field.
• Description consists of descriptive text indicating the official title or the
use and purpose of the coordinate system. This information is not used by
the coordinate conversion system in any way other than to display it at
appropriate times to assist you in selecting a coordinate system.
• Source refers to the source of the information used to define the
coordinate system. Again, the coordinate conversion system does not use
this information in any way other than to display it at appropriate times.
• Country/State is used for annotation purposes only.
• Location is used for annotation purposes only.
8. Set General Parameters for the new coordinate system.
Select the General tab and enter or edit the values to match your new coordinate
system. The areas highlighted in yellow were changed for this example.
Figure 433: Coordinate System Creation – General Tab
Edit fields in the General Tab are used as follows:

• Referenced To: Coordinate system definitions must be referenced to
either a datum or an ellipsoid. The coordinate system editor uses this group
box to indicate the type of reference, and the specific entity, to which the
current coordinate system is referenced. To change the reference, click on
the appropriate box on the right hand side. Selecting a new datum using the

Page 511
Select different Datum button will automatically change the type of

reference to 'Datum' if necessary. Similarly, the editor will, if necessary,
change the type of reference to 'Ellipsoid' if a different ellipsoid is chosen as
the coordinate system reference using the Select different Ellipsoid button.
References can be defaultable. Defaults are useful only for experienced
users, and only then in rare situations. Do no check this box unless you are
very comfortable with the information discussed there.
• Unit: Select the unit upon which coordinate system coordinates are to be
based. The available choices are provided in drop down list form. Note that
the unit named Foot refers to the U. S. Survey foot, the most commonly
used unit of feet. The unit named IFoot refers to the International Foot, a
less frequently used, and slightly different, unit. The choices available will
switch to angular units when the chosen projection in the pseudo projection
used for geographic coordinate systems. Units can be defaultable. Defaults
are useful only for experienced users, and only then in rare situations. Do no
check this box unless you are very comfortable with the information
discussed there.
• Scale Reduction: Scale Reduction is also referred to as the Scale of the
Central Meridian. Scale reduction is not applicable to all projections and this
field is disabled (grayed out) for those projections for which it is not
applicable. (For the pseudo UTM projection, this field is grayed out to
indicate that the user cannot change the preset scale reduction of 0.9996.)
For those projections where it is applicable use this field to enter the scale
reduction factor for the coordinate system. The actual numeric value is
usually (but not necessarily) slightly less than or equal to one. For example,
the scale reduction use for all UTM zones is 0.9996. The scale reduction, in
the form of a ratio, is shown just to the right of this edit box. You can enter
the scale reduction factor in ratio form if you like. To do so, be sure that the
first two characters of your entry are '1:'. These must then be followed by
the appropriate integer value (which may include a thousands separator).
The editor will display the numeric form in the edit box, and the ratio form
to the right upon completion of your entry.
• Map (paper) Scale: This value is almost always set to one (i.e. 1.0). Other
values are used only when working with coordinates on a scaled map. For
example, when designing a coordinate system that is to represent inches on a
map scaled at 1:24,000, you would enter 24,000 in this field to indicate the
scale of the map. In this case, you would also need to set the Unit
specification to Inch. Ratio format may be used to enter the map scale, and
is displayed to the right of the numeric value.
• Quadrant: In rare cases, coordinate systems need to be defined, for
instance, where X coordinates increase to the west, or Y coordinates
increases to the south. Occasionally there is a need to be able to swap the
axes. The Quadrant field can be used to accommodate these rather rare
situations. This field consists of a drop down list which provides the
following choices:
• X/Lng increases to the east, Y/Lat increases to the north (normal)
• X/Lng increases to the west, Y/Lat increases to the north
• X/Lng increases to the west, Y/Lat increases to the south

Page 512
• X/Lng increases to the east, Y/Lat increases to the south

• Y/Lat increases to the east, X/Lng increases to the north
• Y/Lat increases to the west, X/Lng increases to the north
• Y/Lat increases to the west, X/Lng increases to the south
• Y/Lat increases to the east, X/Lng increases to the south
9. Set the projection specific parameters.
Select the Parameters tab and set the parameters associated with the specified
projection.
In this example we set the central meridian value as shown in Figure 434.
Figure 434: Coordinate System Creation – Parameters Tab
Usually at least one Parameter page is visible, but up to four parameter pages may be
required to display all of the parameters associated with a specific projection. The
parameters shown at any given time are those required or supported by the
projection of the currently selected coordinate system. Each parameter is given its
own label that indicates the purpose of the parameter. These labels will change as
the projection selected on the General page is changed to indicate the specific nature
of the parameters appropriate for the selected projection.
Wherever a latitude is required as a parameter value, the latitude must be specified in
degrees north of the equator. South latitudes must be indicated by entering a
negative number or qualifying the input with 'S'.
Similarly, wherever a longitude is required as a parameter value, the value must be
entered in degrees east of Greenwich. That is, all longitudes entered on the
parameter screen must be relative to Greenwich where positive values are used for
longitude east of Greenwich, and negative values are used for values west of
Greenwich. The 'W' character may also be used to indicate west longitude.
Wherever an angle is required as a parameter value, the value must be entered in
degrees east of north. A negative value indicates an azimuth west of north. 'E' and
'W' directional characters may be used to indicate the proper sign of the value.

Page 513
10. Enter Origin values for the specified projection.

Select the Origins tab and modify the highlighted fields to match your projection as
Figure 435: Coordinate System Creation – Origin Tab
Typically, two origins are specified in this dialog: Coordinate System Origin origin
and False Origin.
The Coordinate System Origin are the geographic coordinates (latitude and
longitude) of the point at which the projection mathematics produce a zero value for
the X and Y Cartesian coordinates before the application of the False Origin. (There
are some exceptions to this, most notably the oblique Mercator projections.). Enter
in degrees north of the equator. South latitudes must be indicated by entering a
negative number or qualifying the input with 'S'. Enter longitude in degrees east of
Greenwich. Enter a negative value or use the 'W' character to indicate longitudes
west of Greenwich.
For several projections, the Origin Longitude is the same as the Central Meridian as
specified on the Parameter Page. In these cases, the Origin Longitude field will be
disabled (grayed out). Enter the Origin Longitude as the Central Meridian on the
Parameter page in these cases. For some projections, the Origin Latitude field will
also be disabled. This is true when the Origin Latitude is required by the projection
definition to be the equator or, in certain cases, is determined by parameters given
on the Parameter page.
The False Origin consists of X and Y offsets which are added to all coordinates.
False Origins are often zero. They are used for two reasons. First, it is considered
desirable to have all Cartesian coordinates be positive numbers. False Origins are
often chosen to be large enough to cause all X and Y coordinates to be positive in
the useful range of the coordinate system. Second, False Origins are often used in
multiple-zone systems to identify the specific zone being used. For example, in the
1983 version of Texas State Plane Coordinates there are five zones, and the northing
for each is used to make if difficult to mistakenly use coordinates in the wrong zone.
The Minimum Non-Zero Coordinate values are used to preclude very small
numbers in the output results. For example, in rare cases it is possible for coordinate

Page 514
conversions to generate coordinate values very close to, but not exactly zero;
1.2343510-27 for example. When printed in a report, such numbers can be very
distracting and in some cases cause problems. The values provided in the Minimum
Non-Zero Coordinate value fields indicate the threshold under which the coordinate
conversion system will force small values for X and Y coordinates (longitude and
latitude for a geographic coordinate system) to be zero.
11. Set the geographic limits of coverage of the specified projection.
Select the Extents tab and enter the valid geographic limits of coverage of the
projection as shown in .
Figure 436: Coordinate System Creation – Extents Tab
If values are not provided (i.e. simply left empty or set at zero for both minimum
and maximum values), the coordinate conversion system will automatically compute
rather liberal values for the useful range each time a coordinate conversion is
performed. You can use this page to specify values to override the automatic values
calculated by the coordinate conversion system. Please note that specifications for
either type of extent must be complete. You cannot simply change a maximum
specification and expect the coordinate conversion system to supply the minimum
automatically. If you supply any information at all, you must supply a complete
specification.
12. Save the new coordinate system definition.
To complete the process, press the Save button and then the Close button. The new
coordinate system will now appear in the CTI Geodesy Tools list of Coordinate
Systems.

Page 515
6.1.2 Create Datum

If the library of existing Datums3 does not contain the custom datum required for a
particular project, one may be created here.
The Datum Dictionary Editor (Figure 437) is opened by starting the CTI Geodesy
Tools (Figure 429) and left-clicking Create and selecting Create Datum.
Figure 437: Datum Dictionary Editor Dialog
To Create a Custom Datum

1. Select an existing coordinate system: This is done using the drop-down list for the
Datum Key Name field.
2. Click the New button to begin the creation process.

This will open the dialog shown in Figure 438
3
Yes, yes, the plural of Datum is “Data” but in order to avoid confusion with sensor “data”, the incorrect plural spelling of
data is used here when referring to geodetic data.

Page 516
Figure 438: New Datum Key Name
Enter a name for the new datum in the New Key Name field. You may enter up to
23 characters, one of which must be a colon (:). This is to prevent naming conflicts
with built-in coordinate system names.
Press OK when done.
3. Description and Source in the Datum Dictionary Editor are automatically
populated with the reference datum values.
4. The Change Ellipsoid button allows the user to select any of the many available
ellipsoids to be used as the base ellipsoid.
5. Technique used to convert to WGS84: In order to properly convert the custom
datum to WGS84 coordinates the user must select the technique used and subsequently
fill in any values required for this transformation in the Molodensky or Bursa-
Wold/Severn Parameters sections below.
6. Click Save to exit the dialog and save this new datum.
6.1.3 Create Ellipsoid

If the library of existing Ellipsoids does not contain the custom ellipsoid required for a
particular project, one may be created here.
The Ellipsoid Dictionary Editor (Figure 439) is opened by starting the CTI Geodesy Tools
(Figure 429) and left-clicking Create and selecting Create Ellipsoid.

Page 517
Figure 439: Ellipsoid Dictionary Editor
To Create a Custom Ellipsoid

1. Select an existing ellipsoid: This is done using the drop-down list for the Ellipsoid
Key Name field.
2. Click the New button to begin the creation process.

3. This will open the dialog shown in Figure 440. Enter a name for the new datum in
the New Key Name field. You may enter up to 23 characters, one of which must
be a colon (:). This is to prevent naming conflicts with built-in coordinate system
names.
Press OK when done.
Figure 440: New Dictionary Entry Key Name For Ellipsoids

Page 518
4. Description and Source in the Ellipsoid Dictionary Editor are automatically

populated with the reference ellipsoid values.
5. The user may enter the custom Equatorial and Polar Radius Specified
Parameters.
6. Click Save to exit the dialog and save this new ellipsoid.
6.1.4 How To Import a User Defined Coordinate System Into The

SonarWiz 5 Geodesy Database
1. Use the Import button and select the GXP file that contains the coordinate system
you would like to add to your geodesy database. The GXP file may come from
Chesapeake or you may have received it from a colleague that has exported a user
defined coordinate system from his SonarWiz geodesy database. In any event, click
the Import button and select the GXP file that you want to import as shown in
Figure 441
Figure 441: Open Dialog for Coordinate System to be Imported
2. The imported coordinate system will appear in the list as shown in Figure 442
below. All user defined coordinate systems should start with the ‘:’ colon character.

Page 519
Figure 442: CTIGeodesyTools Showing Imported Coordinate System
6.1.5 Enabling Commonly Used Projections

SonarWiz literally supports thousands of projections; however, very few people want
to see all of these when selecting a projection in the Project or Import dialogs.
Figure 443 below shows the standard Select a Coordinate System dialog where
the user has access to every coordinate system located in the SonarWiz Geodesy
Library.
Figure 443: Select Coordinate System: Standard View
For those users wishing to see only those projections that they commonly use when
selecting a projection, SonarWiz offers a Simplified View function(check-box) in
the Select a Coordinate System dialog (Figure 444).

Page 520
Figure 444: Select Coordinate System: Simplified View
The Simplified View shows only those coordinate systems that have been enabled
by the user in the Geodesy Utility Enabled column (Figure 429).
This is now possible running the CTIGeodesyTool and setting the enabled
checkbox on only the coordinate systems you want SonarWiz to work with.
6.2 Coordinate Converter
SonarWiz includes a versatile coordinate conversion tool for converting a single XYZ
coordinate from one coordinate system to another.
To open the Coordinate System Test Dialog (Figure 445) left click the Coordinate
Converter button (left) within the Tools Ribbon Menu.
Figure 445: Coordinate System Converter Dialog
Use the upper portion of the dialog to indicate the coordinates that are to be
converted and the coordinate system upon which the coordinates are based.

Page 521
In the lower portion of the dialog, you will need to indicate the coordinate system to
which the coordinate is to be converted.
Once the required input has been provided, clicking the calculate button will cause
the indicated conversion to be performed, and the results displayed in the lower
portion of the dialog box.
6.2.1 Input Fields
This section contains a description of the use and purpose of several fields in the
upper portion of the dialog box, i.e. the portion within the box labeled Input.
Coordinate System Key Name
• Use this field to key in the key name of the coordinate system upon which
the source coordinate is based. You can use the browse button (the button
labeled 'B' immediately to the right of the edit field) to activate the
coordinate system browser. Since there are more than a thousand
coordinate system definitions in the dictionary, the browser is often helpful.
For coordinate systems that are commonly used, the key names are well
known, and simply keying in the name is usually the efficient approach.
Note that for state plane coordinates, you can enter the state plane zone
number in lieu of the coordinate system key name. You will need to enter a
number with exactly four digits for this feature to work.
SP Zone Codes refer to NAD83
• Check this box to indicate that any state plane code number entered in the
Coordinate System Key Name field is to refer to the NAD83 version of the
state plane zone. Note that the official NAD83 version of all state plane
zones are in meters rather than feet. To indicate a NAD83 State Plane
coordinate system based on, for example, U. S. Survey feet, you will need to
use the key name approach.
Description
• The description of the currently selected input coordinate system is

displayed adjacent to this label.
Datum
• The key name of the datum referenced by the selected input coordinate
system is displayed adjacent to this label.
Source
• The source of information for the selected input coordinate system

definition is shown adjacent to this label.
Unit
• The unit upon which the selected source coordinate system is based is
shown adjacent to this label.
X/Easting/Latitude
• Use this field to enter the X coordinate, the Easting, or the Latitude as
appropriate for the coordinate system of the coordinate to be converted.

Page 522
When the input coordinate system referred to in the Coordinate System Key
Name field is that of a Cartesian coordinate system, the label on this field
will be X/Easting. The label changes to Latitude when the referenced input
coordinate system is geographic in nature. In either case, input the
appropriate numeric value. The coordinate conversion system automatically
recognizes the format of the input coordinate and processes it accordingly.
Y/Northing/Longitude
• Use this field to enter the Y coordinate, the Northing, or the Longitude as
may be appropriate for the coordinate system of the coordinate to be
converted. When the input coordinate system referred to in the Coordinate
System Key Name field is that of a Cartesian coordinate system, the label on
this field will be Y/Northing. The label changes to Longitude when the
referenced input coordinate system is geographic in nature. In either case,
input the appropriate numeric value. The coordinate conversion system
automatically recognizes the format of the input coordinate and processes it
accordingly.
Grid Scale
• Following conversion calculation, the Coordinate System Test dialog will

display in this field the grid scale factor of the input coordinate system at the
indicated location. This is a calculated field, thus user entry is not permitted.
Geographic coordinate systems do not have grid scale factors. The concept
of a single grid scale factor is compatible only with conformal map
projections. For coordinate systems based on non-conformal projections,
the Coordinate System Test dialog displays a value representative of scale
distortion of the projection in use at the point given.
Convergence Angle

display in this field the convergence angle of the input coordinate system at
the indicated location. The convergence angle is the difference between true
north and the Y axis of the coordinate system, expressed as an azimuth.
This is a calculated field; user entry is not permitted. Note also that the
concept of a convergence angle does not apply to a geographic coordinate
system.
6.2.2 Output Fields

This section describes several fields in the lower portion of the dialog box, i.e. the
portion enclosed within the box labeled Result
Coordinate System Key Name
• Use this field to key in the name of the coordinate system to which the
source coordinate is to be converted. You can use the browse button (the
button labeled 'B' immediately to the right of the edit field) to activate the
coordinate system browser. Since there are more than a thousand
coordinate system definitions in the dictionary, the browser is often helpful.
For coordinate systems that are commonly used the key names are well
known, and simply keying in the name is usually the efficient approach.

Page 523
Note that for state plane coordinates, you can enter the state plane zone
number in lieu of the coordinate system key name. You will need to enter a
number with exactly four digits for this feature to work.
SP Zone Codes refer to NAD83
• Check this box to indicate that any state plane code number entered in the
Coordinate System Key Name field is to refer to the NAD83 version of the
state plane zone. Note that the official NAD83 version of all state plane
zones are in meters rather than feet. To indicate a NAD83 State Plane
coordinate system based on, for example, U. S. Survey feet, you will need to
use the key name approach.
Description
• The description of the currently selected result coordinate system is

displayed adjacent to this label.
Datum
• The key name of the datum referenced by the selected result coordinate
system is displayed adjacent to this label.
Source
• The source of information for the selected result coordinate system

definition is shown adjacent to this label.
Unit
• The unit upon which the selected result coordinate system is based is shown
adjacent to this label.
X/Easting/Latitude
• The Coordinate System Test dialog will display the X Coordinate, the
Easting, or the Latitude (as appropriate) of the result in the edit box
underneath this label. This field is for calculated results; user input is not
required nor is it permitted. The results can, however, be cut for pasting in
another field, window, or application. When the result coordinate system
referred to in the Coordinate System Key Name field is that of a cartesian
coordinate system, the label on this field will be X/Easting. The label
changes to Latitude when the referenced input coordinate system is
geographic in nature. In the case of a latitude, degrees, minutes, and seconds
form is used by default. Check the Decimal Degrees box at the bottom of
the dialog to display values in this format.
Y/Northing/Longitude
• The Coordinate System Test dialog will display the Y Coordinate, the
Northing, or the Longitude (as appropriate) of the result in the edit box
underneath this label. This field is for calculated results; user input is not
required nor is it permitted. When the result coordinate system referred to
in the Coordinate System Key Name field is that of a cartesian coordinate
system, the label on this field will be Y/Northing. The label changes to
Longitude when the referenced input coordinate system is geographic in
nature. In the case of a longitude, degrees, minutes, and seconds form is

Page 524
used by default. Check the decimal degrees box at the bottom of the dialog
to obtain values in decimal degree form.
Grid Scale

display in this field the grid scale factor of the result coordinate system at
the calculated location. Geographic coordinate systems do not have grid
scale factors. The concept of a single grid scale factor is compatible only
with conformal map projections. For coordinate systems based on non-
conformal projections, the Coordinate System Test dialog displays a value
representative of scale distortion of the projection in use at the calculated
location.
Convergence Angle

display in this field the convergence angle of the result coordinate system at
the calculated location. The convergence angle is the difference between
true north and the Y axis of the coordinate system, expressed as an azimuth.
Note that this is a calculated field and user entry is not permitted. Also note
that the concept of a convergence angle does apply to a geographic
coordinate system.
Below the Result box are the following check-boxes:

Decimal Degrees
• Causes all latitude, longitude, and convergence angle output to be shown in

decimal degree format rather than degrees-minutes-seconds.
High Precision
• Displays numeric results in high precision as opposed to normal precision

format.
3D Calculation
• Causes three dimensional datum conversions to be performed.
6.3 File Utilities

SonarWiz offers a number of file utilities (Figure 446) that perform both simple and
advanced functions. Each utility is described in detail in this Section.

Page 525
Figure 446: File Utilities
6.4 XTF File Utilities

Left-clicking the XTF button within the Tools Ribbon Menu open the drop-down list
shown in Figure 447
Figure 447: XTF File Utilities
6.4.1 XTF to SEGY Converter

The Chesapeake XTF-to-SEGY converter is a simple multi-threaded utility program
that will extract the first sub-bottom data channel from either an 8 or 16-bit XTF
data file and will use this to create a SEG-Y file.
To start the utility from within SonarWiz select XTF to SEGY Converter from the
XTF drop down menu The program may also be run standalone by double-clicking
the file XtfToSegy.exe from within Windows Explorer. This file is normally located
in the same folder as SonarWiz.exe.
The program allows for the selection of an input folder containing XTF files and an
separate output folder where SEG-Y files will be written.
All XTF files found in the XTF folder that contains at least one channel marked as a
sub-bottom data channel will be processed.
Note that only the first sub-bottom channel found in the file will be processed. To
select input and output folders, simply browse for the folders by pressing the
Browse button (see Figure 448).

Page 526
When the start button is pressed, the utility will begin processing the XTF files
Figure 448: XTF-to-SEGY Converter - Specifying files
found in the XTF input folder and will write each SEG-Y file until it completes or
an error occurs. I
f an error occurs, processing will continue with the next data file. Two progress bars
indicate the overall progress as well as the individual file progress.
The dialog in Figure 448 shows the successful conversion of 1 XTF file.
The navigation and time stamp data are carried over from the XTF file to the SEGY
file as follows:
• If the original XTF file contained geodetic coordinates then, by default,
• the output SEG-Y file will also contain geodetic coordinates properly
scaled and converted to arc seconds according to the SEGY
specification ;however
• the geodetic coordinates may be converted to project X/Y coordinates
by checking he Convert to... check-box
• If the XTF file contains X/Y coordinates, the utility will scale the
coordinates and apply no other unit conversion.
The program operates in two modes. If any Chesapeake Technology, Inc. software
license key (dongle) is detected on the local machine the program will convert any
XTF file regardless of the program used to record the original XTF file. If no dongle
is found, the utility will operate on files that have been collected with SonarWiz only.

Page 527
When attempting to process foreign (i.e. non-SonarWiz generated) XTF Files

without a CTI dongle, the utility will display an error message.
6.4.2 Rewrite XTF Ping Times

Some data recording programs do not put as much weight on the importance of the
ping time as the ping number and as such Ping times can be out of sequence.
SonarWiz uses both variables and an inaccurate or out-of-sequence ping time can
cause problems in processing imported data.
Figure 449: Rewrite Ping Times - Open File Dialog
The Rewrite XTF Ping Times utility uses the start time of the first ping and
increments the ping time by the Ping Period value in the XTF channel header.
When digitalized the utility simply asks for the name of the file (Figure 449),
Clicking Open initiates the ping time renumber process.
6.4.3 Extract Notes from XTF File
This utility reads any electronic notes entered by the operator during the survey and
stored in the XTF file to be text format and then writes them to a Comma Separated
Value (CSF) ASCII file.
Once the file has been selected (Figure 450) and is found to contain notes a Save
As dialog will prompt the user for the location and file name of the ASCII CSV file
to be created.

Page 528
Figure 450: Extract Notes From XTF File
6.4.4 Update Parameters in XTF File
If the CSF file Fish Position, Cable Out or Altitude values are desired to be written
to the original XTF file, then this utility may be used.
N.B. This utility edits the original XTF file and once edits are saved they
cannot be “undone”. It is highly recommended that a backup of the original
XTF files be made prior to using this utility.
To build a Update XTF File Parameters from CSF:
1. Select Update Parameters in XTF File in the drop down menu under
the XTF button in order to open the dialog in Figure 451

Page 529
Figure 451: Update XTF File from CSF Dialog
2. Select which CSF parameters are to be written to the XTF file(s)
3. Checked Files: files may be selected individually or all files may be

selected using the Check All box.
4. Clicking OK results in a FINAL WARNING (Figure 452)
Figure 452: XTF Update Final Warning
5. Clicking Yes to the Final Warning results in the CSF Values being
written to the original XTF file(s). A progress bar will will be displayed
at the bottom of the Checked Files area.

Page 530
6.5 CSF File Utilities

Left-clicking the CSF button within the Tools Ribbon Menu open the drop-down list
shown in Figure 453
Figure 453: CSF File Utilities
6.5.1 Convert CSF File to CSV
Should the user wish to see the contents of the CSF file, created from the originally
imported sonar file, select Convert CSF file to CSV from the drop down menu
under the CSF button.
Once selected, the dialog in Figure 454 will appear prompting the user to select the
CSF file to be converted. Normally CSF files will be found within the CSF directory
under the root project directory.

Page 531
Figure 454: CSF to CSV File Selection
If only a sampling of the entire file is desired then the user may specify to Export
every nth record
Columns exported to CSV format include:

• Ping
• Date
• Time
• Flags
• Altitude
• FishLat
• FishLon
• AntennaHeight
• NadirX
• NadirY
• PortX
• PortY
• StbdX
• StbdY
• RNG
• HDG
• CMG
• SPD
• CBL
• LBK_X
• LBK_Y
• EVT
• MAG
• MAG_S
• SENSOR_DEP

Page 532
• DEP
• DistToPrevMeters
• Roll
• Pitch
• Heave
• Swell
• KP
6.5.2 Convert CSF Navigation to SEGP1

The Navigation from a CSF file may be written to a SEGP1 file using Convert
CSF Navigation to SEGP1 from the drop down menu under the CSF button.
Once selected the dialog in Figure 454 will appear prompting the user to select the CSF
file to be converted. Normally CSF files will be found under the CSF directory under the
root project directory. If only a sampling of the entire file is desired then the user may
specify to Export every nth record.
When completed (Figure 455) the resultant SEGP1 (.sp1) file will be located in the
same directory as the CSF file.
Figure 455: CSF Navigation Extracted to SEGP1
6.5.3 Convert CSF File to XTF
To convert a CSF file to XTF select Convert CSF file to XTF from the drop
down menu under the CSF button.
Once selected the dialog in Figure 456 will appear (with the center white section
blank) prompting the user to select directory where the CSF data to be converted
resides and the target directory.
Output 16-Bit Records (unchecked is 8-bit)
• By default only 8-bit records are exported unless this boxed is checked
Apply Heading Offset
• If a Heading Offset has been applied in the Settings dialog (see Section
5.11.1 on page 356), and this offset is desired carried forward in to the new
XTF file, then this box must be checked.
Datum for XTF Output Coords

Page 533
• The user has the choice of outputting the coordinates in either WGS84 or
the local project datum.
Once Start is clicked the resultant XTF files will be named the same as their
corresponding CSF file. The dialog in Figure 456 shows the dilog in mid-process
while converting files.
Figure 456: CSF to XTF Converter
N.B.
• This converter only converts sidescan CSF File to XTF.

• Any positional offsets that have been applied to the CSF position will be
included in the final output position.
6.5.4 Convert CSF File to SEGY
To convert a CSF file to SEGY select Convert CSF file to SEGY from the drop
This export function will convert any of the imported SBP files regardless of the
source file type (JSF, SEGY, KEB, ODC, etc) to a full resolution 16-bit fixed point
SEGY file that contains all of the gain settings, navigation adjustments, layback,
swell filtering and heave compensation.
Once the Convert CSF file to SEGY option is selected the dialog in Figure 457
below will prompt the user to select the CSF files to be exported to SEGY format.
The user may choose to ecport either X/Y Coordinates or Lat/Lon
Coordinates by clicking the appropriate radio button at the bottom of the Open
Dialog.

Page 534
Figure 457: Select CSF Files to be Converted to SEGY
Having the original source data is required for the conversion procedure. If
SonarWiz does not know where the original file is located a dialog will appear
(Figure 458) requesting the location of the original file.
Figure 458: Locate Acoustic File Dialog
Once SonarWiz has the original acoustic file and the user left-clicks on the OK
button the conversion process is undertaken with a summary a results appearing at
the end of the conversion process (Figure 459).

Page 535
Resultant SEGY files will be located in the Project's SBP directory.
Figure 459: Conversion Results
6.5.5 Extract CSF Navigation to Text File

This utility is used to produce a Comma Separated Value (.CSV) file containing the
navigation extracted from a CSF file.
To start this utility select Extract CSF Navigation to Text File from the drop
Once selected the dialog in Figure 454 above will appear prompting the user to
select the CSV file to be converted. Normally CSF files will be found in the root
project directory. If only a sampling of the entire file is desired then the user may
specify to Export every nth record.
Figure 460: Navigation Extraction

Completed
Once the Navigation has been extracted the dialog in Figure 460 will appear. The
.CSV file will be named the same as the original .CSF file with a “.CSV” extension
and will be located in the same sub-directory as the original .CSF file. The .CSV file
is a 6-column, multi-row table with the following column headers:
• Date, Time, X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Latitude, Longitude

Page 536
6.6 SEG-Y File Utilities

Left-clicking the SEG-Y button within the Tools Ribbon Menu open the drop-down list
shown in
Figure 461: SEG-Y File Utilities
6.6.1 ODC to SEGY Converter

The Chesapeake ODC to SEGY converter is a simple multi-threaded utility program
that will extract the sub-bottom packets from any StrataBox ODC data file and
create a second 16-bit fixed point SEG-Y file.
To start the utility from within SonarWiz select ODC to SEGY Converter (Figure
461) from the drop down menu under the SEGY button within the Tools Ribbon
menu which will open the dialog shown in Figure 462.
The program allows the user to select an input folder where ODC files may be
selected and an output folder where SEG-Y files will be written. Any ODC file in
the ODC folder that contains at least one sub-bottom data packet will be processed.
This program is intended to be used as a batch conversion utility. To optimize
processing, put all of your ODC files you would like to convert into one folder.
Then, set the input data path to that folder.

Page 537
Figure 462: ODC to SEG-Y Converter
Converting the ODC Navigation Data

If the sub-bottom data packet contains navigation, that navigation data is also
extracted and formatted into the SEG-Y trace header in conformance with the SEG
standards for map units and scale.
The navigation and time stamp data are carried over from the XTF file to the SEGY
file as follows:
• If the original XTF file contained geodetic coordinates then, by default,
• the output SEG-Y file will also contain geodetic coordinates properly
scaled and converted to arc seconds according to the SEGY
specification ;however
• the geodetic coordinates may be converted to project X/Y coordinates
by checking he Convert to... check-box
• If the XTF file contains X/Y coordinates, the utility will scale the
coordinates and apply no other unit conversion.
Sound Velocity
The ODC Sub-bottom packet may include a depth offset value if the StrataBox
software was set to delay the data recording. ODCToSEGY reads the depth in units
and converts it to depth in milliseconds using the sound velocity value in the main
window combined with the units flag from the ODC 105 configuration record. The

Page 538
depth in milliseconds is stored in bytes 105-106 of the SEGY trace header. The
speed of sound in water used for converting between distance and time may be
specified by the user. This Sound Velocity is also written to bytes 91-92 in the
trace header.
Operation
When the Start button is pressed, the utility will begin processing the ODC files
found in the ODC input folder and will write each SEG-Y file until it completes or
an error occurs. If an error occurs, processing will continue with the next data file.
Two progress bars indicate the overall progress as well as the individual file progress.
This software requires a license to actually convert data files. If you have a dongle
(software key) for ANY Chesapeake Technology, Inc. product, you automatically
have access to this product. If no dongle is found, this program will issue an error
message when attempting to convert a ODC file.
Splitting Files When the Range Changes
This utility will automatically convert ODC files such that each output SEGY file
contains a single distinct range per file. When a range change in the ODC file is
detected, a new output SEG-Y file will be created by appending -NNN
6.6.2 Geostar to SEG-Y

This utility converts the older EdgeTech GeoStar data to true SEGY such that it can
be imported in to SonarWiz.
Selecting GeoStar to SegY... (Figure 461) from the drop down menu under the
SEGY button within the Tools Ribbon menu which will open the dialog shown in
Figure 463 below.
Select:
1. If Latitude and Longitude should be converted to X/Y coordinates;
2. The location where the new Seg-Y files are to be written; and
3. The files to be converted.

Page 539
Figure 463: GeoStar to Seg-Y Dialog
6.6.3 SEG-Y Channel Splitter

This utility will take a single SEG-Y file containing 2 channels of data and create two
separate single-channel SEG-Y files.
Simply designate the directory containing the original 2-channel SEG-Y files and the
output directory of the single-channel SEG-Y filesto be created and click on Start.

Page 540
Figure 464: SEG-Y Channel Splitter
6.6.4 SEG-Y Datum Shifter

The SEG-Y Datum Shift Utility will convert a SEGY file from one coordinate
system into a new SEGY file in a different coordinate system.
To use this utility:
Input
• Browse to and select the folder containing the original SEG-Y files to be
datum shifted
• Browse the available Coordinate Systems and select the current coordinate
system of the original files.
Output
• Browse to and select the folder designated to receive the new datum-shifted
SEG-Y
• Browse the available Coordinate Systems and select the desired coordinate
system of the new datum shifted files.
Click Start

Page 541
Figure 465: SEG-Y Datum Shift Utility
6.6.5 SEG-Y File Splitter

The SEG-Y Channel Splitter (Figure 466) is a simple multi-threaded utility program
that will batch split large SEG-Y files into smaller SEG-Y files of the size specified
by the user.
The program allows the user to select an input folder where large input SEG-Y files
are stored and an output folder where the smaller split SEG-Y files will be written.
Any SEG-Y file in the input folder that is larger than the Maximum Size of Split
Files (MB) will be processed.
The EBCDIC and binary headers are copied from the original to the split files
without change. The trace header navigation, time stamp and raw samples for each
channel are copied from the source file without change.
When the start button is pressed, the utility will begin processing the SEGY files
found in the input folder and will write each split file until the size of the split file is
larger than the maximum file size specified by the user or an error occurs. If an error
occurs, processing will continue with the next data file. Two progress bars indicate
the overall progress as well as the individual file progress.

Page 542
Figure 466: SEG-Y File Splitter
6.7 Open Project Folder

Selecting the Open Project Folder within the Tools Ribbon Menu opens Windows
Explorer at the root project directory.
6.8 Open Log File Folder

Selecting the Open LogFile Folder within the Tools Ribbon Menu opens Windows
Explorer at the Logs directory level under the root project directory.

Page 543
6.9 Palette Builder

SonarWiz comes with a variety of color palettes that can be selected through the
Color and Contrast Dialog (See Section 2.5.4 on page 88).
1. If a custom palette is desired one may be created through the Palette Builder Utility
by selecting the Palette Builder button (left) under the Tools Ribbon Menu which
open the Palette Builder Dialog in Figure 467.
Palette
Display
Figure 467: Palette Builder Dialog
Palette Builder Dialog

The anatomy of the Palette Builder Dialog is discussed below.
File Menu
Open
• An existing palette may be opened for editing.

Page 544
Save As
• Once edits are completed, the new palette may be saved such that it can be selected
in the Color and Contrast Dialog for use in the main program.
N.B. Once a new palette has been created, SonarWiz must be restarted in order for the new
palette(s) to be shown in the Color and Contrast Dialog drop down list.
Palette Display
Shows the current color palette with the lowest (base) color at the top (0) and the highest at
the bottom(1) with both colors being represented as squares. The triangles on the right hand
side of the Palette are called “CPeg”s and indicate the position of the transition colors from
0 to 1.
Add New CPeg
A new CPeg may be added using this section at a given distance from the base color (0) and
with a specific color. To choose the new CPeg color, click on the color rectangle and choose
a color.
Selected Peg
Existing Pegs may be selected by a left-click (including start and end pegs) and they may
have their color modified or may be deleted entirely.
Palette Options
Show Tool Tips
• If the mouse is left to hover over a CPeg, a small dialog will appear next to the
cursor giving the Position and Color for the Peg if the Show Tool Tips Check Box is
checked.
Interpolation Method
• Any one of 10 possible interpolation algorithms may be selected to affect the color
gradient from 0 to 1.
Quantization
• Color progression from 0 to 1 may be broken into discreet bins with this option
checked and the number of bins populated with a user choice.
6.10 Grid and Contour
Using the Grid and Contour function (left) the sensor variables Altitude, Cable
Out, Magnetometer, Reflectivity, Sensor Depth and Water Depth may be
gridded and contoured in to an ESRI SHP file, an AutoCAD DXF file or Google
Earth KML file.
In addition external XYZ data may be gridded if it is in the same projection as the
current project.
To Grid and Contour Data:

Page 545
1. Select the Grid and Contour button within the Tools Ribbon Menu in order to
open the dialog in Figure 468
Figure 468: Grid and Contour Sonar Variables
2. Output File Name
• The full path name as well as file name must be specified. By default the
Project “Shp” directory will be inserted as the full path and the file name of
“variable_Contours.shp” will also be inserted. If the Output File Name
or file type default (.shp) is not desired then the user may Browse to an
alternate directory and/or alternate file name.
3. Variable
• If the gridding output is of a sensor variable choose it here. Choices are:

• Altitude;
• Cable Out;
• Magnetometer;
• Reflectivity;

Page 546
• Sensor Depth;
• Water Depth; or
• Altitude + Sensor Depth (a pseudo Water Depth calculation)
4. Grid Size
• For Altitude, Cable Out, Sensor Depth and Water Depth grid size is in
integer meters
• For Reflectivity grid size is unit-less.
• For Magnetometer grid size is in integer gammas
5. Contour Interval
• For Altitude, Cable Out, Sensor Depth and Water Depth contour
interval is in integer meters
• For Reflectivity ,contour interval is unit-less.
• For Magnetometer, contour interval is in integer gammas
6. Z Scale
• Allows the user to change the sign of (primarily depth) variables to create a
grid that can represent depth or elevation
• Can also be used as a scale multiplier for (non DTM) data whose magnitude
is too small to be effectively displayed in its current format
7. File Output Type
• ESRI Shapefile;
• AutoCAD DXF; and
• Google Earth KML
N.B.
A Surfer .grd file is created and put in the working directory regardless of which
output file type is chosen.
The .grd file may be used in the Export to Files to 3D Viewer option for
draping imagery (see Section 5.7.4 on page 326 ).
8. Data Source
Use Data from Project
• Select this option to gris a variable in paragraph 2 above.
Use External XYZ Data

Page 547
• Allows user to import XYZ data from a file
• When selected the dialog will change to that shown in Figure 469
below.
• Use the External XYZ File Browse button to select the incoming file
to be gridded
• N.B. External data MUST be in the same projection as the Project.
Figure 469: Grid and Contour XYZ Data
9. Checked Files
• Files may be selected individually for inclusion into the grid file or all files
may be selected using the Check All box.
10. Extend Grid to Sonar Extents
• Creates a convex hull that covers the mosaic all the way out to the far field
data points.
N.B.

Page 548
If you are not using .grd files created in other applications from external data, it is
recommended to leave this box checked otherwise the bathymetry data will extend
only to the nadir line of the sonar swath UNLESS you use the Clip to Selected
Feature function below.
11. Clip to Selected Feature
• Any currently displayed closed features will appear in this list allowing the
user to clip the resultant grid to the feature extents
• This is an excellent tool to avoid extrapolation of data into regions where

the data os too sparse to be relaible
6.11 Shape Files

ESRI Shape Files may be created from the navigation track of sonar data files in one of three
formats.
To build a Shape File:
1. Select Build Shapefiles (left) from within the Tools Ribbon menu on order to
open the dialog in Figure 470
2. Shapefile Output Type
Polyline of unique navigation points
• Since the ping rate is higher than navigation update rate many pings will
have same position. This function only exports pings with non-
repeating locations.
Point file of Event Numbers
• A file of unique points representing Event Numbers
Single Polyline per file with limited attributes
• A lightweight version of the Polyline version above
Use Every nth ping
• A value of “1” will take every node from EVERY point in the feature
whereas a vale of “50” will only take every 50th point thus reducing the
size of the data object making up the feature. A good rule-of-thumb is
to use a low number (10 or less) for dynamic features.
3. Checked Files
• Files may be selected individually for inclusion into the grid file or all files
may be selected using the Check All box.

Page 549
4. Clicking OK results in an output file being created in the Project .Shp directory for
each file selected in the Process the checked files box.
Figure 470: Build Shape File Dialog
6.12 Dongle Info

Many support calls to CTI require the information contained within the dongle
attached to the user's PC.
The Dongle Info button (let) located within the Tools Ribbon Menu is used in
order to determine the status of the CTI dongle attached to the current PC.
Left-clicking the Dongle Info button causes SonarWiz to read the information
contained in the currently attached dongle and print it to a display screen (Figure
471)
OK
• Closes the dialog

Page 550
Copy
• Copies all the information displayed about the dongle to the Windows
clipboard
Save
• Prompts the user to save the information displayed about the dongle to a
text file of name specified by the user.
Figure 471: Dongle Info Dialog

Section 7 Supported Maps
7.1 List of Supported Reference Map Formats

Provided by Global Mapper Software LLC, Olathe, KS; Makers of Global
Mapper Software which is used by SonarWiz for importing digital maps in a
diverse range of formats.
More information can be found at Global Mapper Software's website:

http://www.globalmapper.com/
ADRG Files
Arc/Info ASCII Grid
Arc/Info Binary Grid
Arc/Info Export Format (E00)
ASPRS LIDAR LAS Files
ASRP (Arc Standard Raster Product) and USRP Files
ASTER DEM and L1A/L1B Imagery and MODIS imagery
AutoCAD DWG (DraWinG) File
AutoCAD DXF (Drawing Interchange File)
BIL/BSQ/BIP Imagery
BSB Nautical Charts
BT (Binary Terrain) Elevation Grid Files
CADRG and CIB Files
Canada 3D Files
Canadian Digital Elevation Data (CDED)
CDF (GES Cartographic Data Format)
CompeGPS RTE, TRK, and WPT Formats
DBF (DBase III+) Files
DHM - Swiss DEM Files
DTED (Digital Terrain Elevation Data) Format
Erdas GIS Files
ERDAS Imagine Image Format
ERMapper Compressed Wavelet (ECW) Format
ESRI Shapefiles
Garmin PCX5 Format Waypoint (WPT) and Track (TRK) Files
Geodas Grid (GRD98) Format
Geosoft Binary Grid Files
Page 552
GIF Files
Global 2' Elevation Data (ETOPO2)
Global 30-arc-second Digital Elevation Data (GTOPO30)
GLOBE (Global Land 1-km Base Elevation) Data
GPS TrackMaker
GPX (GPS eXchange Format) Files
GXF (Geosoft ASCII Grid) Files
Hypack Matrix Files
Idrisi Format
Intergraph COT Format
International Bathymetric Chart of the Arctic Ocean (IBCAO) Files
Japanese DEM (JDEM) Format
JPEG Image with World File
JPEG2000 Files
KML/KMZ Formats
Landsat 7A FAST Format
LizardTech MrSID Data
Lowrance SonarViewer Format
Lowrance USR
MapInfo MIF/MID and TAB/MAP Formats
MapTech Topo Maps and Aerial Navigation Charts
Marplot MIE Files
MicroStation DGN Format
NIMA GNS (GeoNet Names Server) Format
NITF - National Imagery Transmission Format
NOAA DSDATA Geodetic Control, SDTS Format
NOAA TerrainBase Elevation Data
NOS/GEO Chart Files
NTF Grid/Contour Format
OziExplorer Waypoint (WPT) and Track (PLT) Files
PGM Grayscale Grid Format
Platte River ASCII Digitizer Format
PNG Image with World File
S-57 Digital Chart Files
SEGP1 Seismic Shotpoint Format
SMT KINGDOM Software Planimetric Polygon Format
SRTM (Shuttle Radar Topography Mission)
Surfer Grid (ASCII and Binary) Format Files
SonarWiz5 User Guide Supported Maps

Page 553
Terragen Terrain Format

TerraScan .bin/.ts Format
TIGER/Line Files
USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
USGS Digital Elevation Model, GeoTIFF Format
USGS Digital Elevation Model, Spatial Data Transfer Standard Format
(DEM/SDTS)
USGS Digital Line Graph, Optional Format (DLG-O)
USGS Digital Line Graph, Spatial Data Transfer Standard Format
(DLG/SDTS)
USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), GeoTIFF Format
USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), JPG w/ Native Header
Format
USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), Native USGS Format
USGS Digital Raster Graphic (DRG)
USGS Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)
USGS Land Use and Land Cover Data (LULC)
USGS National Elevation Dataset (NED) - ArcGrid, BIL, Grid Float
Format
VPF (VMAP0, VMAP1, DNC) Files
WAsP .MAP Format
Zmap Plus Grid Files
SonarWiz5 User Guide Supported Maps

Section 8 Sonar Servers
B.1 Sonar Servers – Introduction
B.1.1 What Are SonarWiz Servers?

In order to acquire and process sonar data in real time you must have a
SonarWiz server module installed and running on the computer that is hosting
the SonarWiz application. Note that some SonarWiz servers may be run
remotely – i.e. on a different computer – however this is not the normal mode of
operation.
A SonarWiz server software module is designed specifically for the type of
Sidescan or Sub-bottom sonar being used. Several server modules may be
installed on a single host computer, but only one can be running at any given
time.
The server module performs the following functions:
• communicates with the sonar hardware
• provides a control user interface specifically designed for that hardware
• converts the acoustic data to a standard format
• transfers sonar and other data (navigation) to the main SonarWiz
application.
Each different type of server module will have a user interface that reflects the
characteristics of the hardware that it is controlling. While many of these
characteristics are common to all sonar devices (e.g. the ability to set range),
there are also many differences. This document describes the user interface and
other operational details for each of the different sonar servers supplied by
Chesapeake Technology.
Server modules are typically downloaded from the CTI Support web site. The
following section contains details for downloading and installing servers. Server
Availability
The following servers are currently available from CTI:
Page 556
Server Name Description

Analog Server Generic NI analog server for SSS and SBP
applications. Requires NI-DAQMx driver.
Benthos 16xx Ethernet interface to the 2-channel Benthos
1622 or the 4-channel Benthos 1624 Sidescan
system
Benthos 1625 Ethernet interface to 5-channel Benthos 1625
(4 SSS and 1 SBP)
Benthos Chirp III 2-channel Ethernet interface for Benthos
Chirp III SBP system
CMAX CM2 USB-2 interface to C-MAX CM2 digital
sidescan
EdgeTech 3100 (Xstar) Ethernet interface to EdgeTech single channel
Chirp SBP
EdgeTech 4100 Ethernet interface to EdgeTech 4100 sonar.
Requires “Discover” software
Requires “Discover” software
Supports multi-ping modes and HDM modes
of this sonar. Requires “Discover” software
EdgeTech ACI High speed parallel interface to EdgeTech ACI
board for 272 sonar. Requires NI-PCI-DIO-
32HS high speed parallel board and NI DAQ
legacy driver.
EdgeTech DCI High speed parallel interface to Eject DCI
board for DF-1000 sonar. Requires NI-PCI-
DIO-32HS high speed parallel board and NI
DAQ legacy driver.
GeoAcoustics Digital SSS Ethernet interface for GeoAcoustics DSS
digital sidescan sonar
GeoAcoustics Digital SBP Ethernet interface for GeoAcoustics Digital
Sub-bottom profiler
Imagenex SportScan Serial RS-232 interface to Imagenex SportScan
sonar.
Imagenex Yellowfin Ethernet interface to Imagenex tri-frequency
sidescan sonar.
Klein 3000 Ethernet interface to Klein 3000 dual
frequency sidescan sonar.
Klein 3900 Ethernet interface to Klein 3900 Search &
Recovery Sidescan sonar
Klein 5000 Ethernet interface to Klein 5000 multibeam
focussed sidescan sonar.
Knudsen SSS Ethernet interface to Knudsen SSS
Knudsen SBP Ethernet interface to Knudsen SBP
Marine Sonics Sidescan Ethernet interface to MSTL sidescan sonar.
Sonar Requires MSTL SeaScan PC software.
SonarWiz5 User Guide Sonar Servers

Page 557
Marine Sonics HDS Ethernet interface to MSTL HDS sidescan

Sidescan Sonar sonar.
Odom CVM SSS Interface to Odom CVM sidescan sonar
Odom CVM SBP 2-channel interface to Odom CVM sub-
bottom system.
Remote XTF Server Monitor XTF files created by another program
and records in SonarWiz forma
SonarBeam USB interface to SonarBeam S-150 sonar.
SyQwest SBP Ethernet interface to SyQwest StrataBox
Tritech Starfish Interface to the Tritech Starfish sidescan sonar
B.1.2 Obtaining SonarWiz Servers

The original SonarWiz installation CD contains all servers that were ordered as
part of the original system purchase. These servers will automatically be installed
when you install the main SonarWiz application. For additional instructions,
please refer to the documentation contained on the CD.
Additional servers and updates may be downloaded from the Chesapeake
Technology, Inc. support web site (http://www.chestech-support.com) by
clicking on the link under the Downloads section labeled SonarWiz Servers. (Figure
472). Please note that a current Extended Maintenance Agreement (EMA) is
required to access this section of the web site. Also note that a license is required
for each type of server. This license is embedded in the software license key
(commonly called a “dongle”) that must be connected to the computer in order
for SonarWiz to run. Please contact CTI if you wish to license a server that is not
currently contained in your key.

Page 558
Figure 472: Downloading SonarWiz Servers

Page 559
B.1.3 Installing a Server

After downloading the zip file containing a SonarWiz server, unzip the entire
contents of the zip file into this folder:
c:\Program Files\Chesapeake Technology, Inc\SonarWizMAP\Servers
The zip files for some servers will include DLLs and other support files. It is
important that ALL of the files are extracted into the folder as shown in Figure
473
Figure 473: Installing SonarWiz server files
B.1.4 Launching a Sonar Server

Launching a local server or connecting to a remote server are both done from
within SonarWizMAP.

Page 560
To do this, select File->Configure Sonar Interface from the main menu. The
dialog shown in Figure 474 will be displayed.
Figure 474: SonarWiz Server Configuration dialog
B.1.5 Running a Local Server

1. Invoke the server configuration dialog (File->Configure Sonar Interface).
2. A list of server modules installed on the local machine will be displayed in the
“Sidescan” and “Subbottom” fields.
3. Highlight the server that you wish to start and press the Start/Configure button.
If the server is not currently running, it will be started and it's configuration
dialog will be displayed. If the server is already running, it's configuration
dialog will be brought to the foreground..
4. Press OK to dismiss the dialog.
5. Use the server's configuration dialog to set or change any recording parameters.

Page 561
B.1.6 Connecting to a Remote Server

In order to connect to a remote server, that server must be manually started on
the remote PC. When this has been done, do the following from within
SonarWizMAP:
1. Invoke the server configuration dialog (File->Configure Sonar Interface).
2. A entry for the remote server should be found in the list of remote servers that
are currently running on the LAN.
3. Highlight the remote server that you wish to connect to, press the Connect
button and then the OK button.

Page 562
B.2 Teledyne Benthos 16xxx Server - General

The SonarWiz 16xx Server is intended for either the Teledyne Benthos SIS-1622
Single Frequency or SIS-1624 Dual Frequency side scan sonars.
Figure 475: Benthos 16xx Server
B.2.1 Server IP Address

This is the Ethernet address of the CL-160 Communications Link of 16xx
sidescan sonar. The CL-160 Communications Link is the main surface
component of the
system. It provides the high voltage DC power for the tow vehicle, and it
serves as the high-speed communications link between the tow vehicle and
the client computer running SonarWiz.
The 16xx sonars have an IP address of 192.168.0.17 whereas the PC running

SonarWiz must have:
● IP address: 192.168.0.22
● Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
If connecting the CL-160 to a client computer, connect a network

crossover cable to the Ethernet connector on the CL-160 and to the
network connector on the client computer.
If connecting the CL-160 to a LAN, connect a network patch cable to the

Ethernet connector on the CL-160 and to the hub or router.

Page 563
B.2.2 TCP Port

The SIS CL-160 transmits data on TCP port 5009.
B.2.3 LED's
There are two LED style controls that indicate the connections state of the
interface software to both the 16xx sonar and the SonarWiz client software. A
green color indicates the connection is active. Red indicates that there is no
connection.
B.2.4 Connect / Disconnect Button

The Connect button starts the communication between the SonarWiz interface
software and the 16xx Sonar. A valid connection is indicated by the 16xx
Connection LED changing from red to green. If the 16xx Connection LED
stays red, check the Ethernet cables on the SonarWiz PC and the CL-160 and
verify IP Address and TCP Port settings are correct.
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the 16xx Sonar.
B.2.5 Log Diagnostic Data

This is a diagnostic function that should only be used when instructed
by a CTI engineer. The Log Diagnostic Data check box causes the server to
record all raw data Ethernet packets received from the 16xx sonar.
B.2.6 Control Parameters
B.2.6.1 Channels
Selection of either High or Low frequency channels is made in this drop down
box for either 16xx Sonar. Simultaneous HF and LF may be selected for the
1624.
B.2.6.2 Record Length

Drop down list for selection of sonar range setting.
B.2.6.3 Sound Velocity

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the 16xx sonar in
the range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to calculate the
slant range of the returning acoustic pulse.
This value is 1500 m/s by default but should be corrected if the local speed of
sound is know for the best possible results.
B.2.6.4 Samples
Users may choose to:

Page 564
● Record the 16xx data using an 8-bit range i.e. decimating the raw data range
received from the 16xx sonar; or
● Record the 16xx data using the full 16-bit range.
For most applications 8-bit recording should suffice however if the user is
performing intense post-processing analysis then a 16-bit format should be
chosen.
B.2.6.5 LF/HF Transmit Enabled

Check boxes to enable transmission of either LF of HF signals.
B.2.6.6 Gains
Gains for all 4 channels may be selected from the drop down menus according
to the prevailing water column and bottom conditions.
B.2.6.7 Trigger Mode

The CL-160 may be connected to an external trigger source used to synchronize
multiple sonars thus reducing interference. If an external trigger source is
connected to the CL-160 select External otherwise use Internal.
B.2.6.8 Pulse Mode

“In conventional CW side scan sonar systems, higher frequency
content is invariably associated with an increase in resolution.
However, the higher frequencies are also associated with a
decrease in range. Chirp side scan sonar reduces this trade-off by
using digitally produced linear FM acoustic transmissions and
matched filter processing to provide high resolution sonar
imagery at long ranges. In short range applications, however,
high resolution imagery can still be obtained using CW side scan
sonar...”
Teledyne Benthos 1600 Series Manual
The 16xx sonars are capable of either Chirp or Continuous Wave
transmissions. Chirp side scan sonar images are normally used to achieve high
resolution imagery over longer ranges whereas CW can be used to acquire high
resolution images over short ranges.
The Chirp Pattern Test sends a test pattern to the receiver in order to test the
sonar and normally used used for diagnostics under the guidance of a Teledyne-
Benthos engineer.
B.2.6.9 Send ASCII Command

Manual commands to configure the 16xx sonar may be sent via ASCII text
string. This is an advanced user function and requires a complete understanding
of the consequences. Documentation for these commands is available from
Teledyne-Benthos.

Page 565
B.2.7 Status Windows

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the 16xx
including:
● Ping: Current Ping Number
● Range: Sonar Range setting
● Time Period: Time between pings
○ N.B. 1/(Time Period) = Ping Rate in Hz
● Samples: Number of range samples in current ping
● Heading: Towbody compass heading
● Pitch: Towbody Pitch
● Roll: Towbody Roll
● Temperature: Water temperature at towbody (if fitted)
● Pressure: Ambient water pressure at towbody (if fitted)
● Magnetic Field: Magnetometer reading (if fitted)
● System Type: 1622 or 1624
● LPRG: Low Frequency Port Receive Gain
● LSRG: Low Frequency Starboard Receive Gain
● HPRG: High Frequency Port Receive Gain
● HSRG: High Frequency Starboard Receive Gain
● Range: This is the range that is reported in the telemetry data.
● Telemetry: The telemetry area is the parsed data from 162x that
shows the "status data" sent at 1Hz. It is primarily used to verify
that the ASCII commands that have been sent to the sonar have
been received and acknowledged.
B.2.8 Quit
Terminate the SonarWiz 16xx server.
B.2.9 System Menu Controls

The system menu shown below offers options to keep the interface program on
top of all other windows as well as standard Windows menu options. Note that
only the Quit button on the interface program will actually terminate the
software. This feature is to prevent accidentally closing the software.

Page 566
Figure 476: 16xx System Menu Settings
The Reset Stats menu selection is used for internal Chesapeake diagnostics
only and has no effect on the sonar interface.
The About box menu selection is useful for reading the version number of the
interface software and the date that it was last built. The Advanced Settings
dialog is described below.
B.2.10 Advanced Settings

The Advanced Settings dialog includes control settings that specify the level of
diagnostic information recorded by the interface. A value of zero will only record
error messages while a value of 9 will report all diagnostic messages.
Typically, these messages are sent to a log file. In a diagnostic situation, a
Chesapeake support engineer may also ask you to run the SWizMon diagnostic
monitoring application where messages may be viewed in real-time. The TCP/IP
Base Port is where the real-time diagnostic messages are sent and viewed by the
SWizMon software. Please do not change the TCP/IP Base Port address unless
instructed to do so by a Chesapeake support engineer.
Figure 477: Advanced Settings

Page 567
B.3 Benthos 1625 Server
Figure 478: Benthos 1625 Server
B.3.1 General
The SonarWiz 1625 Server is intended for either the Teledyne Benthos SIS-1625
Dual Frequency side scan sonar with combined Chirp III subbottom profiler.
B.3.2 Server IP Address

This is the Ethernet address of the CL-164 Communications Link of 1625 sonar.
The CL-164 Communications Link is the main surface component of the
system. It provides the high voltage DC power for the tow vehicle, and it
serves as the high-speed communications link between the tow vehicle and
the client computer running SonarWiz.
The 1625 sonar has an IP address of 192.168.0.24 whereas the PC running

SonarWiz must have:
● IP address: 192.168.0.22
● Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
If connecting the CL-164 to a client computer, connect a network

crossover cable to the Ethernet connector on the CL-164 and to the
network connector on the client computer.
If connecting the CL-164 to a LAN, connect a network patch cable to the

Page 568
Ethernet connector on the CL-164 and to the hub or router.
B.3.3 TCP Port

The CL-164 transmits data on TCP port 5009.

software and the 1625 Sonar. A valid connection is indicated by the 1625
Connection LED changing from red to green. If the 1625 Connection LED
stays red, check the Ethernet cables on the SonarWiz PC and the CL-164 and
verify IP Address and TCP Port settings are correct.
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the 1625 Sonar.
B.3.5 LED's
interface software to both the 1625 sonar and the SonarWiz client software. A
connection.
B.3.6 Control Parameters

Each Frequency (LF & HF sidescan and SBP) has a number of settings that
appear in a tabular format in the 1625 Server. The functionality of each setting is
identical for each frequency.
B.3.6.1 Rcvr Gain

A drop down list of the desired receive gain setting. A higher number means a
more sensitive receiver.
B.3.6.2 Transmit Power

Drop down list for selection of sonar transmit power settings.
B.3.6.3 Pulse Length

Drop down list for selection of sonar transmit pulse lengths.
Hint: After you have selected the desired range select the lowest Pulse Length
that still allows the the sonar to illuminate the entire range.

Page 569
B.3.6.4 Pulse Type

“In conventional CW side scan sonar systems, higher frequency
content is invariably associated with an increase in resolution.
However, the higher frequencies are also associated with a
decrease in range. Chirp side scan sonar reduces this trade-off by
using digitally produced linear FM acoustic transmissions and
matched filter processing to provide high resolution sonar
imagery at long ranges. In short range applications, however,
high resolution imagery can still be obtained using CW side scan
sonar...”
Teledyne Benthos 1600 Series Manual
The 16xx sonars are capable of either Chirp or Continuous Wave
transmissions. Chirp side scan sonar images are normally used to achieve high
resolution imagery over longer ranges whereas CW can be used to acquire high
resolution images over short ranges.
sonar.
B.3.6.5 Power On/Off

Check boxes to enable transmission of acoustic signals.
B.3.6.6 Rectification
This converts all A/D values received from the sonar to positive vales
(Unipolar) rather than both positive and negative (Bipolar).
N.B. This setting directly affects the recorded data and the SonarWiz Project
Polarity Settings must be properly configured. See Chapter Error: Reference
source not found on page Error: Reference source not found for more
information.
B.3.6.7 Rec Length

Sidescan Only: Drop down list for selection of sidescan sonar range setting.
B.3.6.8 Sound Vel

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the 16xx sonar in
the range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to calculate the
slant range of the returning acoustic pulse.
B.3.6.9 Aux Sensors

Used to display raw information from any connected auxiliary sensors such as a
magnetometer.

Page 570
B.3.6.10 Mag UDP Port

UDP Port of the Magnetometer if it is fitted on the 1625.
B.3.6.11 Mag Data

ASCII data from magnetometer (if fitted).
N.B. Magnetometer data will be passed through to SWM and stored in the XTF
file.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the 16xx
including:
● Telemetry: The telemetry area is the parsed data from 162x that
shows the "status data" sent at 1Hz. It is primarily used to verify
that the ASCII commands that have been sent to the sonar have
been received and acknowledged.
B.3.8 Trigger Mode

The CL-160 may be connected to an external trigger source used to synchronize
multiple sonars thus reducing interference. If an external trigger source is
connected to the CL-160 select External otherwise use Internal.
B.3.9 Chirp Pattern Test

sonar.
B.3.10 Send ASCII Command

Manual commands to configure the 16xx sonar may be sent via ASCII text
string. This is an advanced user function and requires a complete understanding
of the consequences. Documentation for these commands is available from
Teledyne-Benthos.
B.3.11 Approx Latitude

Used for pressure to depth conversion based on the gravitational effects at
different latitudes using the Saunders and Fofonoff method.

Page 571
B.3.12 Quit
Terminate the SonarWiz 1625 server.

Figure 479: 16xx System Menu Settings


Page 572

Page 573
B.4 Benthos CHIRP III Server

The Benthos Chirp III Sonar Interface provides the real-time data interface
services for working with the Benthos Chirp III sub-bottom profiler (Figure
481). The interface can be run on any Windows 2000, XP or later system and
provides command, control and data to and from the Chirp III firmware.
Figure 481: Benthos CHIRP III Server

Page 574
B.4.1 TCP/IP Address of Chirp III Firmware

The IP address of the Chirp III system is 192.168.0.24. This address cannot be
changed. The IP address of SonarWiz PC must be in the must be 192.168.0.2-
192.168.0.255 to communicate with the Benthos Chirp III software. Benthos
recommends setting the SonarWiz PC IP address to 192.168.0.25. The TCP port
address should be set to 5009 unless otherwise noted by the manufacturer.
B.4.2 Connect/Disconnect Button

The Connect button starts the communication between the interface SonarWiz
software and the Benthos Chirp III Firmware. A valid connection is indicated by
the Chirp III LED changing from red to green. If the Chirp III LED stays red,
check the Ethernet cable connecting the SonarWiz PC to the Benthos firmware.
Once connected, the button label changes from “Connect” to “Disconnect”.
B.4.3 Connection Status LED’s

interface software to both the Benthos Chirp III firmware and the SonarWiz
client software. A green color indicates the connection is active. Red indicates
that there is no connection.
B.4.4 Sonar Rep Rate

This drop list sets the Chirp III ping rate in milliseconds.
B.4.5 Trigger Source Selector

This control selects the trigger source applied to the Benthos firmware. Please
refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for details.
B.4.6 Chirp Pattern Test

This check box enables a diagnostic mode to verify the chirp pulse generation in
the firmware. Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for details.
B.4.7 LF/HF Enable

This control enables the low frequency and high frequency transducer sections in
the Chirp III firmware. Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for
details.
B.4.8 LF/HF Signal Rectification

This control enables rectification of the low frequency and high frequency signals
in firmware. Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for details.
B.4.9 Pulse Type Selector

This control selects between either a chirp or continuous wave transmit pulse.
Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for details.

Page 575
B.4.10 Transmit Pulse Power

This control sets the transmit power independently for the low and high
frequency transmitters. Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for
details.
B.4.11 Receiver Gain

This control sets the receiver gain in 3dB steps for both the low frequency and
high frequency receivers. Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for
details.
B.4.12 Transmit Pulse Length

This control sets the transmit pulse length of the outgoing pulse in the firmware.
Please refer to Benthos Chirp III User’s manual for details.
B.4.13 Status of Current Ping

This is a read-only status display of the most recent ping received from the
Benthos firmware. The information displayed is the current ping number, range
in meters, time period of ping in seconds, number of samples for each channel
and altitude in meters if altimeter available.
B.4.14 Amplitude Statistics for Current Ping

The interface software computes the minimum, average and maximum amplitude
statistics for each ping as it is received. The Chirp III signal is a signed 16 bit
digitizer with a full scale range of -32768 to +32767.
B.4.15 Reflectivity
Used to compute the reflectivity coefficient of the seafloor surface. Reflectivity
can be used to estimate the bottom hardness. This value is sent to SonarWiz and
can be color coded and displayed as a snails trail following the ships track.
Selecting the Reflectivity button opens the settings dialog for the reflectivity
engine. The default values for the Benthos Chirp III are shown below:

Page 576
Figure 482: Benthos Reflectivity Settings
B.4.16 PreAmp Gain

The PreAmp Gain control controls the amount of gain applied to the incoming
signal on the LPT port for the two CHIRP III Channels. See your Benthos
Chirp III documentation for further clarification.
Figure 483: Chirp III PreAmp

Gain Settings

Page 577

Figure 484: Benthos CHIRP III Menu

Settings
only and has no effect on the sonar interface. The About box menu selection is
useful for reading the version number of the interface software and the date that
it was last built. The Advanced Settings dialog is described below.


Page 578

Page 579
B.5 C-Max CM2 USB Server

The CMax CM2 USB towfish is controlled via the CMax USB server (Figure
486).
Figure 486: CMax USB Server
B.5.1 Start Towfish

Starts the CMax towfish and connects to it.
B.5.2 Stop Towfish

Stops the CMax towfish.
B.5.3 Set Range/Frequency

Depending on the specific model the the following frequencies and ranges may
be available (See Figure 487):
Acoustic frequencies
● 100kHz – LF
● 325kHz – HF
● 780kHz – EF
Ranges (port and starboard)
● 12.5m – EF
● 25m – EF/ HF
● 50m – HF
● 75m – HF
● 100m – HF/LF
● 150m – HF/LF
● 200m – LF
● 300m – LF
● 400m – LF

Page 580
● 500m –LF; 25m, 50m, 75m,100m,150m –HF; 12.5m, 25m -EF
Figure 487: CMAX Range/Frequency

Settings (Simulation Mode)
B.5.4 Simulation Mode

Simulation mode (shown in Figure 486) starts the server and “connects” to a
simulated CMax sonar. The imagery display is a sonar test pattern and no
position is generated.
B.5.5 Mute Towfish

Mute allows the towfish to run as normal but with no acoustic transmissions.
This is useful for diagnostic purposes where an echo sounder or other acoustic
source may be interfering with the image. When muted, indicated altitude is zero.
B.5.6 Hold Gain

Gain Hold allow the automatic gain to be inhibited, fixing the gain profile as it
was when Gain Hold was selected.
Normally the only reason to disable the automatic gain is if the image of a certain
target, such as a wreck, needs to be observed without the gain slowly changing.
If the gain profile is held whilst the target is in view, the reflectivity of any part of
the target can be directly compared. Also if the target has a significant dark area,
holding the gain constant avoids the “gain shadow” as the scan moves back on
to the relatively light background again.
Caution: If the gain profile is held constant this automatically disables the
towfish from measuring its altitude. The reason for this is that changes in bottom
reflectivity together with the fixed gain may mean that the altimeter would have
difficulty in bottom-tracking. However the altitude can still be adjusted by the
operator using the bottom-tracking, up and down controls. Also note that the

Page 581
correction for the shape of the acoustic beams may be wrong if the altitude
changes whilst the gain is held.
When Gain Hold is in the On state the overall gain profile can be adjusted up or
down, in 1dB steps
B.5.7 Shallow Mode

Shallow mode is intended for use only in very shallow water where the user
needs to use the towfish at less than the normal altitude limit of 1.4m. In shallow
mode the gain profile is started at the towfish position itself instead of at the first
bottom echo and the indicated altitude is zero.
B.5.8 Offset Altitude

The CM2 Sonar Transceiver (STR) can automatically calculate the altitude of the
towfish. To use this automated function the Offset Altitude function should be
used in the following manner:
Either open the Real Time Monitor Window (Map>Real-time Monitor or
Ctrl+W) or have the waterfall display in the Main Window (Alt+S to switch
the Map Window).
Open the Real-time Bottom Tracker (View>Real-time Bottom Tracker
or right click on the waterfall and select Real-time Bottom Tracker)and
ensure that the following settings are enabled/disabled as indicated below:
● Enable Auto-tracker OFF
● Use Telemetered Altitude ON
● Trace Detected Bottom ON
Set the display to show the water column (i.e. not slant-range-corrected) then
lower the towfish to an altitude in the range 5-15m initially. The indicated
altitude (not necessarily the true altitude at this stage) will be displayed by the
SonarWiz in the Navigation Bar and the Altitude trace line in the waterfall
display.
Check that the altitude trace line is locked on the initial bottom echo, not on the
surface echo, nor is left in a “neutral” position.
If the altitude trace initially fails to lock on to the bottom correctly use the
Offset Altitude buttons to push it into lock.

interface software to both the CM2 and the SonarWiz client software. A green
color indicates the connection is active. Red indicates that there is no
connection.

Page 582
B.5.10 Do Not Send Packets

Checking this box leaves the sonar running but data will not be sent SonarWiz.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the CMax
including:
● Altitude: Altitude as determined by the TPU
● Frequency: Sonar frequency
● Minimum: Minimum sampled value in current ping
● Maximum: Maximum sampled value in current ping
● Average: Average sampled value in current ping

Figure 488: CMax System Menu Settings

Page 583


Page 584
B.6 EdgeTech ACI Server
Figure 490: EdgeTech ACI Server
B.6.1 General
The EdgeTech ACI server is designed to control the 272 analog sidescan sonar.
Prior to operating the 272 SSS a National Instruments PCI-6533, formerly
known as the PCI-DIO32HS, high speed parallel IO board must be installed
using the National Instruments NI-DAQ Traditional driver.
Contact Chesapeake Technology, Inc for more details on acquiring and installing
this card.
B.6.2 Frequency:
User selectable radio button as 100 kHz or 500 kHz.
B.6.3 Range:
The achieved range of the sonar at the selected frequency
B.6.4 Baseline Gain:

User selectable hardware gain setting for the sonar

Page 585
B.6.5 Sound Velocity:

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the sonar in the
range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to calculate the slant
range of the returning acoustic pulse.

Top Window: Prior to connect this area states “Static”. After a connection is
made and pinging is enabled the status window shows the statistics of the
current configuration.
Serial Port: Status of the selected ACI serial port used for connection to the
sonar.
Sonar Data: Status of incoming data
Network Status:
B.6.7 ACI Serial Port

The serial port to be used for connection to the National Instruments PCI card.
B.6.8 Port / Stbd

Hardware gains added to the Baseline Gain but adjustable per channel
B.6.9 Enable Test Signal on ACI

Sends a test signal through the ACI in order to test the SonarWiz response
B.6.10 Operating Mode

Simulate
Hardware Test
Normal Operation: Required to operate the sonar for data collection
B.6.11 Software Gain

Gains applied in the National Instruments PCI card.
B.6.12 Telemetry
Sonar telemetry received

Page 586
B.6.13 Send data as...

The sonar captures its data using 12-bit values (i.e. 0-4096) rather than the
standard 8-bit range (0-256).
● Record the data using an 8-bit range i.e. decimating the raw data range
received from the sonar; or
● Record the data using the default 12-bit range but in a 16 bit word i.e. first 4
bits are not used; or
● Record the data using a full 16-bit range i.e. stretching the raw data range
received from the sonar from 12 to 16 bits.
chosen.

Page 587
B.7 EdgeTech DF1000 Server
Figure 491: EdgeTech DF-1000 Server
B.7.1 General
The EdgeTech DF-1000 server is designed to control the EdgeTech DF-1000
analog sidescan sonar.
Prior to operating the DF-1000 a National Instruments PCI-6533, formerly
known as the PCI-DIO32HS, high speed parallel IO board must be installed
using the National Instruments NI-DAQ Traditional driver.
Contact Chesapeake Technology, Inc for more details on acquiring and installing
this card.
B.7.2 Range:
A drop down list of available operating ranges
B.7.3 Hardware Gain:

User selectable hardware gain setting for the sonar
B.7.4 User Gain:

User entered gain to augment the base hardware gain selected above

Page 588

Simulate:
Normal Operation: Required to operate the sonar for data collection
B.7.6 Send data as...

The sonar captures its data using 12-bit values (i.e. 0-4096) rather than the
● Record the data using an 8-bit range i.e. decimating the raw data range
received from the sonar; or
● Record the data using the default 12-bit range but in a 16 bit word i.e. first 4
bits are not used; or
● Record the data using a full 16-bit range i.e. stretching the raw data range
received from the sonar from 12 to 16 bits.
chosen.

Top Window: Prior to connect this area states “Static”. After a connection is
made and pinging is enabled the status window shows the statistics of the
current configuration.
DCI Serial Port: Status of the selected ACI serial port used for connection to
the sonar.
DCI Parallel Sonar: Status of incoming data
Network Status:
B.7.2 Sonar Information

Display the relevant information associated with the current ping. These data are
a quick indicator of sonar status and would normally be used if troubleshooting
were required.
B.7.3 DCI Serial Port

The serial port to be used for connection to the National Instruments PCI card.
B.7.4 Telemetry
Sonar telemetry received

Page 589
B.8 EdgeTech 3xxx SBP Server
Figure 492: EdgeTech 3200-XS Server
B.8.1 General
The SonarWiz EdgeTech 3xxx SBP server is compatible with all EdgeTech 3xxx
series sub-bottom profilers including the 3100-P, 3200-XS and 3300-HM.
EdgeTech controlling software is not required between the SonarWiz server and
the sub-bottom profile as the server can take full control of the sonar.
B.8.2 3xxx SBP IP Address

This is the IP Address of the SBP. See your EdgeTech SBP user manual for
specific information on IP Address.
Typically:
● 3100-P is 192.0.10.100
● 3200-XS is 192.0.10.100
● 3300-HM is 192.0.10.100
B.8.3 IP Port
The port on which the SBP is transmitting its data and receiving commands. See
EdgeTech SBP user manual for specific information on IP Port.
Typically:
● 3100-P is 1700

Page 590
● 3200-XS is 1700
● 3300-HM is 1700
B.8.4 Control and Data Status Lights

Displays green “lights” when Control is established and Data are being received.
B.8.5 Trigger (ms)

User defined Trigger Value in milliseconds
B.8.6 Record Length

User defined record length in milliseconds

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the SBP Unit
including:
● ADC Hz: This is the sampling frequency (in Hz) at which the SBP is
digitizing the signal
● Window: The amount of data the SBP is going to collect for a given
ping cycle given the SonarWiz server request for a given ping rate and
record length.
● Ping: The current ping number
● Time Period (s): Time between pings
● Fish Depth: Sensor Depth of the SBP
B.8.8 Ping Statistics

The Ping Statistics display backscatter (amplitude) information received from
the SBP including:
B.8.9 Telemetry
The readout from the Roll, Pitch and Heading sensors on the SBP.

Page 591
B.8.10 Outgoing Pulse Power

A Slider Bar that adjusts the power of the transmission pulse.
B.8.11 Pulse List

When a connection is made to the EdgeTech system, the server requests a list of
available acoustic pulses. These pulses define the chirp range and bandwidth on
the SBP.
B.8.12 Sound Velocity

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the SBP in the
B.8.13 Log Raw Diagnostic Data & Debug

Used for troubleshooting when requested by a CTI or EdgeTech engineer.
B.8.14 Logging Format

● Record the SBP data using an 16-bit Integer range i.e. decimating the raw
data range received from the SBP but reducing storage space requirements;
or
● Record the SBP data using the full 32-bit floating point range for better
resolution but increased data storage capacity requirements..
B.8.15 JSF Scalar

The JSF amplitude scalar is used to scale the envelope, real or imaginary number
into a useful 16-bit integer display range.
Refer to the sonar manufacturer's documentation for a full explanation on JSF
format.
B.8.16 Quit
Terminates the Server Interface.
B.8.17 Enable Pinging

Starts SBP active transmissions.

Page 592
B.8.18 SonarWiz Connection Light

Displays green when the main SonarWiz program is connected to this server and
red when it is not.
B.8.19 System Menu

The system menu shown in Figure 493 offers options to keep the interface
program on top of all other windows as well as standard Windows menu
options. Note that only the Quit button on the interface program will actually
terminate the software. This feature is to prevent accidentally closing the
software.
interface software and the date that it was last built.
The Advanced Settings dialog is described in the next section below.
Figure 493: EdgeTech SBP Server

System Menu

The Advanced Settings dialog (Figure 493) includes control settings that
specify the level of diagnostic information recorded by the interface. A value of
zero will only record error messages while a value of 9 will report all diagnostic
messages.

Page 593
Figure 494: Advanced Settings Dialog

Page 594
B.9 EdgeTech 4100 Server

The EdgeTech 4100 Server can be used to control the 4100 sonar or can be run
in slave mode. Regardless of the mode chosen, EdgeTech's “Discover”
software must be running in order for the server to interpret the data
stream correctly.
Figure 495: EdgeTech 4100 Server
B.9.1 Start-up Procedure

1. Configure the SonarWiz PC for the 4100 in the same manner as any other sidescan
sonar. See Chapter 4.2 on page 166 for details on setting up the SonarWiz PC .
2. Set-up the 4200 sidescan sonar as prescribed by EdgeTech.
a) If using a 4200 Top Side Processor (Figure 496), either a standard Ethernet
cable to your system's Ethernet Hub/Router or a cross-over Ethernet cable
directly to the SonarWiz PC may be used.

Page 595
Figure 496: EdgeTech

4100 Topside Processor
b) If using a 4100P (Figure 497), normally a cross-over Ethernet cable to the PC

where EdgeTech's “Discover” software will be running is used.
Figure 497: EdgeTech

4100P Processor
3. Start the 4100 as prescribed by the EdgeTech manual.
4. If using a 4100P, run the “Discover” software on the appropriate PC. The link
between “Discover” and the 4100 should be automatic. If no connection is seen,
refer to the EdgeTech manual.
5. Start SonarWiz on your PC.
6. Start the SonarWiz EdgeTech 4100 server.
7. The 4100 IP Address in Figure 495 above is entered as the IP Address of the PC
running the “Discover” software.
a) If the SonarWiz PC is the PC running “Discover” then the IP address may be

the PC loopback address (127.0.0.1) or the specific address of the PC itself.
In order to determine a PC's IP address:

1. Click “Start”
2. Select “Run”
3. Type “cmd”
4. Click “OK”
5. Type “ipconfig” and press “Enter”

Page 596
6. The IP Address of the PC will be displayed.
b) If the PC running “Discover” is not the SonarWiz PC then determine the

“Discover” PC's IP address (See above) and enter this value in the Server 4100
IP Address box. If using the 4100 Top Side Processor the IP address should
be 192.0.10.100
8. The IP Port should always be 1900 unless a custom configuration exists on the
4100.
B.9.2 4100 IP Address / IP Port

See previous section
B.9.3 Connect
Connects the SonarWiz 4100 Server to the “Discover” software.
B.9.4 Slave Mode

When checked this disables the SonarWiz 4100 server from controlling sonar
power or range.
B.9.5 Status Lights

Displays green “lights” when Server Control is established and Data are being
received.
B.9.6 Sonar Power/Frequency

When not in Slave Mode, these radio buttons allow the user to select the active
frequency. See the EdgeTech manual for full details.
B.9.7 Range
When not in Slave Mode, the preset ranges of the 4100 are selectable in this
drop-down list.
B.9.8 Analog Gain Level

The Gain Levels on each transducer may be set in order to optimize the
imagery. Increasing the gain increases the overall brightness of the imagery and
decreasing the gain decreases the overall brightness of the imagery.

If known, the actual Sound Velocity should be entered here to aid in range
versus time calculations.

Page 597

Display the relevant information associated with the current ping. These data are
a quick indicator of sonar status and would normally be used if troubleshooting
were required.
B.9.11 Scalars
The scalar values of the backscatter calculated by the 4100 are required to
indicate to the SonarWiz 4100 server what internal gain setting to use for each
channel. The scalar values are dependent upon a multitude of variables and may
change depending on the environmental conditions.
Typically the user will literally guess on a scalar value and move up or down until
the imagery is seen on the SonarWiz waterfall display. Once that occurs the user
will then enter smaller increments until a waterfall image shows good contrast.
The scalar values, once determined, should not change significantly for a
particular area of operation.
B.9.12 Downsample
The 4100 sonar is a 16 bit sonar and collects 4096 samples per channel. If disk
space on the SonarWiz PC is limited or high-resolution data is not necessarily
required then downsampling may be selected.
B.9.13 Record Diagnostic Data

Used for troubleshooting when requested by a CTI engineer.
B.9.14 Quit
B.9.15 Enable Pinging

When not in Slave Mode, this button starts and stops the 4100 transmissions.
B.9.16 SonarWiz Connection

A green “light” is displayed when the SonarWiz 4100 server and SonarWiz are
linked.
B.9.17System Menu Commands


Page 598
Figure 498: EdgeTech System Menu

Settings


Page 599

Page 600

The EdgeTech 4125 USB Sonar Interface provides the real-time data interface
services for working with the EdgeTech 4125 sidescan sonar. The interface can
be run on any Windows 2000, XP, Vista or later system and provides command,
control and data to and from the 4125 firmware.
B.10.1 4125 COM Port

The 4125 interface uses a virtual COM port driver (VCP) to communicate with
the USB connector attached to the EdgeTech 4125 device. The EdgeTech
Discover software is not required for this interface. The Virtual COM Port
driver must be installed before this SonarWiz server can communicate with the
4125 device. Typically, the Virtual Serial Port driver will be installed by the
SonarWiz installation program.

software and the EdgeTech 4125 sonar. A valid connection is indicated by the
4125 Connection Status LED changing from red to green. If the EdgeTech 4125
Connection Status LED stays red, check the USB cable connecting the
SonarWiz PC to the Eject firmware and verify that the COM port selected is the
actual COM port used by the VCP driver.

Page 601
Figure 501: Windows Device Manager
You may verify the port used by the VCP driver by looking under the Device
Manager settings as highlighted in the image above. Once connected, the button
label changes from “Connect” to “Disconnect”.

interface software to both the EdgeTech firmware and the SonarWiz client
software. A green color indicates the connection is active. Red indicates that
there is no connection.
B.10.4 Sonar Control

Range Selection
This drop list sets the sonar range in meters. Note that the ranges available
at the high frequency setting are shorter in duration than the lower
frequency.
TVG
This drop list provides 3 settings for the firmware applied Time Varying
Gain function. This setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz
as it is applied down in the hardware. For more information about the
firmware TVG please see the EdgeTech 4125 User Guide.
Gain
This drop list sets the analog receiver gain settings to one of 4 different
options. This setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is

Page 602
applied in the hardware. For more information about the firmware analog
please see the EdgeTech 4125 User Guide.
Pulse Length
User selectable from 5 to 100 μSec in 5 μSec steps.

Hint: After you have selected the desired range select the lowest Pulse
Length that still allows the the sonar to illuminate the entire range.
Transmit Frequency
These radio buttons select the transmitted sonar pulse frequency.

Depending on which particular 4125 sonar transducers are fitted the user
may select two of the following frequencies, (one at a time): 100 kHz, 400
kHz, 900kHz or 1250 kHz option. To change the frequency during normal
operation, you must first disconnect from the sonar, reset the desired
transmit frequency and then reconnect again.
Test Mode
See the EdgeTech 4125 User Guide.

Figure 502: EdgeTech Menu Settings

Page 603


Page 604

The EdgeTech 4200 Server can be used to control the 4200 sonar or can be run
in slave mode.
● Master Controller: The Server connects directly to the sonar without
EdgeTech's Discover software required to be running.
● Slave Mode: EdgeTech's “Discover” software running in order for the
server to interpret the data stream correctly.
B.11.1 Master Controller: Start-up Procedure


Page 605
Figure 505: 4200 Topside Processor
b) If using a 701-DL(Figure 506), normally a cross-over Ethernet cable to the

SonarWiz PC is used.
Figure 506: 701-DL Processor
6. Ensure the Slave Mode check-box is not checked.
7. The 4200 IP Address is the IP address of the 4200 towfish itself. The factory
default for the 4200 towfish IP address should be 192.9.0.101
4200.
B.11.2 Slave Mode: Start-up Procedure

b) If using a 701-DL(Figure 506), normally a cross-over Ethernet cable to the PC

where EdgeTech's “Discover” software will be running is used.

Page 606
4. If using a 701-DL, run the “Discover” software on the appropriate PC. The link
between “Discover” and the 4200 should be automatic. If no connection is seen,
refer to the EdgeTech manual.
7. Set the Using Discover check-box as checked.
8. The 4200 IP Address is the IP address of the Computer running the Discover
software.
a) If the SonarWiz PC is the PC running “Discover” then the IP address may be

the PC loopback address (127.0.0.1) or the specific address of the PC itself.
In order to determine a PC's IP address:

1. Click “Start”
2. Select “Run”
3. Type “cmd”
4. Click “OK”
5. Type “ipconfig” and press “Enter”
6. The IP Address of the PC will be displayed.
b) If the PC running “Discover” is not the SonarWiz PC then determine the

“Discover” PC's IP address (See above) and enter this value in the Server 4200
IP Address box. If using the 4200 Top Side Processor the IP address should
be 192.9.0.100
4200.
B.11.3 4200 IP Address / IP Port

See previous section
B.11.4 Connect
Connects the SonarWiz 4200 Server to the “Discover” software.
B.11.5 Status Lights

Displays green “lights” when Server Control is established, data are being
received and SonarWiz is connected to the server.

The following controls detailed in this section are only available when not in
Slave Mode.

Page 607
● High Definition Mode; or

● High Speed Mode:
See the EdgeTech manual for full details on each operating mode.
Within each mode the following settings may be applied:
On/OFF
Turns the channel On or Off

Range
Selects the range for the channel

Trigger Coupling (LF Only)
Allows the HF channel to ping as a multiplier of the LF ping rate. This is
very useful when a large disparity exists between the LF and HF ranges.
TX Power
A relative slider bar for transmit power

AGC
Enable/Disable Automatic Gain Control
B.11.7 Slave Mode

If the SonarWiz server is not the “controlling” server than this check-box should
be populated with a check mark.
B.11.8 Record Diagnostic Data

Used for troubleshooting when requested by a CTI engineer.
B.11.9 Sound Velocity (m/s)

If known, the sound velocity of the water should be entered herein order to
increase the accuracy of the range solutions.
B.11.10 Ping/Channel Amplitude

Displays the minimum average and maximum amplitude values for each channel.
These values are useful for determining the Scalar values below.
B.11.11 Scalars
The scalar values of the backscatter calculated by the 4200 are required to
indicate to the SonarWiz 4200 server what internal gain setting to use for each
channel. The scalar values are dependent upon a multitude of variables and may
change depending on the environmental conditions.

Page 608
Once the 4200 is pinging the seafloor the user may enter a scalar value
commensurate with the observed values in the Ping/Channel Amplitude
display (see previous section) or the Compute buttons may be left-clicked in
order to allow the SonarWiz server to automatically determine the best value.
B.11.12 Ping/Channel Info

Displays the relevant information associated with the current ping. These data
are a quick indicator of sonar status and would normally be used if
troubleshooting were required.
B.11.13 Diagnostics
Used for troubleshooting when consulting with an EdgeTech engineer.
B.11.14 Configure Serial Devices

The Configure Serial Devices...button opens the dialog in Figure 507 below
is used to specify what serial ports on the EdgeTech topside unit are connected
to a magnetometer and/or velocimeter if fitted.
Figure 507: Attached Serial Devices
B.11.15 Downsampling
With the EdgeTech 4200 the number of samples per channel is controlled by the
pulse selection which is in turn a based on range and frequency. A given pulse
length defines what the A/D sampling frequency will be and hence the number
of samples in that record.
SonarWiz always records the full number of samples when downsampling is off
however users may select less samples in order to save disk space. The choices
are:
• Downsampling Off
• Downsample to 1024
B.11.16 Quit

Page 609

top of all other windows as well as standard Windows menu options.
Figure 508: EdgeTech Server

Settings
The Reset Stats menu selection is used for internal Chesapeake diagnostics only
and has no effect on the sonar interface.
The Advanced Settings dialog is described below.

The Advanced Settings dialog includes control settings that specify the level
of diagnostic information recorded by the interface. A value of zero will only
record error messages while a value of 9 will report all diagnostic messages.
monitoring application where messages may be viewed in real-time. The
TCP/IP Base Port is where the real-time diagnostic messages are sent and
viewed by the SWizMon software. Please do not change the TCP/IP Base Port
address unless instructed to do so by a Chesapeake support engineer.

Page 610

Page 611
B.12 GeoAcoustics Digital Sidescan Server
Figure 510: GeoAcoustics Digital Sidescan Server
B.12.1 General
The GeoAcoustics Digital Sidescan Sonar Server is allows the user to
control the GeoAcoustics Digital Sidescan Sonar (DSSS) and monitor the
information being received from the Universal Transceiver via a Local Area
Network connection.

Page 612
B.12.2 Preparing the DSSS Deck Unit
Figure 511: GeoUTS

GeoUTS
The GeoUTS (Figure 511) is accessed on the GeoAcoustics Deck unit. The
GeoUTS unit should not need to be altered from its default configuration
however the Deck Unit IP Address and Port number should be noted in
order to configure the SonarWiz GeoAcoustics Server.
GeoAcoustics System Setup Window
The System Setup (Figure 512)window is accessed on the GeoAcoustics
Deck Unit display.
The “Processing Unit” drop down box should be set to “SonarWiz”.
The remainder of the selectable are described in the GeoAcoustics DSS
manual.

Page 613
Figure 512: GeoAcoustics System Setup Window (on deck unit display)
Connecting the Deck Unit to the SonarWiz PC

Typically the SonarWiz PC and the DSSS Universal Transceiver (Deck
Unit) are connected by an RJ45 Ethernet cross-over cable thus eliminating
the need for a hub or switch. If a hub or switch are used ensure that the
cable is a “straight-through” cable if using a hub. If using s switch it is not
necessary to use a “straight-through” cable if the switch is auto-sensing.
B.12.3 GCF Packet Info

These windows display the relevant information associated with the current
ping. These data are a quick indicator of sonar status and would normally be
used if troubleshooting were required.
The Attitude and position windows display the ancillary information (Roll,
Pitch, Heading, Temp, Depth, Latitude and Longitude) if these values are
sent by the Deck Unit.
B.12.4 Gain Windows

The Gain Levels of each channel are displayed with the Frequency,
Minimum, Average and Maximum detected levels displayed.
The Gain Levels on each transducer may be set via the drop down menus
in order to optimize the imagery. Increasing the gain increases the overall

Page 614
brightness of the imagery and decreasing the gain decreases the overall
brightness of the imagery.
N.B. Incorrect gain levels resulting in imagery that has little contrast due to
the overall brightness being either too high or too low, cannot be fixed in
postprocessing.
B.12.5 Connection Settings

My IP Address: This is the network address of the PC where SonarWiz is
running. The loopback IP address of 127.0.0.1 should suffice but the PC's
actual IP address may be entered here.
Connect: Left-clicking this button instructs the server to attempt to
connect to the sonar using the network settings in this section
Deck Unit IP: This is the IP address of the DSSS Deck Unit. This is
displayed in the GeoUTS window (Figure 511)
TCP/IP Port: The IP port used for Ethernet communications. This is
LED Indicators: There are two LED style controls that indicate the
connections state of the interface software to both the GeoAcoustics Deck
Unit and the SonarWiz client software. A green color indicates the
connection is active. Red indicates that there is no connection.
B.12.6 Controls
Record Length (m): User selectable range of the sonar record from 20m
to maximum range.
Base Gain: User defined overall gain level for all channels independent of
the per-channel gain setting from Section B.12.4 above.
Sampling Freq (kHz): User selectable sampling rate of the sonar from
50kHz t 2kHz.
Sound Velocity (m/s): If known, the actual sound velocity of the water
it should be entered here. An accurate sound velocity ensures accurate slant
range measurements. If the actual sound velocity is not known then a
known historical or average value should be entered. Failing these two
primary methods the sound velocity should be left at the default 1500 m/s.
TVG Mode: User may choose Off or Auto TVG modes
Send GCF Navigation: Instructs the Deck Unit to include navigation
information (position) of the sonar if it is available. This would be used if
the only source of sonar position was being fed into the Deck Unit.
Logging Status: Displays the current state of logging

Page 615
B.12.7 Quit
Terminate the SonarWiz GeoAcoustics Digital Sonar server.
B.12.8 System Menu

Figure 513: GeoAcoustics Server

Settings


Page 616

Page 617
B.13 GeoAcoustics Digital Chirp Sub-bottom Server
Figure 515: GeoAcoustics Digital Chirp Sub-bottom Server
B.13.1 General
The GeoAcoustics Digital Chirp Sub-bottom Server is allows the user to
control the GeoAcoustics Digital Chirp Sub-bottom and monitor the

Page 618
information being received from the Universal Transceiver via a Local Area
Network connection.
B.13.2 Preparing the SBP Deck Unit
Figure 516: GeoUTS
GeoUTS
The GeoUTS (Figure 516) is accessed on the GeoAcoustics Deck unit. The
GeoUTS unit should not need to be altered from its default configuration
however the Deck Unit IP Address and Port number should be noted in
order to configure the SonarWiz GeoAcoustics Server.
GeoAcoustics System Setup Window
The System Setup (Figure 517)window is accessed on the GeoAcoustics
Deck Unit display.
The “Processing Unit” drop down box should be set to “SonarWiz”.
The remainder of the selectable are described in the GeoAcoustics DSS
manual.

Page 619
Figure 517: GeoAcoustics System Setup Window (on deck unit display)
Connecting the Deck Unit to the SonarWiz PC

Typically the SonarWiz PC and the SBP Universal Transceiver (Deck Unit)
are connected by an RJ45 Ethernet cross-over cable thus eliminating the
need for a hub or switch. If a hub or switch are used ensure that the cable is
a “straight-through” cable if using a hub. If using s switch it is not necessary
to use a “straight-through” cable if the switch is auto-sensing.
B.13.3 Ping Windows

Status windows indicating values of the current ping including:
• Ping: Ping number
• Range: Range of record in meters
• Time Period: Range of Record in milliseconds
• Samples: Number of samples
• Altitude: Transducer altitude above sea floor
B.13.4 Controls
Trigger Interval (ms): User selectable time period corresponding to
frequency time between pings.
Tx Power: User defined overall power level for Transmitter.

Page 620
Record Length (ms): Time period corresponding to the maximum

record length (range).
Base Gain: Overall gain level independent of Gain settings from Section
B.13.6 above
Delay (ms): User defined delay applied to the SBP receive window
Sampling Freq (kHz): User selectable sampling rate of the sonar from
50kHz to 2kHz
TVG Mode: User may choose Off or Auto TVG modes
B.13.5 Waveform
The waveforms are downloaded from the deck unit at connection time.
B.13.6 Gain Levels and Settings

The Frequency, Minimum, Average, and Maximum return levels are
displayed for Hydrophone and Transducer channels if enabled by the
corresponding check boxes.
Gain: Each channel's gain may be set via the drop down menus in order to
optimize the imagery. Increasing the gain increases the overall brightness of
the imagery and decreasing the gain decreases the overall brightness of the
imagery.
N.B. Incorrect gain levels resulting in imagery that has little contrast due to
the overall brightness being either too high or too low, cannot be fixed in
postprocessing.
B.13.7 Send GCF Navigation

Instructs the Deck Unit to include navigation information (position) of the
sonar if it is available. This would be used if the only source of sonar
position was being fed into the Deck Unit.
B.13.8 Sound Velocity (m/s)

If known, the actual sound velocity of the water it should be entered here.
An accurate sound velocity ensures accurate range measurements. If the
actual sound velocity is not known then a known historical or average value
should be entered. Failing these two primary methods the sound velocity
should be left at the default 1500 m/s.

Page 621
B.13.9 Connection Settings

My IP Address: This is the network address of the PC where SonarWiz is
running. The loopback IP address of 127.0.0.1 should suffice but the PC's
actual IP address may be entered here.
Deck Unit IP: This is the IP address of the SBP Deck Unit. This is
TCP/IP Port: The IP port used for Ethernet communications. This is
Connect: Left-clicking this button instructs the server to attempt to
connect to the sonar using the network settings in this section.
Quit: Left-clicking this button shuts down the server.
Log Diagnostic Data: Use for troubleshooting purposes in consultation
with a GeoAcoustics Engineer.
LED Indicators: There are two LED style controls that indicate the
connections state of the interface software to both the GeoAcoustics Deck
Unit and the SonarWiz client software. A green color indicates the
connection is active. Red indicates that there is no connection.
B.13.10 Quit
Terminate the SonarWiz GeoAcoustics Digital Sonar server.
B.13.11 GCF Packet Info

B.13.12 System Menu


Page 622
Figure 518: GeoAcoustics Server Settings


Page 623
B.14 HUGIN Server

The Hugin AUV Sonar Interface provides the real-time data interface services
for working with the real-time telemetry data from the Hugin OS. This server
listens on 3 UDP Ethernet ports for navigation and attitude data, sidescan sonar
data and sub-bottom profiler data which are all packetized and broadcast by the
Hugin OS applications. This interface has no AUV control functions, rather it is
simply a listening application that can integrate the navigation and attitude data
together with the sidescan and sub-bottom data and transmit this merged data to
the SonarWiz real-time client for display, processing and recording.
Figure 520: HUGIN AUV Server
B.14.1 UDP Port Addresses

The UDP port addresses must match the UDP addresses set up in the Hugin
OS. The Hugin OS application configures the IP address and the UDP ports
under the Preferences->IO Configuration dialog shown below. This port will be
used to read the navigation and attitude information of the AUV.

Page 624
Figure 521: HUGIN OS Application
The SSS and SBP UDP ports are configured via the Hugin OS application ET
Commander. Using the Export button brings up the dialog below where both
the IP address and the UDP port number may be configured. The ET
Commander program is shown below.
B.14.2 Connect/Disconnect Check boxes

The check boxes next to the UDP port numbers control which ports will be
opened for processing. By default, all 3 ports SSS, SBP and NAV are open.

Page 625
Figure 522: EdgeTech ET Commander

interface software to both the SonarWiz SSS and SBP client connections. A
connection.


Page 626
Figure 523: HUGIN Menu Settings


Page 627
B.15 Klein 3000+ Server

The Klein 3000 sonar (+SBP) can be controlled entirely by the SonarWiz K3000
server; however, the Klein TPU must be connected initialized prior to
connecting to the SonarWiz K3000 server. See your L3-Klein “Series 3000 Sonar
Manual” for complete instructions on configuring the controlling PC.
N.B. The Klein 3000 sonar can be controlled entirely by the SonarWiz K3000
server however the Klein TPU must be initialized on power-up via serial
connection to a correctly configured Windows XP PC. This PC can can be the
SonarWiz PC or another PC. See your L3-Klein “Series 3000 Sonar Manual” for
complete instructions.
Figure 525: Klein 3000 Server
B.15.1 Sonar Configuration

Sonar Range
• This drop-down list allows the user to set the sonar range in meters. The
choices are 37m, 50m, 75m, 100m, 150m, 200m, 250m, 300m, 400m,
500m, 600m ,750m, 800m or 1000m.

Page 628
Dual Frequency Sidescan: Turns on the High Frequency (445 Khz) and Low
Frequency (138 KHz) channels of the sonar.
LF Sidescan and Subbottom: Turns on the Low Frequency (138 KHz)
channels of the sonar as well as the subbottom profiler.
HF Sidescan and Subbottom: Turns on the High Frequency (445 KHz)
channels of the sonar as well as the subbottom profiler.
B.15.2 TPU IP Address

The default factory IP address of the Klein TPU is 192.168.0.81. This address
may be reset (via TPU firmware configuration – see Klein Operator Manual) and
if so the IP address should be set above to match the one set in the Klein TPU.
The IP address of SonarWiz PC must have the same numbers in the first three
fields and the last field must be between 2 and 255 but not the same as the
TPU.
For the factory default address of 192.168.0.81 the SonarWiz PC can be set to
any value from 192.168.0.2 to 192.168.0.255 (but not 192.168.0.81) to
communicate with the Klein TPU software.

software and the Klein 3000 TPU. A valid connection is indicated by the Klein
3000 LED changing from red to green. If the Klein 3000 LED stays red, check
the Ethernet cable connecting the SonarWiz PC to the Klein firmware. Once
connected, the button label changes from “Connect” to “Disconnect”.
B.15.4 Connection Modes

Connect in Slave Mode: If another program, such as L3-Klein's SonarPro or
another instance of SonarWiz is controlling the TPU then the K3000 server
must be in Slave Mode. In this mode the server has no control over TPU
functions such as range scales, or standby mode but is simply “listening” to what
is being broadcast over the network.
Use TPU Navigation (towfish position) option can be selected if:
1. SonarWiz is in slave mode and L3-Klein SonarPro is feeding lever-arm
and layback information (cable out) to the TPU; or
2. A navigation program is feeding a corrected (towfish) position to the
TPU; or
3. SonarWiz has no navigation or cable-out configured but logs are being
maintained in order to correct in pot-processing
Put TPU in Standby Mode: When in Master Mode, enabling this function
stops the sonar from pinging.

Page 629
B.15.5 Advanced (More) Settings
Figure 526: Advanced Klein 3000 Settings
TCP/IP Base Port: See Advanced Settings on Page 632

Log File Threshold: See Advanced Settings on Page 632
UDP Message Threshold: See Advanced Settings on Page 632
Send Towfish Depth: Allows the user to configure a COM port to transmit
the TPU derived towfish depth. This function is normally used for USBL
equipment requiring the depth of the remote device transmitting a responder.
Responder Controls: These controls are used for Klein sonars that have the
Klein Factory installed responder integrated into the towfish
Responder Frequency: Select the frequency to transmit from the
towfish
Responder Ping Rate Divisor: select the ping rate of the
responder based on the ping rate of the towfish. Towfish ping rates
are range based and are approximately:
Range Ping Rate (Hz)
25 m 30
37m 20
50m 15
75m 10
100m 7.5

Page 630
150m 5
200m 3.75
250m 3
300m 2.5
400m 1.875
500m 1.5
600m 1.25
750m 1
800m 0.9375
1000m 0.75
Cable Length Compensation: Allows for signal compensation based on
total cable length between the TPU and the towfish
Pressure Transducer: Type of pressure transducer installed on the towfish.
See your Klein specifications for the installed transducer.
Monitor TPU Navigation...: If the TPU navigation ceases to be transmitted,
SonarWiz may be instructed to stop after a specified number of seconds without
valid navigation from the TPU.

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the TPU in the
B.15.7 Apply Gains

The gain of the sonar signals for both the low, high and SBP frequencies should
be adjusted to a value such that the Real Time displays should require a
minimum amount of overall intensity adjustment.
B.15.8 SBP TX Waveform

The user may select from a drop down list of the available waveforms.
B.15.9 SBP Pre-amp Gain

The user may select Low of High Pre-amp gains

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the TPU
including:

Page 631

● Depth: Towfish Depth (from pressure sensor)
● Cable Out: Cable reading from SonarPro when server is in Slave mode
● CFG Word: For internal use only
● Page Ver: For internal use only
● LF:HF:SB Samples: The number of samples in each channel of each
sub system.
● Chan Flags: For internal use only
○ N.B. Min/Max/Avg values range from 0 to 4096 if 16 Bit
recording is selected and from 0 to 256 if 8 Bit recording selected

interface software to both the Klein firmware and the SonarWiz client software.
A green color indicates the connection is active. Red indicates that there is no
connection.


Page 632
Figure 527: Klein 3000 Menu Settings
Keep on Top: As the name implies, selecting this function will keep this
window on top of all others even when it is not “in focus” i.e. active.


Page 633

Page 634
B.16 Klein 3900 Server

The Klein 3900 Sonar Interface provides the real-time data interface services for
working with the Klein 3900 sidescan sonar. The interface can be run on any
Windows 2000, XP or later system and provides command, control and data to
and from the Klein 3900 firmware.
B.16.1 Send Data as...

The K3900 TPU captures its data using 12-bit values (i.e. 0-4096) rather than the
● Record the K3900 data using an 8-bit range i.e. decimating the raw data
range received from the TPU; or
● Record the K3900 data using the default 12-bit range but in a 16 bit word
i.e. first 4 bits are not used; or
● Record the K3900 data using a full 16-bit range i.e. stretching the raw data
range received from the TPU from 12 to 16 bits.

Page 635
chosen.
Low Frequency: Switches the sonar to Low Frequency (455 KHz)
High Frequency: Switches the sonar to High Frequency (900 KHz)
B.16.2 Gains
The gain of the sonar signals for both the low and high frequencies should be
adjusted to a value such that the Real Time waterfall display should require a
minimum amount of overall intensity adjustment. Selectable values are No Gain,
2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x, 64x, and 128x.
B.16.3 Sonar Range Selection (m)

This drop list sets the sonar range in meters. The choices are 20m, 30m, 40m,
50m, 60m, 75m, 100m, 125m 150m, and 200m.
B.16.4 Pulse Length (µs)

The available pulse lengths for the sonar are selectable via drop-down list. In
order to achieve the best possible resolution the user should select lowest pulse
length that still achieves the selected range.

B.16.6 TPU IP Address

The IP address of SonarWiz PC must have the same numbers in the first three
fields and the last field must be between 2 and 255 but not the same as the
TPU.
For the factory default address of 192.168.0.81 the SonarWiz PC can be set to
any value from 192.168.0.2 to 192.168.0.255 (but not 192.168.0.81) to
communicate with the Klein TPU software.

Page 636


Use TPU Navigation (towfish position) option can be selected if:
TPU; or
B.16.9 Advanced (More) Settings

Send Towfish Depth: Allows the user to configure a COM port to transmit
the TPU derived towfish depth. This function is normally used for USBL
equipment requiring the depth of the remote device transmitting a responder.
towfish
20m 38..8
30 m 25.8

Page 637
40m 19.4
50m 15
60m 12.9
75m 10
100m 7.5
125m 6.2
150m 5
200m 3.75
Pressure Transducer: Type of pressure transducer installed on the towfish.
Note that not all Klein sonars have pressure transducer installed. Typically, if
one is installed, its description will be on a sticker on the top side of the towfish
toward the after end.
Minimum/Maximum Pressure Transducer Voltage: Minimum and
maximum voltages of the pressure transducer installed on the towfish. Note that
not all Klein sonars have pressure transducer installed. Typically, if one is
installed, its description plus voltages will be on a sticker on the top side of the
towfish toward the after end.
After setting the voltages it is highly recommended that the fish but put
just below the surface and then at a known depth (i.e. while the vessel is
stopped) and depth reading compared to the known depths.
Low /High Frequency TVG Offsets: Some extreme operating environments

such as very silty or conversely hard rock seafloors have reflectivities that
require manual tuning of the sonar in order to compensate.
Adjusting the TVG offsets affects the TVG applied in the Sonar TPU and thus
affects the recorded data – unlike display TVG.

Page 638

including:
● Depth: Depth of the towfish
● CFG Word: For internal use only
● Page Ver: For internal use only
● LS:HF Samples: The number of samples in each channel of each sub
system
● Chan Flags: For internal use only

Page 639

recording is selected and from 0 to 256 if 8 Bit recording selected
● Depth: Towfish Depth (from pressure sensor)

connection.

Keep on Top: As the name implies, selecting this function will keep this
window on top of all others even when it is not “in focus” i.e. active.

Page 640


Page 641
B.17 Klein 5000 Server

The Klein 5K Server provides the real-time data interface services for working
with the Klein 5000 sonar. The interface can be run on any Windows 2000, XP
or later system and provides command, control and data to and from the Klein
5000 firmware.
B.17.1 Send Data as...

The K5000 TPU captures its data using 12-bit values (i.e. 0-4096) rather than the
● Record the K5000 data using an 8-bit range i.e. decimating the raw data
range received from the TPU; or
● Record the K5000 data using the default 12-bit range but in a 16 bit word
i.e. first 4 bits are not used; or
● Record the K5000 data using a full 16-bit range i.e. stretching the raw data
range received from the TPU from 12 to 16 bits.

Page 642
chosen.
B.17.2 Sonar Range Selection

This radio button list sets the sonar range in meters. The choices are 50m, 75m,
100m or 150m.
B.17.3TPU IP Address
● Master Controller: The IP Address of the SonarWiz PC running as the
master controller must be 192.168.0.82 if the factory default address for
the sonar of 192.168.0.81 has not been changed.
● Slave Mode: The IP address of SonarWiz PC must contain the same
numbers on the first three fields and the last field must be between 2
and 255 but not the same as the TPU. For the a sonar factory default
address of 192.168.0.81 the SonarWiz PC can be set to any value from
192.168.0.2 to 192.168.0.255 (but not 192.168.0.81) to communicate
with the Klein TPU software.



Page 643
B.17.6 More Settings

towfish
50m 15
75m 10
100m 7.5
150m 5

Page 644
Pressure Transducer:
Depth Rating: Type of pressure transducer installed on the towfish. See your
Klein specifications for the installed transducer.
Offset Observed Depth (m): To be used for a known fixed offset reading
error in the pressure transducer.
Voltage Range for Pressure Transducer: Klein pressure transducers may
operate 0 to 5 volts or 1 to 5 volts depending on which particular sensor is
installed. The type of transducer installed on your particular sonar should be
verified with L3-Klein. As a general rule, pressure transducers included with
Klein sonars prior to 2008 had a voltage range from 0 to 5 volts.
Monitor TPU Navigation...: If the TPU navigation ceases to be transmitted,
SonarWiz may be instructed to stop after a specified number of seconds without
valid navigation from the TPU.
B.17.7 Along Track Resolution

Normal: Normal along track resolution is 20cm and is used for tow speeds
exceeding 10 knots.
High: High along track resolution is 10cm and normally is used for tow speeds
less than 10 knots.
B.17.8 Pulse Length (µs)

The available pulse lengths for the sonar are selectable via radio button. In order
to achieve the best possible resolution the user should select lowest pulse length
that still achieves the selected range.

range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to calculate both the
slant range of the returning acoustic pulse and the altitude of the sonar using the
built-in altimeter.
B.17.10 Apply Gains

The gain of the sonar signal should be adjusted to a value such that the Real
Time waterfall display should require a minimum amount of overall intensity
adjustment.

including:

Page 645

recording is selected and from 0 to 256 if 8 Bit recording
selected
● Roll: Towfish roll
● Pitch: Towfish pitch
● Heading: Towfish heading (compass)
● Speed: Towfish speed (from GPS feed into TPU)
● S Depth: Towfish Depth (from pressure sensor)
B.17.12 Use TPU Navigation

The Use TPU Navigation (towfish position) option can be selected if:
TPU; or

connection.


Page 646


Page 647


Page 648
B.18 Knudsen SSS Server
Figure 537: Knudsen SSS Server

Page 649
B.18.1 General
The SonarWiz Knudsen SSS server is used to control all Knudsen Sounder 1600
series and Chirp 3200 series Echosounders requiring only the Knudsen
EchoControl Server (Figure 538) running in the background (available from
Knudsen Engineering Ltd).
Figure 538: Knudsen EchoControl Program
B.18.2 Knudsen IP Address and Port

This is the IP Address of the computer running the EchoControl Program. If it
is being run oin the same PC as SonarWiz then the 127.0.0.1 may be used.

Connects / Disconnects to the EchoControl Program
B.18.4 Status LEDs

.Displays green “lights” when connected to the EchoControl Program and
SonarWiz.
B.18.5 Quit
Terminates the Server interface.

Page 650
B.18.6 SSS Channel Control

The two tabs are used to control each SSS channel with each tab having identical
functions as the other. See your Knudsen SSS manual for a description of each
function.
B.18.7 Sync
This check-box synchronizes the trigger for the Port and Stbd sidescan
transmitters
B.18.8 Transmit Off/On

Turns off /on the transmitter.
B.18.9 System
Displays system status information including:
● X Coordinate
● Y Coordinate

● Channels: Active channels
● Roll
● Pitch
● Heading
● Heave
B.18.10 Channel
● Average: Average sampled value in current pingThe readout from the
Roll, Pitch and Heading sensors on the SSS.
● Time Per: Time between pings
● Depth: Range of detected bottom
● Delay (ms): Delay applied to the SSS receive window

Page 651
● Delay(m): Equivalent delay in meters converted from ms above.
B.18.11 Graph
A simple scope-like trace of the signal received from the EchoControl server.
B.18.12 Message Box

Contains ongoing diagnostic messages about packets received and events that
occur. Normally used only by CTI or Knudsen engineers in troubleshooting.
B.18.13 System Menu

software.
Figure 539: Knudsen SSS Server

System Menu


Page 652
B.18.15 Typically, these messages are sent to a log file. In a diagnostic situation, a

Page 653
B.19 Knudsen SBP Server
Figure 541: Knudsen SBP Server
B.19.1 General
The SonarWiz Knudsen SBP server is used to control all Knudsen Sounder 1600
series and Chirp 3200 series Echosounders requiring only the Knudsen
EchoControl Server (Figure 542) running in the background (available from
Knudsen Engineering Ltd).

Page 654
Figure 542: Knudsen EchoControl Program
B.19.2 Knudsen IP Address and Port

This is the IP Address of the computer running the EchoControl Program. If it
is being run oin the same PC as SonarWiz then the 127.0.0.1 may be used.

Connects / Disconnects to the EchoControl Program
B.19.4 Status LEDs

.Displays green “lights” when connected to the EchoControl Program and
SonarWiz.
B.19.5 Quit
B.19.6 SBP Channel Control

The two tabs are used to control each SBP channel with each tab having
identical functions as the other. See your Knudsen SBP manual for a description
of each function.
B.19.7 Sync
This check-box synchronizes the trigger for the Port and Stbd sidescan
transmitters

Page 655
B.19.8 Transmit Off/On

Turns off /on the transmitter.
B.19.9 System
Displays system status information including:
● X Coordinate
● Y Coordinate

● Channels: Active channels
● Roll
● Pitch
● Heading
● Heave
B.19.10 Channel
● Average: Average sampled value in current pingThe readout from the
Roll, Pitch and Heading sensors on the SBP.
● Depth: Range of detected bottom
● Delay (ms): Delay applied to the SBP receive window
● Delay(m): Equivalent delay in meters converted from ms above.
B.19.11 Graph
A simple scope-like trace of the signal received from the EchoControl server.
B.19.12 Message Box

Contains ongoing diagnostic messages about packets received and events that
occur. Normally used only by CTI or Knudsen engineers in troubleshooting.

Page 656
B.19.13 System Menu

software.
Figure 543: Knudsen SBP Server

System Menu


Page 657

Page 658
B.20 Marine Sonic Server
Figure 545: Marine Sonic Server
B.20.1 General
The Marine Sonic Server is simply a “bridge” between SonarWiz and the
the Marine Sonic Sea Scan PC and has no control over the Marine Sonic
sidescan sonar. Functions such as range, start and stop must be initiated
from Sea Scan PC.
To configure the Sea Scan PC to connect to SonarWiz, refer to the MST
document “Sea Scan PC Real Time Output Protocol” located on the
Marine Sonics Downloads page and accessed from the link below:
http://marinesonic.us/

The Position status windows are used as an indicator to layback settings
coming from Sea Scan PC. If the ship and towfish positions are different
then layback is being applied by Sea Scan PC prior to data transmission to
SonarWiz.
If SonarWiz is being used to apply layback then positional
information for both the ship and towfish should be the same in the

Page 659
Marine Sonic Server status windows otherwise serious positioning

errors may occur.
B.20.3 LED Indicators

interface software to both the SeaScanPC firmware and the SonarWiz client
B.20.4 Do NOT Send Sonar Packets

Instructs Sea Scan PC to cease sending sonar packets when checked.
B.20.5 Send Sonar Only, Use SonarWiz Navigation

Instructs Sea Scan PC to send sonar packets without navigation information
when checked such that SonarWiz may use a separate positioning input to
calculate the position of both the ship and fish.
B.20.6 Quit
Closes the Server Dialog
B.20.7 Record Diagnostic Data (Test Only)

To be used in consultation with Marine Sonic or Chesapeake Engineers
when troubleshooting.
B.20.8 System Menu

software.

Page 660
Figure 546: MST System Menu


Page 661
B.21 Marine Sonic HDS Server
Figure 548: Marine Sonic HDS Server
B.21.1 General
The Marine Sonic HDS Server connects directly to the MST sidescan sonar
via USB port without the need for SeaScan PC running on a deck unit as
with the original MST sidescan sonars.
B.21.2 Connect
Instructs the Server to attempt to connect to the sonar.
B.21.3 LED Indicators

interface software to both the SeaScanPC firmware and the SonarWiz client
B.21.4 Power
Turns the sonar transmitter on or off.

Page 662
B.21.5 Resolution
Controls the number of samples per channel recorded ot the sonar file,
ether 256 or 4096.
B.21.6 Sonar Range

A drop-down list of available ranges for selection by the user.
B.21.7 Transducer
A drop-down list of transducers (channels) available for selection.

B.21.9 Enable Log Decompression
B.21.10 Packet Statistics

These data are a summary of the sonar packets transmitted to SonarWiz
from the MST sonar and would be used for troubleshooting if required.
B.21.11 Quit
Closes the Server Dialog.
B.21.12 System Menu

software.

Page 663
Figure 549: MST System Menu


Page 664
B.22 ODOM Echotrac SSS Server

The SonarWiz Odom server is a “listen only” server that connects through a
UDP port directly to the Odom deck hardware. The SonarWiz server does not
connect to any other Odom software and relies on the Odom software to
provide the control to the instrument.
B.22.1 UDP Port /Connect

Ensure that the UDP Port in the server is set to the same UDP Port that the
Echotrac Interface is using.
Press the Connect button to start listening for broadcast data from the CVM.
You should see data appear in the various windows on the Odom interface.
Minimize the Odom Echotrac SSS Server program.
Figure 551: Odom Echotrac SSS Server

B.22.2 LED's
UDP Packets Received: Initially, the LED is colored red until an ODOM
Echotrac UDP packet is received. Once packets are being received and sent to
the SonarWiz client the control is green.
Client Connection: This LED indicates the status of the SonarWiz client with
the Echotrac SSS Server. The control is green when SonarWiz is connected and
red when it is not connected.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the Echotrac
sonar including:

Page 665

● Delay: This is the amount of time that has elapsed since the outgoing
transmit pulse. It is used to focus the digitizing window near the point in
the record where the sound actually reaches and penetrates the seafloor.
The delay is useful in deep water applications to avoid digitizing large
intervals of the water column.
● Channels: The number of channels being received from the ODOM
Echotrac.
● Depth 1: Measured depth for frequency 1

the Odom Echotrac sonar including:
B.22.5 Log Raw Data

by a CTI engineer. The Log Raw Data button causes the server to record
all raw data Ethernet packets received from the Odom instrument.
B.22.6 System Menu

software.

Page 666
Figure 552: Odom Echotrac System Menu


Page 667
B.23 ODOM Echotrac Server

The SonarWiz Odom server is a small interface program that listens for UDP
Ethernet packets from the Odom CVM hardware. The Odom interface program
forwards these packets in a suitable format to SonarWiz where they can be
displayed and logged in XTF format and converted to SEG-Y format if required.
The Odom interface program does not control the setting of the CVM. Odom
has already created a rather sophisticated package for doing the control
functions. The Odom control program is required to initialize the CVM on
power up and when any changes to various settings are required.
B.23.1 Start Up
1. The start-up procedure for the Odom/SonarWiz system follows:
2. Launch the Odom Echotrac_CV from the Windows start menu.
Figure 554: Echotrac CV
3. Select the Echotrac CVM from the target unit list as shown below:
Figure 555: Echotrac Control
4. Press the Select button.

5. At this point the Odom Echotrac control program should start up as shown
below:

Page 668
Figure 556: Echotrac CVM
6. Select the Control->Open Connection menu item
Figure 557: Open Connection Menu
7. You will see some progress messages and on my system at least I also receive
this message box. Press OK to dismiss the message box.

Page 669
Figure 558: Echotrac Version Check
8. At this point the system should be running using the settings it was was
operated last. To change the record length and offset or delay choose the
Chart tab as shown below:
Figure 559: Echotrac CVM Chart Tab
9. The end of scale sets the lower limit of the scale width window. So in the
example above sensor is looking between 201 and 301 meters. The total
record length is 100 meters and the deep water delay is set at 201 meters.
10. Now Start SonarWiz and use the File>Configure Sonar Interface to
Start/Configure the Odom interface as shown below:
B.23.2 UDP Port /Connect

Ensure that the UDP Port in the server is set to the same UDP Port that the
Echotrac Interface is using.
Press the Connect button to start listening for broadcast data from the CVM.
You should see data appear in the various windows on the Odom interface.
Minimize the Odom Echotrac Server program.

Page 670
B.23.3 LED's
Figure 560: Odom Echotrac Server

UDP Packets Received: Initially, the LED is colored red until an ODOM
Echotrac UDP packet is received. Once packets are being received and sent to
the SonarWiz client the control is green.
Client Connection: This LED indicates the status of the SonarWiz client with
the Echotrac server. The control is green when SonarWiz is connected and red
when it is not connected.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the Echotrac
sonar including:
● Channels: The number of channels being received from the ODOM
Echotrac.

Page 671

the Odom Echotrac sonar including:
B.23.6 Log Raw Data

by a CTI engineer. The Log Raw Data button causes the server to record
all raw data Ethernet packets received from the Odom instrument.
B.23.7 System Menu

software.

Page 672
Figure 561: Odom Echotrac System Menu


Page 673
B.24 Remote File Server

The Remote XTF File Sonar Interface provides a method for monitoring an
XTF file recorded by a remote data acquisition system and sending the changes
to SonarWiz as real-time sonar pings. The original purpose of this interface is to
allow a user to add a real-time mosaic interface to an existing or legacy system.
Figure 563: Network configuration for XTF File Server
The Remote File Server (RFS) should be run on the same PC to which the XTF
file is being written. This will normally be the computer running the legacy sonar
data recording application. SonarWiz can be running on any PC that is in the
same network as the RFS computer. A typical configuration is shown in Figure
563.
The File Folder or Path to Monitor may be either a local drive and folder or a
remote networked location. Typically, one would use the Windows Explorer
Tools->Map Network Folder to map a remote resource on the SonarWiz
system. If you are unsure how to complete the map a network resource, please
consult your system administrator.
B.24.1 Operational Controls

Page 674
Figure 564: Remote File Server

B.24.2 File to Monitor
The file selection box and Browse button is used to identify the XTF file that
will be monitored by the RFS. As each ping is written to the XTF file, the RFS
will send this data via the network to the SonarWiz client application
B.24.3 LED’s
Remote File Status: The user interface contains two LED controls that indicate
the status of the RFS. The Remote File Status is a tri-state control. Initially, the
control is colored red until a file is selected for monitoring. Once a file has been
identified and known to exist, then the control will change to yellow. The third
state of the control is green and is reached when pings are identified and sent
from the XTF file to the SonarWiz client.
SonarWiz Connection: This LED indicates the status of the SonarWiz client
with the RFS server. The control is green when SonarWiz is connected and red
when it is not connected.
B.24.4 Operating Procedure

4. Start Data Logging on the XTF data acquisition system.
5. Start the Remote File Server (RFS) on the data logging PC.
6. In the RFS, select the same XTF file that is being recorded in step 1.
7. In the RFS, press, the Connect button.
8. Start SonarWiz on a second PC.
9. Under the File->Configure Sonar Interface dialog select the Remote
Servers item labeled Remote File Server Ver 1.x.xxx as shown in Figure 565

Page 675
10. Once the Remote File Server has been selected, press the Connect button
and then the OK button.
Figure 565: Select Remote File Server
B.24.5 System Menu

The system menu shown in Error: Reference source not found offers options to
keep the interface program on top of all other windows as well as standard
Windows menu options. Note that only the Quit button on the interface
program will actually terminate the software. This feature is to prevent
accidentally closing the software.

Page 676
Figure 566: Remote File Server Menu

The Advanced Settings dialog (Figure 567) includes control settings that
messages.
Figure 567: Advance Settings

Page 677
B.25 SonarBeam S-150 Server

The SonarBeam S-150 USB Sonar Interface provides the real-time data interface
services for working with the SonarBeam S-150 sidescan sonar. The interface
can be run on any Windows 2000, XP, Vista or later system and provides
command, control and data to and from the S-150 firmware.
Figure 568: SonarBeam S-150 Server
B.25.1 S-150 COM Port

The S-150 interface uses a virtual COM port driver (VCP) to communicate with
the USB connector attached to the SonarBeam S-150 device. The SonarBeam
Discover software is not required for this interface. The Virtual COM Port
driver must be installed before this SonarWiz server can communicate with the
S-150 device. Typically, the Virtual Serial Port driver will be installed by the
SonarWiz installation program.

software and the SonarBeam S-150 sonar. A valid connection is indicated by the
S-150 Connection Status LED changing from red to green. If the SonarBeam S-
150 Connection Status LED stays red, check the USB cable connecting the
SonarWiz PC to the Eject firmware and verify that the COM port selected is the
actual COM port used by the VCP driver.

Page 678
Figure 569: Windows Device Manager
You may verify the port used by the VCP driver by looking under the Device
Manager settings as highlighted in the image above. Once connected, the button
label changes from “Connect” to “Disconnect”.

interface software to both the SonarBeam firmware and the SonarWiz client
B.25.4 Sonar Control

Range Selection
This drop list sets the sonar range in meters. Note that the ranges available
at the high frequency setting are shorter in duration than the lower
frequency.
TVG
This drop list provides 3 settings for the firmware applied Time Varying
Gain function. This setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz
as it is applied down in the hardware. For more information about the
firmware TVG please see the SonarBeam S-150 User Guide.
Gain
This drop list sets the analog receiver gain settings to one of 4 different
options. This setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is

Page 679
applied in the hardware. For more information about the firmware analog
please see the SonarBeam S-150 User Guide.
Pulse Length
User selectable from 5 to 100 μSec in 5 μSec steps.

Hint: After you have selected the desired range select the lowest Pulse
Length that still allows the the sonar to illuminate the entire range.
Transmit Frequency
These radio buttons select the transmitted sonar pulse frequency. You may
select either the 400 kHz or 1250 kHz option. To change the frequency
during normal operation, you must first disconnect from the sonar, reset the
desired transmit frequency and then reconnect again.
Test Mode
See the SonarBeam S-150 User Guide.

Figure 570: SonarBeam Menu Settings

Page 680


Page 681
B.26 SportScan Server
Figure 572: Imagenex SportScan Server
B.26.1 General
The Imagenex SportScan Server is a stand-alone interface that replaces the
Imagenex sonar interface.
B.26.2 SportScan Serial Port

The SportScan interface uses a standard Windows RS-232 COM port driver to
communicate with the serial port connector attached to the Imagenex SportScan
device.
B.26.3 Frequency Selection

choose any single transmit frequency available on your sonar equipment.
Imagenex builds two models of the SportScan sonar: a single frequency model
and a dual frequency model. Changing the frequency on a single frequency
SportScan will have no effect.
B.26.4 Range
This drop list sets the sonar range in meters. Note that the ranges available at the
high frequency setting are shorter in duration than the lower frequency.

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the SportScan
firmware in the range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to
calculate the slant range of the returning acoustic pulse.

Page 682
B.26.6 Gain
This drop list sets the analog receiver gain settings to one of 40 different options.
This setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is applied in the
hardware. For more information about the firmware analog please see the
Imagenex SportScan User Guide.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the SportScan
firmware including:
● Firmware: SportScan firmware version
B.26.8 LED's
interface software to both the Imagenex firmware and the SonarWiz client

software and the Imagenex SportScan sonar. A valid connection is indicated by
the SportScan Status LED changing from red to green. If the Imagenex
SportScan Status LED stays red, check the serial cable connecting the SonarWiz
PC to the Imagenex firmware and verify that the COM port selected is the actual
COM port used. Also, be sure to check that the power supply to the SportScan
is on and supplying 10 – 16VDC with at least 300mA of current.
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the SportScan.
B.26.10 System Menu


Page 683

software.
Figure 573: SportScan System Menu


Page 684
B.26.12 Quit
B.26.13 Diagnostic Mode

Diagnostic mode records information to a file useful for troubleshooting. This
mode should only be used when requested by a Chesapeake support engineer for
troubleshooting purposes.

Page 685
B.27 Tritech Starfish Server
Figure 575: Tritech Starfish Server
B.27.1 General
The Tritech Starfish Server is a stand-alone interface that replaces the Tritech
sonar interface.
B.27.2 Connection
The SonarWiz Starfish Interface interface connects to the sidescan sonar via a
USB port on the SonarWiz PC.
The Tritech USB port driver must be installed in order for the connection to
the sonar to be successful. Refer to your factory CD or the Tritech website for
this driver.
Connect / Disconnect Button
software and the Tritech Starfish sonar. A valid connection is indicated by the
Starfish Status LED changing from red to green.

Page 686
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the Starfish.
LED's
interface software to both the Tritech firmware and the SonarWiz client

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the Starfish
firmware including:
● Range: User-selected Sonar Range setting
● Time Time between pings
● Frequency: Starfish transmit frequency
● Minimum: Minimum reflectivity value received for current ping for the
selected channel (below)
● Average: Average reflectivity value received for current ping for the
selected channel (below)
● Maximum: Maximum reflectivity value received for current ping for
the selected channel (below)
● Channel: Drop-down list for the user to select ether the port or
starboard channel to view reflectivity statistics.
B.27.4 Quit
B.27.5 Diagnostic Mode

Diagnostic mode records information to a file useful for troubleshooting. This
mode should only be used when requested by a Chesapeake support engineer
for troubleshooting purposes.
B.27.6 System Menu

software.

Page 687
Figure 576: Starfish System Menu


Page 688

Page 689
B.28 SyQwest SBP Server
Figure 578: SyQwest Server
B.28.1 General
The SonarWiz SyQwest SBP Server cannot control the StrataBox therefore must
be is used in parallel with the StrataBox software provided by SyQwest. Further
in order to run the SonarWiz in parallel a special serial splitter cable from
SyQwest must be obtained.
Once the the splitter cable has been attached to the StrataBox Sensor Unit COM
A and COM B are the Sensor and GPS inputs (respectively) for the StrataBox
software. COM C and COM D of the splitter cable are the Sensor and GPS
inputs for the Sonar Wiz.MAP SyQwest SBP Server and main program Nav
Input respectively.
B.28.2 Sonar Serial Port

The serial port where COM C of the SyQwest serial splitter cable is connected.

software and the StrataBox. A valid connection is indicated by the SyQwest
Connection Status LED changing from red to green. If the SyQwest

Page 690
Connection Status LED stays red, check the serial cable on the SonarWiz PC
and the StrataBox Sensor Unit.
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the StrataBox.
B.28.4 Use Pixel Swap

Some of the older versions of the StrataBox software have an undocumented
feature in the firmware that incorrectly swaps the order of the 4-bit pixel values
in the output stream. This checkbox corrects the ordering problem. The
symptom is subtle as illustrated by the the two images in Figure 579 below.
Figure 579: Pixel-Swap Results
B.28.5 StrataBox Mode

This is the standard single-channel operating mode of the StrataBox
B.28.6 Bathy 2010 Mode

This is the dual-channel operating mode of the StrataBox
B.28.7 Dual Channel Mode

Select this check-box if both channels are running.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the StrataBox
Sensor Unit including:
● Channels: The number of channels transmitted by the StrataBox

Page 691

● SyQwest Units: Meters, Feet or Milliseconds. The StrataBox operates
in user selected units and all output values change accordingly. This
status window informs the user what units are being used by the
StrataBox and being sent to SonarWiz.

the StrataBox sensor for each channel (if applicable) including:
● Frequency: The frequency of the channel
B.28.10 System Menu

software.

Page 692
Figure 580: SyQwest SBP Server

System Menu

The Advanced Settings dialog (Figure 581)includes control settings that
messages.
Figure 581: Advanced Menu

Page 693
B.29 YellowFin Server
Figure 582: Imagenex YellowFin Server
B.29.1 General
The Imagenex YellowFin Server is a stand-alone interface that replaces the
Imagenex sonar interface.
B.29.2 IP Address
The YellowFin processor has a statically assigned IP Address of 192.168.0.2 .
This is the number to enter in the Connection Dialog Box as shown in Figure
582
The Recommended PC’s IP address and Subnet Mask on the PC are:
● IP Address 192.168.0.3
● Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
See the the Ethernet Setup Guide in the Imagenex YellowFin Manual for
detailed connection information.

Page 694

The sound velocity value (speed of sound in water) is used by the YellowFin
firmware in the range equation (distance = speed of sound * time of travel) to
calculate the slant range of the returning acoustic pulse.
B.29.4 Frequency
choose any single transmit frequency available on the YellowFin.
B.29.5 Data Gain

This slider bar sets the analog receiver gain settings on a relative scale. This
setting will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is applied in the
hardware.
B.29.6 Range
This drop list sets the sonar range in meters. Note that the ranges available at
the higher frequency settings are shorter in duration than the lower frequency.
B.29.7 Balance Gain

This slider bar is used to balance the port and starboard channel gains in the case
whereon channel appears brighter than the other. Use the Balance Gain slider to
even-out the gain of the two channels.

The Status Windows display sonar information received from the SportScan
firmware including:
● Frequency (Hz): Current operating frequency

the YellowFin sonar including:

Page 695

B.29.10 Diagnostics
Run Type
Waits:
Record Diagnostic Data: Used for troubleshooting when consulting with an

Imagenex or CTI engineer.
B.29.11Connect / Disconnect
software and the Imagenex YellowFin sonar. A valid connection is indicated by
the YellowFin Status LED changing from red to green. If the Imagenex
YellowFin Status LED stays red, check the serial cable connecting the SonarWiz
PC to the Imagenex firmware and verify that the IP Address selected is the
actual IP Address used. Also, be sure to check that the power supply to the
YellowFin is on.
The Disconnect Button severs the link between the server and the YellowFin.
B.29.12 System Menu

software.

Page 696
Figure 583: YellowFin System Menu

B.29.14 Quit
Terminates the Server Interface.

Page 697
B.30 NI Analog Sidescan Server

The National Instruments (NI) Analog Sonar Sidescan Sonar Interface provides the analog
to digital interface services for working with analog sidescan sonars. The interface can be run
on any Windows 2000, XP or later system that has a National Instruments A-to-D converter
installed/available and provides digital sonar data signals to the SonarWiz software for real-
time data acquisition.
B.30.1 Configuring the NI Card

When the National Instruments Card is first installed the NI drivers and software
must also be installed from the NI program CD. Prior to starting the Analog server
and the sidescan sonar the NI card should be tested.
From the Windows Start button select Programs->National Instruments-
>Measurement & Automation to open the dialog in Figure 585 below.
Within this dialog select the following: Device and Interfaces->NI-DAQmx

Devices. The USB-6210 device showing green.
Figure 585: NI-DAQmx Devices Dialog
From Figure 586, once the device is selected the user may:
• Self-test your USB-6210 card, or
• Reset your USB-6210 card, or
• Run Test Panels (equivalent to an NIAnalogServer view) to see input signals
on any of channels 1-5 on the 5-BNC CTI box

Page 698
Figure 586: NiDAQmx Device Configuration
Figure 587 below shows the Test Panels view with a signal coming being received.
In Test Panels, the settings to change are:
• Set Channel Name to select Dev/ai1 = CTI box channel 1
• Set MODE = Continuous, and Click START

Page 699
Figure 587: NI Card Test Panel

Page 700
B.30.2 Operational Sidescan Controls
Figure 588: NI Analog Sonar Interface Configuration Screen

Page 701
B.30.2.1 Summary Window

Displays an overall summary of the user-defined selections including:
• Sampling Frequency in Hz
• Record Length in meters
• Record Length in milliseconds
• Total Channels
B.30.2.2 Board Selection/Simulate Mode

If your system contains more than one National Instruments card, use the Device 1
or Device 2 buttons to select the appropriate board (Figure 589). The simulate
mode will send fabricated data to SonarWiz without using the A/D board. The
simulate mode is useful for testing the system connectivity when no signals are
available.
Figure 589: Board Selection
B.30.2.3 Data Acquisition Mode

From Figure 590 below set:
• Select the number of channels that are appropriate for your sonar. If you
are operating a dual frequency sidescan sonar like the Klein 595, you would
want to select both the LF and HF channels to record low and high
frequency data.
• Set the sampling frequency of the transducers
• Set the voltage range of the transducers
• Set the sound velocity to the appropriate value for your working area. The
interface program uses sound velocity to convert between distance and
time.

Page 702
Figure 590: Data Acquisition Mode
B.30.2.4 LEDs and Data Resolution

This slider bar sets the analog receiver gain settings on a relative scale. This setting
will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is applied in the hardware.
From Figure 591 below:
DAQ Board Status LED
• Green indicates a correct connection to the NI Board whereas Red
indicates no connection
SonarWiz Connection LED
• Green indicates a correct connection to the SonarWiz Program whereas
Red indicates no connection
Send Data as...
• The data resolution recorded is controlled by the 8 or 16-bit radio buttons.

The A/D converter provides 16 bits of resolution however most analog
sidescan sonars provide less than 8 bits of dynamic range. The 16-bit option
doubles the disk space required for a given survey compared to the 8-bit
option.
Figure 591: LEDs and Data Resolution

Page 703
B.30.2.5 Range Selection

The sonar range selection MUST match the range setting in the analog sonar system
or data will be lost. Use the range selection drop down box to select the range in
meters that matches your current sonar setting.
B.30.2.6 Trigger
Sync w/Trigger
• Synchronizes the transmit pulse of the Sonar with the trigger source
Trigger Source
• User defined choice of whether to use an external trigger (connected by

BNC to the NI card interface) or the internal sonar trigger.
B.30.2.7 Data Monitor

The data monitor window displays the minimum and maximum and average values
for the selected channel. The detected trigger interval and trigger rate as well as the
number of samples digitized between trigger pulses is displayed for each channel.
The channel being monitored is selected from the drop-down list to the right of the
monitor windows.
B.30.2.8 Channel Monitor

This tool allows one to select the channel to monitor in the text fields as well as the
chart display. The chart display is an autoscaling graph that shows the relative
strength of the incoming analog signal.
B.30.2.9 BNC Signal Connections

Displays the BNC Channels with their (expected) sonar connections.
B.30.2.10 Error Display

The error display window will list any error conditions encountered during the
operation of the software. If an error condition occurs, it may be cleared and reset
by using the Reset button that will appear when the error appears.
B.30.2.11 Telemetry
Some analog sonars provide telemetry information of the vehicle attitude via a serial
port. Use the Enable Telemetry Port check box and the Telemetry push button
to configure the telemetry serial port configuration. Currently, the only telemetry
datagram supported is that from the Williamson and Associates AMS sonars.
The supported telemetry format is a comma separated ASCII text messages
consisting of towfish depth, altitude, roll, pitch, heading as shown in the following
sample output.

Page 704
3457.48,1203.60,12.9,-16.4,214.7
3357.48,1213.60,13.3,-16.4,215.1
B.30.2.12 Downsampling
The number of samples per channel is controlled by the range and sampling
frequency
however users may select less samples in order to save disk space. The choices are:
B.30.3 Tips & Troubleshooting the Analog Interfaces

This section contains tips about using the Chesapeake Technology, Inc (CTI) 5-BNC box
analog interface for collection 1-2 channel sidescan or sub-bottom sonar data. A set-up like
this can follow CTI SonarWiz installation, and involves the following steps:
1. Install the NI DAQmx CD software, which provides USB drivers to process the
incoming A/D data from the USB-6210 card inside the CTI 5-BNC box;
2. Attach the CTI 5-BNC box to the SonarWiz PC using the USB cable
3. Verify connections and test the CTI 5-BNC box using the NI software; then finally
4. Configure and start the NIAnalogServer.
The sections below are included as an aid to the set-up process, and explain some common
error messages which users have encountered during the set-up process.
B.30.3.1 NI Software Not Installed – Error Message

If the NI CD has not been installed and the NIAnalogServer is started the following
error message will be encountered (Figure 592).
Figure 592: NI Software Not Installed Error

Page 705
B.30.3.2 CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected – Error Message

If the NI CD software is installed but the CTI 5-BNC box is not connected to the
PC USB port then the following error message will likely appear (Figure 593):
Figure 593: CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected Error
Solution: Plug the USB connector into the CTI 5-BNC box and restart the
NIAnalogServer.
B.30.3.3 Green Blinking LED

When the CTI 5-BNC box has successfully connected to the SonarWiz PC USB
port, the GREEN LED on the CTI 5-BNC box will be slowly blinking, indicative of
a successful connection.
B.30.3.4 BNC Connections Impedance Recommendation

The following is a guide on the BNC-connection impedance necessary to minimize
cross-talk in multi-channel recording situations. The information below is adapted
directly from a National Instruments information PDF file, NI manual 370503k.pdf
pp. 2-10:
To ensure fast settling times, your signal sources should have an impedance of <1
k(Ohm). The settling time specifications for your (USB-6210 A/D card) device
assume a 1 k(Ohm)source. Large source impedance increase the settling time of the
PGIA (processing chip) , and so decrease the accuracy at fast scanning rates. Settling
times increase when scanning high-impedance signals due to a phenomenon called
charge injection. Multiplexers contain switches, which are usually made of switched
capacitors.
When one of the channels, for example channel 0, is selected in a multiplexer, those
capacitors accumulate charge. When the next channel, for example channel 1, is
selected, the accumulated charge leaks backward through that channel. If the output
impedance of the source connected to channel 1 is high enough, the resulting
reading of channel 1 can partially reflect the voltage on channel 0. This is referred to
as ghosting, or crosstalk.
B.30.3.5 Single 5-BNC box Use in SSS / SB Data Collection

Configuration
This section describes an example configuration for collection or either side-scan
(SSS) or sub-bottom (SB) sonar data from an analog interface.

Page 706
The diagram in Figure 594 below shows how one might collect SSS or SB data with
an analog interface, using a single 5-BNC box to sample 1-2 channels of input
analog data.
This would be the simplest equipment scenario for analog recording, with one or
two BNC cables connecting the CTI 5-BNC box to the analog outputs of the top-
side sonar unit, and a single trigger output BNC connected to trigger-in on the top-
side unit.
Figure 594: Single 5-BNC Box Recording Configuration
B.30.3.6 Same-Ping-Rate SSS / SB Data Dual-Collection

Configuration
In Figure 595 below shows how one might collect SSS and SB data simultaneously
with an analog interface, using a KDD box to separate the triggers in time. There are
a few things to note about this:
1. The configuration is simplistic and cost-efficient, as it uses only 1 CTI 5-
BNC box
2. The triggers would be separated in time allowing for distinct SSS & SB
return
3. The configuration assumes a same-ping-rate for both SSS and SB data
The problems with this are that SB sonar typically runs slower than SSS, as the
capacitors have to charge. SB max ping-rate is usually 8 Hz for a 125msec period.

Page 707
On the other hand, SSS recording usually uses ping-rates in the range of 10-15 Hz.
You would sacrifice SSS recording quality in this configuration!
Figure 595: Simultaneous SSS & SBP with One KDD
B.30.3.7 Independent Ping-Rate SSS / SB Analog Dual-Collection

Configuration
In contrast to the issues seen in the previous two sections, consider the slightly more
complex dual-5-BNC box configuration in Figure 596 below, as a means of
simultaneous SSS and SB analog recording.
The advantages are:
1. SSS ping-rate can be 10-15 Hz for perfect XFT file recording, driven by the
NIAnalogServer.exe
2. SB ping-rate is independently triggered by the NIAnalogSBServer.exe and
data is simultaneously saved in a SEGY file.

Page 708
Figure 596: Independent Ping-rate Dual 5-BNC Box Configuration

Page 709
B.31 NI Analog Sub-bottom Server

The National Instruments (NI) Analog Sonar Sub-bottom Sonar Interface provides the
analog to digital interface services for working with analog sub-bottom sonars. The interface
can be run on any Windows 2000, XP or later system that has a National Instruments A-to-
D converter installed/available and provides digital sonar data signals to the SonarWiz
software for real-time data acquisition.
B.31.1 Configuring the NI Card

When the National Instruments Card is first installed the NI drivers and software
must also be installed from the NI program CD. Prior to starting the Analog server
and the sub-bottom sonar the NI card should be tested.
From the Windows Start button select Programs->National Instruments-
>Measurement & Automation to open the dialog in Figure 597 below.
Within this dialog select the following: Device and Interfaces->NI-DAQmx

Devices. The USB-6210 device showing green.
Figure 597: NI-DAQmx Devices Dialog
From Figure 598, once the device is selected the user may:
• Self-test your USB-6210 card, or
• Reset your USB-6210 card, or
• Run Test Panels (equivalent to an NIAnalogSBPServer view) to see input
signals on any of channels 1-5 on the 5-BNC CTI box

Page 710
Figure 598: NiDAQmx Device Configuration
Figure 599 below shows the Test Panels view with a signal coming being received.
In Test Panels, the settings to change are:
• Set Channel Name to select Dev/ai1 = CTI box channel 1
• Set MODE = Continuous, and Click START

Page 711
Figure 599: NI Card Test Panel

Page 712
B.31.2 Operational Sub-bottom Controls
Figure 600: NI Analog Sonar Interface Configuration Screen
B.31.2.1 Summary Window

Displays an overall summary of the user-defined selections including:
• Sampling Frequency in Hz
• Record Length in meters
• Record Length in milliseconds
• Total Channels
B.31.2.2 Board Selection/Simulate Mode

If your system contains more than one National Instruments card, use the Device 1
or Device 2 buttons to select the appropriate board (Figure 601). The simulate
mode will send fabricated data to SonarWiz without using the A/D board. The
simulate mode is useful for testing the system connectivity when no signals are
available.

Page 713
Figure 601: Board Selection
B.31.2.3 Data Acquisition Mode

From Figure 602 below set:
• Select the number of channels that are appropriate for your sonar. If you
are operating a dual frequency sub-bottom sonar like the Klein 595, you
would want to select both the LF and HF channels to record low and high
frequency data.
• Set the sampling frequency of the transducers
• Set the voltage range of the transducers
• Set the sound velocity to the appropriate value for your working area. The
interface program uses sound velocity to convert between distance and
time.
Figure 602: Data Acquisition Mode
B.31.2.4 LEDs
This slider bar sets the analog receiver gain settings on a relative scale. This setting
will affect the XTF data recorded by SonarWiz as it is applied in the hardware.
From Figure 603 below:
DAQ Board Status LED
• Green indicates a correct connection to the NI Board whereas Red
indicates no connection

Page 714
SonarWiz Connection LED

• Green indicates a correct connection to the SonarWiz Program whereas
Red indicates no connection
Figure 603: LEDs and Data Resolution
B.31.2.5 Transmit Controls
Figure 604: SBP Transmit Controls
From Figure 604 above:

Trigger Interval
• Time (in milliseconds) between transmit pulses

Record Len (ms)
• The range of the record is determined in milliseconds specified here by the

user
Sync w/Trigger
• Synchronizes the transmit pulse of the Sonar with the trigger source
Recording Delay
• The delay introduced between the transmit mode and the activation of the
“listen” mode of the transducer(s)
Enable Hardware Trigger Divider/Delay
• The option is used to enable the external CTI Key Divide/Delay Box
(KDD which provides trigger divide, delay and generation functions. The
KDD is best used for synchronizing the two active sonar devices thereby
preventing interference. The KDD has a built in 1kHz clock capable of
generating key pulses between 1ms and 1 second.

Page 715
Divide/Delay Button
• Opens the dialog in Figure 605 below in order to configure the KDD box.
See you KDD reference manual for more information
Figure 605: KDD Box Setup
Trigger Source
• User defined choice of whether to use an external trigger (connected by

BNC to the NI card interface) or the internal sonar trigger.
B.31.2.6 Data Monitor

The data monitor window displays the minimum and maximum and average values
for the selected channel. The detected trigger interval and trigger rate as well as the
number of samples digitized between trigger pulses is displayed for each channel.
The channel being monitored is selected from the drop-down list to the right of the
monitor windows.
B.31.2.7 Channel Monitor

This tool allows one to select the channel to monitor in the text fields as well as the
chart display. The chart display is an autoscaling graph that shows the relative
strength of the incoming analog signal.
B.31.2.8 BNC Signal Connections

Displays the BNC Channels with their (expected) sonar connections.

Page 716
B.31.2.9 Error Display

The error display window will list any error conditions encountered during the
operation of the software. If an error condition occurs, it may be cleared and reset
by using the Reset button that will appear when the error appears.
B.31.2.10 Telemetry
Some analog sonars provide telemetry information of the vehicle attitude via a serial
port. Use the Enable Telemetry Port check box and the Telemetry push button
to configure the telemetry serial port configuration. Currently, the only telemetry
datagram supported is that from the Williamson and Associates AMS sonars.
The supported telemetry format is a comma separated ASCII text messages
consisting of towfish depth, altitude, roll, pitch, heading as shown in the following
sample output.
3457.48,1203.60,12.9,-16.4,214.7
3357.48,1213.60,13.3,-16.4,215.1
B.31.2.11 Downsampling
The number of samples per channel is controlled by the range and sampling
frequency
however users may select less samples in order to save disk space. The choices are:
B.31.3 Tips & Troubleshooting the Analog Interfaces

This section contains tips about using the Chesapeake Technology, Inc (CTI) 5-BNC box
analog interface for collection 1-2 channel sub-bottom or sub-bottom sonar data. A set-up
like this can follow CTI SonarWiz installation, and involves the following steps:
1. Install the NI DAQmx CD software, which provides USB drivers to process the
incoming A/D data from the USB-6210 card inside the CTI 5-BNC box;
2. Attach the CTI 5-BNC box to the SonarWiz PC using the USB cable
3. Verify connections and test the CTI 5-BNC box using the NI software; then finally
4. Configure and start the NIAnalogSBPServer.
The sections below are included as an aid to the set-up process, and explain some common
error messages which users have encountered during the set-up process.

Page 717
B.31.3.1 NI Software Not Installed – Error Message

If the NI CD has not been installed and the NIAnalogSBPServer is started the
following error message will be encountered (Figure 606).
Figure 606: NI Software Not Installed Error
B.31.3.2 CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected – Error Message

If the NI CD software is installed but the CTI 5-BNC box is not connected to the
PC USB port then the following error message will likely appear (Figure 607):
Figure 607: CTI 5-BNC Box Not Connected Error
Solution: Plug the USB connector into the CTI 5-BNC box and restart the
NIAnalogSBPServer.
B.31.3.3 Green Blinking LED

When the CTI 5-BNC box has successfully connected to the SonarWiz PC USB
port, the GREEN LED on the CTI 5-BNC box will be slowly blinking, indicative of
a successful connection.
B.31.3.4 BNC Connections Impedance Recommendation

The following is a guide on the BNC-connection impedance necessary to minimize
cross-talk in multi-channel recording situations. The information below is adapted
directly from a National Instruments information PDF file, NI manual 370503k.pdf
pp. 2-10:
To ensure fast settling times, your signal sources should have an impedance of <1
k(Ohm). The settling time specifications for your (USB-6210 A/D card) device
assume a 1 k(Ohm)source. Large source impedance increase the settling time of the
PGIA (processing chip) , and so decrease the accuracy at fast scanning rates. Settling
times increase when scanning high-impedance signals due to a phenomenon called

Page 718
charge injection. Multiplexers contain switches, which are usually made of switched
capacitors.
When one of the channels, for example channel 0, is selected in a multiplexer, those
capacitors accumulate charge. When the next channel, for example channel 1, is
selected, the accumulated charge leaks backward through that channel. If the output
impedance of the source connected to channel 1 is high enough, the resulting
reading of channel 1 can partially reflect the voltage on channel 0. This is referred to
as ghosting, or crosstalk.
B.31.3.5 Single 5-BNC box Use in SSS / SB Data Collection

Configuration
This section describes an example configuration for collection or either side-scan
(SSS) or sub-bottom (SB) sonar data from an analog interface.
The diagram in Figure 608 below shows how one might collect SSS or SB data with
an analog interface, using a single 5-BNC box to sample 1-2 channels of input
analog data.
This would be the simplest equipment scenario for analog recording, with one or
two BNC cables connecting the CTI 5-BNC box to the analog outputs of the top-
side sonar unit, and a single trigger output BNC connected to trigger-in on the top-
side unit.
Figure 608: Single 5-BNC Box Recording Configuration

Page 719
B.31.3.6 Same-Ping-Rate SSS / SB Data Dual-Collection

Configuration
In Figure 609 below shows how one might collect SSS and SB data simultaneously
with an analog interface, using a KDD box to separate the triggers in time. There are
a few things to note about this:
1. The configuration is simplistic and cost-efficient, as it uses only 1 CTI 5-
BNC box
2. The triggers would be separated in time allowing for distinct SSS & SB
return
3. The configuration assumes a same-ping-rate for both SSS and SB data
The problems with this are that SB sonar typically runs slower than SSS, as the
capacitors have to charge. SB max ping-rate is usually 8 Hz for a 125msec period.
On the other hand, SSS recording usually uses ping-rates in the range of 10-15 Hz.
You would sacrifice SSS recording quality in this configuration!
Figure 609: Simultaneous SSS & SBP with One KDD

Page 720
B.31.3.7 Independent Ping-Rate SSS / SB Analog Dual-Collection

Configuration
In contrast to the issues seen in the previous two sections, consider the slightly more
complex dual-5-BNC box configuration in Figure 610 below, as a means of
simultaneous SSS and SB analog recording.
The advantages are:
1. SSS ping-rate can be 10-15 Hz for perfect XFT file recording, driven by the
NIAnalogSBPServer.exe
2. SB ping-rate is independently triggered by the NIAnalogSBServer.exe and
data is simultaneously saved in a SEGY file.
Figure 610: Independent Ping-rate Dual 5-BNC Box Configuration

Section 9 SonarWiz.NAV
9.1 SonarWiz.NAV - Introduction

SonarWiz.NAV is a license free limited version of SonarWiz that reads a
SonarWiz project (.mml) file displaying the current survey navigation
information in real time. The program is run on a PC that is connected to the
same network as (licensed) the SonarWiz PC collecting sonar data and
transmitting navigation data in real time.
NEW: A new navigation program “NavWiz” was released in Spring 2011 and
is installed by default when SonarWiz in installed. SonarWiz.NAV is no
longer included with new versions of SonarWiz. Refer to Section 4.5 on
page 220 for details on NavWiz.
This Chapter will remain in the User Guide for the foreseeable future but
users are highly encouraged to move to NavWiz as it is easier to use and
easily updated for real time changes in the survey plan.
9.1.1 Installing SonarWiz.NAV

SonarWiz.NAV is part of the SonarWiz installation and is installed with the main
program itself. In order to Install SonarWiz.NAV on the desired PC simply
install SonarWiz according to the instructions on Section 1.4 on page 25.
Note that the installation is a software installation only and does not require any
hardware such as the License Key or Data Acquisition Card.
9.1.2 Enabling Data Transmission to SonarWiz.NAV

SonarWiz.NAV cannot display any real time navigation data except for that
being broadcast over the network by the licensed PC running Real Time
collection in SonarWiz. In order for the Collection PC to broadcast the
navigation the user must select the File>Preferences Advanced Settings
tab and check the Broadcast Navigation on Network box. on the SonarWiz
collection PC. See Section 2.8.8 on page 121 for more information.
Page 722
9.1.3 Starting SonarWiz.NAV

SonarWiz.NAV can be started by double-clicking the SonarWiz.NAV icon on
the Desktop (left) or by selecting SonarWiz.NAV under the Windows
Start>Programs Menu.
9.2 Using SonarWiz.NAV

Once started, SonarWiz.NAV will automatically read and process the Broadcast Navigation
messages being sent over the Local Area Network by the PC running a licensed version of
SonarWiz and collecting data in real time.
9.2.1 Anatomy of the SonarWiz.NAV Display
SonarWiz5 User Guide SonarWiz.NAV

Page 723
Figure 611: SonarWiz.NAV Window
9.2.2 Map Window (Orange Box)

The Map Window in Figure 611 is used to display the survey vessel's real-time
icon as well as basemap images, survey lines and digitized features.
9.2.3 Toolbar Buttons (Black Box)
Figure 612: Recording and Misc Control Buttons
Save Project: Saves project settings immediately. N.B. SonarWiz will

automatically save the project on exit regardless.

Page 724
Map Manager (Ctrl+Shift+B): See Section 3.4 on page 156
Survey Line Manager (F12): See Section 4.3.4 on page 194.
Copy (Ctrl+C): (Screen Capture): Puts a copy of the Main Window,

Secondary Window and Position and Recording Status Window onto the
Clipboard. Useful for grabbing screen shots of interesting objects and
pasting them to documents or e-mails
About: Displays information about the current version of SonarWiz
being used as well as the Name of the registered dongle owner and the
date of license expiry
Display Control Buttons

The Display Control Button Toolbar (Magenta Box)
Figure 613: Display Control Buttons
Each button is defined below with a brief explanation. See the appropriate
section for full details on each button.
Copy (Screen Capture): Puts a copy of the Main Window, Secondary

Window and Position and Recording Status Window onto the Clipboard.
Useful for grabbing screen shots of interesting objects and pasting them
to documents or e-mails
Back: Returns Mosaic Window to previous zoom resolution

Page 725
Pan (Ctrl+A): When the display is zoomed in, the mouse

cursor may be used as a Pan tool. To Pan, drag the image
using the left mouse button in the direction you wish to move
See Section 9.2.5.3.9 for on page 741 more details

the view area. Release the left mouse button and the display
will be updated, centered at the new location.
Zoom Window(Shift+Z): Left-Click and hold to drag a box
over a specific area in the Mosaic Window to be zoomed.
Zoom In 10% (PgDn): Left-Click the toolbar button to

zoom Mosaicking Window in by 10%of current resolution.
Zoom Out 10% (PgUp): Left-Click the toolbar button to

zoom Mosaicking Window out by 10% of current resolution.
Fit To View ( Ctrl+F): Left-Click to the toolbar button have

Mosaicking Window fit all visible sonar files within the Mosaic
Window
Measure (Ctrl+M): Measures distance and true bearing
between two points. Left-Click at first point and drag cursor to
second point. Range and bearing line will stay fixed when left
mouse button is released
Center on Current Position (Toggle Switch) (Ctrl+Home):
When depressed, the Real-Time Mosaic will remain centered
on the vessel. The Mosaic will not remain at a “dragged”
position when this button is activated
Map Info Button: When depressed, hovering the cursor over a sonar file
in the Mosaicking Window results in information about the sonar file at
that particular point will be displayed such as File / Ping / Time /
Heading / Course / Speed / Cable Out/ Towfish height / Nearest
Event
Refresh (Ctrl+R): Redraws Mosaicking Window at current resolution
Abort Redraw (Ctrl+Q): Used to stop the redraw (refresh) in the

Mosaicking Window due to the user wishing to make an immediate
change to the display parameters prior to the completion of the current
redraw.
Survey Line Manager (F12): Opens the Survey Line Manager - See
Section 4.3.4 on page 194
Add Survey Line With Mouse: Create a survey line by Left-Clicking at

first waypoint and drag cursor to second waypoint. Multiple individual
lines may be added until a Right-Click or another function is selected (See
Section 4.3.2 on page 192)

Page 726
Draw Survey Route: Create a survey route by Left-Clicking at first

waypoint. Move the cursor to the next waypoint (without dragging) and
Left-Click again. Move cursor to the third point and left click etc. A
survey route will be created made up of multiple lines until a Right Click
ends the process and brings up the “Building Survey Route” Dialog
(See Section 4.3 on page 190)
Lock / Unlock Survey Lines: When depressed Survey Line waypoints
may not be moved with a Click-and-Drag (See Section 4.3 on page 190)
Summary Log (Ctrl+U): Displays Summary Log which contains
information and errors encountered by the program from user requests.
Useful troubleshooting tools when desired results are no being achieved.
(See Section 2.5.1.12 on page 77)
Add Text: Brings up the “Create New Text Feature” Dialog such that
the user may label the Map or Waterfall area with text (See Section 5.16.2
on page 440.)
Polyline: Brings up the “Create New Polyline Feature” Dialog such that
the user may delineate an area on the Map or Waterfall Windows (See
Section 5.16.2 on page 440.)
9.2.4 Status Bar

The lower status bar (Blue Box in Figure 611 and Figure 614 below) displays the
number of sonar channels being used, the drawing resolution, the sonar range and
the map coordinate system. It can be turned on and off by selecting
View>Status Bar from the main menu.
N.B. Only the Geodesy information in the most right-hand window is updated in
SonarWiz.NAV; the other three windows do not display any valid information.
Figure 614: Status Bar
9.2.5 Menus
9.2.5.1 File Menu

The File Menu (Figure 615) offers the following options:

Page 727
Figure 615: File Menu
9.2.5.1.1 Creating a Project

The normal procedure for using SonarWiz.NAV is to copy an existing project
folder (created in SonarWiz) on to the SonarWiz.NAV PC such that the main
project file <filname>.mml may be opened.
Should it be decided that SonarWiz.NAV will be used to create a new project

the following procedure should be followed: Select File>Create New
Project from the main menu, or use the shortcut key Shift+F10. This will
display the Create New Project dialog shown in Figure 616.
N.B. Many fields in the Create New Project dialog are for SonarWiz and
are not used in SonarWiz.NAV. Only relevant fields will be discussed below.

Page 728
Figure 616 Creating a project with the Project Configuration dialog
Using the information in sub-sections below as a guide, fill in the fields as

necessary for the project and then press OK. The project will be created in
the folder specified. If it does not exist, it also will be created.
Specifying Project Name and Folder
Vessel Name: Optional. The vessel name is stored in each contact file.
Project Folder: Use this field to specify the root folder for the project.
All project related files will be stored in this folder or it's sub-folders.
You may browse to an existing folder or enter a new folder. If the folder
does not exist it will be created.
Project Name: Enter a name for the new project. This will be
used,among other things, to name the main project definition file
(<projectname>.MML).
Approximate Project Position

Page 729
SonarWiz requires an initial approximate position to set up the geodesy library

correctly. There are several ways to do this:
13. If you know the approximate position of your work area you can enter
this in the Approximate Latitude/Longitude fields.
14. Select a major city near the project area by pressing the Select From
World Cities button. The position of this city will be transferred to the
Approximate Lat/Lon fields.
Note that you can add your own entries to the world cities list by editing
the text file named “AllCities.CSV” in the MapData sub-folder under the
folder in which SonarWiz is installed.
15. Select an existing existing acoustic data file by pressing the Get From File
button. If the file contains a position it will be extracted and transferred
to the Approximate Lat/Lon fields.
16. Use the GPS position: This function is only be enabled if a LAN PC
with a licensed copy of SonarWiz is receiving a GPS feed and
broadcasting navigation over the LAN (see Section 9.1.2 on page 721
feeding data into SonarWiz (see Section 2.8.8 on page 121). Clicking this
button will cause the program to grab the current position from the
broadcast navigation feed.
Coordinate Source
Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Channels: Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Downsample: Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Automatic Gain Control: Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Allow Negative XY Coordinates: Used where the possibility of negative
coordinates may be introduced due to the location of the survey within the
selected coordinate system. Default is ON.
Sidescan Polarity: Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Send Computed Altitude on Playback: SonarWiz: Not Used in
SonarWiz.NAV
Percent Sonar Range to Map: Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
Selecting a Coordinate System
When SonarWiz generates a mosaic, it is actually drawing a projected map
showing sonar imagery and other data such as digitized features, targets, etc.
In order to do this, it must convert the geodetic coordinates
(latitude/longitude) stored in the navigation record to XY coordinates in a
specific Cartesian coordinate system or map projection.
1. Allow SonarWiz to select the output coordinate system by
checking the box Automatically Select Coordinate
System. When this is done, SonarWiz will compute the
UTM zone based on the geographic location of the project

Page 730
(see Section 9.2.5.1.1 on page 728). Using this technique is

the simple because it does not require any knowledge of
coordinate systems or geodesy on the part of the user.
2. Manually select the coordinate system by unchecking the box
and selecting from a list of available coordinate systems
and projections. This feature is essential to cartographers,
GIS professionals and others who need to present their
data in a coordinate system that is specified by the end
user. To choose the target coordinate system simply press
the Browse button.
Coordinate Systems
SonarWiz supports more than 1000 commonly used coordinate systems.
These include all UTM zones, all State Plane Zones, several variations
thereof, and many others. There is also an integrated coordinate system
editor which allows for the definition of new coordinate systems based on
any of the 30 supported projections. This editor is described in detail in
Projections
SonarWiz supports 30 projections including Transverse Mercator (Gauss-
Kruger), Lambert Conformal Conic, Hotine Oblique Mercator, Albers
Equal Area, American Polyconic, Mercator, Lambert Tangential, Azimuthal
Equal Area, Azimuthal Equidistant.
Datums
SonarWiz supports eight different datum transformation techniques. The
appropriate technique is automatically selected by examining the referenced
datum in the source and target coordinate system definitions. The supported
techniques are: Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe (a.k.a. Seven Parameter
Transformation), DMA Multiple Regression Formulas, WGS72
conversions, NGS NADCON algorithm and data files, NGS HPGN
algorithm and data files, and Canadian National Transformation, Versions 1
and 2. SonarWiz will automatically apply one or more of these techniques,
as appropriate, to accomplish the conversion required by the coordinate
systems involved in the transformation.
Ellipsoids
SonarWiz's ellipsoid dictionary includes the definition of more than 40
ellipsoids.
9.2.5.1.2 Open Existing Project

If a project already exists it may be opened using “File>Open Existing
Project” or “CTRL+F10” in order to open an existing project and Browse
to the directory where the project file (“<filename>.mml”) is located.
9.2.5.1.3 Configure Project Settings

Once a project is created/opened all settings within the project, with the exception of
the Project Folder and Project Name, the project may be modified by selecting “File >

Page 731
Configure Project Settings” or F10. The Configure an Existing Project dialog

(Figure 617) will appear which is the same as the Create Project dialog (Figure 616) but
without the ability to change the Project folder name or directory.
Figure 617: Configure an Existing Project
9.2.5.1.4 Recent Projects

SonarWiz.NAV displays the eight most recently used projects. Select
“File>Recent Projects” in order to view the most recently opened
projects. Simply left-click on the desired project t open it.
9.2.5.1.5 Capture Screen Image

Puts a copy of the Main Window, and Position and Recording Status
Window onto the Clipboard. Useful for grabbing screen shots of
interesting objects and pasting them to documents or e-mails
9.2.5.1.6 Preferences
N.B. The Preferences Tabs shown below are the same tabs used in SonarWiz
however most settings are not used in SonarWiz.NAV. Only those settings that
have any effect in SonarWiz.NAV will be discussed.

Page 732
9.2.5.1.6.1 General Settings Tab

The Time Reference (Figure 618) area allows the helmsman to display the
broadcast time of the navigation data in Local or UTC time and the date may be
displayed as the Julian Day.
Figure 618: General Preferences

9.2.5.1.6.2 File Options
The Default Project Path (Figure 619) is the file area where SonarWiz.NAV
will prompt the user to create new projects.

Page 733
Figure 619: File Options
9.2.5.1.6.3 SBP Options

Status Indicators (Figure 620): Checking/unchecking these boxes turns on/off
their corresponding Data Displays (See Section 2.8.3 on page 104)

Page 734
Figure 620: SBP Options

9.2.5.1.6.4 Contact Options
Not Used in SonarWiz.NAV
9.2.5.1.6.5 Digitized Feature Options

All options in this menu (Figure 621) are utilized in SonarWiz.NAV. See
Section 2.8.5 on page 112 for details.

Page 735
Figure 621: Digitized Features Options
9.2.5.1.7 R/T Navigation Plot

All options (Figure 622)may be used in this tab however it is unlikely that any
option other that “Navigation” will be of any use to the helmsman. See Section
2.8.6 on page 116 for more details.

Page 736
Figure 622: R/T Navigation Plot

9.2.5.1.8 Advanced Settings
Geodesy Data Folder: The folder where the SonarWiz will the geodetic
parameters relevant to the project. The default location is under “Data” in the
SonarWiz installation directory. This option should not be trifled with by the
feint of heart.
Open Last Used Project at Startup: When this box is checked the active
project in use when the program last exited will be opened.
Warn before deleting survey lines from project: Another safety measure
for the indecisive and inaccurate clickers
Ask user to confirm when closing SonarWiz: Just in case...

Page 737
Figure 623: Advanced Options
9.2.5.2 View Menu

The View Menu (Figure 624) offers the following options:
Figure 624: View Menu
Toolbar: Black Box in Figure 611. See Section 9.2.3 on page 723 for more
details.

Page 738
Status Bar: Green Box in Figure 611. See Section 2.5.1.5 on page 65 for more
details.
Navigation Bar: Magenta Box in Figure 611. See Section 2.5.1.5 on page 65 for
more details.
Survey Line Status: Yellow Box in Figure 611. See 2.5.1.14 on page 80 for more
details.
9.2.5.3 Map Menu

The Map Menu (Figure 625) offers the following options:
Figure 625: Map Menu
9.2.5.3.1 Summary Log

Displays Summary Log which contains information and errors encountered by
the program from user requests. A useful troubleshooting tool when desired
results are no being achieved. (See Section 2.5.1.12 on page 77)

Page 739
9.2.5.3.2 Survey Line L/R Indicator

The Survey Line L/R Indicator is to display the survey line tracking status of
the vessel based on the current active line.
Figure 626: Survey Line Indicator
In Figure 626 the the top portion of the window displays the vessel distance
traveled ALONG the current survey line, the current survey LINE name, and the
distance TO END of line. The graphic below the text indicates the lateral
distance off-track to either port or starboard. The value of the teal vertical hash
marks and the outer extents adjust automatically in order to keep the red vertical
hash mark with the graphic itself. In Figure 626 the vessel is 7.3 meters to the
right of the active survey line with a value of 5 meters for each large hash mark.
See Section 4.4 on page 218 which discusses survey line following in greater
detail.
9.2.5.3.3 Map (Ship Display) Options

visualization of the track following. Figure 627 below is activated by selecting
Map>Map Options or Ctrl-O.
● Drawing Scale: The ship graphic on the window may be drawn to true
scale based on the dimensions entered or at three possible fixed sizes
regardless of map scale (small, medium or ,large).
● Bow Line: A projected bow line may be activated and given a true scale
length in order to assist the visualization of the ship heading.
● Center Display: This check box will ensure that the vessel is always in
the center of the Map Window so that the vessel does not “drive off”
the screen. This check box is the equivalent to the Center on Current
Position Display Control Button
● Ship Color: A variety of colors are available in this pull-down menu for
the user to choose based on background colors, basemaps and overlays
in use.

Page 740
Figure 627: Map Options
9.2.5.3.4 Survey Lines

Working with survey lines is the heart of the SonarWiz.NAV program. Please see
Section 4.3 on page 190 for complete instructions.
9.2.5.3.5 Map Manager

9.2.5.3.6 Map Grid and Geo Grid

To display a grid (Northings/Eastings) and/or geo-grid (Lat/Lon graticule) on
the map, click the Grid (or CTRL+G hot keys) and GeoGrid (or Alt+G hot
keys) items on the Map menu.
The spacing between grid and geo-grid lines is determined automatically by
SonarWiz and cannot be changed. The program computes an increment between
grid lines that will result in no more than 10 lines being displayed in the view.
9.2.5.3.7 Map Scale

To display a map scale, click the Map Scale item on the Map menu or the hot
key combination of CTRL+Shift+M, . A scale line will be displayed in the lower
left corner of the view.

Page 741
9.2.5.3.8 Refresh
Redraws Map Window and all objects.
9.2.5.3.9 Map View Controls

The Map View controls are used to move or change the position of map
elements in the view (e.g. By zooming in or out) and to turn on basic map
elements such as scale and grid lines.
Most of the commonly used user interface items are available via a pop-up
context menu, the main menu, the main toolbar or short cut keys. To display the
pop-up menu, right-click in the Map Window.
When operating in a particular mode such as Measure, Pan or Zoom
Rectangle, SonarWiz will display a special cursor to indicate the current
operating mode. To exit a particular mode at any time, simply press the right-
mouse button or press the Escape key.
Figure 628: Map View Controls
See Section 2.5.1.13 on page 78 above for a detailed explanation of each

function.
9.2.5.4 Utilities Menu

The Utilities Menu (Figure 629) offers the following options:
Figure 629: Utilities Menu
9.2.5.4.1 Open Project Folder
Selecting this tool will open Windows Explorer with the current Project Folder
as the base location.

Page 742
9.2.5.4.2 Coordinate Converter

See Section 6.2 on page 520 for complete details.
9.2.5.5 Help Menu

The Help Menu (Figure 630) has the following options:
Figure 630: Help Menu
9.2.5.5.1 Contents
Opens the SonarWiz User Guide PDF document
9.2.5.5.2 Dongle Info

Displays information about the SonarWiz Dongle currently inserted into the PC
9.2.5.5.3 Restore System Defaults

This option, if selected () will restore all SonarWiz.NAV settings to the Factory
Defaults resulting in any user preferences being reset. The program will close
and upon the user re-opening it no project will be loaded.
Figure 631: Restore System Defaults Prompt

9.2.5.5.4 About SonarWiz.NAV
Displays SonarWiz.NAV program information as seen in Figure 632 below:

Page 743
Figure 632: About SonarWiz.NAV

SonarWiz UserGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SonarWiz UserGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SonarWiz5 User Guide

Rev 5.03.0030 - September 11, 2011

 Chesapeake Technology, Inc.

© Copyright 2001-2011, Chesapeake Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

SonarWiz5 User Guide

SonarWiz5 User Guide

2.5.6 Right-Clicking in SonarWiz.........................................................................................90

SonarWiz5 User Guide

4.2.4 Fathometer Setup.......................................................................................................175

SonarWiz5 User Guide

5.4.1 Manually Importing Sub-bottom Data.......................................................................263

SonarWiz5 User Guide

5.14 Layback & Offsets.........................................................................................................392

SonarWiz5 User Guide

SonarWiz5 User Guide

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.5.9 Connection Status LED’s..........................................................................................581

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.9 EdgeTech 4100 Server.....................................................................................................594

SonarWiz5 User Guide

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.16.13 Advanced Settings..................................................................................................640

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.20.4 Do NOT Send Sonar Packets...................................................................................659

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.26 SportScan Server ...........................................................................................................681

SonarWiz5 User Guide

B.30.2 Operational Sidescan Controls................................................................................700

SonarWiz5 User Guide

9.2.2 Map Window (Orange Box) ......................................................................................723

SonarWiz5 User Guide

1.1 SonarWiz – Introduction

1.2 Supported Sensors

1.2.1 Real-Time Sensors

• EdgeTech ACI server

Combined Sidescan and Sub-bottom

1.2.2 Supported Sensor Data Formats (Offline Processing)

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

Sub-bottom Profiler Data Formats

Magnetometer Data Formats

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

• Maglog Standard Format

1.3 System Requirements and Configurations

1.3.1 Recommended PC Configuration

1.3.2 System Configurations and Components

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

1.3.3 Real Time Data Acquisition and Mapping

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

3. A CTI software licensing key (commonly called a “dongle”). This small

Figure 2: USB Key

4. An analog data acquisition card (e.g. National Instruments PCI-60xxE

Figure 3: Typical SonarWiz real time configuration

1.3.4 Post-processing and Mapping Configuration

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

Figure 4: SonarWiz Office Configuration

1.3.5 Remote Server Configuration

Figure 5: SonarWiz Network Configuration

1.4 Component Installation

SonarWiz5 User Guide Introduction

1.4.1 Previously Installed Versions of SonarWiz

1.4.2 Installing SonarWiz from CD

1.4.3 Installing SonarWiz and Servers from Web

3. When prompted, select a location to save the file to be downloaded.